JP2022137441A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 variably displays a pattern on the basis of satisfaction of a first start condition or a second start condition, and can execute a special game advantageous to a player. When a predetermined condition in which a special game is not executed is satisfied in a first game state disadvantageous to a player, a second game state advantageous to a player in a predetermined number of times of variation display can be executed and a third game state advantageous to a player can be executed after execution of a special game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and perform a game effect (variation effect) according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common.

Among such gaming machines, there is known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, the conventional gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the player A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in the first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, the predetermined number of times It is possible to execute a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and in the variable display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of expectations for execution of the special game. It is possible to execute various types of advance notice effects (e.g., lighting of winning entrance lamps, pending changes, effects, simulated effects, etc.), and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the effects that expect the execution of the special game are not included. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the notice effect is a first effect (for example, SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.) and the second production that is different from the first production (movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first game state. It is characterized in that the special game is easily executed from the variable display in which one performance is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure which shows a main board case. It is an exploded perspective view including a base of a main board case. It is a rear perspective view when the main board case is disassembled. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is a front view of a main board case when a main control board is accommodated. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special design determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for normal. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for probability variation / normal time reduction. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation|variation pattern determination table for special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the menu operation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a 1-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a 2-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement type determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous announcement effect scenario determination table for effect modes D~H (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the light emission production|presentation determination process at the time of winning in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable production pattern determination table for production modes D to G (specific game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern determination table for production|presentation mode H (specific game state). It is a figure which shows the timer production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an event timer count determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a first suggested event determination table for one timer; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a second suggested event determination table for two timers; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an update pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a diagram showing an example of the variable start time accessory announcement determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variation start time accessory announcement determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a fixed effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice limit period related to the loss variation effect of the effect modes A to C. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the effect modes D to G. It is a figure which shows the ratio of the notice limitation period regarding the loss fluctuation|variation production|presentation of production|presentation mode H. It is a figure which shows the kind of vibration production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp control part. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial process in a lamp|ramp control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of operating an operation part during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of performing customization of production|presentation during a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead operation|movement production|presentation and step-up notice production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the look-ahead action effect and the step-up notice effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case the look-ahead vibration production|presentation and the dialogue announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example in the case where the anticipatory vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed before a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production is performed after a ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case an expansion production|presentation is performed and a SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP ready-to-win production|presentation and it becomes a big hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect when a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 1 in a case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the production example 1 in the case where the determined production is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win production and the jackpot is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example 2 in the case where a determined effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved. It is a figure which shows the execution time of timer production|presentation for every fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case two timer production|presentations are performed during variable production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case special SP ready-to-win production|presentation is performed by the 2nd fluctuation|variation production|presentation in the production|presentation mode A (normal game state), and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation when chance production|presentation is performed by the 1st variation production|presentation in production|presentation mode G (specific game state), and it becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case variable probability mission production|presentation is performed during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the opening production|presentation of a jackpot game for every game state, and an ending production|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example of the opening production and ending production of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case a special time saving game state generate|occur|produces. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the absence of a jackpot history ends. It is a diagram showing an example of the production when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the state where there is a jackpot history ends. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. 1 is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally; It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 1. FIG. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally; It is the example 1 of the production|presentation in the various timing of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is an example 2 of production at various timings of the timing chart 2. FIG. 3 is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. 3 is an example 1 of production at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 3 is a production example 2 at various timings of the timing chart 3. FIG. 4 is timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 4. FIG. 5 is timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 6. FIG. 7 is timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of production at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. This is a modified example 1 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 2 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modified example 3 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 4 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a modification 5 in which the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 9 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a concrete example 10 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 11 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 12 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 14 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 when the command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 when the command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decided effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame role-product initial motion pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball struck left in the normal game state wins the starting hole. It is a diagram showing a specific example when the game ball struck left in the specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game state) wins the start opening. It is a figure which shows the special icon change production|presentation determination process of the production|presentation control part in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for MAX holding chance. (b) is a diagram showing an example of a puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case MAX holding chance production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in case puzzle pending|holding chance production|presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 10 to 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 13 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in Concrete Example 14 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 2 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 3 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of specific example 1 of an image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 2 of image change effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of a specific example 2 of image change rendering; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 3 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of specific example 3 of an image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 4 of image change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of specific example 4 of image change rendering; It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation when conditions are not met in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the production|presentation by a color effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of zone production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of change notification sound production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a pending|holding icon change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a ramp change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the operation|movement production|presentation of a 1st movable member. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the production example 1; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a light-guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal game state in the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the normal game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific game state in the production|presentation example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; It is a figure which shows the relationship of fluctuation time. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of preparation operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of stop operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation|variation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation start pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the mode change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of reach production|presentation. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 5 of effect; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of production; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of information production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of vibration production|presentation. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160; 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of a main control board 300; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot/hit determination table T1. It is the figure which showed an example of the design determination table T2. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of a main control board 300; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the detail of the production|presentation control board 320. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in a sub-RAM 320c; It is a figure explaining the transition of a game state. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by a main control board 300; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the list of the process performed by the production|presentation control board 320. FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop process, which is one of the processes in the main control board 300. It is a flow chart for explaining transition determination processing to the time-saving gaming state and end determination processing of the time-saving gaming state. It is a figure explaining the end time of time saving game state 3 and time saving game state 4. It is a figure explaining the detail of the information indicator 302c. 4 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a counting period of base value B; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display production|presentation for every production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the display production example of the number of reservations. It is a figure explaining the time saving rush production performed at the time of transition to the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2 and the display effect performed before the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2 end. It is a figure explaining the display production performed before and behind transition to the time saving game state 3 or the time saving game state 4. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining the display effects at the end of the time-saving gaming states 1-4. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of the state transition of the gaming machine 100 and the display mode of the main display device 131 after the fluctuation is stopped; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a customer waiting demonstration effect; It is a timing chart (1) in the case of ending the variable performance in the normal game state and entering the customer waiting state. 323 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 322. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 322. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation at the time of winning during a customer waiting state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the sword hilt unit is operated during the variable display. It is a timing chart when the variable performance in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the customer waits. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 327. FIG. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 327. FIG. It is a timing chart (2) in the case of ending the variable performance in the normal game state and entering the customer waiting state. 331 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 330. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation in other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of the first advantageous game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation in the case of shifting to a 1st advantageous game state. It is an explanatory view showing an example 1 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example 1 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the first advantageous game state. It is an explanatory view showing the example 3 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing the example 3 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example 4 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example 4 of the effect of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example 1 of production in the normal game state immediately before shifting to the second advantageous game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 2 of the normal game state effect immediately before the transition to the second advantageous game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a production example 3 of the normal game state immediately before the transition to the second advantageous game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow at the time of transfer to a 2nd advantageous game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production|presentation at the time of transfer to a 2nd advantageous game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production|presentation at the time of transfer to a 2nd advantageous game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of the second advantageous game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of continuous production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of continuous production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of a pending|holding change production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of the ready-to-win production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a production example 2 of continuous production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a production example 2 of continuous production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a production example 2 of continuous production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific image effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific image effect; It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the basic effect and the advance notice effect in the normal game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the basic production|presentation in a 1st advantageous game state, and an advance notice production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the basic production|presentation in a 2nd advantageous game state, and an advance notice production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of an advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production example of an advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution ratios of specific fluctuations; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution ratios of specific fluctuations; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a background change production|presentation and a jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between specific advance notice production and a jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the announcement production|presentation by a display means, and a jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the advance notice production by a movable member, and a jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the 1st information of information production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the 2nd information of information production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between settings and effects; It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a mode and production|presentation.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a with a center opening in the front-rear direction, and a decoration plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction. , and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, It is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls paid out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball flow path described later, and a game ball shooting operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the firing operation.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) for detecting an operation on the production button 17, and a production button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 9) is provided for driving the game machine 17 so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1. FIG.

The effect button 17 emits effect light by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow colors). It is possible. In addition, by the driving force of the button driving motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, it is possible to move vertically between the standby position (origin position) positioned below and the production position positioned above. A button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button driving device 17b, vibrates in a predetermined vibration mode, thereby making it possible to perform an effect operation. A button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 9) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 9), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) made up of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of light emitting devices for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame illumination device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. When the winning (entering) game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are released from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. Dispensed onto a plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is supposed to be paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot determination) A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 9), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary symbol holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, there is a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 9).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second starting port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The first special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random number (first special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot determination is obtained by acquiring a jackpot determination random value (second special figure determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47, and for the acquired jackpot determination. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing the random value and the jackpot determination value. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big hit mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big hit determination.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot determination (special game determination), run the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be established). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the first special symbol jackpot judgment (first special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 45 It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot determination (second special symbol) stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47 It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when winning the jackpot judgment of the special symbol, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You can For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp pattern LZ or the second lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, a big win. The result of the judgment (lights up in the case of a big hit, lights out in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the second sub-reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). , each of which is composed of two left and right LEDs. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2" The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks and the right LED blinks when the number of reservations is "3", and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of reservations is "4".

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storage (number of reservations), and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, the left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of normal figure reservations is "0", and when the number of normal figure reservations is "1", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side goes out, and the number of normal figure reservations is When the number is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a variable display of the special symbol. Correspondingly, by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are, for example, constituted by patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed in correspondence with (synchronization with) the variable display of the symbols. That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the form of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a ready-to-win production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big hit determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of reach effects are "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", "SPSP "7" reach effect", "full rotation reach effect" and "special SP reach effect". There are seven types of ".

"Normal ready-to-win production" is a ready-to-reach state in which two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions while the background image before ready-to-reach is displayed, and the remaining one production pattern 70a changes in the central region. It is a reach effect that is performed with the

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) is a ready-to-win production in which the production is performed.

The "SPSP ready-to-win effect" is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect, and is a ready-to-win effect in which the effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect is performed.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In this embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

"Special SP reach" is executed after the normal reach production, the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the reach state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal reach production (high expectation of winning big) ), which is a ready-to-win effect in which a different effect from normal SP ready-to-win is performed.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot related to the ready-to-win production is higher in the order of normal reach production <SP ready-to-win production <SPSP ready-to-win production <full-rotation ready-to-win production (jackpot confirmed), and in the order of normal reach production <special SP ready-to-win production. is higher at

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first A first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying reserved icons, and a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special figure reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state, are displayed. A second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of first special figure reservations (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2). That is, the number of second reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special figure reservation number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special figure reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TI disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and the "subject icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

Also, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the first reserved number indicating the number of the current first special figure reserved number (U1) is displayed in the normal game state and the specific game state. For the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation for displaying the second reservation number indicating the number of the current second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is moved vertically between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 9). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 9), the position between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A performance control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) outside the game machine A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting game signals is provided.

In addition, an opening and closing door type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left and right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the devices (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76).

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays each having a decimal point DP arranged side by side. there is An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

(Structure of the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, etc., a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5. The base frame 170 An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled to the rear surface (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover). A main board case 200 containing 110 is attached.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially square annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 171 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5 . A space for arranging various circuit boards and parts is provided on the back surface of the base frame 170 .
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back of the base frame 170 . The image display unit 180 is slidable from the side (horizontal direction) of the base frame body, the vertical direction, or the oblique direction in the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board. It is configured so that it can be attached to
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with a lid member 190 .

As shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a provided on the main control board 110 are exposed.
Also, the information display 113 provided on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the transparent main board case 200 .
The staff of the game parlor opens the door of the game machine, operates the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a while viewing the information display device 113 on the back of the game machine, and clears the RWM, changes the settings, and confirms the settings. You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the game machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the amusement arcade through an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. stands out.
When a staff or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 presses the RWM clear switch 111a. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
An end face of the setting key switch 112a having a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200. As shown in FIG.
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG.
In the present embodiment, the game board 5 side is defined as the front side, and the direction opposite to the game board 5 is defined as the rear side with respect to the main board case 200 . Therefore, the left-right direction in the drawing is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 5 .

4 is a diagram for explaining the main board case 200, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case 200, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view when the main board case 200 is disassembled. be.
The main board case 200 of the present embodiment is attached to the back of a game machine such as a pachinko game machine via a pedestal 280 while housing the main control board 110 on which electronic components are mounted.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (the lamp relay board 186 in this embodiment) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
The main board case 200 housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280. Electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 inside can be viewed through the case piece 220 .

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5 . As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the horizontal direction are longer than two sides along the vertical direction. , and a plate shape is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the horizontal direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that are engaged with the respective shaft portions 281 . A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 are brought into a state in which they can be engaged with the shaft portions 281 , so that the main circuit board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hook portions 249 with the shaft portions 281 .

After the hook portion 249 is engaged with the shaft portion 281 , the free end side of the main circuit board case 200 is rotated upward about the shaft portion 281 to overlap the main circuit board case 200 with the base 280 . At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200 . Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200 .

After that, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200 . Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200 including hook portion 249 . In this manner, the main controller 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5. FIG.

The main board case 200 consists of two case pieces (lower case piece) made of transparent resin that accommodate a main control board 110 (printed circuit board) of a single-sided mounting system in which electronic components are arranged only on one side. 210, upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting an unsealable seal sandwiched and held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and an unsealable seal 250 to be described later. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the substrate case 200 .

The main board case 200 encloses the main control board 110 with the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on the main control board 110 exposed. The main circuit board case 200 is made of a material having optical transparency, such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 110 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 110 interposed therebetween by a crimping member.

A crimping fastening portion 291 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200 , and a crimping member (locking member ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in the closed state. The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable and detachable by removing (breaking) the crimping member driven into (locked) the crimping fastening hole.

In the crimping fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes are provided (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
The respective caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B are formed by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 to each other.

Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the other remaining crimping fastening hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 110 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side of the main controller 110m. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main substrate case 200, which is the side opposite to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are respectively provided with control board storage sections 211 and 221 that store the main control board 110 and sealing sections 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base section 310 to be described later. there is The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and projecting from the peripheral edge portions of the plate portions 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

A cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 110 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 . A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 110 .

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged. A screw shaft for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 110 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical part 565 . The thread formed in the hole portion 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread formed in the shaft portion of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

A portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, which protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”), is formed in an L shape. Three hooking pieces 211c are formed on each side. On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion projecting from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 6 along the horizontal direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. be

When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the encapsulating portion 581, the possibility of unauthorized replacement of the main control board 110 and the main control section 110m can be suppressed.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 110 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board housing portion 221. As shown in FIG. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, the electronic components such as the main control section 110m mounted on the main control board 110 can be maintained. This is because it is possible to check from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not the has been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A having the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, it is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively. When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 that combines them. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base part 310 , in addition to the first screwing piece 91 and the second screwing piece 92 , the ends of the sealing body 300 in the longitudinal direction are , and a third screw-stopping piece 393 of the cap 240 are overlapped to form a screw-stopping portion 390 for screwing.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221, respectively. The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction. Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310 on the right side of the combined control board housing portions 211 and 221 . In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other.

The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main circuit board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications. The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material, such as paper, with an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230 a , a pair of knob portions 361 and a cutting portion 364 . A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 361 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 230a, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 361 is referred to as a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 . The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-stopping piece 393 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 382 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. is provided. A groove portion 386 is formed in the inner surface of the cap main body 241 .

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space of the sealing base portion 310 . After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end portion 361a of the knob portion 361 of the cutting member 230 .

When the cap 240 is put on the sealing base part 310, the third screwing piece 393 is a combination of the first screwing piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screwing piece 92 of the upper case piece 220. to constitute a screwing portion 390 for screwing. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main substrate case 200 , the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 . The same applies when the main board case 200 is unsealed. Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 364 or the like.

(main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the main control board.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, coils, etc.), and a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for game control. In addition, the main control unit 110m stores memory contents that affect the game results.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer integrating a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right in the lower part of main control board 110 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

Two connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are connected to one of the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the big winning hole detection switch 50a for detecting that the game ball has won. A signal from at least a portion is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, and the large winning hole detection switch 45a for detecting that the game ball has won. Assume that all signals of the switch 50a are input. The detection signal connectors 774 , 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771 , 772 , 773 , 776 . In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. I have. A signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .
The plurality of electronic components 595 includes signal pins (second signal pins) provided for each of the plurality of electronic components. A signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200 .

The RWM clear switch 111a will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operation member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. be done. As a result, the RWM clear switch 111a is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported in the recess 688 between a first position where the operation member 685 is closed to disable operation and a second position where the operation member 685 is opened and allowed to be operated. It is
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the substrate case 200 . Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200 can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 111 a may have an end exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 112a is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a having the keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200. FIG.
A staff member or the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a.

(identification mark)
The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. As shown in FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523, the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524, and the identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called identification mark 523. Referred to as display 525 .

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by stamping. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.

Incidentally, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself may be displayed instead of displaying the maker name as "AB" included in "ABCD". Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the identification displays 521 to 525 may display the model of the gaming machine.

(Seal member)
The sealing member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8 , a sealing member 1560 and a sealing member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

The seal member 1560 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the left lower portion of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction. affixed to.
Both of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
The seal members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), respectively. 5, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 positioned in front of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

Seal member 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal member body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with an anti-counterfeiting watermark. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has a white entry area 1570 (entry column), a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal member main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The seal member 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-light-transmitting portions.
Code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, and entry area 1570 as non-light-transmitting portions are provided at positions on seal member main body 1560A that do not overlap with main control portion 110m and information display 113. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than the writing area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display accompanying these areas in the sealing member main body 1560A are translucent because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is exposed. is the translucent portion 1574 with a high .
The translucent part 1574 is the above-described viewing part that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200 , the main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion or non-light-transmitting portion, the seal member 1560 is attached to the main control portion 110m on the main control board 110 at a position where the seal member 1562 is visible from all angles. It is
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the entire sealing member 1560 including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573 overlaps the main control portion 110m from all angles. It is provided so that it will be in a position where it will not
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap the information display 113 from any angle. It is provided so that
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

In FIG. 8, it cannot be said that the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other. is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776 and the sealing member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are positioned close to each other. may

The contents displayed on the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200 and the opening date.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.

Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The code portion 1572 is provided on the upper left portion of the seal member 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of main control board 110 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion 1574 (peek portion) included in the sealing member 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 includes entry area 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, notation of opening date, circle 1 to circle It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The sealing member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached at a position where the seal member 1561 attached to the main control section 110m on the main control board 110 can be visually recognized from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the main control section 110m from all angles.
Therefore, when the main circuit board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main controller 110m can be visually recognized through the main circuit board case 200 without fail.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

Also, the seal member 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is called an identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the portion where the model name is displayed, a base is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the base.

A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal member 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is called an identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the sealing member 1562 .
Moreover, the sealing member 1561 and the sealing member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main circuit board case 200 and the main controller 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 110 may include and display the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with an area 1575, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main circuit board case 200 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can enter in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with. Further, since the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion). Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 (peeping portion) is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main controller 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 110 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. FIG. Therefore, by checking the sealing member 1562, the inspector can easily check whether the main control unit 110m has been replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
At least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, so the inspector can easily recognize at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, a component having a height that makes the seal member 1562 invisible should not be provided in the vicinity of the main control unit 110m.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with the main control section 110m for controlling the game, the information display 113 for displaying the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. there is A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110 . Accordingly, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200 . In addition, the main controller 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200. FIG.

Duplication of the seal member 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 which has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and which needs to be attached to the main substrate case 200 . In addition, by attaching the seal member 1560 to a position that does not cover the main control section 110m and the information display 113, the main control, which is an important board component, is not affected by the watermarking process or the multiple non-transparent portions. In the portion 110m, the visibility of the information display 113 that must be read accurately can be ensured.

As for the electronic component 595, which is less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display unit 113, the state can be confirmed through watermark processing through the gaps between the plurality of non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion 1574 (peek portion). can be done. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions. Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as specifying the main control unit 110m. Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 110 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the information display 113 (opposite).
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the information display 113 .
Also, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap cables, harnesses, sealing members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771-776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited thereto and may be provided on the payout control board 120. Also, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being arranged on the main control board 110, but it is not limited to this. If the setting key switch 112a is electrically connected to the main control board 110, the setting key switch 112a can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 110. FIG.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing. It has an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls, and operates the payout device 100. Control, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. A payout motor 100 b provided in the payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121 .

When a payout command is received from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to perform control to put out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of the game ball is detected, the control of putting out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, button driving device 17b, board driving device 75, board lighting It has a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are Output).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. Also, it controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and a display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. The image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception, the CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and the reception of the voice control command from the general control unit 141 It has an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) for controlling the audio output device 9 based on the data, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes an integrated CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which a LSI) is connected.

The supervising CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the supervising control program stored in the supervising ROM 141b, and uses the supervising RAM 141c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effects. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command (display list) to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device 9, and performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141, Drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 70 are displayed. Various images are displayed by outputting to the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to an effect instruction command, etc., it performs control (outputs data and commands) to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined effect.

The frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub-CPU 130a). Based on various production data (including commands) that have been generated, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and the It also controls the driving of the driving source such as the motor and the solenoid of the board driving device 75 .

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from power supplied from the outside of the game machine 1, and controls the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control). substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, it has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the state related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and "non-time-saving state" and " It has a "time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) that is “low-probability state” and “non-time-saving state”
(2) Time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) that is “low probability state” and “time-saving state”
(3) Probability variable gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state) that is “high probability state” and “time-saving state”

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state". In addition, in the present embodiment, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability state" is, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45 or the second It refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the big win is set as low as about 1/300 in the judgment of the big win of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball enters the 2 start hole 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high probability state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state. It says the game state.

Specifically, there are 4 types of set values from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is about 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability state is about If the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/58, and the set value is " 4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability state". Also, the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is referred to as "variable probability jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state which is set longer than the "time-saving state" and tends to set the opening time of the second starting port 47 short when winning is won. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is 0. .5 seconds, which is shorter than the "non-time-saving state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, longer than the "non-time-saving state". Say the game state. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set to 127/128, for example. and is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 than in the "non-time saving state", the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode. As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

Then, in the "time saving game state", the normal time saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game described later (via the jackpot game), and the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, based on the end of the jackpot game A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) by reaching a specified number of times (900 times in this embodiment) of the special symbol loss fluctuation display executed from 0 clear of the number of fluctuations) and are set.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are advantageous compared to the "non-time saving state" However, the "time saving state" is set so that only one of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery is advantageous. good too. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the probability of winning the winning lottery of the normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of occurrence is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is designed not to win a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win in the judgment of the big win. good too. In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the low probability state and / or high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big win in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. In addition, although the set value of the present embodiment has four stages from 1 to 4, it is not limited to four stages. good).

In addition, as a time-saving game state, a normal time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state are provided, but as a result of the jackpot determination process, a special loss different from the normal loss is elected, and as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, a special loss special A specific time-saving gaming state may be generated over a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 times of special symbol variable display is executed) in response to the symbols being stopped and displayed. For various controls in the specific time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to conform to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 10(a) is a big hit determination table for the first special symbol for determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (entrance) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the jackpot determination table corresponds to the current set value, the current probability state, the random number for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, lose). As a reference, the approximate winning probability in the case of a "jackpot" is described in the rightmost column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10A or the second special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judgment, it is judged whether it is a "big win" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number for judgment is judged to be a "jackpot". Then, a random value for judging a big win other than that judged to be a big win is judged to be "losing".

In addition, the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the game ball to the second starting port 47 The special figure determination information obtained based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when the jackpot determination is performed, the special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information reservation storage area or the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the special figure determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , Jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit Icons are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 to the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. The second special figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, respectively, and the holding icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first storage unit to the fourth storage unit They are displayed in the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

(Special pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for big hits for determining the type of special symbols when it is determined as a big hit, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table when it is determined as a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing for determining the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table includes types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, random numbers for special symbol determination, determination results of the special symbols, and corresponding determination results. Stop special figure data and the special design designation command which corresponds to the decision result are matched.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. The special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot patterns for executing the first jackpot game, and the special patterns "02" and "05" are jackpot patterns for executing the second jackpot game. , the special symbol “03” is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 6 times in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses. Further, after the end of the first jackpot game, the normal time-saving game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 50 times or 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, after the second jackpot game is finished, the probability variable game state (high probability short-time game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game is executed up to four times, in which the second big prize opening 56 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds. Further, after the third jackpot game is finished, the variable probability game state (high probability short-time game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost decided.

Although each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with one unsuccessful special symbol, at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is associated with a plurality of unsuccessful special symbols. good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), and based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random number for special symbol determination, the type of special symbol, Stop special figure data and special design specification command are decided, special design specification command is transmitted to production control baseplate 130.

A first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of special symbols for big hits and the types of special symbols for loss are the same without changing depending on the setting values. By doing so, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind without making the game complicated.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Normal special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a normal special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 12(a) is a normal special figure variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when executing the basic special symbol variation display in the normal game state, and FIG. 12(b). is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination for normal that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining number of the second special symbols remaining at the end of the special time saving state when transitioning from the special time saving game state to the normal game state Table 2.

(Special figure variation pattern judgment table for probability variation / normal time reduction)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for probability variation/normal time reduction referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the probability variation gaming state or normal time reduction gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 13A is a special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for probability variation / normal time reduction that is referred to when performing variation display of basic special symbols in probability variation gaming state or normal time reduction gaming state , and FIG. 13(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time reduction, which is referred to when performing the final special symbol variation display in the normal time reduction game state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table for special time saving which is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in a special time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 for special time reduction that is referred to when performing variation display of special symbols when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c. 14 (b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 for special time reduction that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the special symbol variation display that is the first in the special time reduction game state is executed, FIG. 14(c) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 for special time reduction that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the special symbol variation display before the end of the special time reduction gaming state is executed. and FIG. 14(d) is a special symbol variation pattern determination for special time reduction that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the special symbol variation display that is the final time of the special time reduction game state is executed. Table 4.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) to be displayed, the big hit determination result, and the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data). , The reach determination random number, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the special figure variation pattern as the determination result, and the special The symbol variation time is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating a special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. ) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), based on the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, determine the special figure variation pattern, and the special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern production control board 130 It is designed to send to

In addition, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 determines the content (effect mode) of the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

"Normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra-shortened variation" are shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. It means to stop without

In addition, "ready-to-win" means that the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed in which some of the combinations of the performance symbols 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a for notifying a big hit, the same performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left area and the right area. , refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 70a are changing in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 70a swings slightly or is slightly deformed to make it appear to the player that the production pattern 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

"Normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a big hit is the lowest. It is a reach performance.

"SP ready-to-win" and "special SP ready-to-win" are super ready-to-win effects with a higher expectation for a big hit than normal ready-to-win, and the development effects are executed from the normal ready-to-win effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special ready-to-win production is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. . In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with a higher expectation of a big win than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used. It is designed to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 70a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

In addition, "resurrection variation (hit)" is a resurrection effect that suggests that a jackpot will be restored to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and the special time-saving game state will be changed to a normal game state. It is executed without going through the ready-to-win state after the end notification effect suggesting the end of the specific game state advantageous to the player after the transition to 2 is performed.

"Chance effect variation (hit)" is a variable effect in which a chance effect is executed to suggest that there is a chance to execute a jackpot game, and is executed without going through reach. For example, after the character image of "chance is approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the three effect symbols 70a are displayed together.

“Result fluctuation” is the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues with the jackpot game from the normal game state, which is called the so-called first hit, in the final variable display of the normal time-saving game state. It is an effect that the result display to be displayed is performed. It should be noted that the results may be displayed during a series of advantageous periods during which the player continues to be in an advantageous state, rather than from the first win.

“Result revival variation (hit)” is a resurrection effect that suggests that a big hit will be revived to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. Executed without going through reach after the result is displayed in the display.

“(Crush) ~ Fluctuation” means that if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, a short rush effect that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state in a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is performed. If it is not the first time variation of the time saving game state, it indicates that the short entry effect is not performed.

“Long rush production change” means that in the initial fluctuation of the special time-saving game state, a long rush production that suggests entering the special time-saving game state in a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds) is performed. It is a variation pattern dedicated to the initial variation of the special time-saving gaming state in a state with a jackpot history.

"Immediate win variation (hit)" is an effect in which the player is informed that the result (jackpot) is advantageous to the player without going through the reach, and finally the three effect patterns 70a are aligned. It is designed to perform the production displayed in the state.

The ``finish suggesting variation'' is a presentation in which an end notification presentation suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is performed, and is executed in the final variation display of the special time-saving game state with a big win history.

"End Suggestion Resurrection Fluctuation (To)" is a resurrection effect that suggests that it will be a big hit and return to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player. After the end notification effect is started in the variable display, it is executed without going through the reach.

In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, the "instant hit variation" is not performed, but even when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed "Hit Variation" may be executed.

The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the fluctuation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), the fluctuation effect in which the result display is performed is executed. points to be considered. By doing so, the player can confirm the result of the game during the series of advantageous periods, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the second feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from increasing due to the display of the game results in the series of advantageous periods even though the big winning game is not being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be improved.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that different special figure variation pattern determination tables are used in the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state. By doing so, even in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents of the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state can be made different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the fluctuation display during the special time saving game state, a different special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is used depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) The point is that it is By doing so, it is possible to vary the effect contents during the variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the initial variation in the special time-saving gaming state, a different special figure variation pattern determination table is used depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) The point is that it is By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , There is a large number of special figure variation patterns that are determined when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, it is possible to change the content of the effect during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a history of big wins, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point at which the figure variation pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to perform a dedicated effect (long rush effect) in the first time variation in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the final variation during the special time-saving gaming state, a different special figure variation pattern determination table is used depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) The point is that it is By doing so, it is possible to vary the effect contents during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a big hit history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the ninth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , There is a large number of special figure variation patterns that are determined when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, it is possible to vary the effect contents during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a big hit history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The point that the special figure variation pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to perform a dedicated production (end suggestion production) in the final variation during the special time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, during the special time-saving gaming state, than when the first special symbol losing variation display (first variation effect) is executed, There are more types of special figure fluctuation patterns (variation production patterns) to be determined (executed) in the case where the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed. By doing so, the player can be induced to perform the variable display of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player in the special time-saving game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As the twelfth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the average variation time of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) during the time saving game state is the normal symbol during the time saving game state is longer than the average fluctuation time of By doing so, even in the time-saving game state in which the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than in the normal game state, the second reserved memory is likely to be accumulated, and the variable display of the special symbols can be executed speedily. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 15(a) is an example of a pre-determination table for a non-time-saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 during the non-time-saving state 15(b) is a diagram showing the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 47 during the time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of a determination table.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 15, and based on the random number value for judging the jackpot, the random number value for judging the special symbol, the random number value for judging reach, and the random number value for judging the special figure fluctuation pattern, the special figure scheduled fluctuation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 16, the game state setting table includes stop special symbol data for the jackpot special symbol, game state information when the jackpot is won, and set game state flags (time-saving flag indicating time-saving state, A high probability flag indicating a high probability state), a first time saving number (J1) that is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol that ends the time saving game state, and a second special symbol that ends the time saving game state The second time-saving number of times (J2), which is the number of times of variable display, corresponds to the third time-saving number of times (J3), which is the number of times of variable display of the sum of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that terminate the time-saving game state. attached.

As the first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. The point is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of times of 2 o'clock reduction (J2) increases. By doing so, it is possible to vary the second time reduction frequency (J2) set according to the type of the jackpot game, thereby improving the game performance and enhancing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that three types of times of time saving are set, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed during the time saving state. Since the time-saving state ends in an appropriate number of times regardless of which is executed, the time-saving state can be provided fairly among the players, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing of the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration on the image display devices 70 and 71 symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (first special figure reservation number (U1) and special figure reservation number designation command indicating the second special figure reservation number (U2), general figure reservation number (G) Ordinary figure holding number designation command etc. shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time) and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value updating process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
Timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as a new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial random number value for judging a big hit, the initial random number value for judging a special symbol, the initial random number value for judging a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the normal winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a determines the number of reserved special symbols (judgment of a big hit, etc.), controls the display of special symbols, controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controls the game state, and so on. Perform control processing. In addition, the detail of special figure special electric control processing is mentioned later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal pattern normal electric control processing for performing normal pattern storage number determination (hit determination, etc.), normal pattern display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the production control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, big winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed. .

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the winning ball counter (5 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls is updated by adding data indicating 5 winning balls. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 47a is input, that is, whether the game ball has won the second starting opening 47 or not. The details of the second start opening detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
20, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 45a has been input (a game ball has won the first start hole 45). When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot judgment, random number for special pattern judgment, random number for reach judgment, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special figure pending number (U1) to update (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special figure Set the first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the 1st special figure reservation number specification command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the 1st special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol reservation storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure fluctuation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), it is assumed that a left-handed error has occurred. The process moves to step S230-12.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special time-saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of fluctuations (eg, 5 times). If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process is moved to step S230-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the first start opening detection switch input process of this time as not executing the pre-reading judgment of the special figure judgment information exit.

The main CPU 110a performs first prefetch determination processing in step S230-10. In this first look-ahead determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination information. Then, a scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and terminates the current first start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the first look-ahead specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 executes 1 or before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead specified command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets a left-handed error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, the left-handed error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs the left-handed error notification, thereby performing the notification for promoting the right-handed.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch on the main control board)
The second start opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start hole detection switch 47a has been input (the game ball has won the second start hole 47). When the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current first 2 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating the data indicating one prize ball to the one prize ball counter used for the prize ball, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot judgment, random number for special pattern judgment, random number for reach judgment, random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is less than four in step S240-4. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, this second start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special figure pending number (U2) to update (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the updated second special figure Set the second special figure pending number designation command corresponding to the figure pending number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the second special symbol reservation storage area in step S240-7. Specifically, since the second special symbol reservation storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit, and the vacant storage unit Stores the acquired special figure determination information.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure fluctuation pattern determination A second reserve memory (second reserve) consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. If it is in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the process is moved to step S240-9, and if it is not in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (normal game state), a right hitting error occurred Then, the process proceeds to step S240-12.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the start of the time saving state or before the end. If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process is moved to step S240-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the second start opening detection switch input process of this time as not executing the pre-reading judgment of the special figure judgment information exit.

The main CPU 110a performs second prefetch determination processing in step S240-10. In this second look-ahead determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (second reservation storage) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to the execution of the special symbol variation display based on the determination information. Then, a scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and terminates the current second start opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the performance control board 130 performs 1 or before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that executes a predetermined foretelling effect over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a sets a right hitting error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and terminates the current second start opening detection switch input process. As a result, the right hitting error specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 performs the right hitting error notification, so that the notification for promoting the left hitting is performed.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special special electric processing data loaded in step S302, executes processing corresponding to the branch destination address, This special figure special electric control processing ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reservation storage (special figure judgment information), the fluctuation time is set, and the command at the start (special Design storage designation command, game state designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130 processing and processing to change the special figure special electric processing data to "1" etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for the purpose is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special figure is stopped by the lapse of the variation time, the stop time (for example 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special figure stop command) is produced. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process for transmitting to the substrate 130, a process for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "2", or the like is executed. The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, by the lapse of the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds), if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a big hit special symbol, it is a big hit. A game opening time is set, a process for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130, and a special symbol stop process (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric process data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process for starting the round game by the lapse of the opening time of the big hit game and transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the big hit based on the end of the final round game A jackpot game process (step S340) for performing a process for setting the game ending time and transmitting an ending designation command to the effect control board 130, a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. is executed. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing to end the jackpot game by the passage of the ending time and the game state after the jackpot (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number, time-saving number ), a process for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0", and the like (step S350). The details of the jackpot game ending process will be described later.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being variably displayed, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbols are not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more in step S310-2. When the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-3, and when the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1" in step S310-3, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special pattern storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. Perform the shift processing of the data stored in the first storage unit ~ the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage unit The special figure determination information used in the previous game that was held is erased.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. When the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and when the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special figure corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after subtraction A pattern storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the processing for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8 stores it in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Perform shift processing of the data that has been, to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit ~ fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is erased.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction are stored in the main RAM 110c is set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

Also, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area (the number of second special figure reservations is shifted to the second 1 special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted), but the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area or the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area in the order in which the game ball entered the start hole You may shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number in order of winning), or give priority to the first special figure determination information reservation storage area over the second special figure determination information reservation storage area (The first special figure reservation number is preferentially subtracted over the second special figure reservation number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a performs a big hit determination process. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is collated with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. Determine whether or not In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area is collated with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the special symbol to be stopped Perform processing to determine the type of

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Perform processing to determine the special figure variation pattern (variation time). The details of the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern type determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variation performance pattern, which is a performance mode of the variation performance performed during the variable display of the special symbols, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 , to start the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of the step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of the step S800. In the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. When the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended, and when the customer waiting state flag is not set, the processing is moved to step S319-2. It should be noted that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of special symbols and the special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirements include that the variable display of normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. may

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect for prompting the player to play is performed.

(Special figure variation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process is moved to step S313-2, and if it is not in the normal game state, the process is moved to step S313-3 assuming that it is the probability variable game state or the time-saving game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding (matching game situation) table from the normal special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the normal game state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a corresponds (matches the game situation) from the special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13 to 14) for determining the special figure variation pattern in the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state. A table is selected and the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol type, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random number value, the pending number (U1 or U2), and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number value. A special figure variation pattern is determined by collating with a special figure variation pattern determination table.

The main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c in step S313-5, and the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern in step S313-6. A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the low probability state. If it is not a low probability state (probability variable gaming state), the process is moved to step S313-9, and if it is a low probability state, in step S313-8, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically Specifically, the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of times of change based on the end of the jackpot game) is updated by +1. The number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a first special symbol variable display, or a second special symbol variable display. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations will be referred to in special symbol fluctuation processing, which will be described later.

In step S313-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or special time-saving game state). If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, this time's special figure variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, in step S313-10, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-savings is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time saving number is notified. When this process is finished, the special figure variation pattern determination process of this time is finished.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special figure variation pattern determination process has elapsed. When the variation time has passed, the process is moved to step S320-2, and when the variation time has not passed, the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stop-displays the special symbols that have been determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets the stop time (basically 0.5 seconds) according to the gaming situation. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c in step S320-4. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining time saving times are updated, and the process moves to step S320-5, and if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining time saving times are not updated. The process moves to S320-10.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current special symbol variable display is the first special symbol. In the case of the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number of times (J1), which is the number of times of saving time of the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the number of times of saving time for the sum of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving frequency (J2), which is the time saving frequency of the second special symbols saved in the game RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the above-described third time saving frequency (J3) are subtracted by one.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S320-8 whether or not any one of the first number of times of time saving (J1), the number of times of second time saving (J2), and the number of times of saving time (J3) has become "0". When it becomes "0", the processing is moved to step S320-9 assuming that the time saving game state is terminated, and when it is not "0", the processing is moved to step S320-12.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a clears the high-probability flag, time-saving flag, and various time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to start the normal game state.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special jackpot symbol is stopped. If it is not a special jackpot symbol, the process moves to step S320-12, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-11, a high probability flag and a time saving flag saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. And various times of time saving (J1, J2, J3) are cleared to start the normal game state. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S320-16.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of variations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (900 in this embodiment). When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is moved to step S320-13 assuming that the special time-saving gaming state is started, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving gaming state is started. Assuming that it is not allowed, the process moves to step S320-15.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets the number of time reductions for special time reduction (J1=100, J2=750, J3=750) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-14, the main RAM 110c A special time-saving flag is set in the game RWM area to shift to a special time-saving game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sends a time saving number designation command corresponding to various time saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the remaining time saving number is notified.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a sets "2" to the special figure special electric processing data, and in step S320-17, the current game state (the game state specified from the presence or absence of the high probability flag and the time saving flag). A corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for updating the game state is performed in the effect control board 130. - 特許庁When this process is finished, the special symbol variation process of this time is finished.

In this way, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches the specified number of times, special time-saving gaming state is generated, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time-saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving game state occurs (900 times) is a value larger than the maximum time-saving number of times (100 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so during the normal time-saving game state Since the special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player cannot understand the progress of the game does not occur, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, during the jackpot game (after the special time-saving game state has started or ended), the special time-saving game state will not occur again, and the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side can be secured. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of times of time saving (100 times) in the normal time saving game state to be less than the number of fluctuations (900 times) in which the special time saving game state occurs, the maximum number of times of time saving in the normal time saving game state And it is good also as the same number of times as the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, and it is possible to make the player feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time saving flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of times of fluctuation is cleared to 0 to generate a special time saving gaming state, and if there is a special time saving flag, It is preferable not to generate a special time-saving game state by clearing the number of fluctuations to 0.

(Jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing a jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

The main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1, selects the game state setting table (see FIG. 16) in step S350-2, and, in step S350-3, The stop special figure data is collated with the game state setting table to determine the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets game state information (high probability flag, time saving flag, time saving count) corresponding to the determined game state in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the probability variable gaming state or the normal time-saving gaming state is generated.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the set time-saving number of times (J1, J2, J3) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the time saving number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining number of time saving is executed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state after setting in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-7, sets "0" to the special figure special electric processing data. ” is set, and the current jackpot game end processing is terminated. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for performing the effect corresponding to the current game state is executed.

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing a timer interruption process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen, or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to output audio. For example, the device 9 is caused to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), or to display a voice For example, the output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details of the customer waiting effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs menu operation processing in step E320. Specifically, depending on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, various menu items ("model description" that explains information about the model, settings that set the execution ratio of various effects that are executed during the variable effect) Select and decide the "performance customization" to be selected, "Pachi Log" to manage the game history in cooperation with the terminal such as the mobile phone owned by the player, "End" to end the menu operation), and according to the menu item process. Details of the menu operation process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not the special figure reservation number designation command or the general figure reservation number designation command is received, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c (grasp ) Perform processing to update the number of the first special figure reservation, the number of the second special figure reservation, the number of general figure reservations, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received. Performs processing related to change effects. The details of the look-ahead effect processing will be described later.

"Icon change effect" is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon, and is a jackpot notice that will be described later. It is designed that the production period may overlap with the production. Note that, in the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

"Continuous notice effect" is a kind of foreseeing notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable effects, and after the start of the variable effect. However, the timing of the performance does not overlap with the later-described jackpot announcement performance.
“Lamp change effect” is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the lighting mode of the winning hole lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects, which will be described later. The timing of the production may overlap with the big hit announcement production.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command etc. is received, and if received, processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, the normal design designation command, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, the normal pattern stop designation command, the opening designation command for winning, and the ending designation command for winning, etc. are received. It determines whether or not the command is present, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when the command is received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, the production mode (production stage) in which the production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined is updated. It is determined whether or not the conditions (change in game state, win of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance where the result is lost, etc.) are satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, the performance mode is changed to multiple performances. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" is production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state, production modes D to E set in the variable probability gaming state, production modes F to G set in the normal time-saving gaming state, and special A performance mode H that is set in the time-saving game state is provided. It should be noted that when the power is turned on and the normal game state is controlled (for example, after changing the settings, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the settings, etc.), the effect mode that is set first is always the effect mode A, and the power is turned on. The production mode that is set first when controlled to the variable probability game state when the power is turned on is always the production mode D, and the production that is first set when controlled to the normal time-saving game state when the power is turned on. The mode is always the production mode F, and the production mode that is first set when the special time-saving game state is controlled when the power is turned on is always the production mode H.

In addition, in the production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + pattern effect images (decoration part) that decorate the background of the numbers and characters, Designs of numbers and characters are different between production modes. In the production modes D to H, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the production modes. In addition, in the production modes A to H, the background image corresponding to each production mode is scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion, dynamic display) in the normal state.

In addition, in the normal game state, the production mode when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed rather than the case where the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed. change condition is likely to be established (SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss is likely to be executed, mode update lottery is likely to be won, look-ahead zone effect is likely to be executed, etc.), so the second special symbol fluctuation display ( The effect mode is more likely to change when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed than when the second variable effect is executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable display (variation performance) of the special symbols executed in the normal game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in various time-saving game states than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the normal game state Effect mode update conditions are less likely to be satisfied (SP/SP SP reach effect that results in a loss is difficult to execute, mode update lottery is easy to win, look-ahead zone effect is difficult to execute, number of effect modes is small) etc.). Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, increase the number of production modes in the probability variable gaming state and various time-saving gaming states (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state), and increase the number of production modes in the probability variable gaming state and various time-saving gaming states , When the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed, the performance mode is easier to change. You may do so.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 is performed.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is referenced, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 80 seconds for the normal game mode, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 85 seconds for the specific game mode. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the variable display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As the sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Menu operation processing of production control section)
The menu operation processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing menu operation processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E320-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting. If it is in the state of waiting for a customer, the process proceeds to step E320-2, and if it is not in the state of waiting for a customer (during a variable effect or a jackpot effect), it is assumed that the process related to menu operation is not performed, and step E320-. Move to 7.

In step E320-2, the sub CPU 130a acquires the menu process number updated in each process of the menu operation process, refers to the branch destination address from the menu process number, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address.

Specifically, if the menu processing number=“0”, various menu items (model description, effect customization, pachi log, end) are displayed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the menu is displayed by the operation of the cross key 19. The menu item is determined by selecting the item and operating the effect button 17, and the menu processing number corresponding to the determined menu item ("1" for "description of model" and "2" for "customization of effect"). , "3" for "pachi log", and "0" for "end") is executed (step E320-3), and the menu operation process is terminated.

If the menu process number is "1", then various explanatory information about the model is sequentially displayed in accordance with the operation of the cross key 19, and the model description for setting the menu process number to "0" by selecting and determining the end item. Processing (step E320-4) is executed, and the menu operation processing ends.

If the menu processing number is "2", various effects (for example, icon change effect, continuous notice effect, timer effect, etc.) that are executed during the variable effect according to the operation of the cross key 19 are executed at a normal rate. A normal setting (normal mode) and a simple setting (simple mode) executed at a lower rate than the normal rate are selected, and the effect customization process (step E320-5) determined by operating the effect button 17 is executed, Terminate the menu operation process.

If the menu processing number=“3”, the entry of the history password using the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 is accepted to start updating the play history. Perform processing such as issuing a history password according to the game history, and execute pachi log processing (step E320-6) for managing the game history in cooperation with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player, Terminate the menu operation process.

If the menu operation number=“4”, the menu operation is terminated and the menu processing number is set to “0” (step E320-7), thereby terminating the menu operation processing.

In this way, based on the operation of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, various productions (icon change production, continuous advance notice production, timer production, variable start performance announcement production, etc.) executed during the fluctuation production are performed. It is possible to set normal setting (normal mode) and simple setting (simple mode) with different execution ratios (execution ratio can be set for icon change effect, continuous notice effect, timer effect, variable start character effect effect, etc.) Therefore, the player can customize the performance balance to his liking, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of customizing the execution ratio of various effects (customization target effects) that are executed during the variable effects by selecting between normal settings and simple settings, various effects (customization target effects) that are executed during the variable effects (customization target effects) ) can be individually set to customize the performance balance, or you can choose between normal settings and simple settings, and you can set the execution ratio of various effects (customization target effects). The performance balance may be customized by enabling individual setting.

In addition, the customization target effects are not limited to the above-mentioned icon change effect, continuous notice effect, timer effect, and character notice effect at the start of fluctuation, but also the character change effect at the start of fluctuation, the notice effect before reach (speech notice), which will be described later. Effect, step-up notice effect), fixed effect, etc. may be set as the effect to be customized, and the execution ratio may be set between the normal setting and the simple setting.

In addition, the execution ratio of a specific effect among the effects to be customized (for example, in the case of a dialogue announcement, the dialogue announcement pattern 6 related to the intense dialogue with high expectations, the dialogue announcement pattern 1 related to normal dialogue with low expectations, etc.) may be set individually.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 32, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. The details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon). Execute processing. The details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. The details of the continuous announcement effect determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). The details of the ramp change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E560, the sub CPU 130a sets the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame illumination device 10 to a different light emission mode from the normal light emission mode according to the result of the prefetch determination when the game ball enters the starting hole. A prize-winning light-emitting effect for determining whether or not to execute a prize-winning light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by emitting light in a special light-emitting mode, and the effect mode of the winning-time light-emitting effect to be executed. Make a decision. The details of the prize-winning lighting effect determination process will be described later.

In step E570, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect execution process for executing the winning light emission effect determined to be executed in the winning light emission effect determination process, and ends the current look-ahead effect process.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received pre-reading designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. Also, if the received prefetch designation command is based on the winning of the first starting port 45, the game state is normal, and the received prefetching designation command is based on the winning of the second start port 47. In the case, it may be provided that it is in a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-9, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32, a plurality of One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the suspended icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode in normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the icon final display mode to be selected. For reference, the type of notification sound when an icon is generated is described for each icon type.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game is executed). It is

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon<) blue icon<red icon<rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that confirms a big win.

Then, when the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first generated notification sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second generated notification sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, , the third generated notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth generated notification sound is output.

Note that the rate at which blue and red icons are selected in simple settings is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which blue and red icons are selected in normal settings. may be used, or may be less.

Here, as a first feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It seems to be

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the execution ratio of the icon change effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect balance that suits the taste of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the case of a big win, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode, but it may be selected.

In addition, different notification sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound generated when the white icon was generated changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. Alternatively, the notification sound may not be output when the white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes in any manner. Also, for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, a dedicated notification sound may be provided to provide three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

In the change scenario determination table, the final display mode of the icon, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected are associated. The advance change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (it may be a ready-to-reach effect other than the normal reach effect) is executed in the advance change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change effect execution processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the special figure variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E520-2, and when the special figure variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 37) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the on-hold icon is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the look-ahead information storage area. When the hour command (special figure hold number designation command, prefetch designation command) cannot be received normally, the scenario is not stored in the prefetch information storage area, and the current icon change effect execution processing is terminated assuming that a command abnormality has occurred.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are selected based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage of the change timing. The display mode of the icon that is displayed changes, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stages in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the stage of change of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. FIG. 38B is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is changed to a display mode one step higher, and a degree of expectation for winning a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode two steps higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting a change again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step E530-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is the period during which the continuous notice effect (prefetching action effect, the prefetch effect effect, the prefetch vibration effect, the prefetch zone effect) can be executed, the process is shifted to step E530-4, and if the continuous notice effect is not executable, , the process proceeds to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous announcement effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed.

In the "predictive action effect", a special game is executed by executing an actuation effect (announcement effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation to be.

"Look-ahead effect production" is a special game by executing an effect production (advance production) for displaying an effect image of a predetermined color around the production pattern 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation production in one or more fluctuation productions. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that will be executed.

"Foreseeing vibration effect" is a vibration effect (advance effect) in which the effect button 17 is vibrated in a predetermined manner without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 at the timing immediately after the start of the variable effect in one or more variable effects. It is an effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by executing it.

"Look-ahead zone effect (look-ahead mode effect)" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a zone-in-zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production that continuously suggests.

The ``executable period of the continuous notice effect'' means that there is no precedent reservation in which the continuous notice effect is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the second start port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) etc. mentioned.

The sub CPU 130a selects the continuous announcement type determination table (see FIGS. 40 and 41) corresponding to the current effect mode in step E530-4, and refers to the continuous announcement type determination table in step E530-5. A notice type (whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect, the type of the continuous notice effect to be executed) is determined. Details of the continuous announcement type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the continuous announcement type for executing the continuous announcement effect. If the continuous announcement effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-16, and if the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous announcement scenario determination table (Fig. 42 , see FIG. 43). Details of the continuous announcement scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead action rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead action effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10, and if the look-ahead action effect is to be executed, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-9, and the prediction scenario of the look-ahead action effect is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E530-10 whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead effect rendering has been determined. If the look-ahead effect rendering is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect rendering is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous announcement scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario for the look-ahead effect rendering is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the anticipatory vibration effect has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-reading vibration effect notice scenario is determined. is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type for executing the look-ahead zone effect (look-ahead mode effect) has been determined. If the look-ahead zone (look-ahead mode effect) effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination process is terminated. to determine the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead zone effect (look-ahead mode effect) and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous notice effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines the non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the current continuous announcement effect. End decision processing.

The advance notice scenario or non-advanced scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous notice effect execution processing of step E540 described above, and the processing for executing the continuous notice effect or the continuous notice effect is executed. A process will be performed to prevent this.

Thus, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 39, if the normal game state, since the look-ahead operation effect related to the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is not executed, in the normal game state , When the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed, the look-ahead operation effect (the second movable member 74 actions) are easier to execute. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. When the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed, the anticipation vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more pronounced than when the variable display (variable effect) of the 2 special symbols is executed. easier to implement. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to enhance the production effect related to the variable display (variation production) of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. When the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead motion effect (operation of the second movable member 74) is better than when the variable display (variable effect) of the 1 special symbol is executed. is easier to implement. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. Prefetching vibration production (vibration production of the production button 17) is executed when the second special symbol fluctuation display (variation production) is executed than when the special symbol fluctuation display (variation production) is executed. is becoming easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special symbol in the specific game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 41 shows production modes D to H (specific game state ) is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect determination table referred to in order to determine the continuous announcement type.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the continuous notice type determination table, the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type in normal setting and simple setting by production customization, The continuous notice type is associated with the continuous notice type, "non-execution" that does not execute the continuous notice effect, "pre-reading action effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous notice effects, " ``Foreseeing effect effect'', ``Foreseeing vibration effect'', ``Foreseeing zone effect'', ``Foreseeing effect effect & foreseeing vibration effect'', ``Foreseeing action effect & Foreseeing zone effect'' in which two types of multiple types of continuous notice effects are executed. ” is provided.

For example, if the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, 85% determines "non-execution", 5% determines "look-ahead effect effect", 4% decides "look-ahead action effect", 3% decides "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% decides "look-ahead zone effect", 1% decides "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect" be done.

The rate at which various continuous notice effects are selected in the simple setting is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which various continuous notice effects are selected in the normal setting. may be used, or may be less.

Here, as a first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect any one of them) is the first rate, and the first continuous of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance look-ahead effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the advance notice effect) is executed at the second ratio, and the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. If it is, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is different from the first ratio (here, 0%). Because of this, the execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead motion effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as a third feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the first variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed according to the type of variable performance (special pattern), and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as a fourth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the first variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the type of the variable production (special pattern), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Further, as a fifth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable production (special pattern), and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

As a sixth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable production (special pattern), and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

A seventh feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, the first continuous notice effect (prefetch effect effect, prefetch chance effect, prefetch action effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) (either one of the above) is the first rate, and the first continuous notice of the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) One other than the production) is the second ratio, and the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization. , the execution ratio of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, the look-ahead chance effect, the look-ahead action effect, and the look-ahead vibration effect) is a different ratio (here, 0%) from the first ratio. The execution ratio of the second continuous notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first continuous notice effect) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable production (special pattern), and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

As an eighth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state), the first continuous notice production (look-ahead effect production, look-ahead chance eye production, look-ahead operation production, Any one of the look-ahead vibration effect and the look-ahead zone effect) is executed at the first rate, and the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone One of the productions other than the first continuous notice production) is the second ratio, and the first specific game state (normal time reduction game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization When the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance production, the look-ahead operation production, and the look-ahead vibration production) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and one of the second continuous notice effects (look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead action effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effects) 1) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable production (special pattern), and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Further, as a ninth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the first specific game state (normal time-saving game state), the first continuous notice production (look-ahead effect production, look-ahead chance eye production, look-ahead operation production, Any one of the look-ahead vibration effect and the look-ahead zone effect) is executed at the first rate, and the second continuous notice effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance effect, look-ahead motion effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone In the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the execution ratio of the production (one other than the first continuous notice production) is the second ratio, and the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization When the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution ratio of the first continuous notice production (any one of the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead chance production, the look-ahead operation production, and the look-ahead vibration production) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and one of the second continuous notice effects (look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead action effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effects) 1) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable production (special pattern), and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 42 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. 43 shows a continuous announcement scenario determination table for production modes D to H (specific game state). It is a diagram.

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. The prior fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation), and the production mode of the continuous advance notice production in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specified command. "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The “weak notice” has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action by emitting light in blue, and a weak action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the blue effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the production button 17 blinks in white, and in the case of the look-ahead zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output. It is to be done.

The "strong notice" has different effects depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of the look-ahead action effect, the second movable member 74 performs a strong action by emitting red light, and a strong action effect sound is output. In the case of the look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and the red effect sound is output.In the case of the look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the 17 strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red. In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

The continuous notice production scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the advance change and a weak notice or a strong notice is executed during the change (for example, scenario 11), and a scenario during the change and the change. A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, there is a point that the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, production modes D to H (specific game state) are more The point is that the continuous advance notice effect is likely to be executed (the execution ratio is high), that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is low when the continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

Instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect between the production modes A to C and the production modes D to H, for example, the continuous announcement production is executed more in the production mode B than in the production mode A. For example, the performance mode E may make it easier to execute the continuous announcement performance than the performance mode D. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the effect modes D to H. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, in the production modes D to H (specific game state), when the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), the continuous announcement production (here, the look-ahead effect production, the look-ahead operation production) is more likely to be executed. points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, in production mode D ~ H (specific game state), if the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state in which the (super) shortened fluctuation tends to be more frequent than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. than, in production mode D ~ H (specific game state), if the SPSP reach production is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result), continuous notice production (here look-ahead effect production, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), the full rotation ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (forecast result). In production modes D ~ H (specific game state), continuous notice production (here, look-ahead operation production, look-ahead zone production) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation production from becoming monotonous in the specific game state, which tends to have more super-shortening fluctuations than in the production modes A to C (normal game state), and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the seventh feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more Prefetching vibration production (vibration production not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 or the display of the operation promotion image) is likely to be executed (high execution ratio = different degree of expectation for big win). Therefore, in the performance modes A to C (normal game state) in which the staying period tends to be longer than in the performance modes D to H (specific game state), the player can easily experience the anticipatory vibration performance, and the enjoyment of the game. can be improved. In addition, in production modes D to H (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to add rarity to the anticipatory vibration effects and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

It should be noted that the performance modes D to H may be easier to execute the look-ahead vibration performance (execution rate may be higher) than the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the performance mode A makes it easier to execute the look-ahead continuous performance than the performance mode B or C, so that the execution ratio of the look-ahead vibration performance is increased between the performance modes A to C. It may be different, and if it is a specific game state, the production mode D makes it easier to execute the look-ahead vibration production than the production modes E to H, so that the look-ahead vibration is performed between the production modes D to H. You may vary the execution ratio of production|presentation. By doing so, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the anticipatory vibration effect is executed between the effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, specific reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects ) is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), in production modes D ~ H (specific game state), a specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed ( A look-ahead result) is more difficult to execute the look-ahead vibration effect (execution rate is low). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give a rarity to the anticipatory vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As a ninth feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, production modes D to H (specific game state) are more One of the points is that the look-ahead action effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in production modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give a rarity to the anticipatory vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

As a tenth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. Than, in the production mode D ~ H (specific game state), when the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach effect, SP SP reach effect) are difficult to execute (performed rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, continuous notice effects that end with two fluctuation effects in production modes D to H (specific game state) are executed. Than, when the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in production modes A to C (normal game state) is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In production modes D to H (specific game state), continuous notice effects with only one variable effect are performed than in modes A to C (normal game state). When it is executed, the ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is less likely to be executed in the variable effect that is the target of the announcement of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. , In production modes A to C (normal game state), when the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect) , SPSP ready-to-win effects) are likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 14th feature of the various tables related to the continuous announcement effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) , In production modes D to H (specific game state), when the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed, the reach effect with high expectations for the big hit in the fluctuation effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example , SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature of various tables related to the continuous advance notice effect shown in FIGS. (Second movable member 74) can be used to execute the look-ahead action effect, but the look-ahead action effect can be performed in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). There is a difference in the degree of expectation of the jackpot when executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74, which is not used in the final effect, is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73, which is used in the final effect, which will be described later. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a big win has occurred just because the look-ahead action effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74 in the strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 , the ratio of operating the second movable member 74 should be higher.

As the 17th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In this case, the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the normal state is higher than the ratio (0%) of the production button 17 in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 17 projecting (projecting only in a decided effect, which will be described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the strong notice of the anticipatory vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio of the effect button 17 to the projecting state , the ratio of the normal state should be higher.

As the eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the look-ahead action production (weak action of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) executed without displaying the operation promotion image is executed than when the operation prompting image is displayed. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), strong notice of the look-ahead action production (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and strong notice of the look-ahead effect production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 70a) are executed. When the strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect (strong vibration of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed, the expectation of the big win is higher than when the game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
The continuous announcement effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution processing is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effects (prefetching action effect, prefetch effect effect, prefetch vibration effect, prefetch zone effect) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. At E540-3, it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect is stored. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, it is assumed that the power supply has been restored or a command error (such as failure to fetch the prefetching specified command) has occurred this time. terminates the continuous advance notice effect execution processing.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice pattern (type of continuous notice effect, weak notice, strong notice) to be executed in the current variable effect according to the notice scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the decided announcement pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the continuous announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the determined announcement pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous announcement effect execution process ends.

According to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 44, when the effect scenario of the continuous notice effect is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power supply recovery or the occurrence of a command error (such as failure to fetch the look-ahead designation command), the process starts from now. The continuous notice effect is not executed in the variable effect to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution of the continuous announcement effect becomes unstable due to the restoration of the power supply or the occurrence of the command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. The scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the power recovery or the command at the time of winning that will be cleared (special figure hold number specification command, look-ahead specification command) cannot be received normally. transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the color change of the icon. It will be.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 45, the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR is changed in correspondence with the icon change in the icon change effect to change the lamp. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 45, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to. Therefore, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed in the normal game state, the icon change effect is not executed. The change production is also not executed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the first start hole 45 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state, the icon change effect is not executed, so the lamp The change production is also not executed. Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to encourage the winning of the game ball to the second start hole 47, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect) is executed in the normal game state, or when the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect) is executed in the specific game state, When the lamp change effect (the lamp change effect for the pending memory to be executed later) is already being executed, the lamp change effect may be terminated and not restarted, or the lamp change effect may be interrupted and the corresponding lamp change effect be performed. It may be restarted after the end of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 46, the prize-winning lighting effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the win-time lighting effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E560-1. When the prefetching designation command is received, the processing is moved to step E560-2, and when the prefetching designation command is not received, the winning lighting effect determination processing is ended.

In step E560-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E560-3, determines whether or not the current time is within the executable period of the light emission effect at the time of winning. If it is during the winning lighting effect executable period, the process moves to step E560-4, and if it is not during the winning lighting effect executable period, the winning lighting effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it will not be performed, the current lighting effect determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

The ``executable period of the light emitting effect at the time of winning'' is that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the normal game state is entered when the prefetch designation command based on the winning to the first start port 45 is received, and the second start When a prefetch designation command based on the winning to the mouth 47 is received, it is in a time-saving game state.

In step E560-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emission effect pattern for determining the effect pattern of the winning light emission effect to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and step E560-4. In step 5, a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the win-time light emission effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E560-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light effect pattern. Specifically, referring to the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light emission effect pattern , one prize-winning light-emitting performance pattern is determined from a plurality of prize-winning light-emitting performance patterns.

In step E560-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined winning-time light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing a winning-time light-emitting effect. In the case of the pattern of executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the processing is shifted to step E560-8, and in the case of the pattern of not executing the light emission effect at the time of winning, the current light emission effect determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

In step E560-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the winning light emission effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emission effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emission effect determination process. As a result, the win light emission effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the win light emission effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the win light emission effect execution command.

(Light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of winning)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a win-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a win-time light-emitting effect pattern.

In the winning lighting effect pattern determination table, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetching specified command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the winning lighting effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect mode for each lighting effect pattern at the time of winning is described.

As the winning-time light-emitting performance patterns, a winning-time light-emitting performance pattern 00 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is not executed and winning-time light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02 for which the winning-time light-emitting performance is executed are set. In the prize-winning lighting effect patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with high jackpot expectation is higher than the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with low jackpot expectation. However, there is a point that it is easy to execute the light emission effect at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes easy to increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning-time light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the winning-time light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the winning light emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that there is no winning light emission effect pattern (performance mode) that determines the big win (accurate), unlike the final icon display mode shown in FIG. mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player from the time when the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to provide a light-emitting effect pattern at the time of winning that confirms the jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and outputs a confirmation sound from the audio output device 9). It is preferable to determine the light-emitting performance pattern at the time of winning, which will result in the determination of the jackpot at the lowest rate when is executed.

(Variation production pattern determination processing of production control unit)
Fluctuation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2 selects a variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 49 to 51) corresponding to the current presentation mode. do. The details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from a plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table for the effect modes A to C referred to for determining the variable effect pattern in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), and FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game state) to be referred to for determining a variable performance pattern in D to G, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for production|presentation mode H (specific game state) referred in order to determine.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the variable effect pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variable pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and a selected variable effect pattern. , the effect configuration in each variable effect pattern is described.

"Variation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the normal variable display is executed in which the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 70a is not formed.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is performed in which the reach state is not formed for a shorter period of time than the normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed or not. It shows that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed as a result of not being performed.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that after performing an effect inciting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed, the pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of the pseudo-continuous effect being performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 2” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. is set as one set, and two sets of the effect are performed.
“(Variation → Pseudo-success) x 3” is an effect in which a pseudo-continuous success effect is executed as a result of performing a pseudo-continuous effect after performing a stimulating effect to incite whether or not a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed. is set as one set, and three sets of the effect are performed.

"Variation (first episode)" refers to the first stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo failure and pseudo success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the first episode of the story) will be performed.
"Variation (Episode 2)" is the second stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo failure and pseudo success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the second story following the first story) will be performed.
"Variation (episode 3)" refers to the third stage production (story production) of the stage production (story production) that can be executed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and in which the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the third story following the second story) will be performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-described normal reach effect is executed.
“N “7” ready-to-win” indicates that the above-described normal ready-to-win effect is executed in a state where the ready-to-win state is formed by the effect symbol 70a of “7”.
"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full spin development” indicates that a development effect suggesting full spin reach is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect suggesting whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective period.
"Failure" indicates that a determined failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed as a result of the determined effect.
"Success" indicates that a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game is performed is executed as a result of the determined effect.

"Loss" means to temporarily stop by forming a losing dot (a mode of displaying a losing dot such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) by means of the production pattern 70a which is composed only of numbers and does not include characters. is shown.
"c symbol loss" means that the performance symbol 70a of the display mode including the character forms a losing dot (a false display mode such as "358" or "948" different from the initial dot to be described later) and temporarily stops. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped is displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern match" means that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (a big hit display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a which does not include characters but only numbers.
"c pattern match" indicates that the game is temporarily stopped after forming a big hit result (big win display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a of the display mode including characters.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance (jackpot display mode) becomes a jackpot appearance that is advantageous to the player (from the even-numbered production pattern that usually becomes a jackpot to a definite variable jackpot). (whether or not it becomes an odd-numbered performance symbol, or whether or not it becomes a “7” performance symbol for executing the most advantageous jackpot game), then promotion success performance is performed as an advantageous jackpot outcome. , indicates that a re-lottery effect is executed such as a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmed vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
“Strong vibration for 1 second” indicates that a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol variation (end notification effect continuation)" means that the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not executed while the end notification effect executed during the last variation effect in the special time saving game state described later is continued. It shows that only the variable display of the symbol TZ is performed.
"Resurrection effect" indicates that a resurrection effect is performed in which a special time-saving game state ends and a jackpot is announced.
"Special pattern matching" means that the special pattern TZ forms a big hit (jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") and stops displaying in a state where the production pattern 70a is not displayed.

The “chance effect” indicates that the above-described chance effect (effect of displaying a character image of “chance approaching” on the first image display device 70) is performed.
“Acquisition effect (role item strong downward motion)” means that a jackpot acquisition effect (effect in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and a success effect image SEF is displayed) suggesting that the jackpot has been won. indicates that it will be done.

"Result display" indicates that the above-described result display is performed.
“Resurrection production (role item strong downward movement)” is a revival production that informs that it is a jackpot by pretending that the normal time-saving game state ends (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and the success effect image SEF is displayed).

“Variation (short rush effect)” means that the short rush effect described above is performed when it is the first change in the special time saving game state, and the short rush effect described above is not performed when it is not the first change in the special time saving game state. It is shown that.
"Variation + long rush effect" indicates that the above-described long rush effect is performed in the first time fluctuation of the special time saving game state.

"Immediate hit success" indicates that an effect is performed in which the player is notified of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through the reach.
"Immediate hit success (strong descending action)" is an effect (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position) in which the player is notified that the result (jackpot) is advantageous without going through the reach and the success effect image SEF is displayed).

“End notification effect (door closed)” means that the above-described end notification effect (effect in which the door image is closed and a character image notifying the end of the special time-saving gaming state is displayed) is performed.

A first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the SP ready-to-win effect or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, there is an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. The point is that it is executed and the display pattern 70a including the character is restored. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of the display mode of the production pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the production pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when a big win is achieved, there is a variable performance pattern in which a winning performance is executed and the symbols are aligned, and a successful determination after the symbols are aligned. The point is that there is a variable effect pattern in which the effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the case of a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that, in the variable effect patterns that result in a big hit, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds when the patterns are aligned with the effect pattern 70a that does not include the character. The point is that a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) that strongly vibrates is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, when the production pattern 70a including the character is pattern-matched (c pattern-matched), the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. Production (jackpot confirmation vibration production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, a reach production (normal reach The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 70a (the production pattern that usually becomes a big hit by becoming a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the production, SP ready-to-win production, and SPSP ready-to-win production. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7" results in a big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. The ratio of reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is lower in the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that becomes the most advantageous probability variation jackpot by becoming a jackpot). mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the reach production (normal reach Reach production (normal reach production, SP One of the points is that the ratio of reach production, SPSP reach production) to be performed is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance symbol 70a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As an eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which kind of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, production modes D to G (specific game state) are most advantageous than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a variable probability big win, the ready-to-win performance (SPSP ready-to-win performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the most advantageous performance symbol to become the most advantageous variable probability big hit by becoming a big win). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

As a tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. However, in the production modes D to G (specific game state), when the ready-to-win production is executed with the production pattern 70a of "7", the jackpot is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the performance modes D to G (specific game state), and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, special time reduction than when the first special symbol losing fluctuation display (losing first fluctuation production) is executed in the normal game state The point is that the same variation performance pattern is more likely to be executed in the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of loss) is executed in the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect in the case where the first special pattern loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed depending on the game state, and win the game ball into the second start port 47 in the special time-saving game state. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, special The point is that the same variation performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of the loss) is executed in the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the thirteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the case where the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (the second fluctuation production of losing) is executed in the special time saving game state, and the special time saving In the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect of loss) is executed in the game state, a predictive effect (ready-to-win fan effect) that suggests the possibility of executing the ready-to-win effect is executed. The point is that the execution ratio of the variable production where the ready-to-win production is not executed is different (the execution ratio is high when the second special symbol loss first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the special time-saving gaming state, the second special symbol's losing variation display (losing second variation) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state than when the first special symbol's losing variation display (losing first variation effect) is executed. In the case where the production) is executed, the execution ratio of the variable production in which the predictive production (ready-to-win production) that suggests the possibility of the ready-to-win production is executed is executed, but the ready-to-reach production is not executed is higher. , and vice versa. In this case, the variation in which the ready-to-win staggering performance is executed but the ready-to-win performance is not executed in both the case of executing the first variable performance of losing and the case of executing the second changing performance of losing in the special time-saving game state. After the effect is executed, the execution ratio of the losing first variable effect may be increased.

As the 14th feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. In a different second period (after the remaining second pending digestion period after the end of the time-saving gaming state), a predictive effect (reach fanning effect) that suggests the possibility of executing a reach effect is executed, but a reach effect There is a difference in the execution ratio of the fluctuation effect of the loss that is not executed. Therefore, even in the normal game state, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifteenth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the case where the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (the second fluctuation production of losing) is executed in the normal time saving game state, and the special time saving In the case where the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation effect of loss) is executed in the game state, a predictive effect (ready-to-win fan effect) that suggests the possibility of executing the ready-to-win effect is executed. The point that the execution ratio of the variable production in which the reach production is not executed is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect of whether or not ready-to-win is executed depending on the game state and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. After the execution of the low normal reach production, it is possible to execute the second stage production (movie playback of the second episode of the story), while the second stage production (story Playback of movie of episode 2) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect by making it different depending on the type of the ready-to-win performance whether or not the stage performance progresses, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed may be provided.

Also, if you temporarily stop with a losing result after a cut-in production or a decision failure production, it will be confirmed that you will lose, but after the cut-in production or decision failure production, it will be a big hit. may be executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, a predictive performance (reach fanning performance) that suggests the possibility that the ready-to-win performance will be executed is executed. Effect is not executed Although the variable effect is not executed, it may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute at a lower rate than when the second special symbol losing variation display (second variation effect) is executed in the normal game state or the normal time-saving game state.

(Timer effect determination processing in effect control unit)
The timer effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing timer effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. determination process).

The sub CPU 130a refers to the current variable effect pattern in step E620-1, and in step E620-2, the reach effect (including chance effect) or more effects (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, It is determined whether special SP reach, chance performance) is executed. If an effect equal to or higher than the ready-to-win effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step E620-3, and if an effect equal to or greater than the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, the current timer effect determination process is terminated.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the number of event timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variable effect using the event timer frequency determination table (see FIG. 53). do. Specifically, the big hit lottery result, variation effect pattern, etc., are collated with the event timer frequency determination table. Details of the event timer frequency determination table will be described later.

The event timer effect indicates the occurrence of any of a plurality of suggestive events (excluding icon changes) that make players expect that a jackpot game will be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing of the occurrence of the suggestive event. However, when the event timer production is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of the suggested event, and when the suggested event occurs, it is possible to determine the type of the suggested event. there is

Suggestion events include normal reach effects, pseudo-runs, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, all-rotation reach effects, special SP reach, effective period, jackpot pattern stop, and the like.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of times of the event timer effect is to execute the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of times of the event timer effect is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process moves to Step E620-5, and the event timer effect is not to be executed (event timer effect If the number of effects is "0"), the current timer effect determination process is terminated.

In step E620-5, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is twice instead of once, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 54) to determine the suggested event suggested by the event timer effect and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. to decide. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer. Details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later.

The timer types include a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(a)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the first event timer effect and the timer effect. Determines the timer type, which is classified by type and length. Specifically, the variation effect pattern and the like are collated with the first suggested event determination table for two timers. The details of the first suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (drawing mode) in the first event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect designation command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect specifying command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggested event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(b)) to determine the suggested event suggested by the second event timer effect and the timer. Determines the timer type classified by length. Specifically, the variation performance pattern and the like are collated with the second suggestive event determination table for two timers. The details of the second suggested event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a determines the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect using the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Specifically, the timer type, the jackpot determination result, and the like are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a suggested event and a timer effect pattern command indicating an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and terminates the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table referred to when determining the number of times of event timer effects to be executed during variable effects. In the event timer count determination table, the jackpot judgment result, variable effect pattern, distribution ratio (%) for each event timer effect count between normal setting and simple setting by customizing the effect, and the number of event timer effects to be determined. are mapped.

The number of times of the event timer effect is "0 times", which means that the event timer effect is not executed, "1 time", which means that the event timer effect is executed once, and the event timer effect is executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Also, the ratio of selecting each number of times (1 time, 2 times) at which the event timer effect is executed in the simple setting is the ratio of selecting each number of times (1 time, 2 times) at which the event timer effect is executed. It is supposed to be 1/2, but it may be more or less than 1/2.

The first feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation for big win is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effects are executed is more likely to occur in the event of a big win than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the number of times the performance is executed tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the event timer number-of-times determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the execution ratio of the timer effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) made by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect balance that suits the taste of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the production modes A to C, when the second variation production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP ready-to-win production pattern, the timer production is executed. The production may not be executed (restricted). In this case, when the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed during the effect modes A to C, and the first variation effect (the first special symbol is displayed during the effect modes D to H) When the variable display) is executed, the timer effect is not executed.

(Suggestion event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a suggestive event when one event timer effect is executed during a variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for one-time timer referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for one-time timer is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggestive event to be determined, and a timer type.

Eight types of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, all-rotation reach performance, special SP reach, effective period, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. 54 is that the types of suggested events are set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the easier it is for the long timer to be determined as the timer type). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a suggestive event in the case of executing the event timer effect twice during the variable effect, and a suggestive event determination table for two timers referred to when determining the timer type. The suggestive event determination table for two timers is associated with a variable effect pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestive event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

Note that FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a first suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggested event and the type of the timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggested event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggested event and the type of timer type.

Seven kinds of suggestive events are set: normal reach, pseudo-run, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, effective period, all-rotation reach performance, and jackpot symbol stop.

In addition, three timer types are set as timer types: a short timer that is a short timer time category, a middle timer that is a long timer time category, and a long timer that is a long timer time category. Note that the timer times set according to the three types of timers are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

A first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that the types of suggested events are set differently according to the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

Also, as a second feature of the suggestive event determination table for two times of the timer shown in FIG. One of the points is that both of the events that are executed at the late stage of the variable performance are likely to be determined as suggestive events. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be improved for a long period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as a third feature of the suggested event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55, the timer type for which a long timer time is set is more likely to be determined for a variable effect pattern with a higher expectation for a big win ( A long timer is more likely to be determined as a timer type as the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher). By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot determination result, distribution ratio (%) for each update pattern, and determined update pattern. The timer display position and whether or not the standby display indicating that the execution of the timer effect is waiting is described.

The “normal pattern” is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is subtracted by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
The “special pattern” means that the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which 1 is decremented by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected degree of jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< A normal pattern 28 is provided.

In this way, in the timer effect, a plurality of timer times (update patterns) are set. effect, effective period of the effect button 17, stop display of the jackpot pattern, etc.) occurs, and the timing of the occurrence of a predetermined event, so any timer time (update pattern) , the count value is counted up to the final reaching point (0 second in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that regardless of the timer type, there is an update pattern in which the timer time is longer in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the big win lottery result. points that are easy to determine. By doing so, the longer the timer time in the timer effect is, the higher the expectation of the big win becomes, so that the player will have a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that even if the timer time is the same, the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the display mode (character color) of the timer. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the display mode of the timer, and to improve the amusement of the game. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big win related to the display mode (character color) of the timer is white<blue<red<rainbow (confirmed big win).

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 57, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. is executed after the process of determining

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the player expects that a jackpot game will be executed when the variation starts. A change start accessory announcement determination table (see FIGS. 58 and 59) for determining the announcement pattern is selected, and the announcement pattern is determined. The details of the fluctuation start accessory announcement determination table will be described later.

"Variation start role announcement effect" is a kind of big win announcement effect in which the role object (first movable member 73) is operated in an operation mode according to the degree of expectation of a big win at the start of the change effect.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the change start role product notice effect is to execute the change start role product notice effect. If the fluctuation start character product announcement effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E650-5, and if the start character object announcement effect is to be executed, the character product announcement is performed in step E650-4. A character object announcement effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer. As a result, the character product announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the variation start character product announcement effect corresponding to the character product announcement pattern is executed at the start of the variation effect.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a decides the pre-reach notice decision for determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed in the pre-reach effect period (high-speed fluctuation period). A table (see FIG. 60) is selected to determine the notice pattern. The details of the pre-reach announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the dialogue notice effect. If the dialogue foretelling effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue foretelling effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Dialogue advance notice effect" is to generate an effective period during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit on the image display device according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period or the elapse of the effective time. It is a kind of big hit announcement effect in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.例文帳に追加

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialog announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining the dialog announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect, and determines the dialog announcement pattern. Set a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

The "step-up notice effect" is a plurality of steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) without generating the effective period of the effect button 17 during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period). It is a kind of big-hit advance notice effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of the steps (steps) is reached.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up notice pattern. At 11, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice performance corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). The details of the dialog announcement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect to determine the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and step E650-14. , a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, all-rotation development effect). If it is the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-16, and if it is not the variable effect pattern for executing the development effect, the process is shifted to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect, determines the development effect pattern, and in step E650-17, determines the development effect pattern. A development effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the development effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, the process is moved to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and step E650-21. , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process is moved to step E650-25.

The sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the determined effect pattern of the determined effect in step E650-23 to determine the determined effect pattern, and in step E650-24, determines the determined effect pattern. A decision effect command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. The details of the determined effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern for executing a re-lottery performance, the process is moved to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 68) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and steps E650-27. , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variation effect. The details of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern capable of executing a fixed effect (a big hit). If it is a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, the process is shifted to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that can execute a fixed performance, this time's jackpot announcement performance determination processing is terminated.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects the confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the confirmed effect pattern of the confirmed effect to determine the confirmed effect pattern, and in step E650-30, determines the confirmed effect pattern. A fixed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in a transmission buffer, and the current big hit notice performance determination processing is terminated. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Details of the fixed effect pattern determination table will be described later.

(Advance notice decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 shows a fluctuation start role announcement decision table for production modes A to C (normal game state) referred to when determining the notice pattern of the fluctuation start role announcement effect in production modes A to C. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a variation start role announcement for production modes D to H (specific game state) that is referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the fluctuation start role announcement effect in production modes D to H. It is a figure which shows a determination table.

The fluctuation start role announcement decision table contains the production mode, the jackpot judgment result, the fluctuation production pattern, the selection rate (%) of each fluctuation start role announcement pattern, and the selected fluctuation start role announcement pattern. are mapped.

The pattern for notifying the character at the time of start of fluctuation includes no notice, a rattling action in which the first movable member 73 swings up and down at the initial position (standby position) at the start of the fluctuation production, and the start of the fluctuation production. A weak lowering motion is set in which the first movable member 73 is lowered from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the performance position and then returned to the initial position.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

As a first feature of the variable start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. There is a point that the weak descending motion is not executed as the object notice pattern, that is, the execution of the character object notice effect at the time of fluctuation start is restricted. By doing so, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first start port 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the variable start time role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. If it is executed, the weak descending action is not executed as the fluctuation start character product announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start character object announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the production modes A to C (normal game state) in which hitting left is advantageous to the player, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first start port 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the fluctuation start role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variation effect is executed, the weak descending action is not executed as the variation start character product announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start character object announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the production modes D to G (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) in which hitting to the right is advantageous to the player, the game ball enters the second start port 47. It is possible to promote the execution of the second variable performance to be performed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variable start time role announcement determination table shown in FIGS. 58 to 59, the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the effect mode H (special time-saving game state). If it is, the slight downward movement is not executed as the fluctuation start role announcement pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start role announcement effect is restricted. By doing so, in the production mode H (special time-saving game state) in which hitting to the right is advantageous to the player, the second variation production performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 47 can be promoted, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the production modes A to C (normal game state), when the second fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, the fluctuation start accessory notice (rattling operation ) is to be executed, but it is also possible to prevent (restrict) execution of the announcement at the start of fluctuation.

Also, in production modes D to G (probability variable gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the chance production pattern, the variable start time accessory notice (Rattling motion) is executed, but the performance notice at the start of fluctuation may be prevented (restricted).

Also, in the production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variation production corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, or when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed When the first variation production is executed in the end-suggestion revival production pattern, the change start performance notice (rattling action) is executed, but the change start change performance notice is not executed (limited ).

Also, in production modes D to H (specific game state), when the first fluctuation production corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is not executed. However, the first movable member 73 may be slightly lowered. In this case, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). It should be executed.

Also, although the performance for notifying the accessory at the time of fluctuation start is not a customization target performance in which the execution ratio changes depending on the setting between the normal setting and the simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of "rattling action" and "slight descending action" in simple settings is lower than the selection rate (execution rate) of normal settings (for example, , 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal game state) referred to when deciding the notice pattern of pre-reach notice production in production modes A to C (normal game state). and FIG. 61 is a before-reach notice determination table for production modes D-H (specific game state) that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the before-reach notice effect in production modes D-H (specific game state). It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the before-reach notice determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected. .

There are 3 types of advance notice patterns: "no notice" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, "serif notice effect" in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and "step-up notice effect" in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The type is set, and the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game (percentage of execution of the vibration effect associated with the matching of the symbols described above) is no notice<serif notice effect<step-up notice effect.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the pre-reach advance notice effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit determination result, and a big win is expected. When a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for big win is determined, the advance notice performance before reach is more likely to be executed than when a variable performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is determined. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that production modes D to G (specific game state) are more lost than production modes A to C (normal game state). In the case, the advance notice effect before reach (both the dialogue notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 and the step-up advance notice effect in which the vibration effect can be executed without the effect period of the effect button 17) is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the advance notice determination table before reach shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the production modes D to G (specific game state) are more jackpots than the production modes A to C (normal game state). Even in this case, it is difficult to execute the pre-reach announcement effect (execution rate is low) when the variable effect pattern is the pattern for executing the normal ready-to-win effect and the pattern for executing the SP ready-to-win effect. Therefore, useless pre-reach announcement effects are less likely to be executed in the effect modes D to G (specific game state) in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. When the advance notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of executing the vibration effect accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the ratio of executing the vibration effect in the decided effect described later, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, than when the step-up notice effect is executed, when the serif notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (the ratio of the vibration effect accompanying the matching of the above-mentioned patterns is executed, the success effect which will be described later) The rate at which the accompanying vibration effect is executed, etc.) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

Also, in the production modes A to C (normal game state), when the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reach announcement production (line announcement production) is executed. However, the pre-reach announcement effect may not be executed (restricted).

In addition, in the production mode D ~ G (probability variable gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the reach before notice production (serif notice production) Although it is designed to be executed, the pre-reach announcement effect may not be executed (restricted).

Also, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the notice production before reaching (line notice production) is executed. However, the pre-reach announcement effect may not be executed (restricted).

Also, in production modes D to H (specific game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the step-up notice production (effective period such as pattern 5 described later occurs Vibration production not to be performed) is not executed, but step-up notice production may be executed. In this case, the step-up notice effect (pattern 5 etc. described later) is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). (vibration presentation) that does not occur during the effective period of is preferably executed.

In addition, although the pre-reach announcement effect (dialogue announcement effect, step-up announcement effect) was not a customization target effect in which the execution ratio changes depending on the setting between the normal setting and the simple setting, it may be a customization target effect. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of "line notice effect" and / or "step-up notice effect" in simple setting is higher than the selection rate (execution rate) of normal setting It is preferable to make it lower (for example, 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 62, the speech announcement pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each speech announcement pattern, and the selected speech announcement pattern. , and for reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each line notice pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the speech announcement effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. It should be noted that operation sound 1 is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits light in white with a low expectation for a big hit.

The "effect content" indicates the content of the effect to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. indicates that there is

``Normal dialogue (black)'' in the dialog production mode column means that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black characters and that normal dialogue is output by voice. showing.
“Chance dialogue (black)” means that a chance dialogue with the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and the chance dialogue is output by voice.
“Reach lines (black)” indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters, and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
“Reach lines (red)” indicates that the ready-to-win lines for which the execution of the ready-to-win effect is confirmed are displayed in red characters, and the ready-to-win lines are output by voice.

“Heat speech (red)” indicates that a heat speech that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red characters, and that heat speech is output by voice.
“Extremely hot speech (gold)” indicates that an intensely hot speech that has a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters, and that intensely hot speech is output as a voice.
“Confirmed line (rainbow)” indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is output by voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate 1 from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the display of the dialogue (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). This indicates that a vibrating strong vibration effect is to be executed.

The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue” < “chance dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “heat Dialogue (gold)” < “Confirmed dialogue (rainbow)”. In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a speech with high expectation for a big hit (heat speech or higher) is displayed, it is possible to execute a vibration presentation in which the presentation button 17 is vibrated. points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialogue forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, the dialogue foretelling effect of intensely hot dialogue with a higher expectation for a big win than the heat dialogue is executed than when the dialogue foretelling effect of the heat dialogue is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue advance notice effect of the hot dialogue is executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a speech with a high expectation of a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is for a relatively short time. mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is set to 2 according to the degree of expectation for a big win. There are several points. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fifth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration period of the effect button 17 during display of the dialogue image (1 second) is shorter than the display period of the dialogue image (3 seconds). is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech announcement effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, or the vibration time of the weak vibration effect may be longer than the strong vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the speech announcement performance is the same between the performance modes A to C (normal game state) and the performance modes D to G (specific game state). However, production modes A to C (normal game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit, and production modes D to G (specific game state) may have a higher degree of expectation for a big hit. can be In this way, it is possible to vary the game characteristics depending on the type of the production mode, and it is possible to easily increase the player's expectation in the production modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Also, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, and the dialogue forewarning effect is executed. You can choose not to run it.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the dialogue forewarning effect, it is also possible to execute the dialogue forewarning effect without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be used.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 shows a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding the notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 63, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect contents of each step-up notice pattern (step-up (SU) effect mode, button vibration) are described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first and second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the 1st to 4th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the 1st to 5th step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the 1st to 3rd step effects are executed in order, the 4th step effect is skipped and the 5th step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

Weak vibration (1 second) at "5" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. It indicates that

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during execution of the step-up notice effect. This indicates that the production button 17 is turned off.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot in each step-up effect mode is “1→2”<“1→2→3”<“1→2→3→4”<“1→2→3→4→5”<“1→ 2→3→5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 can be vibrated to vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big win is displayed is relatively short. There is a point. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration There is only one type of preset time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the step-up notice effect with low expectation is difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , weak vibration effects are easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the expectation of a big hit is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without the effective period (the display of the operation promoting image) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of anticipation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of anticipation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A to C (normal game state) are more effective than production modes D to G (specific game state), and the effect button 17 without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) in the step-up notice effect The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the vibration presentation is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance according to the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. As a reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestive effect, valid period, effect content) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo continuous effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. It is an effect that displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Protruding button white” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. It indicates that the production button 17 emits light in white with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, and "protrusion (red)" means a state in which the production button 17 protrudes and the production button 17 has a high degree of expectation for a big win. It shows that it emits light with a high red color.

"Effect content" indicates the content of the effect related to the pseudo continuous effect, and "temporary stop period of pseudo continuous symbol 2 seconds" means that the period during which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later. is shown.

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the pseudo-continuous effect mode means that the central effect symbol 70a, which suggests the execution of the pseudo-continuous, is not temporarily stopped, and the normal effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and a failure sound effect is produced. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive failure effect to be output is executed.
"Pseudo-success" means that the central effect symbol 70a, which is a pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of a pseudo-continue, is temporarily stopped, a success effect sound is output, the second movable member 74 is weakly operated, and the pseudo-continuation effect is performed. It shows that the pseudo consecutive success effect to be performed is executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo symbol (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for one second.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped (=when the production button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

A first feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that a vibration effect for vibrating the button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the variation effect pattern has a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed has a relatively short time. The point is that Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on . Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (pseudo continuous success effect), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more likely than production modes A to C (normal game state). ) has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates the . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A sixth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have expectations before the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance or the SPSP ready-to-win performance, but to prevent the players from having excessive expectations, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the effect button 17 during the effective period may be in a protruding state when the simulated consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, but it may not be in a protruding state.

In addition, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, although the effective period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success effect and the pseudo consecutive failure effect without generating the effective period. Often, the vibration effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous success effect may be only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or only 1 second of strong vibration effect. can be

In addition, the production modes A to C (normal game state) are simulated using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) than production modes D to G (specific game state). The degree of expectation for a big hit when a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed may be higher, and the effect mode B or C is more likely than the effect mode A with the same effect device (effect button vibration Motor, second movable member 74, etc.) may be set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) is executed is high, or the effect mode D ~ is higher than the effect mode G. Even if F has a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device (effect button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), an action effect using the second movable member 74 is executed, but an action effect using the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution ratio of the motion representation using the second movable member 74 higher than that of the motion representation using the first movable member 73 .

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the development effect.

As shown in FIG. 65, the development performance pattern determination table contains performance modes, jackpot determination results, variable performance pattern types, development performance types to be determined for development performance patterns, selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, Developed production patterns to be selected are associated with each other, and the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each developed production pattern is described for reference.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and then the valid period occurs.

The 'effective period (long press for 4 seconds)' indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by pressing the effect button 17 for a long time and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the operation sounds 1 and 2 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits light in white with a low degree of expectation for a big win, and "normal (red)" means a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude and the production button 17 has a high degree of expectation for a big win. It shows that it emits light with a high red color.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production related to the development production, and "development pattern temporary stop period 2 seconds" indicates that the period in which the development pattern described later is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds. ing.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode means that as a result of the development mode, an SP development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest the development to the SP ready-to-win mode, and the SP development mode that outputs the first development effect sound is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" means that as a result of the development production, an SPSP development pattern indicating development to the SPSP ready-to-win production is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development production that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full spin notification" means that as a result of the development production, a full spin development pattern is derived and displayed to suggest development to a full spin reach production, and a full spin development production that outputs a third development effect sound is executed. is shown.

The "weak action" in the column of character action is a weak action production in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak action with a small movement width when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period). is executed.
The "strong action" means that the second movable member 74 emits light in red when various symbols are derived and displayed (=at the end of the effective period), and a strong action effect with a large swing width is executed. is shown.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development patterns (= the end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" refers to a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time various symbols are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each action production is "weak action"<"strong action". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

As a first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect may be executed in which the effective period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the full-rotation development effect, in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is easily executed (execution rate is high), and the performance button 17 is more likely to be activated than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed when the SPSP development performance is executed. When the vibration presentation is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the SPSP development performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that it is a variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. One of the points is that the vibration effect is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of misleading the player into thinking that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed and the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65, the same production device (production button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.) can be executed (SPSP development effect, etc.), but production modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than production modes A to C (normal game state). There is a point that the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher when the development effect using the effect device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the temporary stop period of the development pattern (2 seconds) and the vibration period of the production button 17 during the temporary stop of the development pattern (2 seconds) are the same. Alternatively, the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the production button 17 is smaller than that of the pre-reach announcement production. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal game state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific game state) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) The degree of expectation for a big hit when a production (SPSP development production, etc.) is executed may be set to be higher, and production mode B or C may be higher than production mode A using the same production device (production button vibration motor , the second movable member 74, etc.) may be set to increase the expectation of the jackpot when the development performance using the second movable member 74 is executed, and the performance modes D to F are the same performance as the performance mode G. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased when a development effect using a device (the effect button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and the selected cut-in effect pattern. As a reference, the production configuration (effective suggestive production, effective period, production content) of each cut-in production pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the cut-in effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 4 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the operation sounds 1 to 3 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "Normal (white)" is the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude and the effect button 17 is in a normal state. indicates that it emits white light with a low expectation of a big hit. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for a big hit. "Protrusion (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm the big win.

"Effect content" indicates the content of the effect executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or when the effective period elapses. This indicates that the image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column indicates that a cut-in image in a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a first cut-in effect sound is output. It indicates that
“Green cut-in” indicates that a cut-in image in a green frame is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in effect is executed in which a second cut-in effect sound is output. .
"Red cut-in" indicates that a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a red cut-in effect is executed in which a third cut-in effect sound is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 lasts for 3 seconds from the time the cut-in image starts to be displayed (=when the production button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that a strong vibration effect is executed in which strong vibration is performed.

The expected degree of jackpot for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated. The point is that a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. There are some points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 during display of the cut-in image are the same. (the ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach announcement effect). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

Also, although the effective period is generated and the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating the effective period. Only weak vibration effects for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effects for 3 seconds may be used, or only weak vibration effects for 1 second or only strong vibration effects for 1 second may be used.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the determined effect.

As shown in FIG. 67, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the valid period. An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the operation sounds 1 to 4 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and "Normal (white)" is the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude and the effect button 17 is in a normal state. It shows that it emits light in white, which is expected to be a big hit. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for a big hit. "Protrusion (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a projecting state, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm the big win.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period elapses. Seconds)" means that the execution period of the effect related to the determined success effect in the effect mode other than the effect mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of the effect related to the determined success effect in the effect mode H is 6 seconds. showing.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
“Success” means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the hour) and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates).

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "protruding button rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each button state is "normal" < "protruding".

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that when the fixed success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which an effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 generated during the variable effect is the longest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effect button 17 emits rainbow light for a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the ratio is smaller than the pre-reach announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, in the decision effect (decision success effect), the action effect using the first movable member 73 is executed, but the action effect using the second movable member 74 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio of the action effect using the first movable member 73 higher than the action effect using the second movable member 74 .

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 68, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether it is scheduled to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect pattern to be selected. They are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, effective period, effect content) of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestive effect" is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. 70 is moved and displayed, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promoting effect" in the effective period column is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 17 during the effective period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggesting effect. Along with this, a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed by the length of the gauge. It should be noted that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the operation sounds 1 to 5 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
“Normal button red” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and the "normal (white)" in the button state column means the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the effect button 17 emits white light with a low promotion expectation. "Normal (red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in red, which is highly expected for promotion. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in a rainbow color indicating confirmation of promotion.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that is executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period elapses. It indicates that the performance execution period is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become a effect pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → Odd symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promoting sound effect is output.
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop), and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed. "Strong vibration (2 seconds)" is a strong vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 2 seconds from the time the promotion pattern is displayed (= the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is displayed for 4 seconds (when the effect button 17 It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than strong oscillation. "Rainbow light emission (3 seconds)" means that the production button LED for lighting the production button 17 emits light for 3 seconds (the production button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time of derivation display of the promotion symbol (= the end of the valid period). ), iridescent emission occurs over a longer period of time.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the pattern has been promoted to an advantageous performance symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The third feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 seconds) is smaller than the pre-reach announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the re-lottery performance (promotion failure performance, promotion success performance) is executed by generating the validity period, but the re-lottery performance may be executed without generating the validity period.

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 69, the finalized effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed effect pattern, and the selected confirmed effect pattern. The effect configuration (execution timing, effect content) of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "○" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Determined sound" in the voice column indicates that a determined sound indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 15 emits light in rainbow colors from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for 4 seconds or more until the production pattern stops displaying). indicates that

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time when the confirmation sound is output. is shown.

It should be noted that "(special 1)" described in the column of the variable production pattern means that it is a variable production pattern related to the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(special 2)” means that it is a variable effect pattern related to the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that, when a fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is executed without generating an effective period. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Summary of various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69)
Here, as a first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialogue announcement effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17. Compared to the case where the effect button 17 is not accompanied by the effective period of the step-up notice effect (1 second weak vibration), the expectation of the big hit (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 second) is executed, and the ratio of vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) is executed in the decided production, etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, compared to the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of execution of the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment described above, the vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds→5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the vibration effect executed as a jackpot announcement effect has a relatively short vibration period. Vibration performance (1 second) during notice performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decision success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration effect (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during a fixed effect, and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) ) and a variable effect with a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration effect is included, the second effect is performed after the first effect period (pre-reach effect). In a variable effect with a period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (executed) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. high percentage). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. In a variable effect with a production), the first vibration production (at the time of the dialogue announcement production, the step-up announcement production, the simulated continuous production, the development production, etc.) is more effective during the first production period than the third production period. Effect (1 second)) is easy to execute (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without misleading the player into thinking that the game is a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. , Vibration effect (1 second) during simulated continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period ( SP/SPSP ready-to-reach production), the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) in the second production period than in the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. production), the third production period is longer than the first production period, the second vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of successful success production, at the time of fixed production, etc. Vibration production longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easily executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. is higher than the ratio of executing the first vibration effect with the effect button 17 in the projecting state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect), the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and the second vibration effect (3 seconds or longer) is activated. The ratio of execution is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration production with the production button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. , Vibration effect (1 second) during pseudo continuous effect, development effect, etc.), and second vibration effect (during cut-in effect, determined success effect, confirmed There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) longer than 1 second during performance, etc., and continuous performance (pseudo-continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the second vibration effect is easier to execute (the execution rate is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. ) points. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during cut-in effects, determined success effects, and confirmed effects, etc., during production modes A to C (normal game state). In the variable effect, the reach effect by the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach effect by the first type effect pattern (odd number pattern other than “7”) (The execution rate is high. ), it is difficult to execute the ready-to-win effect by the third type of effect pattern (the effect pattern of “7”) than the ready-to-win effect by the second type of effect pattern (the ratio of execution is low), and the second type of effect pattern The point is that the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) when the ready-to-win performance by the performance pattern of the third type is executed than when the ready-to-win performance by is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the jackpot fluctuation effect in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the ready-to-win effect ( Vibration production without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during production after reach (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation production) than the number of times of execution ) is likely to be executed more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect , SPSP ready-to-win production) is executed, the number of vibration productions (development production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed production) that does not accompany the effective period during the production after reach tends to increase. are mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. The number of executions of vibration effects (forecast vibration effects, step-up notice effects, fixed effects) that do not have an effective period during the pre-reach effect is likely to be greater than the number of times the pattern is aligned, final effect) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by means of a vibration effect that does not accompany an effective period, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution ratio is high) in the case where the post-ready notice performance (cut-in performance) with high expectation of big hit is executed (execution ratio is high), and the pre-ready notice performance. When is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a 14th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. , the expectation for the big hit increases when the vibration effect is executed with the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that production modes A ~ C (normal game state) than production mode D ~ G (specific game state), vibration with the effective period of production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the notice production after reach The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when the performance is executed. To improve the amusement of a game by making it possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode even in this case, and to easily increase the expectation of the player in the performance modes D to G which are advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

As a fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. When the production is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher, and in the big hit variation production, regardless of whether or not the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed during the pre-reach production, the production after the reach (determined success production) Later period), the vibration production of the production button 17 (vibration production at the time of pattern matching and C pattern matching) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the game will be a big win by means of the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

As a sixteenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, there is a vibrating effect (at the time of dialogue notice effect, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins. Vibration performance (one of vibration performance such as step-up notice performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) without effective period of performance button 17 (display of operation promotion image) executed during variable performance. is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, when it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without the effective period, it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game.

As a seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the pre-reach production period in the jackpot fluctuation production, the effect period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) is accompanied by a vibration production (dialogue notice production). When the vibration effect at the time) is executed, and when the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image) is executed (vibration effect at the time of the step-up notice effect), then ( The rate of execution of vibration performance (vibration performance of 3 seconds or more such as successful performance, pattern matching, C pattern matching, etc.) is executed during the performance period after reach) is different, and vibration performance without the effective period of the performance button 17 (Vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during the normal game state (production modes A to C) than during the specific game state (production modes D to G). are mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance that does not accompany the effective period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or not, execution timing, etc.) in the big hit notice effect depending on the odd number pattern other than the “7” pattern), but with the execution of the determined success effect and the confirmed effect When the vibration performance is executed by , the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern to be aligned (including C pattern alignment). Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a nineteenth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by the display of the operation prompting image), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that are accompanied by the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. While the timing to start vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start vibration is predetermined for vibration effects (symbol matching, C pattern matching, etc.) that are not accompanied by an effective period (display of operation prompting image). be done. Therefore, depending on whether or not the effective period (display of the operation prompting image) is involved, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, the same movable member (second It is possible to execute a specific effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, etc.) using the movable member 74), but the specific effect can be performed in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the jackpot expectations are different when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 21st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, there are multiple It is possible to execute a step effect that progresses to any of the stages (step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.), but in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to G (specific game state) If the step effect (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is the same stage (if it is a step-up notice effect, it is either the 3rd step effect, the 4th step effect, or the 5th step effect, if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times), the big hit expectation is different. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, there are multiple Any of the operation promotion effects can be executed, and an operation effect (any of the development effect, cut-in effect, and final effect) can be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17, and effect modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state), the degree of expectation for a big hit when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different, and production modes A to C (normal game state) ) and production modes D to G (specific game state), when the operation production is executed, the effective suggestion production is executed and the operation is promoted rather than the case where the operation promotion production is executed without the effective suggestion production being executed. The point is that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twenty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. There are cases where it is executed with an effective period and cases where it is executed without an effective period, but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long (3 seconds or more). is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 24th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, in the special time-saving gaming state, the first 2 If the special symbol losing variation display (the second variation effect of losing) is executed, the operation effect (line notice effect, development effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect) involving the operation of the valid period is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the production effect can be varied depending on the type of the special symbol (variation production), and the interest in the game can be improved.

A twenty-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Execution of the first vibration production in the case where the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second fluctuation production is executed in the specific game state. The ratios are different (the execution ratio is high when the second variable effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the variable production (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the execution of the first vibration production is better when the second fluctuation production is executed in the specific game state than when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Although the ratio is high, it may be reversed.

As a twenty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating a valid period (prediction vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and in a specific game state A case where a first variation performance (variation display of a first special symbol) in which a specific performance (various ready-to-win performance, chance performance, etc.) is executed to expect execution of a jackpot game is executed, and a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. When the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in which the specific production (various reach production, chance production, etc.) is executed, and the first vibration production during the execution of the specific production The execution ratio is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variable effect is executed). Therefore, when a variable effect is executed in which a specific effect is executed in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration effect can be varied depending on the type of the variable effect (special symbol), and the interest of the game can be improved. becomes.

It should be noted that, in the specific game state, a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game is executed than when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed. In the gaming state, a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game is executed. Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect during execution is high, the opposite may be the case.

As a twenty-seventh feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, and when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state , the execution ratio of the second vibration production is different (the execution ratio is high when the second fluctuation production is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the variable production (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the case where the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state than the case where the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state In this case, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be done.

As a twenty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration performance related to lottery performance etc.) and the second vibration performance (vibration performance related to fixed performance etc.) that is executed without generating a valid period, Specific game state (variable probability game state, various time saving game state) In the case where the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in which the specific production (various reach production, chance production, etc.) that expects the execution of the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot game in the specific game state In the case where the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in which the specific production (various reach production, chance production, etc.) that makes the execution expected is executed, the second vibration production during the execution of the specific production The execution ratio of is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, when a variable effect is executed in which a specific effect is executed in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration effect can be changed depending on the type of the variable effect (special symbol), and the interest of the game can be improved. becomes.

It should be noted that, in the specific game state, a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game is executed than when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed. In the gaming state, a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that expects execution of a jackpot game is executed. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect during execution is high, it may be reversed.

As a twenty-ninth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute the second action effect (decision success effect etc.) operated in the second mode, and the first variation effect of losing in the normal game state (variation display of the first special symbol ), the first action production can be executed, but in the first fluctuation production of losing in the specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states), the execution of the first action production is limited, and in the normal game state A second action effect can be executed in the first variation effect of the big win and the first variation effect of the big win in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to change the presence or absence of execution of the action presentation depending on whether or not the jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirtieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, it is possible to execute a lamp change effect that suggests the possibility of executing a jackpot game by lighting the winning entrance lamp in a predetermined manner, An action performance suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being executed by operating the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) during the execution of the variable performance (prediction motion performance, variable start time role announcement performance). can be executed, and during the execution of the first fluctuation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) of the loss in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the light emission effect and the operation effect, and the loss in the special time-saving game state During the execution of the 1-variation production, it is possible to limit the execution of the light emission production and the operation production. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a 31st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 2 modes (wining gate lamp blue light), 3rd mode (top lamp lighting), and 4th mode (winning gate lamp & top lamp off). It is possible to have the first mode and the second mode, and when executing the lighting effect at the time of winning, it is possible to set the lighting device to the third mode, and in the normal game state, the first variation effect (first The ratio of the lighting device to the fourth mode is higher when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the variable display of 1 special symbol is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The thirty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is operation effects (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect) that suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. , cut-in production, decision production, etc.) can be executed, and the first loss in the special time-saving game state is higher than the case where the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the 1-variation performance is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A thirty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state, and when the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving game state, the first vibration production The execution ratios are different (higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state than when the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the first vibration production Although the execution ratio is high, the opposite may be true.

As a thirty-fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state, and when the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving game state, the second vibration production The execution ratio is different (the execution ratio is high when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the regular game state than the case where the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving gaming state is the second vibration production. Although the execution ratio is high, the opposite may be true.

As a thirty-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state The execution ratio of the first vibration effect (mainly the vibration effect related to the determined effect) is different (the execution ratio is high when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In the case, the execution ratio of the first vibration effect (mainly the vibration effect related to the determined effect) is higher, but the opposite may be done.

A thirty-sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state The execution ratio of the second vibration effect (mainly the vibration effect related to the fixed effect) is different (the execution ratio is high when the second fluctuation effect is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In the case, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect (mainly the vibration effect related to the fixed effect) is higher, but the opposite may be done.

A thirty-seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. It is possible to execute the second action effect (decision success effect etc.) operated in the second mode, and the second variation effect of the jackpot in the normal time-saving game state (variation of the second special symbol display) and the first variation effect of the jackpot in the special time-saving game state, the second action effect can be executed, and the second variation effect of the loss in the normal time-saving game state (variation display of the second special symbol) Although the first action production can be executed, the execution of the first action production is limited in the first variation production of losing in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to change the presence or absence of execution of the action presentation depending on whether or not the jackpot is won, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirty-eighth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state The execution ratio of the first vibration production is different (the execution ratio is high when the second fluctuation production is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is higher in the case, the opposite may be done.

As a thirty-ninth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state The execution ratio of the second vibration production is different (the execution ratio is high when the second fluctuation production is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is higher in the case, the opposite may be done.

As a fortieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, operation effects (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut Vibration effect related to in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating the effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) Including, the execution ratio of the vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration presentation according to the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a forty-first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effect related to in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating the effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) Including, the execution ratio of the vibration production that does not generate the effective period in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (normal game state high execution rate). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration presentation according to the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the vibration production that does not generate the effective period in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is higher in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. , and vice versa.

A forty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that an operation effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut Vibration effect related to in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating the effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) , and the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the vibration effect can vibrate the effect button 17 in different modes. Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the effect of the vibration performance. can be improved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a forty-third feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effect related to in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 without generating the effective period (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) For example, when the vibration effect is executed while operating means such as the cross key 19, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if the vibrating performance is executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 17, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player does not notice, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a forty-fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. During a normal game state, including a vibration performance related to an in performance, a decision performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a vibration performance (prefetch vibration performance) for vibrating the performance button 17 without generating an effective period according to the look-ahead result. When the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed is executed, the ratio of executing the vibration performance is higher before the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation even before execution of the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating a valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) When the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state; In the case where the first variable production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the variable production (until the first temporary stop) is different (normal The execution ratio when the first variable effect is executed in the game state is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the first variable production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state), the fluctuation Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is high in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the effect, the opposite may be the case.

As a forty-sixth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) When the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state; In the case where the second fluctuation production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state), the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) is different (normal The execution ratio when the first variable effect is executed in the game state is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state is better than the case where the second fluctuation production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variation gaming state) , the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is high in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect, but it may be reversed.

A forty-seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) When the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first game performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state; In the case where the first fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration production in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) is different (the first fluctuation in the normal game state The execution ratio is high when the production is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the first game effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, after the start of the variable effect Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) is high, the opposite may be true.

As a forty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) When the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state; In the case where the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) Different (higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect according to the game state and the type of the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state In this case, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher, but the opposite may be done.

As a forty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, the first vibration production and the second vibration production can be executed so that the production period does not overlap, and the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) When is executed and when the second fluctuation production is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) is different ( It is higher when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration effect during the second variable effect depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, than when the second variable production is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state) the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. However, although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is high in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect, the opposite may be done.

As a fiftieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating a valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including the case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. , In the case where the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration performance during the second fluctuation performance depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In the case, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher, but the opposite may be done.

As a fifty-first feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, it is possible to execute the first vibration production and the second vibration production so that the production period does not overlap, and the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal time reduction game state (or probability variable game state) is executed, and when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), a predetermined period after the start of the variation production (first Until the temporary stop), the execution ratio of the second vibration production is different (higher when the second fluctuation production is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state), the performance related to the vibration production can be varied depending on the type of the variation production, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the second variation production ( In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the execution ratio of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher, but vice versa. You can make it

A fifty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) Including, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. , In the case where the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the second vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation production (until the first temporary stop) is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration production depending on the type of the fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is high in a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect, the opposite may be done.

A fifty-third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the performance button 17 is different between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance. It is possible to vibrate with Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration effect was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the vibration effect was performed. The production effect can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifty-fourth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating a valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different modes in the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. It's becoming Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish whether it is the first vibration performance or the second vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifty-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap. Vibration associated with the vibration presentation is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if the second vibration performance is executed in which the effective period of the performance button 17 does not occur, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player does not notice, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifty-sixth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.) and second vibration production (prefetch vibration production) executed without generating an effective period according to the look-ahead result, including the first vibration production. and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and when the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal game state is executed, the second vibration performance is performed before the ready-to-win performance rather than during the ready-to-win performance. The rate at which the vibration effect is executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation even before execution of the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effects related to cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects that are executed without generating an effective period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance period does not overlap, and the second vibration performance is performed during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state. The jackpot game is executed when the second vibration production is executed during the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) than when it is executed. Expectations are rising. Therefore, the expectation for the second vibration effect can be varied depending on the game state and the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a fifty-eighth feature relating to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration production related to) and the second vibration production (vibration production related to final production, pattern alignment, etc.) that is executed without generating an effective period, and the production period of the first vibration production and the second vibration production is It can be executed so as not to overlap, and during the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration production and the second vibration production can be executed, and the normal time saving game state ( Or probability variable gaming state) during the first variable production, the execution of the first vibration production is restricted, but the second vibration production can be executed, the initial vibration of the production button 17 after turning on the power, and the first vibration production , it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different modes. Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the effect of the vibration performance. can be improved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration production related to) and the second vibration production (vibration production related to confirmation production, pattern alignment, etc.) that is executed without generating an effective period, and the production period of the first vibration production and the second vibration production is It can be executed so as not to overlap, and during the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration production and the second vibration production can be executed, and the normal time saving game state ( Or probability variable gaming state) during the first variable production, the execution of the first vibration production is restricted, but the second vibration production can be executed, and the initial vibration of the production button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration production , the effect button 17 can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the vibration performance was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the effect of the vibration performance. can be improved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 60th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, vibration performance related to re-lottery performance) executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. , When the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variation gaming state), the second variation production in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variation gaming state) The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different from the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed (higher when the second variable effect is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance of the vibration performance depending on the type of the variable performance in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the probability variable gaming state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second variation production ( The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is higher when the second special symbol variation display) is executed, but the opposite may be the case.

As the 61st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variation gaming state), the second variation production in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variation gaming state) The execution ratio of the second vibration production is different from the case where the 2 special symbol fluctuation display is executed (higher when the second fluctuation production is executed). Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance of the vibration performance depending on the type of the variable performance in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the probability variable gaming state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the second variation production ( The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is higher when the second special symbol variation display) is executed, but the opposite may be the case.

As the 62nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state , the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is higher in the case, the opposite may be done.

As the 63rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, when the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state , the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second fluctuation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the second variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state than the first fluctuation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is higher in the case, the opposite may be done.

As the 64th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) than the first vibration performance. Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state), and the production button 17 is pressed between the initial vibration of the production button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration production. It is possible to vibrate in different modes. Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the first vibration effect was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the first vibration. The performance effect of the performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the 65th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), and the production button 17 is operated in the initial vibration of the production button 17 after power-on and the second vibration production. It is possible to vibrate in different modes. Therefore, the game clerk will not misunderstand that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration effect was performed (there was a fraudulent act such as turning on and off the power of the game machine), and the second vibration. The performance effect of the performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the 66th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, when the first vibration performance is executed in the big hit variation performance, the performance button 17 is in the first light emission mode (white light emission etc.) with a low expectation of the big win than when the second vibration performance is executed in the big win variation performance. It is easy to emit light. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 depending on the type of vibration effect and the degree of expectation for a big win, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 67th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. etc.), and the second vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state), and the first vibration production is executed than when the second vibration production is executed in the jackpot fluctuation production. In this case, the effect button 17 is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode (white light emission or the like) with a low expectation for a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 depending on the type of vibration effect and the degree of expectation for a big win, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 68th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Effective period related to pseudo-continuous effect) and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period. 2 When the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 can be executed, and the performance button 17 is vibrated in different modes depending on the initial vibration and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 after the power is turned on. is possible, and different operation sounds can be output when the performance button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the performance button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the presentation effect different between when the first valid period occurs and when the second valid period occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Effective period related to pseudo-continuous effect) and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period. When the performance button 17 is operated during one effective period, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 can be executed, and the performance button 17 is vibrated in different modes depending on the initial vibration and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 after turning on the power. is possible, and different operation sounds can be output when the performance button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the performance button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the presentation effect different between when the first valid period occurs and when the second valid period occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 70th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. Valid period related to pseudo-continuous effect) and second valid period (valid period related to development effect, fixed effect, etc.) that occurs at the second timing (during reach) after the first effective period, normal game State and the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) differ in the execution ratio of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period (normal game state is higher), during the first effective period and the number of vibrations in the vibration effect according to the operation during the second effective period are different (the number of vibrations in the vibration effect according to the operation during the second effective period is large). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect depending on the game state and the type of valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period in the normal gaming state than the execution ratio of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) Although the execution ratio of the vibration presentation corresponding to is higher, it may be reversed. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration effect corresponding to the operation during the second effective period is greater than the vibration frequency in the vibration effect corresponding to the operation during the first effective period, but the opposite is true. may

As a 71st feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. Valid period related to pseudo-continuous effect) and second valid period (valid period related to development effect, fixed effect, etc.) that occurs at the second timing (during reach) after the first effective period, normal game The execution ratio of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period is different between the state and the special time-saving game state (normal game state is higher), and the vibration according to the operation during the first effective period The number of vibrations in the effect is different from the number of vibrations in the vibration effect according to the operation during the second valid period (the number of vibrations according to the operation during the second valid period is greater). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect depending on the game state and the type of valid period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, than the execution ratio of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period in the special time-saving game state, the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first effective period in the normal game state Although the execution ratio is higher, it may be reversed. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration effect corresponding to the operation during the second effective period is greater than the vibration frequency in the vibration effect corresponding to the operation during the first effective period, but the opposite is true. may

As the 72nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the first variation production (first special symbol When the variable display of) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) is the first ratio (high), and the execution ratio of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second ratio ( high), and when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production is a ratio different from the first ratio (low rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, than the execution ratio of the first specific effect and the execution ratio of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, The execution ratio of the first specific effect and the execution ratio of the second specific effect when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state is higher You may make it

As the 73rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the first variation production (first special symbol When the variable display of) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) is the first ratio (high), and the execution ratio of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second ratio ( high), and when the first variable production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production is a different ratio from the first ratio (low ratio ), and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is a ratio (low ratio) different from the second ratio. Therefore, even in the first variable production after setting to the normal setting state, the production effect can be changed according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, than the execution ratio of the first specific effect and the execution ratio of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, The execution ratio of the first specific effect and the execution ratio of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time saving game state after setting to the normal setting state is higher You may make it

As the 74th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, specific effects (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and the second When the variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific production (for example, continuous notice production) is the first ratio (high) and the second specific production (for example, timer production) When the execution ratio is the second ratio (high) and the first variable production is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production is a ratio different from the first ratio (low rate), and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a different rate (lower rate) than the second rate. Therefore, even in the second variable production after setting to the normal setting state, the production effect can be changed according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state, than the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance , The execution ratio of the first specific production and the execution ratio of the second specific production when the first variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state You can make it higher.

The seventy-fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a specific effect (continuous advance notice effect, icon change effect, timer Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and the second When the variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific production (for example, continuous notice production) is the first ratio (high) and the second specific production (for example, timer production) When the execution ratio becomes the second ratio (high) and the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production is the first. It is a ratio (low ratio) different from 1 ratio, and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is a ratio (low ratio) different from the second ratio. Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific effect and the second specific when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or probability variable game state) after being set to the normal setting state Rather than the execution ratio of the production, the execution ratio of the first specific production and the second specific production when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after being set to the normal setting state The execution ratio may be higher.

The seventy-sixth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific effect (continuous advance notice effect, icon change effect, timer Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and a second variable production (second special When the variable display of symbols) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) is the first ratio (high) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second ratio. (High), and when the first variable production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production At a rate (low rate) different from the first rate, the execution rate of the second specific effect is set at a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific production when the second fluctuation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state is higher than the execution ratio of the second specific production. , The execution ratio of the first specific effect and the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state) after being set to the normal setting state may be made higher.

The seventy-seventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a specific effect (continuous advance notice effect, icon change effect, timer Production, etc.) can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) with different execution ratios, and the second When the variable production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution ratio of the first specific production (for example, continuous notice production) is the first ratio (high) and the second specific production (for example, timer production) When the execution ratio is the second ratio (high) and the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific production At a rate (low rate) different from the first rate, the execution rate of the second specific effect is set at a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the specific game state after being set to the normal setting state, the effect can be changed according to the type of the variable effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific effect when the second variable effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or probability variable gaming state) after being set to the normal setting state is the second specific Rather than the execution ratio of the production, the execution ratio of the first specific production and the second specific production when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state after being set to the normal setting state may be made higher.

As the 78th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. Vibration effect related to cut-in effect) is not executed, but a specific first vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, final effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 79th feature related to various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69, when the first variable effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the vibration production related to the re-lottery production (execution ratio of the variable production related to the re-lottery production) is different. Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to vary the performance related to the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The eightieth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an effective suggestive effect suggesting the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.). ) is not performed (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc.), and a second operation effect (advancement effect, cut-in notice effect) is performed with an effective suggestion effect that suggests the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 , determination performance, etc.), and the first variation performance of loss in the special time-saving game state is higher than the case where the first variation performance of loss (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state. is executed, the first operation effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The eighty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the vibration effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 during the effective period, the vibration effect is generated by operating the effect button 17 during the effective period. is not executed, the action effect of the movable effect member 73 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A specific operation performance is provided in which a predetermined performance is executed according to the operation during the effective period but the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed, and the performance button 17 during the valid period is more effective than the case where the specific operation performance is executed. If the first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) is executed in response to the operation, the effect is better It is preferable to facilitate the execution of an effective suggesting effect (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) that suggests the occurrence of the effective period of the button 17. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the first vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Proportion of advance notice restriction period)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the ratio of the notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the production modes A to C, and FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the ratio of the notice limit period related to the loss fluctuation effect of the production modes D to G. There is, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the ratio of the notice restriction period related to the loss variation effect in the effect mode H.

The "notice restriction period" means that the variable display of the production pattern 70a and/or the special pattern TZ and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, but the big hit notice effect (at the start of the fluctuation, the character notice effect, the dialog notice effect, the step Up notice effect, cut-in notice effect, fixed effect, etc.) is restricted (regulated), and the "notice period" refers to the above-described effect symbol 70a and / or the variable display of the special symbol TZ. The dynamic display of the background image is executed and it is a period during which there is a possibility that the jackpot announcement effect will be executed.

For example, in the variation production pattern 3, the first half of the normal fluctuation is the advance notice period, the latter half of the normal fluctuation and the normal reach production are the limit period, the ratio of the limit period in the fluctuation production is 70%, and the number of occurrences of the limit period. is 1 time.

It should be noted that, although the loss variation effect is illustrated here, the big hit variation pattern is basically the same because the final result of the variation effect and whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed are different. When compared with the loss fluctuation production that is the production configuration, the ratio between the notice period and the restriction period is the same.

As a first feature relating to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the notice limit period occupies more of the losing fluctuation production pattern in which the ready-to-win production is not executed than the losing fluctuation production pattern in which the ready-to-win production is executed. The point is that the ratio tends to increase. Therefore, the period during which the big win announcement effect can be executed changes according to the degree of expectation for the big win of the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature related to the notice limit period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the notice limit period occurs more in the loss fluctuation production pattern in which the ready-to-win production is not executed than in the loss fluctuation production pattern in which the ready-to-win production is executed. The point is that the number of times is likely to decrease. Therefore, the number of times the big win notice effect can be executed changes according to the degree of expectation of the big win of the variable effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature related to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state) Also, when the first special symbol loss variation display (first variation performance) is executed in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), the proportion of the notice restriction period tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the execution of the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As the fourth feature related to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state) Also, in the production mode H (special time-saving game state), the number of occurrences of the notice limit period tends to decrease when the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the execution of the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As the fifth feature relating to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state). , In the production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), when the first special symbol losing fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed, the execution ratio of the fluctuation production that will be the notice limit period over the entire period is different (special The point is that the execution ratio is high when the first variable effect is executed in the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first special symbol in the production mode H (special time-saving game state) than the case where the first special symbol losing variation display (first variation performance) is executed in the production modes A to C (normal game state) In the case where the losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the execution ratio of the variable effect that becomes the notice limit period over the entire period is high, but the opposite may be done.

As the sixth feature related to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state) Also, in the production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first special pattern loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed, it is easier to execute the fluctuation production that will be the notice limit period over the entire period. is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature relating to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the second special symbol loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in the production mode D to G (normal time reduction game state) Rather, in the case where the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state), the proportion of the notice limit period is likely to increase. . Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature relating to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the second special symbol loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in the production mode D to G (normal time reduction game state) Rather, in the production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), the number of occurrences of the notice limit period is likely to decrease in the case where the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the ninth feature related to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in the production mode D to G (normal time reduction game state) And, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first special symbol losing variation display (first variation production) is executed, the execution ratio of the fluctuation production that becomes the notice limit period over the entire period is different ( The point is that the execution ratio is high when the second variable effect is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the first special symbol in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state) than the case where the second special symbol losing variation display (second variation production) is executed in production mode D to G (normal time-saving gaming state) In the case where the loss variation display (first variation performance) is executed, the execution ratio of the variation performance that becomes the notice restriction period over the entire period is higher, but the opposite may be done.

As the tenth feature related to the notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, when the second special symbol losing fluctuation display (second fluctuation production) is executed in the production mode D to G (normal time reduction game state) In the case where the first special symbol loss variation display (first variation performance) is executed in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state), the proportion of the notice restriction period tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the variable performance is executed depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, in the production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), when the first special symbol losing fluctuation display (first fluctuation production) is executed, when it is a normal fluctuation production pattern (first number of reservations = 0) Although the length of the advance notice limit period differs between the case of the ultra-shortened variable effect pattern (first number of reservations = 1 to 3), the length of the notice limit period may be the same. In this case, on the premise that both the normal variable performance pattern and the super-shortened variable performance pattern are executed, the length of the advance notice limit period may be the same, and regardless of the number of first reservations, the normal variable performance pattern and the super-shortened performance pattern On the premise that only one of the variable production patterns is executed, the length of the notice restriction period may be the same.

(Types of vibration production for each production mode)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing types of vibration effects for each effect mode.

Vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) are seven types of vibration effects that occur during the valid period. , and there are five types of vibration effects that do not generate an effective period.
In addition, the vibrating effect that may be executed during the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) is the type of vibrating effect that occurs during the valid period. There are three types of vibration effects that do not have an effective period.

Vibration production that may be executed during the variable display (first variable production) of the first special symbol in production modes D to G (probability variable game state / normal time reduction game state) is the vibration production that occurs during the effective period There is one type, and there is one type of vibrating effect that does not generate an effective period.
In addition, the vibration effect that may be executed during the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol in the effect mode D to G (probability variable game state / normal time reduction game state) is the vibration that occurs during the effective period There are six types of effects, and there are four types of vibration effects that do not generate an effective period.

The vibrating performance that may be executed during the variable display (first variable performance) of the first special symbol in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state) has one type of vibration performance in which the valid period occurs. , and there is one type of vibration effect for which the valid period does not occur.
In addition, the vibration performance that may be executed during the variable display (second variable performance) of the second special symbol in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state) has four types of vibration performance that have an effective period. , and there are three types of vibration effects that do not occur during the valid period.

In addition, in the initial operation of the production button 17 executed when the game machine is powered on, the vibration operation of the production button 17 is 2.5 seconds of strong continuous vibration or 2.5 seconds of strong intermittent vibration. The vibrating mode (vibration time, vibration pattern, etc.) is different from the vibration operation (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 in which the effective period is generated and the vibration operation (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 in which the effective period is not generated. It's becoming

In this way, the type of vibration production that may be executed during the variable display (first variable production) of the first special symbol in the production mode D to G (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) does not occur The number of types of vibration effects that do not occur during the effective period that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) is larger than the number. ing. Therefore, it is possible to vary the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, than the number of types of vibration production that does not occur during the variable display (first fluctuation production) of the first special symbol in production mode H (special time-saving game state), production mode A The number of types of vibrating effects that do not occur during the effective period that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in ~C (normal game state) is increasing. The performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be made different depending on the type of performance mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol in the effect modes D to G (probability variable game state, time saving game state) does not occur Also, the number of types of vibration effects that do not occur during the effective period that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) is increasing. . It is possible to make the performance effect of executing the variable performance different depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol in the effect mode H (special time-saving game state) does not occur, the effect mode A The number of types of vibrating effects that do not occur during the effective period that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in ~C (normal game state) is increasing. It is possible to make the performance effect of executing the variable performance different depending on the performance mode and the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization (0 clear) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt ), etc., and permits all interrupts in step T3.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display device (first image display device 70, second Adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and an adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5 ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5). I do.

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch 22 can always be performed when the game machine 1 is in the power ON state (after the integrated control unit 141 is activated).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs the perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (first image display A process for adjusting the light quantity (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable performance and at the end of the variable performance (stop of the performance pattern 70a). . Also, during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.) (until the timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are regulated (restricted) even during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is returned to the volume before the decrease.

The supervising CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, it performs processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode for suppressing power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70 and second image display device 71).

In step T8, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether or not it has received an effect instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. If the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11, and if the performance instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a sets in the supervising RAM 141c a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). determine whether or not If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is set by the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing/display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). is set by the V blank interrupt processing which is executed each time the is received. Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, referring to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter updated by the V-blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. , the sound scene address is updated based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, this display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, and look-ahead effect) performed by the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. It is supposed to be the end timing.

In addition, effects directly controlled by the effect control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (suspension display by the sub first suspension display 83 and the second sub suspension display 84, effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operation) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) is performed.

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing for outputting various effects and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

Thus, at the start of the variable production and at the end of the variable production (stop of the production pattern 70a), the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment by the changeover switch 22 operable by the game clerk are possible, but the player can operate. Volume adjustment and light amount adjustment by the cross key 19 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During the notification (output of notification sound) of the door open error), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity with the switch 22 operable by the game clerk, but the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible with the cross key 19 operable by the player. are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light amount adjustment on the game parlor side while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light amount does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, during the output of the abnormality notification sound, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various effects sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various effect sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing an abnormality notification sound due to various effects sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that while the abnormality is being notified (output of the notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 that the player can operate may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and the light intensity value may be disabled. may be restricted between 0 and 2, for example.

(Accessory initial processing of lamp control section)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the character object initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed by the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the operation of returning various roles to the origin position and the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are not mixed, and it is possible to separate and check the return operation and the initial operation and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 75, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. Therefore, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp controller 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in lamp control unit 150 .

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the button driving motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position. +1 update the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin positions at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motions of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories never ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the returning motion of various accessories to the origin position and the initial motion of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separate and confirm the returning motion and initial motion of various accessories. .

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control section)
Initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of lamp control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 78) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of command at power ON and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information. do.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 79) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 77, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial action of various accessories, and to prevent obstruction of the production actions of various accessories during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete breakdown or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the recovery error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the recovery error has not occurred is executed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 77, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the production action, and it may occur that it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the production action. Gone.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth feature of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the return abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is turned off during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17, the vibration time of the vibration production executed during the fluctuation production Vibration effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during simulated continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Vibration effect during re-lottery effect, It is a different time from the vibration production at the time of confirmation production).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on executes an action that is not in the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the frame accessory (production button 17) is in the initial operation at the time of power on and at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

As a fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79, the number of light emitting colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As a seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial action of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. Therefore, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 83, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the settings has been described. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 A winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A still screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. The state is maintained, but the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 92 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 93 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 94 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a big hit effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 95 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed shot image MU is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (statically displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 94 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 92 to 95, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the performance symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the supply of power that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (the first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the board role can be performed after the player grasps the number of pending games (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. Therefore, the initial action of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the stop screen is displayed after the screen during recovery is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, when a special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110, a winning sound is generated. It is designed to output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by a return motion or an initial motion during execution of a variable effect.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has already finished, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has already finished, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the effect Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the effect Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 96, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a and a second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 93 to 95 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 97 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 93 to 95 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). It is basically the same as the example shown.

In FIGS. 96 and 97, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen in which the production pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed while the initial screen is being displayed. , and the production button LED is turned off. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning prize is received, the first reservation number in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display The first suspension icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. Therefore, compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable member has an abnormality.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and the abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 returns. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Modified example of accessory initial processing of lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 150. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as the role product initial process shown in FIG. 75, and the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. can be reduced.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery) When a designated command) is received, the return action of various characters and the initial action are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the power-on command was transmitted later than usual (abnormality occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110). can be grasped.

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is based on the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, and various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the effect button 17) are displayed after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery error in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. When the power is turned on, after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is effected. When the substrate 130 receives the signal, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 104 is based on the modified example of the character product initial processing shown in FIG. ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. .

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The first pending number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 , the winning sound "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 108 is based on the modification of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, and the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (variable display of loss) and with reserved memory. It is a figure which shows the example of a case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving the special figure pending number designation command (first special figure pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) as a power ON command, the image display device displays the screen during recovery. A state is maintained in which the second reserved number is not displayed in the one special figure reserved number display area 70E or the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static display state is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 109, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 109 to 110, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 111 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, assuming the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 109, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , And, the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the reserved icon or the icon output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 112 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 113 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and effect control board 130 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the main control board 110. FIG.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen of status is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device, and , "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the second special figure pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 114 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 99, and the variation effect is being executed after the origin return process and the initial action process are completed (main control board 110 and effect control 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 is displayed. output a stop sound. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this time's variable performance becomes a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a jackpot effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, a big win display mode is displayed to indicate that a big win has been made, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reservation number of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "0 ”, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has passed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the production pattern 70a are not performed. , the variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 115 is based on the modification of the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 99, and the process of returning to origin and the execution of the jackpot effect after the initial operation process is completed (main control board 110 and effect control FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted while power is being supplied to the board 130;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the big win effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special pattern TZ ("777") is displayed. is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 114 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the big hit effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first special figure reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special figure reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. Then, a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round number designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect is performed. A screen will appear.

Also, when a round number designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance is continued until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. The screen may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 112 to 115, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the processing load related to display control is reduced when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It becomes possible to

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the supply of power that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device. It is designed to be a display mode showing the number of reservations from when (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variation display and when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of pending games immediately after the game control state is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control related to the return operation of various character objects, and to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various character objects.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it can be distinguished from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return motion is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c and initialization of main RAM 110c are performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device ), the initial operation is performed. Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like Therefore, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the performance is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the stop screen is displayed after the screen during recovery is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power ON command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When the special figure reservation number designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is received from the main control board 110 when the performance control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the performance according to the command, winning It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is Therefore, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as the return operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. becomes possible

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as the return operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 responds to the command, such as the return operation of various roles and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 stops while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the production Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 116(a) will be described.
FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 116(b) will be described.
FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-insertion, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, the specific detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

In addition, when the first starting opening detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, the special figure determination information is acquired as the start winning prize is generated and the first special figure reservation number (U1) is increased, thereby special symbols (variation display of production design 70a, variation display of special design) may be executed.

(Concrete example when operating the operation unit while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 117, a specific example of operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when shifting to a customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effective suggestion effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the effective period may occur is not executed. Effective period during customer waiting during which operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (Because the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable production is started, it is can occur over a long period of time) is started.

At this time, in the lower right portion of the first image display device 70, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. FIG. Specifically, the first image (image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 17, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. and a third image suggesting that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (the left and right buttons are A light-colored image simulating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the menu image MG is displayed so as to be superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a without vibrating the effect button 17, and the menu image MG is displayed. is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model description" item for explaining the model, a "effect customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, a fixed effect, etc.), A "pachi log" item is set to manage the game history in cooperation with a mobile terminal (smartphone, etc.), and while the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, the currently unselected item is displayed in a dark color. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without vibrating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG. 117(c). Also, the sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18, as shown in FIG. 117(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 18.例文帳に追加Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guidance image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 117(f). .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the production button 17 related to various announcement effects (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, fixed effect, etc.) that occurs during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect is provided to vibrate the effect button 17 (by vibrating the effect button 17). (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 that is transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the performance button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot game), various advance notice effects (lines) that occur during the variable effect It can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, , Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the big winning performance, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, regarding the valid period while waiting for a customer, an effective suggesting effect (introduction effect) suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. It's like Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable production (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), the effective suggestive production (introduction production) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, during the effective period of customer waiting that can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 (display period of the operation prompting image) that occurs during the variable effect The effective period of the production button 17 (operation When the effect button 17 is operated during the promotion image display), the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialog advance notice effects, etc.). There is a valid period accompanied by the display of an image) and a relatively long second valid period (valid period accompanied by the display of an operation promotion image related to a determined effect, etc.), but the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect When the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the effect button 17 is more likely to be operated than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period during customer waiting, which can occur over a longer period. It is easy to execute the vibration presentation to vibrate. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Concrete example of performing production customization while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 118, a specific example of performing customization of effects (setting to normal setting or simple setting) by operating the operation unit (effect button 17, cross key 18) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the production button 17 is operated in the customer waiting state, the menu image MG is displayed on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed in front of the production pattern 70a. In the menu image MG, the above-mentioned "end", "description of model", "customization of effect", and "pachi log" are set as menu items, and the currently selected item is displayed in a bright color. Items that are not selected are displayed in a dark color, and the items can be selected with the cross key 19 .

After that, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated twice, the item "customization of effect" is selected as shown in FIG. 118(b). As shown in 118(c), effect customization is determined and the menu image MG changes to the effect customization image KG. In the production customization image KG, there is a "normal setting" where the appearance frequency of various productions (continuous notice production, icon change production, timer production, character notice at the start of fluctuation, etc.) is normal, and the appearance frequency of various productions is low. An item of "simple setting" is set, the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, the currently unselected item is displayed in dark color, and the item can be selected by a cross key 19.例文帳に追加

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated with the item "normal setting" selected, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed, the menu image MG is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 118(e).

In this way, by operating the production button 17 or cross key 19 while waiting for a customer, it is possible to set the appearance frequency of various productions (continuous advance notice production, icon change production, timer production, variable start announcement, etc.). customizable). As a result, the player can set his/her preference, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
119 to 121, a specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 119 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 120(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number and the non-animated increase display of the first pending icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated The output of the notification sound is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special symbol reservation number, and the change display (decrease display) by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon concerned be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "0 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first suspended icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display (preparation operation) of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the change display (decrease display) of the first pending icon starts. At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and Along with the icon TI, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the variable display in the center Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a state of being shaken) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the incremented display of the reserved number and the reserved icon by non-animation is the shortest 1 frame Since it ends in a period of minutes (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decrease display of the pending number and change display of the pending icon) so as not to delay, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update) timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the decrease display of the reserved number by non-animation, and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon by animation are executed Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the decrease display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the pending icon to the icon (frame update), special figure pending While directing that the number changes, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has been reduced by the reserved number, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of pending special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increasing display of the pending icon with non-animation, rather than the increasing display of the pending number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special figures, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon You may make it start the scrolling of the production|presentation design (update to the next production|presentation design) at the (frame update) timing of a little before completion.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
122 to 123, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described. FIG. 122 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 123(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the increase display by non-animation of the first special reservation number and the increase display by animation of the first reservation icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "0" to "1 , and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 to start enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures is increased, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increased display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can see that the number of reserved special figures has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of pending special figures will change. While directing that, the player can easily grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increased display of the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing of the end of the increased display of the pending icon (frame update), so special figure pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the suspended icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, while improving the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special figure pending has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be longer than the period of changing display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special figure pending number has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period for increasing display of the pending icon than the period for displaying the change of the pending icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the pending number increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 125(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first special pattern reservation number, the change display by the animation of the first reservation icon to the icon, and the first reservation icon Decrease display by animation starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "2" to "1 ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number is started, but since the change display of the first reservation icon and the decrease display are being executed, the increase display of the first reservation icon and the icon The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when generated, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the changing display and decreasing display of the first pending icon are ended. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(d), in the first image display device 70, the first suspended icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TI, the first pending icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display portion 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is finished and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special figures pending increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon and the decrease display of the pending icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, in order to start increasing the display of the pending number, the change display of the pending icon and the increase in the number of pending special figures even during the execution of the decreasing display can be made to recognize, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if the number of special pending icons increases during the execution of the change display of the pending icon to the icon, and the decreasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increased display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound ( limit), and at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started. can be prevented from becoming difficult to grasp, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

In addition, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start increasing the display of the pending icon and outputting the generated notification sound at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the changing display and the decreasing display of the pending icon. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the special figure pending number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, even if the number of special pending items increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, wait for the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound, just like during the change display or decrease display of the pending icon. On the other hand, the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific ready-to-win effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 127(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Movement to the upper left and reduced display are started, and the effect design 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display and icon generation of the first pending icon at this timing The generated notification sound, which is the time notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not a jackpot is achieved) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect symbol 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. is temporarily stopped at a combination ("555") indicating a big hit (becomes in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, right variable display area returns to the display mode composed of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of this specific effect ending (frame update), the number of pending numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (it was displayed in a reduced size At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the pending icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special pending number, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special pending numbers increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure hold number increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pending numbers increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), while executing the increasing display of the pending number, the execution of the increasing display of the pending icon is on standby (restricted) It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the special figure pending number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the pending number. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. Figure 128 is a timing chart that the number of pending increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, Figure 129 (a) ~ (f), and Figure 130 (g) ~ (i), Figure 128 (a) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(a), "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. ing. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable production) when the number of first special figure reservations (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special figure pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increased display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs The generated notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is from "1" to "2 , and the effect pattern 70a continues to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG darkens, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the return display by non-animation of the first reservation icon, and the increase by non-animation of the first reservation icon Display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and the second The second suspended icon display area 70D is hidden with the suspended icon, and the first suspended icon display area 70B is redisplayed with the suspended icon.

Furthermore, the reduction display (preparation operation) is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame timing (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, as shown in FIG. 130(h), in the first image display device 70, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect) after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon. At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the central variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first special figure pending number is displayed. Since it starts, the player can be made to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of the first special figure pending (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first pending icon at the timing when the specific game state (last variable effect in) ends (frame update). , even if you miss the increase display of the first special figure pending number executed before that, you can recognize that the number of the first special figure pending number has increased, and enjoy the game. can be improved.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special figure at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the change display of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern is displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling (update to the next performance pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of the first special figure reservation increases during the specific game state, while executing the increase display of the reservation number, the execution of the increase display of the reservation icon is waited (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

Further, when the number of the first special figure pending increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the first reserved icon display area 70B is set (displayed) in the normal game state, the second reserved icon display area 70D is not set (displayed), and in the specific game state, the first While the suspended icon display area 70B was not set (displayed), the second suspended icon display area 70B was set (displayed), but the second suspended icon display area 70D is set (displayed) in the normal game state. Alternatively, the first reserved icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) in the specific gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F were set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 , or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special figures pending according to the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the first variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 131, an example of effect when the player changes the effect element (here, volume value) during the first variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, but basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state (ordinary time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state).

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In this state, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. never.

From this state, when the first variation effect is started with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 0", but the pending icon is not shift-displayed (reduced display), the effect symbol 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value is changed to "4". BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to ".

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

In addition, instead of performing left-handed error notification due to the fact that one game ball has won in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls have won in the first start port 45 You may make it perform left-handed hitting error alerting|reporting by having done.

Furthermore, when the game ball wins the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9, and the second special figure reservation The number display area 70F becomes "1". Also, a pending icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70B.

Note that the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting hole 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is erased before the left-handed error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be erased before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 131(c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 131(d). The BGM that has been updated and is currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the number "379" is lost. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has passed, the first variation effect is completed, and the second variation effect is started with the start of the next variable display of the second special symbol, FIG. 131(f). , the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second pending icon (white icon) H21 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts the reduced display (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and the volume ( Effect element) continues to output BGM.

In this example, the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase the volume value, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. Basically the same applies to cases.

Also, when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the light amount value is displayed instead of the volume value image OG by operating the cross key 19 An image is displayed, and the operation is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, when the second variation performance is executed after the first variation performance in the specific game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variation performance, the background The image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM corresponding to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the effect mode after the change from the start of the next second variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the second variation performance is executed after the first variation performance in the normal game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the first variation performance, The background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the effect mode after the change from the start of the next second variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, by operating the various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in the specific game state, the second to be executed next It is possible to change the production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the variable production. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if the game ball wins the first start hole 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if the game ball wins the second starting hole 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound ( When the winning sound) is not output and a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, at the start of the first variable effect, the pending icon is not shift-displayed and the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed without being shift-displayed. .

(Example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 132, an example of effect when the player changes the effect element during the second variable effect in the specific game state will be described.
It should be noted that, here shows an example that has become a probability variable gaming state as a specific gaming state, basically the same when it is a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second reservation icon A pending icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the display area 70B. In addition, since the white icon is displayed even if the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific game state, no generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9 (a special icon is displayed If it is, the generated notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output).

When the second variation effect is started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 0", and the second suspended icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the second suspended icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts scrolling, and BGM is output from the audio output device 9 with a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the voice output device 9. never.

Further, left-handed error notification based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

In addition, instead of performing left-handed error notification due to the fact that one game ball has won in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls have won in the first start port 45 You may make it perform left-handed hitting error alerting|reporting by having done. Also, the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second start hole 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is erased before the left-handed error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be erased before the left-handed error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the effect button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value "4" is displayed. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is being displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is increased by +1 without vibrating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, as shown in FIG. 132(d). The BGM that has been updated and is currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to the volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and the confirmation sound is output with the volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the number "379" is lost. Also, the sound volume value image OG is erased according to the stop display of the production pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the second variation effect is completed, and the first variation effect is started along with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol, FIG. 132(f). , the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the pending icon is not performed, and the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed (preparation operation) At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the output of the BGM at the volume (effect element) corresponding to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variable effect continues. .

In this example, the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase the volume value, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. Basically the same applies to cases.

Also, when the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable effect in the specific game state to increase or decrease the light amount value, the light amount value is displayed instead of the volume value image OG by operating the cross key 19 An image is displayed, and the operation is basically the same except that the light amount of various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, the image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease of the light amount value.

Further, when the first variation performance is executed after the second variation performance in the specific game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variation performance, the background The image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM corresponding to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light quantity value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the changed effect mode from the start of the next first variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, even if the production mode is changed in the specific game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is not changed, but the display form of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

Also, when the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal game state, and the performance mode is changed by operating the performance button 17 during the second variable performance, The background image is changed to the background image corresponding to the changed effect mode, and the BGM is changed to the BGM according to the changed effect mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second fluctuation performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the sound volume value and the light quantity value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed in the changed effect mode from the start of the next first variable effect. good. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the production mode is changed, the display mode of the production pattern 70a is changed, but the display form of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, by operating the various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the second variation production in the specific game state, the first to be executed next It is possible to change the production elements (volume value, light amount value, production mode, etc.) used for the variable production. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if the game ball wins the first start opening 45 during the specific game state in which the first pending icon is not displayed, the generated notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by outputting only the generated notification sound even though the first pending icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, when the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generated notification sound ( When the winning sound) is not output and a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of the special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in the specific game state in which the game balls are likely to enter the second start hole 47, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, at the start of the first variable effect, the pending icon is not shift-displayed and the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed without being shift-displayed. .

(Example of effect when look-ahead motion effect and step-up notice effect are executed)
133 and 134, an example of effect when the look-ahead motion effect and the step-up notice effect are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first effect of the look-ahead action effect over three times of variable effects is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the figure) to be the announcement target of the look-ahead operation effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. After the (preparation operation) is completed, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first rendering of the look-ahead operation rendering is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 133(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stopped-displayed with a losing number of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production design has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a weak advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, performs a weak motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion effect sound. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for the advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. After that, the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second rendering of the look-ahead motion rendering ends. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 134(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead operation production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third effect of the look-ahead motion effect is started. Specifically, as a strong advance notice of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion effect sound. be done.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed, and the normal size scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. Then, the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 134(j), the first step effect of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Further, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is displayed. is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output when the game board decoration LED is played, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) and the lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued.

After 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 134(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and 2 seconds later, the fifth step effect ends. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the number of reservations displayed in the special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation ) and before starting the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a, the look-ahead operation production (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the look-ahead action performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest degree of expectation. It's supposed to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the execution period (1 seconds) are shorter. Therefore, the appearance of the fifth step presentation is not overwhelmed by the vibration presentation, and the presentation effect of the step-up notice presentation can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image ( The effect sound when displaying the opaque effect button image, the gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, movable member operating effect sound, etc.) are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, even during the vibration production of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change production are continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined manner (for confirming the big hit) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color which is the luminescence color, and in a luminescence mode different from the luminescence mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking or yellow blinking. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp that the vibration effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Production example when anticipation vibration production and dialog announcement production are executed)
135 and 136, a description will be given of an effect example when the look-ahead vibration effect and the speech announcement effect are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the fluctuation production (equivalent to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. One holding icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance over the three fluctuation performances is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon (the left end in the figure) to be notified of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a blue icon, as shown in FIG. (Preparation operation) is completed and scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in normal size is started, then the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the look-ahead vibration performance is completed. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 135(d), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "365", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the next fluctuation production (corresponding to the advance fluctuation) is started, as shown in FIG. to "1", the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the second look-ahead vibration effect is started. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 weakly vibrates for one second and the effect button 17 blinks white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) is displayed. Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon targeted for advance notice of the anticipatory vibration effect changes to a red icon, as shown in FIG. Upon completion, scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, after which the weak vibration and white blinking of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the second effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Also, the prize winning entrance lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp changing effect is continued.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(g), the performance symbol 70a is stop-displayed with a loss of "635", and the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed with a loss of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production pattern has passed and the fluctuation production (corresponding to the fluctuation) to be the notice target of the look-ahead vibration production is started, as shown in FIG. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

At this timing, the third production of the look-ahead vibration production is started. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead vibration effect, the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for three seconds, and the effect button 17 flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration is not accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque production button image, gauge image) Although the effect sound (sound effect) is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is completed and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started. The strong notice of will continue. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the effect button 17 are stopped, and the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the third effect of the look-ahead vibration effect is completed, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW. A display sound effect is output and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period elapses, as shown in FIG. , a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the production button 17 is turned off, a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second. The lamp change production continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 136(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo-continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed, an SP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed, and an SPSP reach performance is executed after the normal reach performance is executed. It will be executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, after the number of reservations displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (production pattern 70a is the preparation operation is started) and before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation), the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production and before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the anticipatory vibration effect (Vibration of production button 17, blinking in white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed while notifying the player of the start of the variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

135 and 136, when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is flashed in white although the effective period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the read-ahead vibration performance is being executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the look-ahead vibration production is a forewarning effect accompanied by an effective period (dialogue forewarning effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect). It is different from the light emitting mode of the effect button 17 during the valid period in the effect, final effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the effective period of the effect button 17 has occurred in the look-ahead vibration effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reach forewarning effects (words forewarning effect, step-up forewarning effect) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the read-ahead vibration performance, which is difficult to judge visually, is being executed due to the pre-reach announcement performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pseudo-continuous production is not executed until the look-ahead vibration production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it is difficult to notice that the look-ahead vibration effect which is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the dialogue advance notice production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue advance notice production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue foretelling effect without vibrating the appearance of the dialogue foretelling effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration production executed during the look-ahead vibration production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound when the production button image, gauge image) is displayed and the production sound (operation effect sound, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) button images, gauge images), and effect sounds (operation effect sounds, dialogue voices, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the speech announcement production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, even during the vibration production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission and the lamp change production by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are continued. there is Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as pausing the performance light emission or the lamp change performance by the vibration performance accompanying the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect executed at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 attracts attention by the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emission toward the effect button 17). You may make it perform production light emission.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed before reach production)
With reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of an effect example in which a pseudo-continuous effect (a staged effect associated with the pseudo-continuous effect without straddling the ready-to-win effect) is executed before the ready-to-win effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle region, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur, and the pseudo continuous success effect is started. More specifically, an inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the fanning production ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle region, and a success effect sound is output, as shown in FIG. 137(b). Further, as shown in FIG. 137(c), the second movable member 74 emits light in blue, and performs a weak action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (that the stage of production has progressed) is displayed in blue. In addition, the first stage effect (movie of the first episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 137(d), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continued in the middle area, and a pseudo-flashing effect is executed to agitate whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed and operated. A display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. . In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 137(f), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red. In addition, the second stage effect (movie of the second episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when the strong action time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 elapses, the simulated continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and the normal ready-to-win performance is executed, after that, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or the SP ready-to-win performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is executed. It will be.

(Production example when pseudo-continuous production is executed after reach production)
With reference to FIG. 138, a description will be given of an effect example in which a pseudo-continuous effect (a staged effect associated with the pseudo-continuous effect straddling the ready-to-win effect) is executed after the ready-to-win effect. Note that FIGS. 138(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 137(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted here.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 138(c), as shown in FIG. 138(d), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to prompt whether or not the pseudo-symbol suggesting execution of the pseudo-continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle area. At this time, an effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 17 emitting white light and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed and effected. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 138(f), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

When one second has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 138(g), the weak vibration of the production button 17 stops and the weak vibration production ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light, and performs a strong action to move toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the production pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo fluctuations (the stage of production progresses) "x3" indicating that the user has completed the task) is displayed in red. In addition, the second stage effect (movie of the second episode of the story) among the stage effects executed along with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 138(h), the production pattern 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win production is executed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

137 and 138, it is possible to execute the vibration effect when executing the pseudo continuous effect accompanied by the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

137 and 138, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive success effect is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success effect. It's getting shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo consecutive success presentation without the vibrating presentation being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

137 and 138, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

137 and 138, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect, the type of the effect symbol forming the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is the pseudo-continuous effect. Downgrading from the type of production pattern that formed the reach state before execution (downgrading from reach with odd-numbered patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns, reach with "7" patterns to reach with even-numbered patterns or odd-numbered patterns other than "7" downgrade). Therefore, the player will not be dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, even during the vibration production involving the effective period of the production button 17, the production light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the variable production in which the pseudo-continuous production is executed, the production can progress step by step with the pseudo-continuous (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the production pattern 70a). It is possible to perform a staged production (playback of the story 1st to 3rd story movies). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, there are cases where the staged production is started before the pseudo-run is performed, and where the stepped production is started after the pseudo-run is performed. It's like As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed after the staged effect has been started, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the effect button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the luminescence color for confirming the big win), throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the production button 17 is generated during the pseudo-continuous production, and the vibration production of the production button 17 is executed. The vibration performance may be executed, or the effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but the vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SP development effect is started, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP reach effect, SP development pattern suggesting development to SP reach effect, pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of and a scrap symbol suggesting that the performance does not develop (is lost), are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and scrap symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139(d), it is notified that the SP developing pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area and the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. In addition, in the roulette effect, the type of special effect symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the variability pattern, so the special effect symbols that are variably displayed (final special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped and special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (expectation for a jackpot).

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The display is reduced in the corner and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. Note that the icon is hidden with the start of the SP ready-to-win effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP ready-to-win production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 140, a description will be given of an effect example when the development effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "5" temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SPSP development production is started, SP development pattern suggesting development to SP reach production, SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP reach production, full rotation reach. A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols such as full-rotation symbols suggesting development to performance are variably displayed in an oblique direction at a low speed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development pattern, the SPSP development pattern, and the all-rotation pattern are variably displayed at high speed, and there is a possibility that the operation of the production button 17 will be effective. An effective suggestion production is started to suggest that. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. It should be noted that the characters "long press" are displayed in the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is long pressed, the speed of the variable display of various developing patterns is slowed down step by step, and the time of the long push reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period elapses. Then, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. be done. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.

139 and 140, depending on the type of special effect symbols (finally not temporarily stopped special effect symbols, temporary stop special effect symbols) that are variably displayed in the roulette effect , suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a jackpot (degree of expectation for a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectations for the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, there are cases where the effective suggestive production is executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with a high degree of expectation for a big win is heightened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

139 and 140, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without vibrating presentation superior to the appearance of the development presentation. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

139 and 140, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image). image, gauge image, etc.) and a production sound (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

139 and 140, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production button 17 is not made to emit light in the vibration production executed during the development production, but the production button 17 is kept in a predetermined mode (other than the rainbow color that is the luminescence color for confirming the big win) over the execution period of the vibration production. , but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, for example, white flashing, yellow flashing, etc.).

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the development effect is performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated). 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect is variable).

In addition, the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated during the development performance and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but the vibration performance is not generated during the development performance. may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 17 may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when a cut-in production is executed during SP reach production and a big win is achieved)
141 and 142, a description will be given of an effect example in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 13 to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(a), the effect pattern 70a of the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 141(d). Specifically, a cut-in image with a red frame is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by a plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. is doing.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. An effect is performed as to whether the design 70a is stopped or the effect design 70a of "6" is stopped.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since then, as shown in FIG. 141(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state in which three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed for four seconds. Along with the start of a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) to vibrate, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since then, as shown in FIG. 142(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142(h), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 142(i), promotion failure effect is started. Specifically, three of the "5" production patterns 70a that have been displayed in reduced size are aligned (symbols are aligned), and are moved to the front side of the screen to be enlarged and displayed, and a non-promoted sound effect is output. The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the performance symbol 70a is in the normal size and temporarily stopped, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 142(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. If there are pending numbers, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When one second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. 142(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A right hitting image MU is displayed. Further, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of the variable effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts to FIG. 142(k) after FIG. 142(g) and the eye-catching effect is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the cut-in production, and in addition to the occurrence of the effective period, the expectation of the big win is high. This can be suggested to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the cut-in production execution period (3 seconds) and the vibration production execution period (3 seconds) executed during the cut-in production are the same. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, since the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a sound effect (operation effect sound, cut-in effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode that do not include characters are temporarily stopped (symbol alignment), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big win confirmation vibration performance) is executed over a period longer than the performance, the player can be effectively notified of the big win, and the amusement of the game is improved. It is possible to

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped (C pattern alignment), strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promoting image), so the display effect sound and the effective period when displaying the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) During operation of the production button 17, the production sound (operation effect sound, other effect sound, etc.) is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the big win is achieved as a result of executing the SP reach production, the vibration production is executed during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a to be the big hit, Vibration presentation is not executed during this stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

141 and 142, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 17, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the effect button 17 does not emit light in the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 is kept in a predetermined state (rainbow color, which is the emission color for confirming the big win), over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the above, but in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white flashing or yellow flashing.

Also, while the effective period relating to the cut-in effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue to emit effect light. Until elapses, part or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be extinguished, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SP ready-to-win production is executed, the production pattern 70a is actually stopped after the eye-catching production and the production pattern 70a are returned to the display mode including the character. When the result of the SP ready-to-win performance results in a loss, an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is actually stopped, and a big win is achieved. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed during the cut-in performance and the promotion success performance, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance during the cut-in performance and not to execute the vibration performance during the promotion success performance, Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration performance is executed when the big hit is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a with only numbers or when the big win is temporarily stopped by the production pattern 70a including characters, but the production pattern 70a with only numbers is executed. While the vibration performance is executed when the big win is temporarily stopped, the vibration performance may not be executed when the big win is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including the character, or vice versa, or only the numbers. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a and at the time of temporary stop of the big winning number by the production pattern 70a including the character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the cut-in effect, the winning entrance lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon). It is designed to emit light in different colors), but it may be designed to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 143 and 144, an effect example 1 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 20 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(a), three performance symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in reduced size in the upper left part of the screen to execute the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, since there is no customer waiting state, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP ready-to-win effect reaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. At the same time, the production button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 143(d), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(f), it is temporarily stopped in a state where three "5" production patterns 70a are aligned (symbol alignment), and a strong vibration production ( When the big hit determination vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After 4 seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. When one second elapses from there, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resumes the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144(g), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and moved in the depth direction to be displayed in a reduced size, and the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) is generated, An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque performance button image imitating a performance button 17 emitting red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of an effective period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(h), promotion success effect is started. Specifically, the three "7" production patterns 70a switched from the "5" production pattern 70a that was displayed in reduced size are moved to the front side of the screen and enlarged and displayed in a state in which three are aligned (symbols are aligned). , the promotion sound effect is output. In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds.

Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the strong vibration effect is completed after the effect pattern 70a is in a normal size and temporarily stopped, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit effect light (other than rainbow light emission). light emission mode) is resumed, and the production button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(j), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

When 1 second has passed from there, as shown in FIG. The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production and the jackpot is achieved)
Using FIGS. 145 and 146, an effect example 2 in the case where a big win is achieved by executing a determined effect during the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the variable effect pattern 16 will be described. Note that FIGS. 145(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 143(a) to (c), so description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state of FIG. 145(c) or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. A temporary stop effect is performed at , and a big hit is notified by the effect pattern 70a, but the strong vibration effect is not performed at this point. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the success effect and the strong vibration effect are completed, as shown in FIG. A blessing production is started to bless the big hit while the light emission continues. Then, when the blessing effect is completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 146(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting stop display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three production patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, as shown in FIG. Along with being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It emits rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, and the effect symbol 70a is stopped at "555". The symbol TZ is also permanently stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the sound effect when the operation promoting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed. The sound effect (sound effect) is not output. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the big win game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period of the determined effect, or when the effective period passes and the determined failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the second movable member 73 is turned off. A failure effect image is displayed on the one-image display device 70, and a failure effect sound is output. Furthermore, part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and after that, the three effect symbols are temporarily stopped by the reach-losing result (for example, "565"). When a predetermined period elapses thereafter, an eye-catching performance suggesting stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, and when the eye-catching performance ends, the performance pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special figure reservation number, the reservation icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is officially stopped with a reach-losing result, and the special symbol TZ is also fully-stopped with a reach-losing result.

Thus, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the final production, so that the effective period is generated and the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. Since there is a determined success performance, the performance effect of the determined performance can be effectively improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a decided success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the pattern matching and the first movable member 73 operates after the pattern matching. In the decided success effect, the period from the operation of the effect button 17 to the execution of the vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) during the valid period is different. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration from the beginning, or to give the player an exhilaration after stirring up the anxiety of the player, and it is possible to effectively improve the amusement of the game by the contrast effect. .

143 to 146, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the decided success effect and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration effect executed in the determined success effect. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effect when displaying the promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and effect sound when operating the effect button 17 during the valid period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, movable member operating sound effect, etc.) ) is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode not including characters are aligned (symbol alignment), the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration) is temporarily stopped. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when three production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are aligned (C pattern alignment), strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration) is temporarily stopped. production) is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (opening vibration production) executed at the time of temporary stop or the opening of the jackpot game with three production patterns 70a aligned is the production button 17 effective period (display of the operation prompting image), the display sound effect when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration performance that does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the decision success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the effective period related to the determined effect, but the effective period is determined by operating the effect button 17 immediately before or from the start of the effective period. Until the passage of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and in the case of executing a successful performance determined by the operation of the performance button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned into a rainbow. It may be made to emit light. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the decided success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, after the end of the blessing effect, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume the effect light emission, and the effect button 17 is turned off. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow light emission may be performed until the actual stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the performance button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed, the effect of returning the eye-catching effect or the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is actually stopped. When the result of the SPSP ready-to-win performance results in a loss, the eye-catching performance or the performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the performance pattern 70a is finally stopped, and the jackpot is obtained. Alternatively, the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without executing the eye-catching production or the production of returning the production pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the decision success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the decision success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the decision success performance, and the vibration performance may not be executed at the time of the promotion success performance, Conversely, the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance and the promotion success performance.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed at the time of a temporary stop of a big win due to the effect pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing effect or a temporary stop of the big win due to the effect pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance, and the vibration performance is executed at the time of temporary stop of the big winning eye by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. It may be set so that it may not be performed, or vice versa, and at the time of temporary stop of the big hit by the performance pattern 70a with only numbers after the blessing performance and the big win by the performance pattern 70a including the character after the eye-catching performance. Vibration performance may not be executed at the time of temporary stop of .

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (even during the final effect, the icon before the winning entrance lamp NR is hidden is displayed. It emits light in a color corresponding to the display mode), but it may be made to emit light and extinguish in conjunction with the light emission mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Timer production and execution time)
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern will be described.

For the timer effect, as an event timer effect, there is a "pseudo-continuous timer effect" that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-continue, a "normal reach timer effect" that suggests the start of the normal reach effect, and a "SP reach" that suggests the start of the SP reach effect. Occurrence timer effect", "SPSP reach occurrence timer effect" suggesting the start of the SPSP reach effect, "Full rotation reach generation timer effect" suggesting the start of the full rotation reach effect, Suggesting the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 There is a "valid period occurrence timer effect" and a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that suggests that the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the case of variable effect patterns 7, 15, and 20, there is a possibility that three of the simulated continuous timer effect, normal reach timer effect, and SP reach timer effect will be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the case of variable production patterns 8, 16, and 21, four normal reach generation timer effects, SP reach generation timer effects, SPSP reach generation timer effects, and effective period generation timer effects are executed. There is a possibility that

In this case, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the SP reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Also, the effective period occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 147(c), in the case of variable production patterns 11 and 22, four effects of pseudo continuous timer effect, normal reach timer effect, SPSP reach timer effect, valid period timer effect can be executed. have a nature.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Also, the normal reach generation timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Also, the SPSP reach generation timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Also, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, an effect example in which two timer effects are executed during the variable effect will be described. Here, it is assumed that execution of the variation effect pattern 22, the pseudo-continuous timer effect (normal pattern 7), and the effective period generation timer effect (normal pattern 21) is determined in the normal game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach production is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo success effect, and a success effect sound is output. , the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect associated with the pseudo continuous effect is omitted in the drawing).

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the effect symbol 70a changes again, and "x3" indicating the number of pseudo-variations (that the stage of the effect progresses) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop effect sound is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. be done. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, the image display device 70 displays a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds left" as a normal display, and the subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen is whited out and the development effect is finished, and as shown in FIG. The SPSP reach effect is started. Note that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. At this time, the white character timer YTW becomes "33 seconds remaining", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, when the SPSP ready-to-win production reaches the final stage, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are assembled from four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white-character timer YTW becomes "two seconds left", which is the timer time during subtraction.

Then, after the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white character timer YTW reaches "0 seconds left", the effective period of the effect button 17 (single hit 5 seconds) is generated, and an opaque effect button image simulating a red light emitting effect button 17 projecting at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period. is displayed, the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 is in a projecting state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. 148(h), the decided success effect is started. Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. The game is temporarily stopped in a state in which three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and production buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Production example when a special SP reach production is executed in the second variation production in production mode A (normal game state) and becomes a big hit)
With reference to FIG. 149, a description will be given of an effect example in which a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) in the effect mode A (normal game state) to result in a big hit.

First, as shown in FIG. 149(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "635" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the effect mode is A (normal game state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. Change. Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(c), a development effect suggesting development to a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP ready-to-win effect ends, as shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect pattern 70a is permanently stopped at "555", and the special pattern TZ is also permanently stopped at "555", resulting in the second variation. The performance ends.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, when the game ball wins the first start port 45, the right hit error notification based on the right hit in the normal game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) carried out over the Specifically, a right-handed error image MUE suggesting that the game ball is to be shot toward the left side of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and the voice output device 9 says, "Please hit left." Right hitting error sound is output.

After the end of the second variation effect, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the opening effect of the jackpot game is started during the execution period of the right hitting error notification, and the right hitting image MU suggesting right hitting is displayed on the upper right of the screen. is displayed, a right hitting notification is performed, and a jackpot performance 1 is executed. At this time, the right hitting error image MUE is erased by the start of the right hitting notification, but the output of the right hitting error sound continues, and the output ends when a period shorter than the normal output period elapses. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

(Production example when a chance production is executed in the first variation production in the production mode G (specific game state) and becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 150, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the chance effect is executed in the first variation effect in the effect mode G (specific game state) to result in a big win.

First, as shown in FIG. 150(a), the image display device 70 is in a state in which the performance symbol 70a of "285" indicating a failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the production mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variation effect is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 150(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". Although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150(c), a character image of "Chance is approaching" is displayed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that it is a chance to execute a jackpot game. A chance production suggesting is executed.

Also, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the chance production was started, the big winning production is started as shown in FIG. 150(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Moreover, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

Then, when the jackpot acquisition effect is completed and the first movable member 73 returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 555", and the first variable effect is completed.

After the end of the first variation effect, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the opening effect of the big win game is started, and the big win effect 1 is executed. Incidentally, when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, the jackpot effect 2 is executed.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, in the specific game state, the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, and the second fluctuation production (second Variable display of special symbols) is executed, different aspects (whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific reach effect, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image , type of BGM, etc.), but the jackpot effect after the first variation effect in the specific game state and the jackpot effect after the second variation effect in the specific game state have a common aspect (background image, BGM , round effect image, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger, so that the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without bringing in extra thoughts. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

149 and 150, if a player hits right during the normal game state, a right hit error notification (display of a right hit error image HUE suggesting left hit) and "Please hit left" is displayed. ”) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if a jackpot game is started during the execution of the right-handed error notification, the right-handed error notification is continued while the right-handed error notification is continued. is set to run. Therefore, while making the player aware that the right hit during the normal game state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the right hit so as not to give the player a loss due to the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to improve interest.

149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started during the execution of the right-handed error notification, the display of the right-handed error image HUE is ended, but the message "Please hit left." ” continues to output the left-handed error sound. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started during execution of the right-handed error notification which is executed for a predetermined period, the left-handed error sound of "Please hit left" continues, but ends in a shorter time than usual (before the predetermined period elapses). Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and the case where the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed are different aspects. Effect can be executed by (whether or not prefetch effect is executed, whether or not various notice effects are executed, whether or not specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state The jackpot performance after the first variation performance and the jackpot performance after the second variation performance in the normal game state may be performed in a common mode (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of whether the first variation performance is the trigger or the second variation performance is the trigger during the big win performance, so that the player can enjoy the big win performance without bringing in extra thoughts. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production example when the variable mission production is executed during the jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 151, an example of an effect when a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether the variable probability game state is entered during the jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 151(a), when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the effect button 17 (opening vibration effect). ) is started, the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. After that, when one second elapses, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game starts.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game is started, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``Defeat the enemy and the odds change'' are displayed until the second round game is completed.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game is started, as shown in FIG. The variable mission production will start. Specifically, the text "destroy" is displayed, and an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (a part of the board lighting device) continues.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, a mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 in a state of emitting rainbow light, and the success effect image SEF is displayed on the first image display device 70 . At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, a strong vibration effect (elevated vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and part or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 151(e), the characters "defeat" indicating that the mission is successful are displayed, and the effect button 17 finishes emitting rainbow light, and a plurality of game boards are displayed. The effect light emission of the decoration LED is restarted, and when the third round game is completed, the characters of "defeat" are erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. At least 11 seconds from the start until 5 seconds have passed) occurs, and the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image of the production mode D and the option image of the production mode E are displayed, and as the operation prompting image, "Please select the mode in which the probability is changing with the cross key and press the button!" An opaque effect button image imitating the luminous effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the option image of the effect mode D is selected (the option image of the effect mode E is displayed in dark color). , the option image of the effect mode E is selected (the option image of the effect mode D is displayed in a dark color).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period elapses, as shown in FIG. It is informed that it becomes E, and the mode selection effect is completed. After that, when the 10th round game ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the variable probability game state is started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, left-handed error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the jackpot game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

When the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the failure effect sound is output. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed, and the ending effect is entered.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the mission success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the vibration effect is advantageous to the player, that is, that a variable probability state will occur, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 17, so the operation promoting image (opaque production button image, gauge image) ) is output, and a presentation sound (success sound effect) is output when the presentation button 17 is operated during the valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the execution period of the vibration production (elevation vibration production) executed at the time of mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151, even if the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection effect, the vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the selected production mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the non-selected production mode, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 151, it is possible to execute right-handed notification (display of right-handed hitting image MU) suggesting right-handed hitting during the jackpot game. When the game ball wins in the starting port 45, the right-hand shot notification (right-hand shot image MU display) is continued, and the left-hand shot error notification (left-hand shot error image HUE indicating right-hand shot is displayed). ”) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by urging the player who has hit the left hand to hit the right hand despite being notified of the right hand shot, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 151, the right hitting image MU displayed during the jackpot game and the left hitting error image HUE (right hitting notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap each other. there is As a result, the player can be urged to hit the ball to the right, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, while the valid period related to the probability variable mission effect is occurring, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are designed to continue the effect light emission. Until elapses, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are extinguished, and when executing the mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or the elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. Rainbow light may be emitted. In this way, the operation prompting image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be informed of the tense scene, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were designed to emit rainbow light during the mission success effect. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or while the first movable member 73 emits rainbow light, some or all of the effect button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. may

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start to emit rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start to emit rainbow light and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs. And the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started. may

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the mission success effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 17 is not operated) 3 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

Moreover, although the vibration presentation is executed at the time of the mission success presentation, the vibration presentation may not be performed at the time of the mission success presentation.

In addition, the right-handed image MU and the left-handed error image (right-handed notification image) are not dynamically displayed. may In this case, it is preferable not to synchronize the dynamic display cycles of the right-hand shot image MU and the left-hand shot error image (right-hand shot notification image).

(Example of opening effect and ending effect of jackpot game for each game state)
Using FIG. 152, an example of the opening effect and the ending effect of the jackpot game for each game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in the production mode A (normal game state), the first special symbol variation display (first variation production) is executed, and the first image display device 70 displays the production The symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the first reservation icon display area A first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are actually stopped at the big hit "444" and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG. When the opening effect is started, a right hitting image MU suggesting right hitting is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the first right hitting notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening effect is completed and the second half of the effect is started, as shown in FIG. is output and the second hitting to the right notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first hit) from the normal game state ends and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. Chance time entering" is displayed, and an alert notification for calling the player's attention is started. Specifically, a "forgetting to remove a card" message is used to warn the player of forgetting to remove a card (storage medium) that is inserted into a game medium lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1 and stores the valuable value owned by the player. A first warning image KG1 containing the words "Please be careful" and a second warning image KG2 containing the words "Please be careful not to become addicted to games" to warn against excessive addiction to games. is displayed.

After that, when the ending effect ends and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled to enter the effect mode F. Although the display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set on the screen, the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols is newly started while the right-handed image MU continues to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 152(e), in production mode G (normal time-saving gaming state), the remaining time-saving number of times (J2) becomes the 49th variation display (variation production) of the second special symbol is started. On the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward).

After that, when the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped at the big hit "444" and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG. ) is started, a right hitting image MU suggesting right hitting is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the first right hitting notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening effect is completed and the second half of the effect is started, as shown in FIG. is output and the second hitting to the right notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive game) from the normal time-saving game state ends and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. However, the ending effect progresses without execution of the warning notification for calling the player's attention.

After that, when the ending effect ends and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled to enter the effect mode F. Although the display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set on the screen, the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbols is newly started while the right-handed image MU continues to be displayed.

(Example of opening production and ending production of jackpot game during special time-saving game state)
Using FIG. 153, an example of the effect of the opening effect and the ending effect of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), in production mode H (special time-saving game state), the second special symbol variable display (second variable production) is executed, in the first image display device 70, The effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "1" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and in the second reservation icon display area 70B , four second reserved icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icons (white icons) are displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped at the jackpot appearance "444" and the stop time elapses, as shown in FIG. is started, a right-handed shot image MU suggesting a right-handed shot is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the first right-handed notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening effect is completed and the second half of the effect is started, as shown in FIG. is output and the second hitting to the right notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting hitting to the right is displayed, and a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first hit) from the special time-saving game state ends and the ending production is started, as shown in FIG. A character image of "Chance Time Rush" is displayed, and an alert notice to call the player's attention is started. Specifically, a "forgetting to remove a card" message is used to warn the player of forgetting to remove a card (storage medium) that is inserted into a game medium lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1 and stores the valuable value owned by the player. A first warning image KG1 containing the words "Please be careful" and a second warning image KG2 containing the words "Please be careful not to become addicted to games" to warn against excessive addiction to games. is displayed.

At this time, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, left-handed error notification based on the game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that a game ball is to be shot toward the right side area of the game area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a size larger than the right-handed image MU, and an audio output device. From 9, a left-handed error voice saying "Please hit the right hand" is output.

On the other hand, it is pre-determined that there is a jackpot game to be executed in the second reservation memory, and when the execution condition of the look-ahead reservation continuous effect for informing that effect is satisfied, FIG. 153 (e). , the look-ahead hold continuous effect is executed. Specifically, in parallel with the warning notification, the Renso character RC is displayed on the first image display device 70, and it is notified that a jackpot game is to be executed in the second reserved memory. be.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, when the jackpot game (so-called first hit) is executed during the normal game state, the specific game related to the end of the jackpot game It is possible to execute notification (alerting notification), and when a jackpot game (so-called consecutive game) is executed during the normal time-saving game state, specific notification (calling attention) related to the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game notification) is restricted (not executed), and when a jackpot game (so-called first hit) is executed during a special time-saving game state that is executed without going through a jackpot game, it is related to the end of the jackpot game. Then, it is possible to execute specific notification (notification for calling attention) related to the game. As a result, it is possible to execute a game-related alerting notification to the player to a necessary and sufficient degree, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, the probability variable mission production of whether or not the probability variable gaming state is entered during the jackpot game (the effective period is generated and the production button 17 during the effective period is operated) Although it is possible to execute the variable promotion effect in which the movable member operates, the execution of the variable mission effect (variable promotion effect) is restricted (not executed) during the execution of the alert notification. . Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the attention of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 152 to 153, it is possible to execute the alerting notification related to the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, but even during the execution of the alerting notification, the reserved storage It is possible to execute a look-ahead pending continuous effect that notifies (suggests) that a jackpot is included in the game. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player calm and to give them a sense of anticipation by alerting the player, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, it is possible to execute the alerting notification related to the game in relation to the end of the jackpot game. When a disadvantageous left-hand shot is made, a left-hand shot error notification suggesting a right-hand shot can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unnecessary losses, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed during a normal game state or a special time-saving game state, an alert notification is executed, but a specified amount (for example, 300) or more prize balls (balls out) It is also possible to execute attention-calling notification when a jackpot game that can be obtained is executed, and not to execute attention-calling notification when a jackpot game that cannot obtain a predetermined amount or more of prize balls is executed.

(Example of production when special time-saving gaming state occurs)
With reference to FIG. 154, an example of production when a special time-saving gaming state occurs will be described.

Here, the number of times of the special symbol loss fluctuation display executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) is 800 times (remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs It is assumed that the activation counter display that suggests the occurrence time of the special time-saving gaming state is performed from the time when the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times. Specifically, the notification logo LG including characters of "help time", which means a special time-saving gaming state, and a character image of "remaining ○○" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed.

In addition, it is assumed that a countdown effect suggesting that the special time-saving game state will occur from the time when the number of remaining fluctuations until the occurrence of the special time-saving game state reaches three times is performed. Specifically, a character image indicating the remaining number of times is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) each time the variable effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 154 (a), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation performance) is started, the number of remaining fluctuations until the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state is one, the production symbol 70a and the special The variable display of the symbol TZ is started, the number of the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the icon One of them is displayed as the icon TI in shift display toward the display area 70C. At this time, a character image of "1" is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and the number of remaining variations of the display of the activation counter becomes "1".

Then, when the variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol is started, the number of remaining variations until the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state is one, and as shown in FIG. 154(c), the effect symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B One of the icons TI is displayed by shifting toward the icon display area 70C. At this time, a character image of "0" is displayed as a countdown effect.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , the icon disappears and the number of remaining fluctuations of the activation counter display becomes "0".

When the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44 at this timing, the right hitting error notification based on the fact that the right hitting is performed in the normal game state is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-handed error image MUE suggesting that the game ball is to be shot toward the left side of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and the voice output device 9 says, "Please hit left." Right hitting error sound is output.

After that, when the special time-saving gaming state occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. A blackout effect for restricting visual recognition of the image is performed, and a right-handed shot is notified by displaying a right-handed shot image MU suggesting a right-handed shot at the upper right of the screen. At this time, the right hitting error image MUE is erased by the start of the right hitting notification, but the output of the right hitting error sound continues, and the output ends when a period shorter than the normal output period elapses.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. (Long rush effect or short rush effect) is executed. In addition, a right-hand shot image MU2 suggesting right-hand shot is displayed, and a right-hand shot is announced by outputting a voice saying "right shot".

Further, when the execution time of the rush effect has passed, the character image of "help time rush" is erased, and the background image of the effect mode H becomes visible. In addition, a band image of "help time" is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and a remaining number of times of reduction of time KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second number of times of reduction of time (J2) is displayed on the lower left of the screen as "remaining 799 times". .

Next, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stop-displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ” to stop display.

After that, when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 45, left-handed error notification based on left-handed hitting in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the right side of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and the voice output device 9 says, "Please hit right." Right hitting error sound is output.

In addition, instead of performing left-handed error notification due to the fact that one game ball has won in the first start port 45 in the specific game state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls have won in the first start port 45 You may make it perform left-handed hitting error alerting|reporting by having done. Also, the left-handed error notification may be ended at the timing when the game ball wins the second start hole 47. In this case, the left-handed error image HUE is erased before the left-handed error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed error sound may be erased before the left-handed error image HUE.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (here, 100 times), the activation counter display is started. . Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display (variable performance) of the special symbols until the transition to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is made up of numbers only and does not include unit display such as times or times. As a result, players are more likely to find out what these numbers mean, and by increasing opportunities to see machine model information, they are able to deepen their understanding of the game machine and increase their interest in gaming. can be improved.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the number of remaining fluctuations as the activation counter display is not at the start of the variable effect at which the big hit notice effect and the look-ahead effect are likely to be executed (started), but the start of the fluctuation. It is designed to be updated at the time of stop display of the production pattern that makes it difficult to execute (start) the big hit notice production and the look-ahead production than time. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is suggested to shift to the special time-saving gaming state from the variable display (fluctuation production) of the special symbol before the predetermined number of times (here, 3 times) before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state. A countdown effect is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute a rush production (long rush production or short rush production) when shifting to a special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize that the special time-saving game state has been entered, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the right-handed notification is performed along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol for the first time in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving game state can understand that he will hit to the right, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the rush production of the special time-saving game state is executed in a different production mode from the case of shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be notified of the occurrence of the time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state, and the player can be notified of the occurrence of the special time-saving game state in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, if the right shot is made during the normal game state, the right shot error notification (the display of the right shot error image MUE suggesting the left shot, the left shot of "please hit left") Output of hitting error sound) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but when a special time-saving game state is started during execution of right hitting error notification, right hitting notification is continued while right hitting error notification is continued. It is executable. Therefore, while making the player aware that the right hit during the normal game state is disadvantageous to the player, the right hit can be notified so as not to give the player a loss due to the start of the special time-saving game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the special time-saving game state is started during the execution of the right-handed error notification, the display of the right-handed error image MUE is ended, but "Please hit left". The output of the left-handed error sound continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without extremely obstructing the notification of hitting to the right.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, the number of images suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed image MU, right-handed hitting image MU2) is greater than the number of images suggesting left-handed hitting (right-handed error image MUE). is more common. Therefore, it is possible to make the player appropriately hit to the right, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 154, when the special time-saving game state is started during execution of the hitting to the right error notification, the display of the hitting to the right image MU2 ends after the display of the hitting to the right error image MUE ends. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to make the player appropriately hit to the right, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute right-handed notification (display of right-handed image MU) that suggests right-handed during special time-saving gaming state, but left-handed during special time-saving gaming state Then, when the game ball wins the first start hole 45, while the right hitting notification (display of right hitting image MU) continues, left hitting error notification (display of left hitting error image HUE suggesting right hitting, "right Please hit the left hand error voice output) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by urging the player who has hit the left hand to hit the right hand despite being notified of the right hand shot, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, so as not to overlap the right shot image MU that was displayed during the special time-saving game state and the left shot error image HUE (right shot notification image). It's becoming As a result, the player can be urged to hit the ball to the right, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although it is designed to generate a special time-saving game state in the same production mode regardless of the presence or absence of a big hit history, when a special time-saving game state is generated in a state with a big hit history, the special time-saving game state is The effect mode may be shifted to the countdown mode from a predetermined period before the occurrence (for example, when the variable display is performed 800 times after the predetermined condition is established). By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, regarding the countdown mode, while it is possible to shift in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs between the jackpot games, it is not possible to shift in the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs. good. If it does in this way, it can be grasped|ascertained before generation|occurence|production or after generation|occurrence|production of a special time-saving game state by whether countdown mode generate|occur|produces, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

Also, when the countdown mode can be generated, the change rate of the production mode is different between the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs and the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs ( In the normal game state before the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the change of the performance mode more likely to occur), and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state that occurred without a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 155, an example of the production when the special time-saving gaming state generated in the absence of the jackpot history is terminated will be described.

Here, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed such that the remaining second time saving number of times (J2) in the special time saving game state is "1" time, and the time saving remaining number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " 1 time left" is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and is displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol that the special time-saving gaming state ends (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The display is started, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are displayed in the icon display area 70C One of the icons TI is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, a character image of ``LAST'' is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance 5 times before the end of the special time-saving game state, and the remaining time-saving number image KG becomes ``remaining 0 times''.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the special symbol of loss is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. , the icon disappears and is displayed.

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 at this timing, left-handed error notification based on left-handed hitting in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed error image HUE suggesting that the game ball is shot toward the right side of the game area 5a is displayed at a position near the center of the screen, and the voice output device 9 says, "Please hit right." A left-handed error sound is output.

After that, when the special time-saving gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. output) is started. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the effect image corresponding to the effect mode H (background image, effect symbol 70a, icon display area 70C, third 2 reserved icon display area 70D and second reserved icon, etc.) is displayed, and the effect image corresponding to the effect mode A (background image, effect pattern image etc.) becomes visible. At this time, the left-handed error image HUE is erased by the start of the left-handed notification, but the output of the left-handed error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The display area 70B and the first reserved icon, etc.) become completely visible, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a becomes visible, and the characters "help time", which means a special time-saving gaming state. , and the character image "Remaining ???" indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations is unknown can be visually recognized.

After that, when the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is completed, the scroll display of the effect pattern 70a is started as shown in FIG. 155(f). Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses, the left-handed information ends.

In addition, different effects between the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs and the normal game state after the special time-saving game state ends (remaining fluctuation number “○○” and remaining fluctuation number “???”) can be executed, but the change rate of the production mode according to the progress of the game is the same.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, a predetermined number of times (here 5 times) before the end of the special time-saving gaming state from the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuation production) to the normal game state A suggestive countdown effect is to be executed. Therefore, the end time of the special time-saving gaming state can be clearly grasped, and the player's frustration about the end of the special time-saving gaming state can be aroused, and the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when left-handed during a special time-saving game state, left-handed error notification (display of left-handed error image HUE suggesting right-handed, "Please hit right" Left-handed error sound output) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if the normal game state is started while left-handed error notification is being performed, left-handed error notification is continued while left-handed error notification is performed. It's supposed to run. Therefore, while letting the player recognize that the left-handed hit during the special time-saving game state is disadvantageous to the player, the left-handed notice can be performed so as not to give the player a loss due to the start of the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 155, when the normal game state is started during the execution of the left-handed error notification, the display of the left-handed error image HUE is ended, but the message "please hit right" is displayed. The output of the right hitting error sound continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without extremely hindering the information of hitting to the left.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 155, when the normal game state is started during the execution of the left hitting error notification, the display of the left hitting image HU ends after the display of the left hitting error image HUE ends. It's like Therefore, the player can be made to hit left-handed properly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the information logo LG including the characters "help time" meaning the special time-saving gaming state and the rest The character image of "remaining ???" indicating that the number of fluctuations is unknown is visible, and it is suggested that the special time-saving gaming state has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suggest useful information to the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving gaming state that occurred in the absence of the jackpot history ends, the end notification production ("Help The display of the character image "time is over") is not executed, and when the game shifts to the normal game state, an effect (display of the background image of the effect mode A, etc.) that suggests the normal game state is executed. . Therefore, the special time-saving game state can be enjoyed to the end, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state that occurred with a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 156, an example of the effect when the special time-saving game state generated in the absence of the jackpot history is terminated will be described.

Here, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed such that the remaining second time saving number of times (J2) in the special time saving game state is "1" time, and the time saving remaining number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " 1 time left" is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and is displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol that the special time-saving gaming state ends (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The display is started, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are displayed in the icon display area 70C One of the icons TI is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, a character image of ``LAST'' is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance 5 times before the end of the special time-saving game state, and the remaining time-saving number image KG becomes ``remaining 0 times''. In addition, an end notification effect for notifying that the special time-saving game state is terminated is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed to close the door image TB that shields the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc., and a text image of "help time is over" is displayed in front of the door image TB.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the stop display of the special symbol of loss is performed, as shown in FIG. Stop with .

After that, when the special time-saving gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. be started. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second special symbol pending number display area changes from "3" to "2", and only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is displayed while the door image TB is closed. The variation production to be performed is started.

Then, when the change time of the second special symbol passes and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Stop display. After that, a variable performance is executed in which only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the end notification performance is continued until the second suspension disappears.

Next, when the change time of the second special symbol based on the last second hold has passed and the stop display is performed with the lost special symbol, as shown in FIG. stops at the losing roll "569".

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. Production pattern image, etc.) can be visually recognized. In addition, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production design 70a is started, and the variable display of the special design TZ is started, and the two reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are displayed in the icon display area 70C. , and one appears as the icon in question.

In addition, when there is a jackpot in the remaining second suspension when the special time-saving game state is terminated, it is notified that the revival performance is executed during the continuation of the end notification performance and the jackpot is achieved. It's like

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving gaming state generated in the absence of the jackpot history ends, and when the special time-saving gaming state generated in the state with the jackpot history ends , the effect mode (start timing of end notification effect, end timing, content of end notification effect, etc.) when the special time saving game state ends is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the special time-saving game state ends depending on the presence or absence of the history of big wins, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the presence or absence of a big hit history (whether or not RWM is cleared) can be inferred from the effect mode when the special time-saving game state ends, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, the fluctuation production (variation display of the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the remaining second suspension when the special time-saving game state ends while continuing the end notification production is inconspicuous. It's supposed to run like this: Therefore, when the end notification performance ends, the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is started, and the game can be played with a new feeling, and the interest in the game can be improved. becomes.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, if there is a jackpot in the remaining second holding when the special time-saving gaming state ends, the jackpot as a resurrection production in a state in which the end notification production continues It is reported that it will be Therefore, it is possible to make it look as if a jackpot has been won during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state ends, the left-handed notification (left-handed image HU) is immediately started regardless of the presence or absence of the second hold, but immediately regardless of the presence or absence of the second hold. Instead of starting left-handed notification, if there is no second reservation when the special time-saving game state ends, start left-handed notification immediately, and if there is a second reservation, respond to the second reservation You may make it start left-handed alerting|reporting after completion|finish of the variation production|presentation which was carried out.

(Example of effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
157 and 158, a description will be given of an effect example when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red icon to start the icon change effect, and along with this, the winning hole lamp NR flashes red from the state of being extinguished. By changing to the state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157(c), while the production pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 157(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 157(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 157(f).

After that, when the power supply to the game machine 1 is resumed, the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Loading" as shown in FIG. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed during the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win performance (including the execution period of the re-lottery performance to determine whether the temporarily stopped jackpot performance symbols are promoted to the jackpot performance symbols of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win production that becomes a loss ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing shaking fluctuation). , the variable performance ends without restarting the ramp change performance.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the square icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 158(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) that has been displayed is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. ``777'' jackpot effect pattern 70a that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing swing fluctuation/swing display) (formed the reach state before power off) A combination of production patterns different from the reach combination by the production patterns of 3 ↓ 3”), and a stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and a lamp change effect is displayed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 158(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed after the production design 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation) is restarted. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol stop designation command (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state is shifted to the customer waiting state after that, the customer waiting state designation command) is received, the production design 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation/swing display) of the production design 70a. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (static display) effect pattern by lottery. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance that has been performed has ended.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the control state of the game is the restoration of the power supply, and that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the jackpot variation performance.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern after the control state of the game is restored (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. Therefore, there is no need to be conscious of the jackpot performance symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variation production being executed at the time the power supply is stopped, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no useless effect is performed until the effect pattern is stopped (stationary display), the player is immediately notified that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variable effect. It is possible to grasp the

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the jackpot fluctuation production is stopped during the execution The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted. can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is being displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. Therefore, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable performance is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (extinguishing or white lighting) is set so as not to suggest the degree of winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 159 and FIG. 160 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable production that is the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the look-ahead effect effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (= red icon) is changed to a blue icon to start the pending icon change effect, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from an off state to a blue flashing state. A change production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 159(d), after the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss production pattern 70a of "259" and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that becomes the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 159(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the preliminary variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without performing, the stop screen in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the lamp change production is restarted without restarting. Fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon that is not the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) for the icon is secured in such a manner that the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 160(k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first 1 pending icon (white icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(l), the dialogue uttered by ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the dialogue from the audio output device 9, "Your chance has arrived!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 160 (n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 160(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. A jackpot performance pattern 70a of ``333'' suggesting the type of one jackpot game) and a special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance ends.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a is not displayed. , the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) is continued.

In addition, for those icons that have changed from the pending icon to the relevant icon after the restart of the power supply, a lottery regarding the icon change effect is conducted at the start of fluctuation, and if a lottery is won, the display mode of the relevant icon is changed according to the result. However, the lottery relating to the lamp change effect may not be newly executed, and the winning entrance lamp NR may be kept turned off so that the lamp change effect is not restarted.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the power supply stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration The continuous announcement effect is not restarted in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous announcement effect from being restarted in an incomplete state due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous advance notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, the special icon is displayed (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode). When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, the variation production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. FIG. 161 is a timing chart 1 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 162(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the changing BGM is being output is "2" in the non-animation for one frame. , the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TI. displayed as Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

The variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is represented by a double circle. It shall be. Also, the LED of the first sub-hold display 83 is represented by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from a very small size) in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (see FIG. 162(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 162(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 162(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 162(d)). .

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 162(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 162(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 162(f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 162(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 162 ( g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 162(h)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TI continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 162(i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 162(i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the customer waiting state (game waiting state) transition to When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (final stop), and the special symbols are displayed. TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp pattern LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (turning off) (see FIG. 162(j)).

At the timing of T7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. When the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the same as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive will be processed.

Here, although the specific example 1 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basically The flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communicating between the substrate 110 and the performance control substrate 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. FIG. 163 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 164(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (see FIG. 164(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 164(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 164(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 164(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 164(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 164(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone effect continues (see FIG. 164(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icon HI displayed third in the reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past fluctuation The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 164(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 164(h)).

When the redundant reserved icons are erased and the required reserved icons are shifted and displayed, the redundant reserved icons may be left as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 164(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special design in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" In (Target of expectation level suggestion by prefetch zone production), normal zone production (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is executed along with the notice scenario, and the production pattern 70a is the real one. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the point of stop.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 2 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 165. FIG. FIG. 163 is a timing chart 2 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 165(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 164 and FIG. 165 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the continuous notice effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so description of common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 165 ( d) see).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 165(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 165(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 165(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 165(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 165(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus pending icon HI displayed second in the pending icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is erased by one frame of non-animation. displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 165(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(h)).

Thereafter, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. to scroll. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 165(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the number of first special symbol reservations becomes "0" A look-ahead effect presentation (display of an effect image EF, output of an effect sound) and an icon change presentation (the icon change presentation) are also executed in the presentation (target of expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead preview presentation). Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

At the timing of T7 to T9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" was described, but the first special figure pending number is " 4" to "2", and when the first special figure reservation number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence from the pending number is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number, the surplus pending icon (for example, the third A necessary number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are shift-displayed without shift-displaying the pending icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of the pending icon (first pending information) that is two more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number of pending icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the specific number (for example, one) two more than the predetermined number ( For example, while displaying the number of reservations of 3), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without doing anything. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 167(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 1.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 167(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 167(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 167(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 167(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 167(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 167(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 167(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed at the second and third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production, is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 167(h)).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts to scroll after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 167(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 167(i)).

After that, when the production control section 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control section 110m, the look-ahead zone production ends when the production pattern 70a actually stops.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 4 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 168. FIG. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 168(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. This is production example 2.

Note that FIG. 167 and FIG. 168 are different in that the look-ahead effect rendering is executed instead of the look-ahead zone rendering as the continuous announcement rendering, and the icon change rendering is executed, so the description of the common parts is omitted here. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 168(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 168(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. Also, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 168(g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) is maintained without execution of the look-ahead effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended (see FIG. 168(g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) is changed from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The first and second surplus pending icon HIs displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the thirdly displayed pending icon HI is deleted for one frame. Appears first in non-animation. Further, all the performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance patterns 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display).

Then, the required one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed behind and below the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon change performance is executed simultaneously with the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is finished, and the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 168(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 4" to "1", that is, if the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 5 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first pending information), when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the special figure reservation number is a predetermined number, the predetermined number without displaying the reservation icon of the number one less than the specific number is now displayed with a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of the pending icon (first pending information) three more than the predetermined number (eg, one) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures pending is a predetermined number during the display of, the number of pending icons that is one less than the specified number is displayed without displaying the specified number. A number of pending icons less by two is displayed, followed by a predetermined number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) three more than the predetermined number ( For example, 4) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of special figures is a predetermined number, the number of reservations less than the specific number by 1 and 2 A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. FIG. 169 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 170(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) 1 special figure reservation number is changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames in the pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 170(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Also, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 170(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 170(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "4" to "3" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 170(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the third pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 170(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 170(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 170 ( g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The number of 1st special figure reservation which the part 130m memorize|stores (grasp) remains "3", and the process for starting a fluctuation production|presentation will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "0 , and a process of setting a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The surplus reserved icons HI displayed in the first to third positions in the reserved icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased by one frame of non-animation, and icon change effect and The look-ahead zone production ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). , The special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is finally stopped in a losing mode (lights out) (see FIG. 170(h)).

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m explained the case where the customer waiting state designation command was received in the state of "3", but the first special Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the figure pending number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 6 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 169 to 170, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the production patterns 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the production patterns 70a shifted from the stopped position are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. FIG. 171 is a timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 172(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

169 and 171 differ only in that the command received at the timing of T14 is the customer waiting designation command or the opening designation command, so the description of the common parts is omitted here, and the different Only part will be explained.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot A process for starting the opening effect of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. In addition, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined failure mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol LZ is permanently stopped in a failure mode (turned off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 172 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is finished (time saving game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m , The first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in non-animation for one frame.

At the timing of T7 to T13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m can receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m normally. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T14, the first special figure pending number that the effect control unit 130m memorizes (knows) explained the case where the opening designation command is received in a state of "3", but the first special figure pending Even when the opening specifying command is received with the number being "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 7 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 171 to 172, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) including the performance symbols 70a deviated from the existing stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is performed. An opening effect image is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. FIG. 173 is a timing chart 6 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 174(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 174(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 174 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 174 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second pending icon HI (white icon) in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 174(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 174 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 174 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (SP ready-to-win production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in the ready-to-win losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 174(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 174(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, A changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 174 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at winning, command at stop) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the command (a winning command, a stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where it cannot be received at this time is performed.

Here, at the timing of T5, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 0" to "0", if the first special figure reservation number is from "2" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "3" to "3", that is, the main control If the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the unit 110m and the number of reservations stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 8 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), the pending icons are shift-displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a predetermined number, the holding number of the predetermined number is not displayed. It is designed to display numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but during the display of the icon, the special figure pending number is "0" When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of The pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 to 174, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display to be "0", the number of reservations of "0" is displayed without displaying the number of reservations one more than "0" (for example, one) is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. FIG. 175 is a timing chart 7 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 176(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 176(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 176 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 176(c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol LZ is variably displayed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the look-ahead zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 176 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the first special figure reservation number becomes "3" from "1" and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first Suspended icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed for one frame in non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions in the suspended icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 176(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 176 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 176 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

In addition, at the timing of T2 to T6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stop, command at the time of start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the commands (the winning command, the stop command, the start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m ) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of T7, the case where the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is from "1" to "3" was described, but the first special figure reservation number is " 1" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "2", if the first special figure reservation number is from "0" to "1", that is, the main control If the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the unit 110m is greater than the number of suspensions stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above. .

Also, here, although the specific example 9 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state has been described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, during the display of a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icon (first pending information) in the pending icon display area, the special figure pending number is specified When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the number, after displaying the pending icon that is one larger than the specific number (for example, three) , a specific number of pending icons are displayed by shift-displaying those pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while displaying the number of reservations of a predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the figure holding number is a specific number (for example, 2) that is larger than the predetermined number, the holding number that is 1 more than the specific number (for example, 3) It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but during the display of the icon, the special figure pending number is a predetermined number ( For example, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is 1), after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), those pending icons are shifted By displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 to 176, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the special figure reservation number When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number is displayed without displaying the number of holds that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) It is designed to display the number of pending. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Summary of specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176)
As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the production design 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the fluctuation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ, and the output period of the BGM during fluctuation are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. ing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). It's like Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Even if there is, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined stop After all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the variable display is started. It is designed to Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the lamp design LZ is designed to continue variable display without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ. Further, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (immediately derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ can inform the player that the variable production is being performed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the start time command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the icon is displayed at the normal time. It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the start time command, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead preview effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m When normally receives the command at the time of start, in the newly executed variable effect, it is possible to execute the effect of contents according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. FIG. FIG. 177 is a timing chart 8 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 178(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending.

At this time, since the command at the time of winning that the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special that is displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The figure pending number remains "1", and the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (Fig. 178 (a) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first In the second of the reserved icon display areas 70B corresponding to the first special figure reserved number "2" which could not receive the command at the time of winning, the reserved icon HI is not displayed and the first special figure reserved number "3" ” is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 178(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 178(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable production when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "2" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" that could not receive the command at the time of winning in the pending icon display area 70B is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (normal size from the beginning ), and the three displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(e)).

After that, at the timing of T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 178(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 178(g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 178(h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, A changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 178 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change production ends.

At the timing of T2, the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. is not normally received by the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the same processing as in the case where the effect control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. will be taken.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first special figure reservation number is "3" When the winning command is received Although the case was explained, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m was "1", the first special figure reservation number was "4" When the winning command was received In the case, when the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "0", the first special figure reservation number is "2", "3", or "4" Winning Even when the hour command is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Also, here, although the specific example 10 when the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the command in the normal game state was described, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special design, the sub-first reservation indicator 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, each of the first start port 45, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special design, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure The reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47 may be read.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the holding icon (first holding information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the holding icon display areas. is not displayed, the number of special figures pending is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number. Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number (eg, second), the pending icon is displayed in an area (eg, third) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, a number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number. It is designed to display a certain number of pending counts without displaying them. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the holding icon (first holding information) is displayed in the area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the holding icon display areas. is not displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that has a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number of special figure reservations, a predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas The area corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display areas (e.g., the second) without displaying the reserved icon in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to one less than the specific number (e.g., the second) For example, the 4th) is designed to display a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, a number (eg, 1 ) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number to the specific number It is designed to display a specific number of holds without displaying one less number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas, and the reserved icon is displayed more than the predetermined number. While displaying the reserved icon in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) by one more, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, A specific number of reserved icons are additionally displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of reserved icon display areas, and then a predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed by shifting the reserved icons. It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 3) without displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number of special figures pending while displaying the pending icon in the area (e.g. 4th) corresponding to a specific number (e.g. 4) more than the predetermined number When the effect control unit 130m receives a start time command that is one less than the specific number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number After displaying a specific number of reserved icons by additionally displaying a reserved icon in the area corresponding to (for example, 3), the reserved icons are shifted to display a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. It is designed to display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 to 178, the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
163 and 179, a modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 163 and 164 (modification 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 179(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 164 and 179 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more has occurred, the look-ahead zone effect ends.

Specifically, the look-ahead zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output (see FIG. 179(h)).

In addition, the surplus reserved icon HI displayed second in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation, and the third reserved icon HI is displayed for one frame. is displayed second in the non-animation of All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 179). (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 179(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 179(i)).

(Modified example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
163 and 180, a modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 163 and 165 (modification 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 180(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 165 and 180 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "3" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original deviation of 1 However, since an abnormality that is a divergence of 2 or more occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead effect effect end.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted by one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 180(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 180(h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the suspended icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 180(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed for the variable display of the special symbols in which the first special figure reservation number becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), the pre-reading effect effect and the icon change effect are not executed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 179 to 180, the first special figure pending number and the first special figure pending number that the production control unit 130m was notified from the main control unit 110m If there is an inconsistency due to command abnormality (original deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but deviation of 2 or more in the decreasing direction) occurs, a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect , icon change effect, look-ahead effect effect) are terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
173 and 181, a modified example of specific example 8 described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174 (modified example 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 181(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 174 and 181 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored by the production control unit 130m (original 1 in the decreasing direction) The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are ended because there is a discrepancy (abnormality of the same number).

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first suspended icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second suspended icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation ( displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 181(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 181 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 181 ( f) see).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181(g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 181(h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of 1 special design is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first One pending icon HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181(i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so the icon is in a state of rotating (drawing operation) (Fig. 181 (j )reference).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 181, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m command If an inconsistency caused by an abnormality occurs (abnormality where the deviation is 1 but the number is the same), the pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect, pre-reading effect effect) is terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modification 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
175 and 182, a modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 175 and 176 (modification 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 182(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG.

Since FIGS. 176 and 182 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, explanations of common parts are omitted here, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol retention number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variation display of the pattern is started. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m remembers (knows) the first special figure reservation number becomes "3" from "1" and processing for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the main control Inconsistency due to command abnormality between the first special figure pending number notified from the unit 110m and the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m (original in the decreasing direction The icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated because there is a deviation of 1 from the value and an abnormality of 1 or more in the increasing direction.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to the white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (white icons) are one frame of non-animation. Additional display (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 182(e)).

Then, the required four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 182 ( e) see).

After that, at the timing of T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so that the suspended icon and the corresponding icon are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 182 ( f) see).

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 182, between the first special figure reservation number and the first special figure reservation number and the production control unit 130m that is notified from the main control unit 110m command In the event of an inconsistency caused by an abnormality (normally, a deviation of 1 in the direction of decrease, but a deviation of 1 or more in the direction of increase), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change production, look-ahead effect production) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the variable effect which is not the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect originally, and the decrease in the interest of the game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
177 and 183, a modification of the concrete example 10 described in FIGS. 177 and 178 (modification 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described. 183(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG.

178 and 183 have the same timing from T6 to T11, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the number of first special symbol reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". be. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m A process for starting the variable effect when the number of the first special figure reservations stored (grasped) changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shift-displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shift display of icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) It remains "1" without processing for updating the number of the first special figure pending (see Fig. 183 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command, prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp) The number of 1 special figure pending changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first A second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a non-animation of 1 frame, and a third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (gradually larger from a very small size). is displayed) (see FIG. 183(b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon HI and the icon TI are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 183(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is in a losing mode (extinguishing). (See FIG. 183(d)).

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the pending icon (first pending information) is displayed in an area (eg, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (eg, two) of the pending icon display areas. When not, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the number of reserved icons corresponds to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas. A pending icon is additionally displayed in a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the second) and a region corresponding to a specific number (eg, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When the production control unit 130m receives a prize winning command in which the number of reserved special figures is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number while the number of reservations is being displayed, the number of reservations of the predetermined number is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts instead of Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas. When, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning, which is a specific number (for example, four) of which the special figure pending number is more than a predetermined number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number of the pending icon display areas ( For example, the reserved icon is additionally displayed in areas corresponding to a specific number (for example, the 4th) from the 2nd). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E While the number of reservations is displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of winning that the special figure reservation number is a specific number (for example, 4) more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number is less than the specific number by one. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without displaying the number of pending counts. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, the icon change effect is displayed during display as the pending icon. is not executed, but an icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 184 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, the auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting to the right, or the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time-saving game state) before entering the normal game state Second start port 47 (movable member 48) When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as elimination of the ball biting generated in the part, the second special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m The number increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is due to the winning of the second starting port 47 during the normal game state. is not output (see FIG. 184(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 184(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 184(c), and the output of the BGM is maintained during fluctuation.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Loss variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 184(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ, which has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81, is stopped (turned off) in a failing manner (see FIG. 184(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 184(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the processing for ending the first fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit The second special figure pending number that 130m stores (grasp) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at "814" which is the same as the production pattern 70a. The second special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 185 is a timing chart 10 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shift-displayed (reduced display) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting to the right, or the auxiliary game executed during the specific game state (time-saving game state) before entering the normal game state Second start port 47 (movable member 48) When the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 for reasons such as elimination of the ball biting generated in the part, the second special figure reservation stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m The number increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the second special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the second start port 47 during the normal game state. is not output (see FIG. 185(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the first variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 185(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 185, and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 185(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Jackpot variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 185(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub second variation display 82. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 185(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is newly won based on the winning to the second start port 47 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol reservation number designation command as the signal at the start, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 185(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the first start port 45 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the number of the first special figure pending as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special design reservation number display area 70F The second special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (command abnormality occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the first variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image is displayed without being erased as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are terminated).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol variable display started after the end of the variable display is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the first variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the symbol variation display is received, the sub-first variation display 81 stops displaying the losing mode (extinguishing). Then, the second sub-variation display 82 does not stop displaying the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting). Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the second special symbols started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, the variation of the first special symbol during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the command when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 to 185, in the normal game state, the second special figure pending number displayed in the sub second pending indicator 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure pending number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F The second special figure pending number is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is lost. When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the first variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 11 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 186 is a timing chart 11 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, it becomes a normal game state from the specific game state (time saving game state), and the second special figure reservation number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state is from "1" to "0". , the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the second suspended icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the suspended icon from the second suspended icon display area 70D. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed (increasedly displayed) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70B1 of the suspended icon display area 70B, and the prize is won based on the prize this time because the prize is won to the first start port 45 during the normal game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 186(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 186(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production The processing to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 186, and accordingly the output of the BGM is maintained during fluctuation (see FIG. 186(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 186(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 186(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and is waiting for customers. It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 186(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the second fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit The first special figure pending number that 130m stores (grasp) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at the same "814" as the production pattern 70a. The first special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the first special symbols as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 187 is a timing chart 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, it becomes a normal game state from the specific game state (time saving game state), and the second special figure reservation number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state is from "1" to "0". , the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the second suspended icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the suspended icon from the second suspended icon display area 70D. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first start port 45. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed (increasedly displayed) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70B1 of the suspended icon display area 70B, and the prize is won based on the prize this time because the prize is won to the first start port 45 during the normal game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 187(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the second variable effect, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 187(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 187(c), and the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained accordingly.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The big hit variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 187(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the first sub-variation display 81. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 187(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is newly won based on the winning to the first start port 45 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (1st special figure pending number designation command as the signal at the start, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 187(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the second start port 47 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special design reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (command abnormality occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the second variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image is displayed without being erased as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are terminated).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation production started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the second variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation effect started corresponding to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the second variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the second special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the symbols, the sub-second variation display 82 stops displaying the losing mode (extinguishing). However, the first sub-variation display 81 is designed not to stop and display the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting). Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (turning off) to a big hit mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, the variation of the second special symbol during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol variable display is displayed, the first special symbol variable display stop command The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 to 187, in the normal game state, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The number of the first special figure pending is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player does not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the second variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot mode.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 188 is a timing chart 13 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 by hitting left, or during the normal game state before becoming a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) As the number of first special figure reservations stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as winning a game ball in the 1 start port 45, the first special symbol Loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, A process for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the pending icon from the first pending icon display area 70B. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation indicator 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A hold icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display portion 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output as a winning to the second start port 47 during the specific game state. (See FIG. 188(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 188(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained (see FIG. 188(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Loss variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 188(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ, which has been variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81, is stop-displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 188(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 188(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit 130m The number of the second special figure pending stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at "814" which is the same as the production pattern 70a. The second special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 189 is a timing chart 14 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 by hitting left, or during the normal game state before becoming a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) As the number of first special figure reservations stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as winning a game ball in the 1 start port 45, the first special symbol Loss variation display is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The processing for starting the first variation production when the number of first special figure reservations stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m becomes "0" from "1" is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shift display (reduction display) of the pending icon from the first pending icon display area 70B. It is displayed as a 10-frame animation. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47. . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the second special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of second special figure reservations being made changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation indicator 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A suspended icon HI is additionally displayed (increasedly displayed) in a normal addition manner in the first display portion 70D1 of the suspended icon display area 70D, and the winning is based on the winning of this time because it is the winning of the second starting port 47 during the specific game state. A sound is output (see FIG. 189(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 189(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. 189(c), and the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained accordingly.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2 Jackpot variation display of special symbols is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the second special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 189(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the sub first variation display 81 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub second variation display 82. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 189(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the second special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is newly won based on the winning to the second start port 47 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol reservation number designation command as the signal at the start, the special symbol designation command, the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 189(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the first start port 45 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the number of the first special figure pending as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special design reservation number display area 70F The second special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing for ending the variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and starting the opening production is performed.

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped losing mode and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI (normal icon, special icon) displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed. ) as non-animation for one frame, the opening image is displayed (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are finished).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol variable display started after the end of the variable display is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable effect is terminated by receiving the stop command, the first variable effect can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the first variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the first variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the second special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the symbol variation display, the sub first variation display 81 and the sub second variation display 82 In any case, the lamp pattern LZ of the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (extinguishing) to a big winning mode, and to terminate the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the second special symbols started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased at the timing of receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific game state, the variation of the first special symbol during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and during the display of the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the command when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific gaming state, the second special figure pending number displayed in the sub second pending indicator 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure pending number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub second pending display device 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F The second special figure pending number is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player will not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the second special figure pending number is not "0".

In addition, in the specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance started corresponding to the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lost after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the first variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot manner.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 19 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 190 is a timing chart 15 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Also, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shift-displayed (reduced display) as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the second lamp symbol LZ is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting to the left, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is It increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increase displayed), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state. is not output (see FIG. 190(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 190(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the first fluctuation production No termination process is performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 190(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Loss variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the first fluctuation production is not performed (Fig. 190(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variable display 82 is stop-displayed (turned off) in a failing mode (see FIG. 190(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special figure reservation number and the second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer It shifts to a waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0 ”.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-second reservation display device 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is reduced from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, waiting for customers It waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbols is newly started (see FIG. 190(f)).

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the state designation command can be normally received by the production control unit 130m, the process of ending the fluctuation production started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol at this timing is performed, and the production control unit 130m The number of the first special figure reservations that are stored (grasped) changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped at the same "814" as the production pattern 70a. The first special figure pending number displayed in the display area 70E is reduced from "1" to "0" in the specific update mode. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 20 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIG. The upper diagram in FIG. 191 is a timing chart 16 when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m in the specific game state, and FIGS. These are examples of effects corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at the timing of T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (second special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "1" to "0", and the process of starting the second fluctuation production is performed.

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed in the sub second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F while the fluctuating BGM is being output changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. In addition, the suspended icon HI displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is displayed as the icon TI in the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation with a shift display (reduced display). Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started. It is in the state of performing (directing action).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting to the left, so that the first special figure reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is It increases from '0' to '1'. When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as the winning signal, the look-ahead designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m stores (grasp ), the number of the first special figure pending is changed from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increase displayed), and the winning sound based on the current winning is the winning to the first start port 45 during the specific game state. is not output (see FIG. 191(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotating motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 191(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality occurs), the second fluctuation production is terminated No action is taken to make it work.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI are continuing, the periods of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ are extended. 191(c), and accordingly the output of the BGM during fluctuation is maintained.

After that, at the timing of T4, when the special symbol stop time passes, the first special symbol reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The big hit variation display of 1 special symbol is started. The production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special figure reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command as a start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing. If it is not possible (command abnormality occurs), the first special figure pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process of starting the variable production is not performed (Fig. 191 ( d) see).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the jackpot manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop time command (special figure stop command as a stop time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second started corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol A process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames regardless of whether the icon TI is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the performance symbol 70a in the temporarily stopped state of losing is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that has been variably displayed on the second sub-variation display 82 is stopped (turned off) in a losing mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the first sub-variation display 81. It will be in a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 191(e)). In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed with the second special symbol as the object of the change display of the loss, the continuous notice effect is finished at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the opening period of the jackpot game is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs processing for starting the opening effect.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and characters of "big win" is displayed. In addition, the first special figure reservation number "1" displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is newly won based on the winning to the first start port 45 The command (signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the command at the start based on the start of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (1st special figure pending number designation command as the signal at the start, special symbol designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives (see FIG. 191(f)).

In other words, a command at the time of winning based on the new winning to the second start port 47 (signal at the time of winning) and a command at the start based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special figure pending number as the signal at the start Designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) even when the production control unit 130m receives, it is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special design reservation number display area 70E The first special figure reservation number "1" is maintained.

At the timing of T3 and the timing of T4, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the supplied production command (command abnormality occurs), the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced. The same processing as when the control unit 130m cannot receive normally (a command error occurs) is performed.

Also, at the timing of T5, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, a process of ending the second variable production started corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing and starting the opening production is performed. .

Then, the effect symbol 70a in the losing mode temporarily stopped and the special symbol TZ that was displayed in a variable manner are not stopped and displayed, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is displayed as non-display for one frame. The opening image is displayed without being erased as an animation (substantially, effects other than the opening effect are terminated).

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation effect started corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the second variable performance ends at the timing of receiving the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation effect started corresponding to the second special symbol loss variation display, the second special symbol When the stop command (stop signal) of the first special symbol jackpot variation display started after the end of the variation display is received, the second variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a, special symbol TZ ) is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform processing such as switching the performance pattern from the losing mode to the big hit mode, and to end the second variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ started corresponding to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When receiving a stop time command (stop time signal) of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the symbol variation display, the sub first variation display 81 and the sub second variation display 82 In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lighting) is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to dispense with processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a losing mode (turning off) to a big hit mode, and to terminate the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) of the variable display of the first special symbol started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. Further, since the icon is erased by receiving the stop command, the icon can be erased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, during the display of the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol When the display stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol variable display is displayed, the first special symbol variable display stop command The icon is erased in the same manner as when the (stop signal) is received. Therefore, it is possible to naturally erase the icon without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 to 191, in the specific game state, the first special figure pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E When receiving a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special figure reservation number is "0" when it is not "0", it is displayed on the sub first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E The number of the first special figure pending is displayed to be reduced to "0". Therefore, the player does not have doubts that the variable performance is not executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance started corresponding to the big hit variation display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol started after the end of the variation display of the second special symbol When a variable display stop time command (stop time signal) is received, the second variable performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be terminated in a jackpot mode.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 192 . FIG. 192 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 192, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the central bottom side portion of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the production button device 16 .
The performance lever device 23 is provided on the central bottom surface side of the upper plate 11 so as to form the front and back of the performance button device 16, and the performance lever 24 that the player can pull toward the front side and the performance lever 24. and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

Since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations move the upper plate 11 to serve as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor for vibrating the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11.例文帳に追加In other words, when the player is operating one of the operation parts by hand, the other operation part is vibrated (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut When the vibration effect with/without the effective period of the operation unit related to the in effect, the final effect, the re-lottery effect, the final effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is designed to be

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4 that fulfill the function. Furthermore, when a lever vibration motor for vibrating the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4. - 特許庁

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 193, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. , and for reference, the effect configuration (effective suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) of each determined effect pattern is described.

"Valid suggestion effect" is an introduction effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. This is an effect in which the transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button image and the semi-transparent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the effective period of the final effect ends when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is operated once or 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the effective period column indicates the type of operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes effective.

The "promoting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (the effect button 17, the effect lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, the effective suggesting effect is not executed or the effective suggesting effect is executed. As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the operation sounds 1 to 4 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 that is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the above-described opaque effect button image. there is
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
“Protruding button rainbow” indicates that a button image simulating the effect button 17 in a projecting state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that an effect lever image simulating the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

"Operation unit state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the effective period. If it is the button 17, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the production button 17 emits white light. "Normal (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits light in red. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that if the target operating portion is the effect lever 24, it is in a normal state in which the effect lever 24 does not protrude, and the effect lever 24 emits light in rainbow colors. "Protrusion (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state, and the production button 17 emits light in red. “Protrusion (rainbow)” means that if the target operation unit is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state, and the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to confirm a big hit. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period elapses. Seconds)" means that the execution period of the effect related to the determined success effect in the effect mode other than the effect mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of the effect related to the determined success effect in the effect mode H is 6 seconds. showing.

"Failure" in the column of the determined effect mode means that the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color, thereby indicating that the jackpot game is not executed. is executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 operates to the maximum operating position and emits light in rainbow colors, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that the jackpot game is executed. It indicates that a successful production that is determined to suggest is executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button vibration is determined by the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17, and when the successful effect starts (=when the effect button 17 is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the column of button light emission means that the effect button LED for lighting the effect button 17 is determined from the start of the successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective period ends). It shows that the rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the effect button 17 strongly vibrates). Even if the operation target is the production lever 24, the production button 17 emits rainbow light.

The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is "normal button white" < "protruding button red" < "normal lever" < "protruding button rainbow" = "large lever rainbow". In addition, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in each operation unit state is "normal" < "protruding".

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. production) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the effective period is generated over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the player misses the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 vibrates over the longest period of time as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 . Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is finished, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a frame role-play initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-play (effect button 17, effect lever 24) in the second embodiment.

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 is greatly raised, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are continuously vibrated for 2.5 seconds, After that, the effect button 17 returns to the origin, and then the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 intermittently vibrate for 2.5 seconds (vibration of 1.25 seconds → interval of 1 second → vibration of 1.25 seconds). During this period, the production button 17 lights up (lights up) in order of red→green→blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is in the waiting state is received, and the effect button 17 rises greatly, and the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 After vibrating continuously for 2 seconds, the production button 17 returns to the origin, and the production button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2 seconds, the performance button 17 returns to the origin after that, and the performance button 17 goes out during that period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24, the vibration time (line Vibration effect during notice effect, Vibration effect during step-up notice effect, Vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, Vibration effect during development effect, Vibration effect during cut-in effect, Vibration effect during decision effect, Re-lottery effect Vibration production, vibration production at the time of confirmation production) It is a different time.

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17, production lever 24) have different operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of turning on the power does not have the initial action of the effect button 17 at the time of power restoration. The point is that it is designed to Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

As a third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

As the fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the game control state is initialized) or an initial operation by power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in Therefore, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). .

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

As the seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration effect during dialogue announcement, vibration effect during step-up announcement effect, vibration effect during pseudo continuous effect, vibration effect during development effect, vibration effect during cut-in effect, vibration effect during final effect) , Vibration effect at the time of re-lottery effect, Vibration effect at the time of fixed effect). Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is due to the initial operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 .

As the eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 in which the presence or absence of detection is performed. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously check the operation of the effect button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and the lever vibration motor, thereby shortening the time required for operation confirmation.

The effect lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the effect position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the effect button 17 during the initial operation. → It may be operated (moved, vibrated) by the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the effect lever 24 may be arranged at the normal position when the "normal lever" is used in the determined effect, and the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position when the "large lever" is used.

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the decided production, the production lever 24 is operated a plurality of times, for example, 5 seconds for consecutive pulls, etc., and each operation of the production lever 24 is performed. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) while the production progresses (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), a success production or a determined failure production may be executed. The production lever 24 is continuously operated during the operation of the production lever 24, and the production is progressed (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.) while the operation of the production lever 24 is continued, and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success effect or a determined failure effect may be executed.

In addition, during the effective period related to the development performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once or the performance lever 24 may be continuously pulled when the performance with high expectation for the big win is executed. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be extended (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive draws, the effect is advanced for each operation of the effect lever 24 (for example, the level gauge is raised, etc.), and when the number of times of operation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), the SPSP development effect and the pseudo consecutive success effect are executed. It is recommended that In addition, in the case of a long draw, while the operation of the production lever 24 continues, the production is progressed (for example, the level gauge is raised), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development production is performed. It is preferable to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect.

Further, when the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 are extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be weakly vibrated every time the effect progresses (the level gauge rises to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the effect button 17 includes weak vibration and strong vibration, and the vibration intensity of the effect lever 24 includes strong vibration. The strong vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the strong vibration of the production button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than the production lever 24.例文帳に追加

Also, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied according to the type of effective period (operation prompting image: single-press, long-press, repeated-press, long-pull, consecutive-pull). For example, a single press of the effect button 17 for 3 seconds during a serif announcement effect or a pseudo-continuous effect will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and a long press of the effect button 17 for 4 seconds during a development effect will be a weak vibration of 1 second, and cut. If the single hit of the production button 17 is 4 seconds during the in-stage production, the weak vibration is 3 seconds, and if the single push of the production button 17 is 5 seconds during the fixed production, the strong vibration is 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and the production during the development production is performed. If the long press of the lever 24 is 4 seconds, the strong vibration is 1 second,

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to a display mode (for example, red or rainbow) with high expectation of a big win, the effect button 17 and the effect lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the third embodiment, a starting winning device 430 having a first starting port 450 and a second starting port 470 is provided at the position where the first starting port 45 in the first embodiment was. The point of executing the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order of winning the first start port 450 or the second start port 470, and the reservation for displaying the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon The point having the icon display area 70B, and the advance determination of the special figure determination information based on the winning to the first start port 450 in the normal game state and the special figure determination information based on the winning to the second start port 470 It is different from the first embodiment in that determination is executed and a look-ahead foretelling effect is executed. Note that description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

(Configuration of starting prize device)
First, the configuration of the startup winning device 430 in the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 195, the starting prize winning device 43 has an internal space S with a ball entrance 440 at the top. Openings 440c and 440d are provided on both left and right sides of the central portion in the vertical direction of the internal space S to allow the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a. A port 450 and a first starting port detection switch 450a are provided, and a second starting port 470 and a second starting port detection switch 470a are provided at a position on the right side of the internal space S.

In addition, immediately below the ball entrance 440 and above the first start hole 450 and the second start hole 470, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball hole 440 is inserted into the first start hole 450 and the second start hole 470. A distribution member 440a for distributing and flowing down alternately is provided, and in the lower part of the internal space S, a discharge for discharging the game balls that have won the first start port 450 or the second start port 470 to the outside of the start winning device 43 An outlet 440d is provided.

The distributing member 440a has a substantially inverted T shape having an upright portion that rises upward from the left-right center of a flat plate portion that extends in the left-right direction. A right ball receiving portion is formed on the right side of the standing portion, and can swing in the left-right direction while the intersection portion of the flat plate portion and the standing portion is pivotally supported. In the right tilted state, the left ball receiving portion is positioned below the ball entrance 440, and when a game ball is received in the left ball receiving portion, the weight of the game ball transforms the left ball receiving portion into a left tilted state. While the game ball flows down toward the first starting port 450, the right ball receiving portion is positioned below the ball entrance 440 in the left inclined state, and when the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion, the game ball By changing the state of tilting to the right by the weight and making the game ball in the right ball receiving part flow down toward the second start port 470, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball entrance 440 is moved to the first start port 450 and the second start port. They are alternately distributed to the mouths 470 .

(Concrete example of when a left-handed game ball wins the starting hole in the normal game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a specific example of a case where a left-handed game ball enters a starting hole in a normal game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the normal game state, the second special symbol fluctuates in a state where "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70E. The display (second variable effect) is executed, the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B. Assume that the member 44a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 44 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a tilts to the left due to the weight of the game ball. work in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and the game After the ball enters the first start port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Further, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 44a is received. operates in the direction of tilting to the right by the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right inclined state, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and the game After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. operates in the direction of tilting to the left due to the weight of the game ball.

In addition, at this time, the variable production is completed (the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped) in response to the stop display of the second special symbol fluctuation display (second fluctuation production), and the icon display area 70C The displayed icon disappears and is displayed. Furthermore, the first special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "0" with the start of the next variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol, and the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B Shift display is performed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first start port 450, and the game After the ball enters the first start port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

(Specific example of when a game ball hit left in a specific game state wins a starting hole)
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a specific example of a case where a game ball struck left in a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) wins a starting hole will be described.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), in the state where "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70E in the specific game state, the second special symbol fluctuates. The display (second variable effect) is executed, the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B. Assume that the member 440a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 440 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a tilts to the left due to the weight of the game ball. work in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and the game After the ball enters the first start port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but the reserved icon display area 70B shows a reservation corresponding to the first special symbol because it is a specific game state. Icon is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. operates in the direction of tilting to the right by the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right inclined state, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and the game After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special figure reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Further, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. operates in the direction of tilting to the left due to the weight of the game ball.

In addition, at this time, the variable production is completed (the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped) in response to the stop display of the second special symbol fluctuation display (second fluctuation production), and the icon display area 70C The displayed icon disappears and is displayed. Furthermore, the first special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "0" with the start of the next variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol, but the pending displayed in the pending icon display area 70B The icon is not shift-displayed, and the variable performance is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and the game After the ball enters the first start port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special figure reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but the reserved icon display area 70B shows a reservation corresponding to the first special symbol because it is a specific game state. Icon is not displayed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 to 196, in the normal game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B. is displayed in the order of winning the first start opening and the second start opening, and in the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, and the second special symbol is displayed. The pending icon is now visible. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to easily grasp the number of times the variable performance is executed, while in the specific game state, it becomes easy to prompt the player to win the second start hole 47 by striking to the right, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 to 196, in the specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, but the first special symbol pending number display area and the display of the number of reservations on the sub-first reservation display 83 is updated. Therefore, even if a game ball wins the first start hole in the specific game state, the number of reserved balls can be grasped, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 to 196, in the normal game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the icon display area 70B. In the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the icon display area 70B, but the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in the normal game state, the game can be played without worrying about the type of the special symbol, while in the specific game state, it becomes easy to prompt the player to win the second start port 47 by striking to the right, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon are not displayed, but the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed and corresponds to the first special symbol. The icon may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the variable effect is executed without the icon being displayed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The special icon change effect determination processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing special icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m. It should be noted that the special icon change effect determination process is executed next to the win-time light emission effect execution process of the look-ahead effect process of the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E580-1. If the prefetch designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E580-2, and if the prefetch designation command has not been received, the current special icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E580-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E580-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which a special icon change effect (MAX pending chance effect, puzzle pending chance effect, which will be described later) can be executed. If it is during the special icon change effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E580-4, and if it is not during the special icon change effect executable period, the current special icon change effect determination process is terminated.

The ʻexecutable period of the special icon change effect` is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the normal icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided.

In step E580-4, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current total number of reservations is the upper limit of "8". If the total pending number is the upper limit "8", the process is moved to step E580-5, and if the total pending number is not the upper limit "8" (1 to 7), MAX The processing is shifted to step E580-8 assuming that the pending chance effect is not executed.

The "MAX pending chance effect" is an effect that can be executed when the total number of pending events reaches the upper limit of "8", and all the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are displayed in a special display mode. , and by changing the display mode to a normal display mode or a special display mode when the icon is displayed, the player expects that a big win game will be executed.

In step E580-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the MAX pending chance icon final mode determination table (Fig. 198 (a )). The details of the icon final mode determination table for the MAX holding chance will be described later.

In step E580-6, sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode of each pending icon by referring to the MAX pending chance icon final mode determination table. Then, the MAX pending chance effect execution command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current special icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the MAX pending chance effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the MAX pending chance effect is executed.

In step E580-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current sum of pending numbers is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4). If the total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5, the process is moved to step E580-9, and if the total number of reservations is not less than 2 and less than 5, it is assumed that the puzzle reservation chance presentation is not executed this time. end the special icon change effect determination process.

"Puzzle hold chance effect" is an effect that can be executed when the total number of holds is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4), and changes the target hold icon to a special display mode, This is a kind of look-ahead forewarning performance that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a step performance in response to the holding icon displayed in a special display mode becoming the icon.

In step E580-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current pending memory (the latest pending memory according to the prefetching designation command) is for executing the SP ready-to-win effect or above. If the SP reach effect or more is executed, the process is moved to step E580-10, and if the effect less than the SP reach effect (no reach, normal reach effect, etc.) is executed, the puzzle The current special icon change effect determination processing is terminated assuming that the pending chance effect is not executed.

In step E580-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a jackpot or ready-to-win effect in the previous pending memory. If there is no jackpot or ready-to-win effect to be executed, the process is shifted to step E580-11, and if there is a big win or ready-to-win effect to be executed, this time it is assumed that the puzzle pending chance effect is not executed. The special icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E580-11, sub CPU 130a selects a puzzle pending chance pattern determination table (see FIG. 198(b)) for determining a puzzle pending chance effect pattern (progress scenario). Details of the puzzle pending chance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E580-12, the sub CPU 130a refers to the puzzle pending chance pattern determination table to determine the puzzle pending chance effect pattern, and in step E580-13, the determined puzzle pending chance effect pattern executes the puzzle pending chance effect. It is determined whether or not it is an effect pattern. In the case of the effect pattern for executing the puzzle pending chance effect, the processing is shifted to step E580-14, and in the case of the effect pattern not to execute the puzzle pending chance effect, the current special icon change effect processing is terminated.

In step E580-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a puzzle pending chance effect execution command corresponding to the determined effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current special icon change effect determination process. As a result, the puzzle pending chance effect execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the puzzle pending chance effect is executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table for MAX pending chance)
FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing a MAX pending chance icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode in the MAX pending chance effect.

The icon final display mode determination table for the MAX holding chance is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a character A card icon, which is a normal card icon, and a character B card icon, a character C card icon, and a character C card icon, which are special card icons suggesting that a special game may be played. A D card icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special card icon is higher in the order of (character A card icon <) character B card icon <character C card icon <character D card icon, and the character D card icon is a big win. is a card icon that confirms.

Here, as a first feature of the final icon display mode determination table for the MAX holding chance shown in FIG. 198(a), the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the ratio of special card icons is higher than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. The points selected by Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the MAX holding chance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table for MAX holding chance shown in FIG. The point selected by the ratio is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the MAX holding chance, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the MAX pending chance icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. However, it does not matter which card reserve icon the ready-to-win performance is likely to be executed, and whether or not the ready-to-win performance is executed depends on the special figure determination information corresponding to the card reserve icon. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for any card holding icon, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, although the execution ratio of the icon change effect in the MAX pending chance effect is not changed by the effect customization setting by the player, the icon change in the MAX pending chance effect is changed by the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting). You may make it the execution ratio of production|presentation change.

(Puzzle hold chance production pattern decision table)
FIG. 198(b) is a diagram showing a puzzle pending chance rendering pattern determination table referred to when determining a puzzle pending chance rendering pattern (progress scenario).

The puzzle pending chance production pattern determination table is associated with the scheduled change pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of the production pattern of each puzzle pending chance production, the number of holds, and the production pattern of the puzzle pending chance production to be selected. As a reference, advance variations in each effect pattern and progress modes of progress effects executed in the variations are described.

As the performance patterns, a performance pattern 0 in which the puzzle pending chance performance is not executed and performance patterns 1 to 6 in which the puzzle pending chance performance is executed are set.

For example, in production pattern 6, four pending icons, including three pending icons that were already displayed when the game ball entered the starting hole and a newly displayed pending icon, are displayed as puzzle pending icons and progressed. The effect is started, and when the pending puzzle icon changes to the icon before 3 changes, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and the background of the first image display device 70 is covered, and 1/4 of the screen is covered. When the puzzle pending icon changes to the icon before the 2 change, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and the background of the first image display device 70 is covered, and 1/2 of the screen is covered. When the puzzle pending icon changes to the relevant icon before the change, a puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon, and an effect is performed to cover the background of the first image display device 70, thereby covering 3/4 of the screen. When the reserved icon becomes the relevant icon, a puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon, and an effect of covering the background of the first image display device 70 is performed to cover 4/4 of the screen.

Here, as a first feature of the puzzle holding chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b), the selection rate of each production pattern is made different according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern in which the puzzle pending chance effect is executed is more when the scheduled variation pattern is SP SP reach or full rotation reach than when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach. The point is that it is selected at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the puzzle holding chance production, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the puzzle pending chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the effect pattern for executing the puzzle pending chance effect is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a failure. The point selected by the ratio is mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the puzzle holding chance production, and to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pending puzzle chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the ready-to-win effect is executed by the variable effect corresponding to the last puzzle pending icon without executing the ready-to-win effect by the variable effect corresponding to the preceding puzzle pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the last puzzle pending icon, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the puzzle pending chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point that reach production is executed is mentioned. Therefore, the player's expectation can be gradually increased by the progress effect executed while the puzzle pending icon is displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the puzzle pending chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. is the specific number (for example, the first) of the hold icon displayed in a different display mode before the last hold icon. The chance performance is higher). Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of the player's sense of anticipation different between the MAX pending chance presentation and the puzzle pending chance presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the puzzle pending chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the rate at which the ready-to-win effect is executed during the variable effect corresponding to the last pending icon displayed in a different display mode is different (puzzle pending chance effect is higher). Therefore, it is possible to make the timing of the player's sense of anticipation different between the MAX pending chance presentation and the puzzle pending chance presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the MAX pending chance effect is executed than when the puzzle pending chance effect is executed, the specific number ( For example, the percentage of reach production being executed during the variable production corresponding to the holding icon that is the first) is high, but the puzzle holding chance production is the variation corresponding to the holding icon that is the specific number You may make it the ratio which a reach production|presentation is performed becomes high during production|presentation.

In addition, the execution ratio of whether or not the puzzle pending chance effect is executed does not change depending on the effect customization setting by the player, but the puzzle pending chance effect is performed depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) The execution ratio of whether or not is executed may be changed.

(Production example when MAX holding chance production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 199, an example of an effect when the MAX holding chance effect is executed in the normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and 7 is displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. Two pending icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. , the MAX holding chance presentation is started. Specifically, a character is displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C, and a character image of "MAX hold chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to a card icon with the card upside down.

Then, when the variable time has passed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. disappears.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The variable display of 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the suspended icon displayed in the suspended icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

After that, when the character displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C turns over the card icon which is the icon, the icon is displayed as a character A card icon in FIG. 199(f). A production is performed that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable production of.

Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 470, as shown in FIG. A pending icon is additionally displayed in , but since it is a pending icon displayed after the start of the MAX pending chance presentation, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the fluctuation time elapses and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and is displayed. 199(f) to (h) are produced until the variable production corresponding to the holding icon displayed as the card icon is completed, and finally the character is erased to produce a MAX holding chance production. ends.

In this way, in the MAX pending chance presentation, all of the eight pending icons are displayed as the same card pending icon, and when the icon is displayed, the card is turned over to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. . Therefore, the player comes to have a sense of anticipation for each reserved icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the suspension icon additionally displayed after the start of the MAX suspension chance presentation is displayed as a normal suspension icon instead of the card suspension icon. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the extent of the pending icon targeted for the MAX pending chance presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Example of production when puzzle pending chance production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 200, an example of an effect when the puzzle pending chance effect is executed in the normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the variable display (second variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in each of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and two reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. , and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. Chance production is started. Specifically, a character image of "puzzle pending chance" is displayed, and all the three pending icons change to puzzle icons shaped like puzzle pieces.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed and the variation display of the second special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. disappears.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The variable display of 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the pending puzzle icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, a progress effect is started, a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and two places of the upper right and lower left of the background image of the first image display device 70 are covered, thereby covering 1/2 of the screen. , the degree of expectation that the last puzzle pending icon to be announced will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

After that, when the fluctuation time passes and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. disappears.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the pending puzzle icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues, and a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 3/4 of the screen is covered by covering one place in the lower right of the background image of the first image display device 70. The degree of expectation that the last puzzle pending icon to be announced will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

After that, when the fluctuation time elapses and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends, as shown in FIG. disappears. Also, when the game ball wins the second starting port 470, the second special figure pending number display area 70F becomes "1", and the pending icon is additionally displayed in the second display part of the pending icon display area 70B. Since it is a pending icon displayed after the start of puzzle pending chance presentation, it is displayed as a white icon which is a normal icon.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The last puzzle pending icon and the normal pending icon displayed in 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the last puzzle pending icon is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues, and a piece of the puzzle appears from the icon, and the screen 4/4 is covered by covering one place in the upper left of the background image of the first image display device 70. The degree of expectation that the target last puzzle pending icon will be a big hit is suggested step by step.

Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of fluctuation, the normal ready-to-win production is started, and after that, the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, and when the fluctuation time has passed and the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, it is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon as a puzzle icon that has been displayed is erased.

In this way, in the puzzle pending chance effect, all of the plurality of pending icons are displayed as the same puzzle pending icon, and the progress effect is performed each time the icon becomes the puzzle pending icon. Therefore, the player has a sense of anticipation for the final reserved icon, which is the notice target, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation for a big hit for the last puzzle pending icon to be announced is gradually suggested by the progress effect. Therefore, it is possible to gradually raise the player's expectation for the final reserved icon, which is the notice target, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the puzzle hold chance production, the puzzle pieces only covered the screen, but each piece was drawn with an object and text information that expected the execution of the SPSP reach production, and four pieces were created. When the entire screen is covered by , the object or character information suggesting execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect may be completed.

In addition, although the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SPSP reach production will be executed by the puzzle pending chance production is suggested, even if it suggests the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SP reach production is executed Alternatively, the degree of expectation (possibility) of execution of a chance effect other than the ready-to-win effect may be suggested, or the degree of expectation (possibility) of simply winning a big win may be suggested.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, all the three production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (shake motion), but the left and right production patterns 70a are stopped and the central production Only the pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (shaking motion). At this time, all the three production patterns 70a may perform a fluctuation action (production action), or the left and right production patterns 70a do not fluctuate (production action), and only the central production pattern 70a fluctuates (production action). ).

Further, in the present embodiment, the tactile image SK and the design effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate during the temporary stop of the performance design 70a. Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the identification unit composed of the hexagonal base image and the number portion (identification character) does not perform the fluctuation operation (production operation) when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. A texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation action (drawing action), or a fluctuation action (drawing action) may be performed by adding a light emission effect to the identification section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a (special figure pending number specification command, special design specification command, special figure variation pattern specification command) production control unit When 130m receives, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ is continued, but it is also possible to start the variable display after instantaneously deriving display in the same way as the effect symbol 70a. good. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is being displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the command at the start is received during the display of the number of pending icons larger than the number of special figure pending, the surplus pending icon HI is erased by one frame worth of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TI, 20 frames for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the hold icon, based on the reception of the stop command. It may be erased by animation for 5 frames.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), one more than the predetermined number After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. can be

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start when the number of special figures reserved is a predetermined number, so that the number of special figures reserved and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored ( If there is a mismatch (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the increasing direction) due to command abnormality between the special figure pending number that was grasped), reception of this command at the start However, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of production mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon may be provided to suggest that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) will be executed. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation icon is displayed when both the prefetching designation command of the special figure reservation number designation command as the winning command is normally received, but the special figure reservation number designation command is received If you do not receive the prefetch designation command normally, you will display a pending icon, while if you do not receive the special figure hold number designation command normally and you will receive the prefetch designation command normally, display the pending icon You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the look-ahead designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestive effect is semi-transparent, but the effect button image may be an outline-only effect button image instead of a translucent effect, or may be a silhouette-only effect button image. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) when the advance notice effect (dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect) and the development effect are executed. However, the glass frame 4 may be provided with a frame movable member, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in the pre-reach announcement effect or the development effect, the motion effect of operating the frame movable member may be executed. Instead of the vibrating effect, an action effect of moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration effect of the effect button 17 at the time of execution of the advance notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, final effect) or when the symbols are aligned. Alternatively, a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance may be executed by operating the frame movable member when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed when the patterns are aligned, or instead of the vibration performance. An action effect for moving the frame movable member may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the title display indicating that the reach effect is being performed is not performed during the execution of the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. The title may be displayed using either red characters that have a higher expectation of winning than white characters, rainbow characters that confirm the big hit, etc.), and after the title display is displayed in white characters, it changes to red characters or rainbow characters. You can let it run.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production, but it is performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach production, and the SP reach production is performed. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in a protruding state (proportion of protruding state is higher) in the case of performing the cut-in performance at the end of the SP reach performance than in the case of performing the cut-in performance in the middle stage. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an effective period for long-pressing the production button 17 is generated in the development performance, but an effective period for long-pressing the performance button 17 is generated as a jackpot announcement performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long-pressing period during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings in the effective period, and to determine to what stage the effect is to be developed based on the determination results.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reservations when the number of reservations changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. The decrease display of the first hold information (1 is subtracted) is earlier than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing that will complete the update to the pending digits) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. It is possible to perform a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (moving from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the frame is updated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. when the number of the reserved memories increases, it is possible to display an increase of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information, and during the display of the decreased second reserved information, When the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending Incremental display of information (update to pending digits incremented by one) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays the reduced first reserved information and the second reserved information whose variable display is started. A change display that changes to the execution information (the icon) can be executed, and when the number of the pending memories increases, an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed. and when the number of pending memories increases during change display of the second pending information, the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing of , the increase display of the first reservation information (update to the reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and control of the game effects based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can increase the display of the first pending information and increase the display of the second pending information. Yes, when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the incremented display of the first pending information (update to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which . By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game effect is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the variable effect execution means is capable of displaying the variable effect execution means during execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the information display means displays the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. and an increased display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (1 is added update to the reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed). It is designed not to be By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means controls the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub-control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Variable effect execution means executable by display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of the reservation memories, and second reservation information indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories ( and an information display means capable of displaying a pending icon), wherein, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means increases display of the first pending information and increases display of the second pending information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reservation storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition When the determination information based on (entrance of the game ball to the second starting port) is stored as a second reservation memory, and the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the first reservation information Increased display (updated to the reserved number with 1 added) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information satisfies a predetermined condition (finishing the final variation effect in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It will not run until By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reservations.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means changes the operation mode of the initial operation (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) are made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and a power source Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the operation means after the start of power supply Effect control means (effect control board 130) that performs initial light emission and is capable of performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different between when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during game execution. ), wherein the effect control means determines the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps and the Although the operation mode of the operation of each step, etc.) is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game; The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means controls when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means is the same. are designed to be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by the production, wherein the plurality of production patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the production When the game control state is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and sets the game control state. is restored, the second combination (for example, "753") is used as the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

<Content 3 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial action is performed after the return action of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) at which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the return operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial motion is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial motion is performed. The initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is Instead, the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) are arranged. Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped. and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when power supply is started (restored power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position when power supply is started (power is turned on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. If it is at the position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is performed. , the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the power supply was stopped and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. A control means (rendering control board 130) is provided, and the movable rendering means includes a first movable rendering means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable rendering means, and a second position of itself. Including a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) that overlaps with the above-mentioned effect control means, the control state of the game is initialized When the power supply is started (power-on), the When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved to the first position. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial movement of the second movable effect means is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

<Content 4 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility to

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variation accompanied by variation display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing production is provided, and in the variable production, the production pattern that is being variably displayed is oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means returns a predetermined (at the time of receiving the special figure stop designation command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command), it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging the display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can be played, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed production patterns, and the variable production includes a ready-to-win state by some of the production patterns. Including a ready-to-win variation effect that is formed and displayed to execute a ready-to-win effect, the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, at a predetermined timing ( When a special figure stop designation command is received, and when a customer waiting command is received), a combination of the production patterns different from the ready-to-win combination by the production patterns that have been formed and displayed in the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. there is Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 5 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and determination by the determination means According to the result, a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), are a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. When the game control state is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means. The mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen + screen during recovery) when the power supply is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is made different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 6 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the displayed production pattern, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production pattern on the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) by the display means, and when the effect pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable effect elapses, and the control state. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed depending on whether the effect pattern is statically displayed after the initialization of or after the control state is restored. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Content 7 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after power supply is started. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with variable display of symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, displays the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the pattern, and the determination information during execution of the variable effect is displayed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the start of the variable display, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), and the execution information is displayed in the predetermined display area. It is set not to display. Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 8 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information, there was a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects (for example, JP-A-2017-143904 reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display, and the production control means performs the variable production a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the pre-reading notice effect is not restarted, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, a notice performance (for example, alternative notice performance) different from the look-ahead notice performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Content 9 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, JP-A-2017 -143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. rice field.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, wherein the performance control means stages the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is implicitly suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before stopping the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change effect in accordance with the contents of the current variable effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Content 10 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect is not completed is changed in stages. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed is high. There was a fear that

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and the effect control means is provided with the determination information and the variable effect that the execution of the variable effect is not completed. It is possible to display identification information (the corresponding icon, pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information step by step. It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation to be held, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., white icon) and a second stage mode (e.g., blue icon). icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply stopped during the display in the second stage mode of the identification information that changes up to the third stage mode is resumed, and the game is controlled. is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not have to be conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Content 11 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes a long time to grasp the number of reserved memories. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and determination by the determination means A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a result, and the control state of the game is determined. When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second Suspension display indicating the number of suspension storage in each of the suspension display 84) and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area When the power supply stopped in the state of the reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

<Content 12 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that it could drop.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state before the power supply is stopped, and the production design displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by variable display, and light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, wherein the effect control is performed. The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is puzzled that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed, thereby improving the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

<Content 13 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration specifying command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and from the main control means during execution of the variable effect When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the special game effect The initial operation can be executed when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. In the case where the game control state is initialized and in the case where the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps and the motion of each step) is the same. However, the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation of the movable production means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination information ), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game is initialized after power supply is started. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and the effect control means initializes the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the performance operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the determination by the determination means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable display of the effect pattern is shaken. It is possible to perform static display (stop display) after moving display (temporary stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply that was stopped during execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, it is possible to statically display the production pattern on the display means without swinging display at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means ) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the game machine The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. and a second state, wherein the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means when the game control state is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply stopped during state 2 resumes and the state is restored to the first state or the second state, the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the screen during recovery) is made different, and according to the signal If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform operations. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses after the static display of the production pattern, the display means can execute a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production), and after the fluctuation time of the variable production has elapsed, the production pattern is displayed. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the signal. If so, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the prior Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling effect (continuous foretelling effect) for a plurality of times of the variable performance, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the fore-reading foretelling effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the predictive notice effect is not restarted, and the notice effect different from the predictive notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped (for example, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or for restoring the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and a plurality of times It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, When a command specifying power restoration, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and an operation in a predetermined mode (Action, light emission, sound output, image display) possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and establishment of acquisition conditions Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (entering the game ball into the starting port) as a pending storage, and the determination information, the player Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or before stopping the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the production control means, the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and the production It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests a degree, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is changed to the above. During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and to execute an effect according to the signal, the main control When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and according to the signal When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which performance can be executed, the predetermined It is possible to output a notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is progressing. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and during execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration) from the main control means designated command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the effect control means.

<Content 14 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means continues.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means A game machine having a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a production image (variation production, jackpot production, etc.) The effect control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of effect symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the game standby screen When the power supply to the main control means stops during display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

<Content 15 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting door detection switch, Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means and, when the power supply to the game machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic Anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave anomaly notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined anomaly notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine that can be played, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality When the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period of time (elapsed 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue execution of anomaly notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

<Content 16 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and perform game effects according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a game machine comprising main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means for controlling production in response to a command (signal) from the main control means (for example, , see JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. There, according to the increase of the first reserved memory, the first reserved information (first reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and according to the decrease of the first reserved memory, the first Each of the reserved information can be shifted and displayed to be reduced, and the first reserved information is subjected to a production operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production. It is possible, and the first suspension information is during the temporary stop of the plurality of production symbols that are performing the production operation, and a specific number (for example, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation storage receives the signal at the start of the variation display (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) where the predetermined number becomes the predetermined number , without starting the variable effect and shift-displaying the first reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first reserved information, The first pending information (at least the first pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the predetermined number is shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of the first suspension information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation production is started, and the number (for example, two) of the first After displaying the pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved display 83), and the second corresponding to each of the first reserved memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (character tactile image, pattern effect image) that constitute the A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory reaches the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 3) that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). (Reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution of the variation effect is started, and the first reservation less than the specific number by one in the first display area Display the first pending number (for example, one) of the predetermined number without displaying the number (for example, two), and display the number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area After displaying the first pending information, the predetermined number (for example, one) The first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display the first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the plurality of production patterns are displayed in the variable production During the temporary stop, it is possible to cause the first suspension information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.), and the plurality of performance symbols in which the first suspension information is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. and at the start of the variable display in which the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 4) that is 3 more than a predetermined number (eg, 1) When a signal (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special figure variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first reservation of the number (eg, three) that is one less than the specific number Displaying the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information without displaying information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In the normal game state, the effect control means executes a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first suspension information (first suspension icon) corresponding to each of the first suspension storage in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable effect, the When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped, the background image can be effected (scrolled, changed, etc.), and the plurality of performance patterns in which the background image is performing the performance operation are temporarily stopped. During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of the first suspension information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number, and the variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the number (eg, three) of the first Displaying a number (for example, two) of the first holding information that is less than the specific number by two without displaying the holding information, and then displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the first holding information. . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. The effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal game state. It is possible to display a first reservation number indicating the number of the first reservation memories in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83), and to display the first reservation number corresponding to each of the first reservation memories. 1 reservation information (first reservation icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of production patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production pattern (Character tactile image, pattern effect image) can be made to perform a production operation (fluctuation operation, etc.), and the predetermined element is performing the production operation during the temporary stop of the plurality of production patterns A signal at the start of the variable display when the first suspension memory becomes the predetermined number during the display of the first suspension information of a specific number (eg, 4) which is three more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). (Reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the first storage number (two less than the specific number in the first display area) display the predetermined number of the first stored numbers (for example, one) without displaying the number (for example, two); 1 A number less than the specified number by 2 without displaying pending information (eg, two) of the first pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the first pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein in the normal game state, the effect control means performs a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to execute, and when the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, a performance operation (fluctuation operation) of a predetermined element (character tactile image, symbol effect image) constituting the performance symbol etc.), and when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is displaced from the stop position, it is based on the determination result of the first determination information When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, after the production design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation production Display variable. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There, the second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the second pending memory, and the second pending information is displayed according to the decrease of the pending memory. can be reduced by one by shifting display, and during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold storage is the predetermined number of the variation display start time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the specific number of the second The second pending information corresponding to the predetermined number (the icon display 1st and 2nd pending icons from the area side) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. There is, second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending storage can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) can be specified During the display of the second reservation information of the number (for example, three), the signal at the start of the variation display that the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern specified command) is received, the variable effect is started, the second reservation information of the number (for example, 2) less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the Display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, three) of the above-mentioned During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the variation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reservation storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (eg, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored number (eg, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and after displaying a number (for example, two) of the second pending information that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed indicate. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and the predetermined number (eg, one ) to display the second pending information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and the predetermined number (for example, one) is larger than three. During the display of a large specific number (for example, four) of the second reservation information, the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number. Figure variation pattern specification command) is received, the variation effect is started, and two more than the specific number without displaying the second hold information of the number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number A small number (eg, two) of the second pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; Storage means for storing the second determination information of execution as a second reservation storage, and state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, the effect control means can execute a variable effect (variable display of effect symbols 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the second storage number indicating the number of the second storages in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display the second storage number corresponding to each of the second storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (eg, four) of the above-mentioned During the display of the second pending information, when the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special design designation command, special design fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, where the second reserve storage becomes the predetermined number, The variable effect is started, and the predetermined number of the second stored numbers (eg, one) is displayed without displaying the second stored numbers (eg, two) that are two less than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and without displaying the second pending information of a number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, a number that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) The second pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (performance control board 130), the main control means, the first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the first start condition (entering the first start opening) Or a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second start condition (entering the second start port) , variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and control to a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state. It is possible, and when the performance symbol that is temporarily stopped in the variation performance is displaced from the stop position, a signal at the start of the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information (holding number designation command, When a special symbol designating command, a special symbol variation pattern designating command) is received, the performance symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then the variation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means for performing, the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (variable display of the production pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, Additional display of pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) according to the increase of the pending memory, shift display of the pending information according to the decrease of the pending memory, and one of them is execution information. (the corresponding icon), and while a specific number (for example, 3) of the reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, 1) is being displayed, the reserved storage becomes the predetermined number When the signal at the start of the fluctuation display (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased to start the fluctuation production, and the specific number of the holding Without shift-displaying the reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the information, the necessary amount of the reserved information (the first and second from the icon display area side) hold icon) are shifted and one is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, three) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, along with erasing the execution information, starting the variation effect, and displaying the holding information of one less than the specific number (for example, two) , the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of the pending information that is capable of being displayed and is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), starting the variable display in which the pending memory is the predetermined number. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation production is started, and the specific number in the first display area Display the number of reservations (for example, one) of the predetermined number without displaying the number of reservations (for example, two) that is less by one, and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 2) of the pending information are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, 1) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; and a storage means, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories It is possible to display the pending information (holding icon) in the display area (image display device 70) and display the holding information for which the variable display is started as execution information (the icon). 1), during the display of a specific number (for example, 4) of the holding information, the holding memory becomes the predetermined number. , Toku-zu variation pattern specification command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation effect is started, and the number of the reservation information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. A number (for example, two) of the pending information that is less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port). determination means for determining whether or not to execute; variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display, and a holding indicating the number of the holding storage It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F) The pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories is displayed in a second display area (holding icon display area), and the holding information whose variable display is started is used as execution information (the icon). During the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of said pending information that is capable of being displayed and is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), said pending memory is said to be said predetermined number, and said variable display is started. When the time signal (reservation number designation command, special design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the variation production is started, and the specific number in the first display area Display the number of reservations of the predetermined number (for example, one) without displaying the number of reservations less than two (for example, two), and a number that is one less than the specific number in the second display area (for example, 3) of the pending information are displayed, the holding information of a number less than the specific number by two (for example, 2) is displayed, and then the holding information of the predetermined number (for example, 1) and the holding information are displayed. Display execution information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means means (production control board 130), the main control means, the special game (jackpot) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the starting condition (entering the starting port) game), and a variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by variable display of performance patterns so as to correspond to the display, and the variable display is started when the temporarily stopped performance symbols in the variable performance are deviated from a stop position. When an hour signal (holding number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the performance design is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variation performance, and then variably displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the production control means.

<Content 17 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a game machine, there is also known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a first effect (pre-reach effect) Includes a specific game effect (reach fluctuation effect) in which the second effect (post-reach effect) is executed later, and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect) , vibration production for 1 second during development production, etc.) and a second vibration production different from the first vibration production (at the time of cut-in production, at the time of decision success production, at the time of final production, at the time of pattern alignment, etc. 3 seconds or more Vibration effect), and in the specific game effect, the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect than during the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). includes a specific game effect (ready-to-win effect) in which a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected is executed after the predetermined effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first Vibration effects (1-second vibration effects such as dialogue announcement effects, step-up announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.) and second vibration effects different from the first vibration effects (during cut-in effects, At the time of decision success performance, at the time of fixed performance, at the time of matching symbols, etc., vibration performance of 3 seconds or more), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is executed rather than when the first vibration performance is not executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the second vibration effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a suggestive effect (look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead operation effect) suggesting that the special game may be executed during execution of the game effect; It is possible to execute a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means, and the vibration effect is performed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display. and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display. In a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is completed), the case where the second vibration effect is executed is higher than the case where the suggestive effect is executed. There is a high degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state game state) and a game state control means (main control board 110), and a production control means (production control board 130 ), the production control means can execute a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the variable production, and the variable production includes a first type production pattern (even number design) A first specific variation effect in which the reach effect is executed, a second specific change effect in which the reach effect is executed by the second type of effect pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern (" 7" symbol) includes a third specific fluctuation effect in which a ready-to-win effect is executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, at the time of the step-up notice effect, at the time of the pseudo continuous effect, at the time of the development effect etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (3 seconds or more vibration performance such as cut-in performance, determined success performance, finalized performance, etc.), In a normal game state, the first specific variable performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variable performance, the third specific variable performance is less likely to be executed than the first specific variable performance, and the first specific variable performance is less likely to be executed. The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect (read-ahead vibration effect, speech announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game effect. The vibrating effect includes a first vibrating effect (dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display effect sound of the operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is included. , a production sound corresponding to the operation of the production button, and an operating effect sound of the character) are outputted, while the predetermined production sound is not outputted when the second vibration production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the game effect includes a specific effect that makes the execution of the special game expected. Including a specific game effect (reach variation effect) in which (reach effect) is executed, the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (line notice effect, a cut-in effect, a determined success effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect, etc.) executed without the operation prompting display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed when the second vibration effect is executed. , In the specific game effect (jackpot reach fluctuation effect) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 3 times) before the start of the specific effect After the start of the specific effect , the number of executions of the second vibration effect (maximum 7 times) tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (the production button 17, the production lever 24) that the player can operate. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During the execution of the game effect, a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operating means can be executed, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, the vibration associated with the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. is capable of executing a suggestive effect (jackpot announcement effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation effect (vibration effect) that operates (moves, vibrates) the frame effect unit during execution of the suggestive effect , action effects, etc.) can be executed, and the suggested effects include a first suggested effect (weak notice, pre-reach notice effect) and a second suggested effect (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion is performed. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher when the operating performance is executed during execution of the first suggestive performance than when the operating performance is not executed during performance. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the second vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), and the production control means is controllable in a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and during execution of the game production and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (at the time of dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), and the first Expectations for execution of the special game when the first vibration performance is executed are different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game frame (a frame consisting of a game board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of , and establishment of acquisition conditions (first start port 45 or second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main A control board 110) and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the effect control means is during execution of the game effect. Executes a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) for changing the frame effect part from the first state (standby state, extinction state) to the second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state). The variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-ready performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-ready performance), and execution of the first performance. Compared to when the change effect is not executed during the change effect, the expectation that the special game is executed is higher, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed In the reach variation effect), regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the change effect is executed during the execution of the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operation means during the operation promotion display. The first vibration effect (one of the vibration effects such as the dialogue announcement effect, the simulated continuous effect, the development effect, and the cut-in effect) executed in response to the above-mentioned operation prompting display is executed without Including a second vibration performance (one of vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance, at the time of pattern matching, and at the time of C pattern matching), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation for execution of the special game. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration effects during dialogue announcement, pseudo continuous effects, or development effects, weak or strong vibration for 3 seconds for vibration effects during cut-in effects) Vibration), and the second vibration effect is one predetermined vibration mode (at the time of step-up notice effect) when performing a predetermined effect (step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching) If the vibrating effect is weak vibration for 1 second, if the vibrating effect when the pattern is aligned, it is strong vibration for 4 seconds, and if the C pattern is aligned, the strong vibration is performed for 1 second). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variation performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means can execute a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a predetermined vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, speech notice effect, step-up notice Vibration production for 1 second at the time of production, etc.) and a specific vibration production different from the predetermined vibration production (Vibration production for 3 seconds or more at the time of success production, pattern matching, etc.), and the predetermined vibration production includes , a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display (vibration effect at the time of the dialogue announcement effect), and a second vibration effect executed without the operation prompting display (pre-reading vibration production, vibration production at the time of step-up notice production), and in the game production in which the special game is executed, the first vibration production is executed and the second vibration production is performed. The rate at which the specific vibration effect is executed after that differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal game state than during the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the information, and production control for executing a variable production that variably displays a plurality of types of production symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. Means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means includes a special effect (determined success effect, fixed effect, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect, and the operation means vibrate in any of a plurality of vibration modes (look-ahead vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determined success effect, fixed effect Vibration effects such as when the symbols are aligned, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned). The mode of execution of the vibration performance (execution/non-execution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on even-numbered symbols, odd-numbered symbols other than "7", and "7" symbols, and the vibration performance is executed along with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is During execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) for vibrating the first operation means, and the vibration effect includes an operation prompting display. A first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the first operation means in the above (vibration effect such as dialogue announcement effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and execution without the operation prompting display and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a vibration effect at the time of a step-up notice effect, etc.). In the second vibration effect, the start timing of vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is played through the second operating means. It is designed to be communicated to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 16th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (line announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development During the second valid period, including the valid period related to the performance, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and the second valid period (valid period during customer waiting) different from the first valid period The vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47), and the determination Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and production control means (production control board 130), wherein the effect control means can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to speech advance notice effect, etc.) , a second valid period different from the first valid period (valid period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), and a third valid period different from the first valid period and the second valid period (customer waiting middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period than when the operation means is operated during the third effective period. is becoming easier. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 18th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor) operable in a predetermined manner) , Production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74) and establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of game balls to first start port 45 or second start port 47) Based on determination information (special figure determination information ), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring the information, a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production), and the production control means includes a first production mode (production modes A to C) and a second production mode (production mode D to G), and changes the effect section from a first state (standby state, extinction state) to a second state (vibration state, operation state, predetermined light emission state) during execution of the game effect. A change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be executed, and the expectation is that the special game will be executed when the change effect is executed in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and up to one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for execution of the special game during execution of the game performance. Progressive step effects (step-up notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect) can be executed, and in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the step effect is a predetermined stage (if the step-up notice effect, the second effect is performed). The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when progressing to any of the 3-step effect, the 4th-step effect, or the 5th-step effect, or once or twice in the case of pseudo-continuous effect, is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, a specific effect (ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected in the game effect can be executed, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first effect mode. When the continuous performance of the predetermined number of times is executed in the second performance mode than when the continuous performance is executed, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance are becoming harder to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 21st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected can be executed, and in the second effect mode, a predetermined number of times (twice or 3 times), the case where the continuous effect is executed for the predetermined number of times in the first effect mode is more likely in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect. The specific effect is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the establishment of the acquisition condition (to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47 Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of the game ball), and determination means (main Control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production (variation production) according to the determination result of the judgment means, and the production control means is a first production mode (production Modes A to C) and a second production mode (production modes D to G), and continuous production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading operation production, pre-reading) that performs advance notice production in one or more times of the game production Vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the game effect, a specific effect (reach effect) that expects execution of the special game can be executed, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (normal reach production) and a second specific production (SP/SPSP ready-to-win production) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than the first specific production, and the first production mode is higher than the second production mode. is more likely to execute the specific effect in the game effect that triggered the execution of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is executed for the first number of times, and the second effect is more likely than the first effect mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button 17, a production lever 24) that can be operated by the player. And, display means (image display device) capable of displaying the effect image, and determination information (special figure determination information) based on establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and game according to the determination result of the determination means and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing an effect (variable effect), and the effect control means includes an operation prompting display (opaque button image ) is performed, and an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) can be executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation prompting display is displayed on the display means before the operation prompting display is performed. It is possible to perform a suggestive display (semi-transparent button image) suggesting that there is a possibility that the The first operation prompting display includes a second operation prompting display (a normal state red button image, a projected state red button image, and a projected state rainbow button image) with different expectations for the execution of the special game. The degree of expectation for execution of the special game when the first operation prompting display is performed differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the suggestive display is not performed in the first effect mode. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation prompting display is performed after the suggestive display is performed than when the operation prompting display is performed immediately. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 18 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, and perform a game effect (variation effect) according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. In such a game machine, it is known that a predetermined production device (production button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) is used to execute production (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, the conventional game machines as described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem that the games are not very interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), storage means (main control board 110) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as pending storage, and the special based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute a game, and game production according to the result of the judgment (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only with variable display of the fourth pattern) , and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production of lamp blinking only), and the production control means is capable of displaying pending information according to the number of the pending memories, and a plurality of the A first display effect (MAX 8 tarot card change) in which the pending information is displayed in a predetermined mode different from the normal mode, and a second display effect (puzzle reach) in which a plurality of pieces of the pending information are displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode puzzle change), and a specific effect (predetermined advance notice effect, various ready-to-win effects, etc.) that makes it possible to expect that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game effect, and When the first display effect is executed and when the second display effect is executed, it corresponds to the holding information that is a specific number (for example, 1st) before a predetermined number (for example, 4th) The rate at which the specific effect is executed during the game effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start hole) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second starting port), and the determination based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition storage means (main control board 110) for storing information as a first reserved memory and storing the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a second reserved memory; and executing the special game based on the judgment information. Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and controllable state control to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal game state A means (main control board 110) and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect with only the variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation effect with only the flashing of the lamp) are executed according to the result of the determination. Effect control means (effect control board 130), and the determination means includes the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the determination acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. Information is determined in the order of acquisition, and the effect control means can display a number of pending information (holding icons) corresponding to the holding storage, and in the normal game state, the first holding information and the 2nd pending information is displayed in the order in which the determination information is acquired, and in the specific game state, the 2nd pending information is displayed in the order in which the determination information is acquired without displaying the 1st pending information. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the result of the determination Variation display execution means (main control board 110) for executing variation display of symbols (special symbols) accordingly, and a specific game more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a state (special time-saving game state), initialization means that can initialize the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and depending on the result of the determination and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the variation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production with only flashing of the lamp), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the variable display execution means controls the specific game state in which the special game is not executed after the initialization. A variation pattern table that is different between the variation display that is the final round in the game state and the variation display that is the final round in the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game is executed after the initialization. can be used to determine the variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the result of the determination Variation display execution means (main control board 110) for executing variation display of symbols (special symbols) accordingly, and a specific game more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a state (special time-saving game state), initialization means that can initialize the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and depending on the result of the determination and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the variation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production with only flashing of the lamp), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the effect control means controls the specific game in a state in which the special game is not executed after the initialization. When the state ends and when the specific game state controlled in the state where the special game is executed after the initialization ends, the effect mode when the specific game state ends (end notification effect (start timing, end timing, content of end notification effect, etc.) can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start port) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, variation display execution means (main control board 110) for executing variation display of symbols (special symbols) according to the result of the determination, and the special game State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that it is not executed, and according to the result of the determination A production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the variation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production with only flashing of the lamp), In the production, the first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the above-mentioned based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition A second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and the first game effect for notifying non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed. The number of types of game effect patterns when the second game effect for informing non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed is larger than the number of types of game effect patterns when the second game effect is executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , normal time-saving game state) and controllable state control means (main control board 110), and game production according to the result of the determination (variable production with variable display of production patterns, variation only in variable display of the fourth pattern) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, serif notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) can be executed. A first vibration effect executed in response to an operation (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and executed without generating the valid period. and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a vibration effect related to a confirmed effect, etc.), and the game effect includes determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first game production according to the result (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol), and the second game production according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the second special symbol corresponding fluctuation production), and when the first game production is executed in the specific game state and when the second game production is executed in the specific game state, the first vibration production are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , normal time-saving game state) and controllable state control means (main control board 110), and game production according to the result of the determination (variable production with variable display of production patterns, variation only in variable display of the fourth pattern) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading Vibration effect, step-up notice effect, speech notice effect, cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and specific effects (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that make the execution of the special game expected, In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period. Vibration effect related to) and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the effective period, and the game effect , a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Including a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of determination, and when the first game effect in which the specific effect is performed in the specific game state is executed, and the The execution ratio of the first vibration effect during execution of the specific effect differs from that when the second game effect is executed in which the specific effect is performed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (special time-saving game State) control means (main control board 110), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only with variable display of the fourth pattern, lamp flashing and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production), and the production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (prediction vibration production, step-up an announcement effect, a speech announcement effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) can be executed. The first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed according to the above, and the effect is executed without generating the effective period. and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a vibration effect related to a confirmed effect, etc.), and the game effect includes the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. 1st game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game production (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition and a variation effect), and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the second vibration effect The execution ratio is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , Normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) controllable state control means (main control board 110), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with variable display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only variable display and a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp, and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. Vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, step-up notice production, speech announcement production, cut-in production, decision success production, etc.) and specific production (various reach production, special production, etc.) that expects the execution of the special game In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect, fixed effect) is executed in accordance with the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period. , a vibration effect related to a re-lottery effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a fixed effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the game effect includes the first A first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Including the corresponding second game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), when the first game production in which the specific production is performed in the specific game state is executed, and in the specific game state The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is different from that when the second game effect in which the specific effect is performed is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, movable effect members (first movable member, second movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined manner Movable member) and determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port) Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and determination that the special game is not executed Based on the state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and depending on the result of the determination and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a game production (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production with only the variation display of the fourth pattern, and fluctuation production with only flashing of the lamp), The effect control means controls the first action effect (prefetching action effect, variable start accessory announcement effect, etc.) for operating the movable effect means in the first mode during execution of the game effect, and the second action effect for moving the movable effect means. and a second action effect (determined success effect, etc.) to operate in a mode, and the game effect includes a first game according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. Effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol), and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, In the first game effect for notifying non-execution of the special game in the normal game state, the first action effect can be executed, but the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is notified In the first game effect, the execution of the first action effect is restricted, and the first game effect for notifying the execution of the special game in the normal game state and the execution of the special game in the specific game state are notified. With the first game effect, the second action effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner and a predetermined manner. A movable effect member (first movable member, second movable member) that can be operated with, and establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start port) or establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port) Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on entering ball), and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information ), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variable effect only with variable display of the fourth pattern, and variable effect only with lamp blinking) according to the result of the determination. And, the effect control means is capable of executing a light emitting effect (lamp change effect by prefetching) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, By operating the movable effect means in a predetermined mode during the execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute an action effect (pre-reading action effect, variable start accessory announcement effect) suggesting the possibility that the special game will be executed. , The game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2nd game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on, and the first game for notifying non-execution of the special game in the normal game state During execution of the effect, the light emitting effect can be executed, and the action effect can be executed, and during the execution of the first game effect for notifying non-execution of the special game in the specific game state, It is possible to limit the execution of the light emission effect and to limit the execution of the action effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, effect means for performing a predetermined effect (winning entrance lamp NR, top Lamp 10b etc.) and determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquiring condition (entering the second starting port) Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquisition, determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and determination that the special game is not to be executed Based on the state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the game effect (variation of the effect pattern) according to the result of the determination an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect with display, a variable effect with only the variable display of the fourth pattern, and a variable effect with only the blinking of the lamp), wherein the effect control means is the effect means can be used to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (a lamp change effect by looking ahead, a light emission effect at the time of winning, etc.), and the game effect includes, when the first acquisition condition is satisfied A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on, and a second game according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol), and the mode of the production means includes a first mode (white blinking of the winning entrance lamp) and a second mode (winning a prize) different from the first suggested mode mouth lamp blue light emission), a third mode (top lamp light emission) different from the second mode, and a fourth mode (winning entrance lamp & top lamp off) different from the third mode, and the suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (a lamp change effect by looking ahead) and a second suggestive effect (light emission effect at the time of winning) different from the first suggestive effect, and when the first suggestive effect is executed, , the effect means can be the first mode and the second mode, and when the second suggestive effect is executed, the effect means can be the third mode. , the effect means is in the fourth mode when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state than when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state. percentage is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed Possible state control means (main control board 110) and game production according to the result of the above determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only with fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only with lamp flashing ), and the production control means is capable of executing the game production in any one of a plurality of game production patterns (fluctuation production patterns), and the game production In, the first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Including a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the information, and the first game effect for informing non-execution of the special game in the normal game state is executed. The same game effect pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game effect for informing non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the special game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means is operated during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute an operation effect (line announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed according to the operation of the operation means during the valid period. The game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the second acquisition condition. Including a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on establishment, and the first notifying the non-execution of the special game in the normal game state When the first game effect for informing non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state, the operation effect is less likely to be executed than when the game effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed Possible state control means (main control board 110) and game production according to the result of the above determination (variation production with variable display of production patterns, fluctuation production only with fluctuation display of the fourth pattern, fluctuation production only with lamp flashing ), and the production control means (production control board 130) for executing the above, the production control means can be controlled in any of a plurality of production modes (including the look-ahead mode), and the game production includes the first A first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of 1 acquisition condition, and a result of determination of the determination information based on establishment of the second acquisition condition and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to, and the first game in the specific game state than when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state When the performance is executed, the change in the performance mode is less likely to occur (the SP/SPSP ready-to-win performance that results in a loss is less likely to be executed, the mode update lottery is more likely to be won, and the look-ahead zone performance is less likely to be executed. , the number of production modes is small, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a serif notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the means, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period; and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition. The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), including the case where the first game production is executed in the normal game state, and the first game production is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a serif notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the means, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period; and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition. The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), including the case where the first game production is executed in the normal game state, and the first game production is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the 18th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (entering the first start port) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed Possible state control means (main control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production with variable display of production patterns on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation for execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect, and A dynamic display of the background image is executed, but it is possible to generate a notice restriction period during which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effect is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variation production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the judgment information, and a second fluctuation production ( A variation performance corresponding to a second special symbol), and notifies the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state rather than the first variation performance that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. The proportion of the notice restriction period is likely to be greater in the first variable effect to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start port) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed Possible state control means (main control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production with variable display of production patterns on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation for execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect, and A dynamic display of the background image is executed, but it is possible to generate a notice restriction period during which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effect is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variation production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the judgment information, and a second fluctuation production ( a variation production corresponding to a second special symbol), and when the first variation production is executed in the normal game state, and when the first fluctuation production is executed in the specific game state, The ratio of the entire performance period to the notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start port) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed Possible state control means (main control board 110), and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production with variable display of production patterns on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of executing an indication effect (such as a ready-to-win effect) that suggests the possibility that the ready-to-win effect will be executed during the execution of the variable effect, and the variable effect is performed when the first acquisition condition is satisfied. A first variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on, and a second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Including a variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), when the second variation performance for notifying non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state, and in the specific game state The ratio of execution of the performance in which the predictive performance is executed but the ready-to-win performance is not executed is different between when the first variable performance for informing non-execution of the special game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a serif notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the means, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period; and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition. The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), including the case where the second game production is executed in the specific game state, and the first game production is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a serif notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the means, and in the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, determination effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period; and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.), and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition. The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), including the case where the second game production is executed in the specific game state, and the first game production is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect differs depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state 110), and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a variable production with a variable display of production symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is the special game. The first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time saving game state) controlled according to the end, and the second specific game state (special time saving game state) controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed ), wherein the effect control means dynamically displays a background image of the display means and a plurality of advance notice effects suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the background image, but it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effect includes the first A first variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition Including a corresponding second variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the second specific game rather than the second variation performance for notifying non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state The proportion of the notice restriction period occupied by the first variable effect for informing non-execution of the special game in the game state tends to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start hole) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state 110), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is a first specific game controlled according to the end of the special game. A game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the production control means is capable of executing dynamic display of a background image of the display means and a plurality of advance notice effects suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the variable effect; Although dynamic display is executed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the game effect includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination, and a second game effect (second special Fluctuation effect corresponding to the design), and when the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state, and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state , and the ratio of all of the performance periods to be the notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, movable effect members (first movable member, second movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined manner Movable member) and determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port) Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a production control means (production control board 130) that executes a game production according to the result of the determination. Provided, the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and the special game is controlled based on the fact that it is determined not to be executed and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state), and the production control means operates the movable production means in the first mode during execution of the game production. , variable start accessory announcement effect, etc.), and a second action effect (determined success effect, etc.) for operating the movable effect means in the second mode, and the game effect includes the first A first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition The corresponding second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol), including the first game effect for notifying the execution of the special game in the first specific game state, and the second specific game state In the first game effect for notifying the execution of the special game in the above, the second action effect can be executed, and in the second game effect for notifying the non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state , the first action effect can be executed, but in the first game effect informing non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state, the execution of the first action effect is restricted. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (entering the first start port) or Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entering the second start port), and executing the special game based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state 110), and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is a first specific game controlled according to the end of the special game. A game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) and a second specific game state (special time reduction game state) controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the production control means is capable of executing the game effect in any one of a plurality of game effect patterns (variable effect pattern), and the game effect includes a determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition ), and notifies the non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state than when the second game effect for notifying the non-execution of the special game is executed in the first specific game state. The same game effect pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , Various time saving) controllable state control means (main control board 110) and production control means (production control board 130) for executing game production according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is , The first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and the second specific game state controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined to be non-executing (Special time-saving game state), and the production control means has a vibration production that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration production, step-up notice production, dialogue notice production, cut-in production, A decision success effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (line notice effect) is executed according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period , pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect) , vibration effects related to confirmed effects, etc.), and the game effects include a first game effect (corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the first specific game The execution ratio of the first vibration effect differs between when the second game effect is executed in the state and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in various time-saving game states), and production control means (production control board 130) that executes game production according to the result of the determination, and the specific game The state is a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A game state (special time-saving game state), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, dialogue notice effect, cut-in In the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (speech notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up effect) Vibration effects related to advance notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the game effects include a first game effect (first special symbol (variation production corresponding to) and a second game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the first The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 29th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state than A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is advantageous to the player, and an effect control means ( Effect control board 130), and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time reduction game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and non-execution of the special game. It has a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination, and the effect control means has a specific notification related to the game in connection with the end of the special game (addiction prevention display , card forgetting prevention display, etc.) can be executed, and when the special game (so-called consecutive game win) is executed during the first specific game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and the second When the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the 2 specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, determination information ( Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring special figure determination information), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state than A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is advantageous to the player, and a production control means (production Control board 130), and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and non-execution of the special game. It has a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination, and the effect control means has a specific notification related to the game in connection with the end of the special game (prevention display, Card forgetting prevention display etc.) can be executed, and when the special game (so-called first hit) is executed during the normal game state, the specific notification can be executed, and the first specific game state When the special game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the second specific game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and when the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the second specific game state. is capable of executing the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 31st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a game medium is supplied to a start area (start opening) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning, and determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information , a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the determination and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect according to the result of (1), wherein the effect control means shoots a game medium to a second area of the game area during the normal game state. Then, a first notification effect (right-handed error notification) for prompting the shooting of the game medium to the first area of the game area can be executed for a predetermined period, and when the specific game state is started, the game area It is possible to execute a second notification effect (right-handed notification) that prompts the shooting of the game medium to the second area, and when the specific game state is started during execution of the first notification effect, the first notification is performed. It is possible to execute the second notification effect while continuing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means controls the special game during the game effect. A first setting state (normal setting) in which a specific effect expected to be executed (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) can be executed, and the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the operation of the operation means. and a second setting state (simple setting), and the game effect includes a first game effect (first special symbol (variation production corresponding to) and a second game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific production includes a first specific effect (for example, continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and the normal game after the first setting state is set. When the first game effect is executed in the state, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate). Then, when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the ratio of execution of the first specific effect is different from the first ratio (appearance rate is low) And the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio (appearance rate is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means is a specific production (continuous notice Effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) can be executed, and a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the operation of the operation means. and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example continuous advance notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and the first game effect is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set. If so, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate), the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game effect is executed in the specific game state after being played, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is a ratio (low appearance rate) different from the first ratio and the second specific effect The execution ratio is set to a ratio (low appearance rate) different from the second ratio. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing production, variable production of lamp flashing only), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (definite variable A game state, a normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the effect control means is the game It is possible to execute a specific effect (icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that expects execution of the special game during the effect, and a first setting state ( normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting), and the game effect includes a first game effect (second 1 variable effect corresponding to special symbol), and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, The specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and after the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (appearance rate is high) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio. (high appearance rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio A different ratio (low appearance rate) and a ratio (low appearance rate) where the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means is a specific production (continuous notice Effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) can be executed, and a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the operation of the operation means. and the game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set. If so, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate), the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game effect is executed in the specific game state after being played, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is a ratio (low appearance rate) different from the first ratio and the second specific effect The execution ratio is set to a ratio (low appearance rate) different from the second ratio. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (definite variable A game state, a normal time-saving game state), and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the effect control means is the game It is possible to execute a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the effect, and the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the operation of the operation means. A first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) can be set. A game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol), and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , wherein the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a continuous advance notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the second specific game state after being played, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first A ratio (low appearance rate) different from 1 ratio, and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio It is designed to be a percentage (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing production, variable production of lamp flashing only), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (definite variable A game state, a normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the effect control means is the game It is possible to execute a specific effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the effect, and the execution ratio of the specific effect differs according to the operation of the operation means. A first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) can be set. A game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol), and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , wherein the specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a continuous advance notice effect) and a second specific effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after being played, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is the second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific effect is the first A ratio (low appearance rate) different from 1 ratio, and the execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio It is designed to be a percentage (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Content 19 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, and perform a game effect (variation effect) according to the result of the determination. A game machine that executes is common. In such a game machine, it is known that a predetermined production device (production button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) is used to execute production (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, the conventional game machines as described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem that the games are not very interesting.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and acquisition means (main control) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting hole) board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in a state (probability variable gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), and game production (variation production with variable display of production design, fourth design) according to the result of the determination and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect with only a variable display and a variable effect with only blinking of a lamp, and the effect control means corresponds to the determination information that the game effect is started. Execution information (the icon) can be displayed, and by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for execution of the special game. It is possible, and a change effect that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode ( In a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation), an operation valid period is generated, and the operation valid period is the An operation effect for performing a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operating means (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.) and the operation effective period are generated. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, vibration effect related to confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means without moving, and during the normal game state and the specific game state The execution ratio of the vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between the two, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the game is resumed. When the control state is restored, the execution information is not executed, and the light emitting means is in a notification mode (white light emission, off) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that the player can operate, Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Judging means (main control board 110) for judging and controllable state control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed Means (main control board 110) and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production that variably displays production patterns according to the result of the determination, and the production control means is provided with the variable production. During a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) after the start of the operation effect (advance notice of dialogue Vibration effects related to production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, re-lottery production, etc.) and vibration production that vibrates the operation means without generating the operation valid period (pre-reading vibration production, step Vibration effect related to up notice effect, etc.), and stepwise effect in a specific change effect (variation effect with pseudo-continuation) in which the variable display of the effect pattern is simulated multiple times stage production (story production) in which the game can progress, and a ready-to-reach production that makes the player expect that the special game will be executed, and the stage production includes a first stage production (story 1). and a second stage effect (story 2) executed after the first stage effect, wherein the reach effect includes a first reach effect (normal reach effect) and the first reach effect rather than the first reach effect. Including a second ready-to-win effect (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect) with a high expectation that a special game is executed, and in the specific variable effect, the second stage effect can be executed after executing the first ready-to-win effect. However, after executing the second ready-to-win production, the second stage production is not executed, and the execution ratio of the vibration production in a predetermined period after the start of the variable production during the normal game state and the specific game state. are becoming different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and acquisition means (main control) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting hole) board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and game effects (variation accompanied by variable display of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a fluctuation production of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, and a fluctuation production of only the blinking of the lamp), and the production control means performs the operation after the start of power supply. An initial vibration that vibrates the means can be executed, execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information that the game effect is started can be displayed, and the execution information is different from the normal mode (normal icon) By displaying in a special mode (special icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and a specific notification mode corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode with the light emitting means. (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.), it is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation, and during the execution of the game effect, the operation valid period Vibration related to operation performance (speech announcement performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. effect), and a vibration effect (such as a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means without generating the operation valid period. When the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means is in a different notification mode from the specific notification mode (white light emission , extinguished), and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the initial vibration and the vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever, a firing handle) that can be operated by the player ), acquiring means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not, and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production (variable production) that variably displays the production pattern according to the result of the judgment. , the operation means includes a first operation means (production button) and a second operation means (production lever, firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means executes the variable production in which an operation effective period is generated, and an operation effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect) is performed in accordance with the operation of the first operating means during the operation effective period; Vibration effect related to effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means without generating the operation valid period. In the specific variable performance (variable performance with pseudo-continuation) in which the variable display of the performance symbols is simulated multiple times, the stage performance (story performance) in which the performance can progress step by step and the special game are performed. and a ready-to-win effect that is expected to be executed, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is generated by the second operating means. The stage production includes a first stage production (story 1) and a second stage production (story 2) executed after the first stage production, and The ready-to-win effect includes a first ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect) and a second ready-to-win effect (SP/SPSP ready-to-win effect) in which the special game is expected to be executed more than the first ready-to-win effect. In the variable performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first ready-to-win performance is executed, but the second stage performance is not executed after the second ready-to-reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Light emitting means (winning entrance lamp) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and acquisition means (main control) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting hole) board 110), storage means (main control board 110) for storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as pending storage, and determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information ( main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, various State control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the time-saving game state), and production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production that variably displays the production pattern according to the result of the determination. The effect control means can display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information that the variable effect is started, and display the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon) ), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.), it is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation, and during execution of the variable effect, an operation effective period is generated, an operation effect for performing a predetermined effect in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (a dialogue effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a final effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.); a vibration effect (prefetching vibration effect) for vibrating the operating means without generating an operation valid period (pre-reading vibration effect), wherein the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, and the When the power supply stopped during execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means is in a different notification mode from the specific notification mode (white light emission, light off) ), and when the variable effect in which the ready-to-win effect is performed during the normal game state is executed, the ratio of the vibration effect to be executed is higher before the ready-to-win effect is executed than during the ready-to-win effect. It's getting Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. vibrating effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibrating effects, dialogue notice effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration effects include: An operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery) is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. and a second vibration effect (prefetch vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first It is possible to execute the vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance period does not overlap, and the game performance is performed according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition ), including when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, a predetermined period after the start of the game effect ( (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation), the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the vibration effects generates an operation effective period, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.), and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.), It is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. 1st game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game production (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition After the start of the game production, including the case where the first game production is executed in the normal game state and the case where the second game production is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination, and a second game effect (second special Fluctuation effect corresponding to the pattern), and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, the game effect The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after the high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination, and a second game effect (second special A variable effect corresponding to the pattern), and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the game effect The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after the high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , normal time-saving game state) and controllable state control means (main control board 110), and game production according to the result of the determination (variable production with variable display of production patterns, variation only in variable display of the fourth pattern) Production control means (production control board 130) for executing production, variable production of lamp flashing only), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (definite variable A game state, a normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and the effect control means is the game Execution of vibration effects for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the effects (vibration effects related to anticipatory vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.) In the vibration effect, an effective period of operation is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective operation period. , development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, fixed effect, etc.) and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), including the case where the second game production is executed in the first specific game state, and the second game production in the second specific game state is executed, a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (high (until the first temporary stop after speed fluctuation), the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination, and a second game effect (second special Fluctuation production corresponding to the pattern), and when the first game production is executed in the specific game state and when the second game production is executed in the specific game state, the game production The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after the high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the vibration effects generates an operation effective period, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.), and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.), It is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. 1st game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game production (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition including a variable effect), and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, after the start of the game effect The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect that is executed without generating the valid period (prediction vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect period does not overlap, and the game effect includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of determination, and a second game effect (second special Fluctuation production corresponding to the pattern), and when the first game production is executed in the specific game state and when the second game production is executed in the specific game state, the game production The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after the high speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) for determination, and game performance according to the result of the determination (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation performance with lamp flashing only) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance It is possible to execute vibration effects that vibrate the operating means (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.). In the vibration effect, an operation valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period. Vibration effects related to effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, etc.), and second vibration effects that are executed without generating the valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) , wherein the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the operation means is different between the initial vibration and the second vibration effect. It is possible to vibrate with Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) for determination, and game performance according to the result of the determination (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation performance with lamp flashing only) and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing the above-mentioned production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production , development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) can be executed. 1st vibration effect (vibration effect related to speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) executed according to the operation of the operation means in the above, and the effective period and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect during the effect period. are not overlapped, and the operation means can be vibrated in different modes between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a game effect (with variable display of effect symbols) according to the result of the determination and a production control means (production control board 130) for executing a variable production, a fluctuation production with only the variable display of the fourth pattern, and a fluctuation production with only the blinking of the lamp), and the operation means is the first operation means (production button ) and a second operation means (effect lever, firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means vibrates the first operation means during execution of the game effect ( Pre-reading vibration effect, speech announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration effect includes an operation A valid period is generated, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, repeat effect) is executed in accordance with the operation of the first operating means during the operation valid period. a vibration effect related to a lottery effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect executed without generating the valid period (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a vibration effect related to a confirmed effect, etc.); It is possible to execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and when the second vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the second vibration effect is performed. Vibration associated with the performance is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 17th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), and storing the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a pending memory Storage means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and prior determination of whether or not to execute the special game Pre-determination means (main control board 110), state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect that variably displays the effect pattern according to the result of the determination, and the operation means includes first operation means (effect button) and the first operation and a second operation means (production lever, firing handle) different from the means, and the production control means vibrates the first operation means during execution of the variable production , simulated continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, etc.), and the vibration effect generates an operation effective period, A first vibration effect executed in accordance with the operation of the first operating means during the operation valid period (vibration effect related to dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) ), and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipation vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the second vibration effect includes the above-mentioned It is executed according to the result of the previous determination, it is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance period does not overlap, and the ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal game state. When the variable effect is executed, the ratio of execution of the second vibration effect is higher before execution of the ready-to-win effect than during the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration Vibration effects related to production, dialogue advance notice production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, re-lottery production, final production, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration production includes an operation effective period. is generated, and a first vibration effect executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period (line announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to anticipatory vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and It is possible to execute the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes a first game according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. Effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol), and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, When the second vibration effect is executed during the second game effect in the specific game state than when the second vibration effect is executed during the first game effect in the normal game state , the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 19th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the vibration effects generates an operation effective period, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and the second vibration effects executed without generating the valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation effects, etc.) effect), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game effect according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (Variation production corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the first game production in the specific game state (vibration related to pattern matching etc. production), the number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the first game production in the normal game state (predictive vibration production, step-up notice production, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation Vibration production etc. related to production etc.) is increasing be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , deciding effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and the second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed effect, etc. and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (variation production corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the first game production in the specific game state (with matching symbols The number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the first game production in the normal game state (forecasting vibration production, step-up notice production, pattern matching, C pattern There are more It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the vibration effects generates an operation effective period, and a first vibration effect (diaphragm announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and the second vibration effects executed without generating the valid period (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmation effects, etc.) effect), and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game effect according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (Variation production corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the second game production in the specific game state (forecast vibration production, step-up The number of types of the second vibration effect that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state (anticipation vibration effect, Step-up notice production, pattern matching, C pattern Vibration effects related to fixed effects, etc.) are increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), In the vibration effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a first vibration effect (dialogue announcement effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period. , deciding effect, re-lottery effect, etc.), and the second vibration effect executed without generating the effective period (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, pattern matching, C pattern matching, fixed effect, etc. and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the game effect includes the first acquisition condition The first game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on establishment, and the second according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition 2 game production (fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration production that may be executed during the second game production in the specific game state (predictive vibration production , pattern matching, vibration effects related to fixed effects, etc.), the number of types of the second vibration effects that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal game state (forecasting vibration effects, step-up Notice production, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed performance, etc. Vibration production etc. related to) is increasing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply. , Vibration production for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue announcement production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, confirmation production, etc.) ) can be executed, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effect is performed at a predetermined timing ( 1st vibration effect (vibration effect related to pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, etc.) executed before reach) and second vibration effect executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect production (confirmation production, vibration production related to pattern alignment, etc.), and during execution of the first game production in the normal game state, the first vibration production and the second vibration production can be executed. , During execution of the first game effect in the specific game state, the execution of the first vibration effect is restricted, but the second vibration effect can be executed, and the initial vibration and the first vibration effect are different , the operating means can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main Control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state , various time-saving game states) and a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in accordance with the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply. , Vibration production for vibrating the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue announcement production, pseudo-continuous production, development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, confirmation production, etc.) ) can be executed, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and a second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effect is performed at a predetermined timing ( 1st vibration effect (vibration effect related to pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, etc.) executed before reach) and second vibration effect executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect production (confirmation production, vibration production related to pattern matching, etc.), and during execution of the first game production in the normal game state, the first vibration production and the second vibration production can be executed. , During execution of the first game effect in the specific game state, the execution of the first vibration effect is restricted, but the second vibration effect can be executed, and the initial vibration and the second vibration effect are different , the operating means can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the game effects The first game production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition A second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration effect is a first vibration effect (prefetch Vibration production, serif announcement production, step-up announcement production, etc.) and second vibration production (development production, cut-in production, final production) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration production , Vibration effect related to re-lottery effect), and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the The execution ratios of the first vibration presentation are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the determination information, and specification that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. State control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and game production according to the result of the determination (variation production with fluctuation display of production design, fourth design and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display and a variable effect of only the blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, determination effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the game effects The first game production (variation production corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition A second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration effect is a first vibration effect (prefetch Vibration production, serif announcement production, step-up announcement production, etc.) and second vibration production (development production, cut-in production, final production) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration production , Vibration effect related to re-lottery effect etc.), when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, Execution ratios of the second vibration effect are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), The game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the vibration effect is a first vibration executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) Effects (vibration effects related to anticipatory vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) and second vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect , deciding effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.), when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state , the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game effect according to the result of the determination (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect of only the variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect of only blinking of the lamp), and the effect control means performs the operation during execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the means (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.), The game effect includes a first game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game effect (fluctuation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the vibration effect is a first vibration executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) Effects (vibration effects related to anticipatory vibration effect, dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) and second vibration effect (development effect, cut-in effect) executed at a timing (during reach) different from the first vibration effect , deciding effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.), when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state , the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) to determine, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variable effect only with variable display of the fourth pattern, and variable effect only with lamp blinking) according to the result of the determination. and, the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (forecast vibration effect, It is possible to execute a vibration effect related to dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, etc.), and the vibration effect is performed at a predetermined timing (before reach ), and the second vibration is executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during reach). Effect (development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the It is possible to vibrate the operation means in different modes between the initial vibration and the first vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) to determine, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, Effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variation effect with variable display of effect patterns, variable effect only with variable display of the fourth pattern, and variable effect only with lamp blinking) according to the result of the determination. and, the effect control means can execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during execution of the game effect (forecast vibration effect, It is possible to execute a vibration effect related to dialogue announcement effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, final effect, etc.), and the vibration effect is performed at a predetermined timing (before reach ), and the second vibration is executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during reach). Effect (development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the It is possible to vibrate the operation means in different modes between the initial vibration and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a 31st configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined mode. (Production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance to the starting port), and based on the determination information Judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute a special game, and game production according to the result of the judgment (variation production accompanied by fluctuation display of production patterns, fluctuation only for fluctuation display of the fourth pattern production control means (production control board 130) for executing a production, a variable production of lamp flashing only), and the production control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game production (pre-reading vibration Vibration effects related to production, dialogue advance notice production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, re-lottery production, final production, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration production is performed at a predetermined timing ( The first vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, serif notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) executed before reach) and the first vibration production executed at a timing different from the first vibration production (during reach) 2 vibration effects (development effect, cut-in effect, determined effect, vibration effect related to re-lottery effect, etc.), and the light emission mode of the operation means includes a first light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission), and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) in which the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is higher than that of the first light emission mode; When the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode than when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined mode. (Production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entrance to the starting port), and based on the determination information Determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a special game, and controllable state control to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A means (main control board 110) and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect with only the variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation effect with only the flashing of the lamp) are executed according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130), wherein the performance control means vibrates the operation means during execution of the game performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue announcement performance, pseudo-continuous performance, development performance) , cut-in effect, decision effect, re-lottery effect, confirmation effect, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration effect is a first vibration effect ( Pre-reading vibration production, dialogue notice production, step-up notice production, etc.) and second vibration production (development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, etc.), and the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the light emission mode of the operation means includes the first The special game is executed including a light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission) and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) in which the expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first light emission mode. in the game effect that notifies the operation means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) for determination, and game performance according to the result of the determination (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation performance with lamp flashing only) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance It is possible to execute vibration effects that vibrate the operating means (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.). , the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue announcement effect and pseudo-continuous effect) generated at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and the above-mentioned A second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period, and the operation means during the second effective period is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the second valid period are different aspects of the operation means and different operation sounds can be output depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) for determination, and game performance according to the result of the determination (variation performance with variable display of performance symbols, variation performance only with variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation performance with lamp flashing only) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance It is possible to execute vibration effects that vibrate the operating means (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue announcement effects, pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-lottery effects, confirmation effects, etc.). , the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue announcement effect and pseudo-continuous effect) generated at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and the above-mentioned and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period, and the operating means during the first effective period. is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the first valid period are different aspects of the operation means and different operation sounds can be output depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Determining means (main control board 110) to determine, and a state control means (main control board 110), and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect with only the variable display of the fourth pattern, and variation effect with only the blinking of the lamp) according to the result of the determination. (Production control board 130), wherein the production control means can execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and the operation means during the effective period that occurs during the game production It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means according to the operation of , and the effective period includes a first effective period (a period of validity pertaining to dialogue advance notice effect and pseudo-continuous effect) generated at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and the first effective period during the game effect. A second valid period (valid period related to development effect, determined effect, etc.) generated at a second timing (during reach) after one valid period, and the game effect in the normal game state and the specific The execution ratio of the vibration effect according to the operation during the first effective period is different from the game effect in the game state, and the number of vibrations in the vibration effect executed according to the operation during the first effective period ( time) and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effect executed in accordance with the operation during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (a production button, a production lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the starting port), and whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information Judging means (main control board 110) for judging and controllable state control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed A means (main control board 110) and a game effect (variation effect with variable display of the effect pattern, variation effect with only the variation display of the fourth symbol, and variation effect with only the flashing of the lamp) are executed according to the result of the determination. Effect control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and during the effective period that occurs during the game effect A vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up notice effect, a serif notice effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, a promotion success effect, etc.) is executed by vibrating the operation means according to the operation of the operation means. The effective period includes a first effective period (a period of validity related to a dialogue announcement effect and a pseudo-continuous effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game effect, and a period during the game effect. A second effective period (effective period related to development effect, determined effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first effective period of the above, and the game effect in the normal game state , the execution ratio of the vibration performance corresponding to the operation during the first valid period is different from the game performance in the specific game state, and in the vibration performance executed according to the operation during the first valid period The number of times of vibration (time) differs from the number of times of vibration (time) in the vibration effect executed according to the operation during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of the jackpot special pattern is the normal pattern, and when the jackpot special pattern type is the specific pattern. 1 shifts to a high-probability game state continuing until the next big-win game after the end of the big-win game, but it may be a game machine that shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the big-win games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to the game state.

In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it is also possible to adopt a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

(Fourth embodiment)
(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. FIG. FIG. 201 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". It starts with the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number (numerical information) displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "2" in one frame of non-animation. becomes "1". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when distinguished in particular) on the first sub-variation display 81 is started, but the production pattern 70a performs a preparatory operation. Start scrolling after going.

In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays the first reservation number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by turning on/off/blinking of the LED. The variable display of the first lamp pattern is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81 . In addition, in the sub-first suspension display device 83, the first suspension number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed by lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T12 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B2 (see FIG. 202(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 202(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 202(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished), and the actual stop is made.

Next, at P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of one special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 of the 1-lamp symbol is started. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as the operation of a part of the decoration part or the expansion/contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 202(d)). reference).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 202(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 202(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 202(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of special symbols is started by the first special symbol display device 60. - 特許庁Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one suspended icon H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 202(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub first holding display 83 continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the performance symbol 70a is the decorative part as in the present embodiment. After performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving or enlarging/reducing the whole or part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 202(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 202(h)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("365"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TH continues rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 202(i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 202(i)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At this time, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the special symbol stop time has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P8 ), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 202(j)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect (predetermined effect) is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of P8.

In a state where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", as a predetermined effect executed after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol) is not limited to customer waiting demonstration effects, but may be adjustment guidance effects such as adjustment of volume and brightness of image display devices, guidance effects related to game operations, and other effects. In this case, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the effect other than the customer waiting demo effect is executed. Thus, the predetermined effect includes the effect executed until the next variable effect is started for the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped. Note that the predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), and may be executed by other commands, time by a timer, or the like.

Thus, according to the specific example 1 shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, when the command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m in the state in which the variable production of the production pattern 70a is performed, A performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is finished can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance to perform a customer waiting demonstration performance. It is set not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

After that, since the first reservation number U1 memorized (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the game shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

In addition, at the timing of P7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally received by the production control unit 130m. The same processing as when it is impossible will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in which the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the winning command (first special symbol When the production control unit 130m receives the storage designation command, the first start opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command), the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4 ”. It should be noted that, in the specific example 2, based on the first reservation memory due to the winning at the timing of P1, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the big win is high is executed in advance. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 204(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 204(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 204(c)), and the first ramp. The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, at the timing when the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3", the start command (first special symbol storage When the production control unit 130m receives the specified command, the production pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to " 3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and after performing the preparatory operation, the scrolling is started (see FIG. 204(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 204(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 204(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 204(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 204(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 204(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to "2". It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 204(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 204 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the redundant reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

Thereafter, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the holding icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 204(i)). Here, in specific example 2, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Also in the pre-reading effect target), normal zone effects (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are executed according to the announcement scenario (see FIG. 204(i)), and effect pattern 70a is executed. The look-ahead zone production ends at the time when is fully stopped.

Like the modification shown in FIG. 205, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 changes to "0" special symbols Based on the variable effect (target of the pre-reading effect) executed during display, the normal zone effect (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the announcement scenario. The look-ahead zone effect may be ended without execution. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a mode of performance such as mode A background with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 206. FIG. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

206 differs from the specific example 2 in FIG. 204 in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 206(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 206(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 206(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 206(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 206(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) is continuously executed, and the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2". Except for , the state of FIG. 206(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) 206(g) is maintained.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 206(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 206(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continued. is executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed to produce the production pattern 70a. is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 206(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and icon change effect (the icon change effect) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 3, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 207, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 changes to "0" special symbols Based on the variable performance (subject to suggest the degree of expectation by the pre-reading effect) that is executed during the display, the icon changing effect and the pre-reading effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect effect sound) are continued according to the notice scenario. You may make it complete|finish the look-ahead production|presentation without executing it. When the look-ahead performance is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect performance is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode of performance is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead effect performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 208. FIG. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

Note that, in specific example 4 of FIG. 208, the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading forewarning effect, and the effect by the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading forewarning effect (action effect and light emitting effect). 206 in that this differs from the specific example 3 in FIG. 206, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In specific example 3, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in specific example 2, the explanation is omitted.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 208(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). (see also FIG. 208(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a. The partial period of the variable production is the variable production period from the start of the variable production to the stop (temporary stop or final stop) of the variable production, for example, at the timing of the start of the variable production, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times. execution of a look-ahead effect to perform, a look-ahead effect in which the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing during the variable performance, and a predetermined number of operations of the first movable member 73 at the timing at the end of the variable performance. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect at various times, such as executing the look-ahead effect. In this specific example, the look-ahead effect executed during a partial period of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 208(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 208(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 208(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, except that the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2" without executing the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73, Fig. 208 (g) state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 208(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the action of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 208(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first The first pending icon display area 70B3 is erased without shift display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73 are executed in accordance with the advance notice scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 208(h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead foretelling effect and scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 was completed, the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It will scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 208(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are executed. Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 209, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 changes to "0". Icon change effects and pre-reading forewarning effects (movement effects and light emission effects of the first movable member 73) are continued in accordance with the forewarning scenario based on the variable effects (subjects for which the degree of expectation is suggested by the pre-reading effects) executed during display. You may make it complete|finish the look-ahead production|presentation without executing it. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the execution of the read-ahead notice performance is stopped, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the read-ahead notice performance, such as mode A background only. Also, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win. Furthermore, the look-ahead effect by the first movable member 73 and the like is not executed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, at the timing of P10, when the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m becomes "1" from "3" was explained, but when the first reservation number U1 changes from "4" to "2", and when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, the main control unit 110m grasps If the divergence between the number of reservations held and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (for example, two more than the predetermined number (eg, one)) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons among the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but the necessary number of hold icons (eg, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2-4 shown in FIGS. hold information), when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211. FIG. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4". In specific example 5, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory due to the winning at the timing of P1. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 211(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 211(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 211 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 211(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 211(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 211(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 211(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 211(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 211(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 211(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 211(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1". At the timing of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Further, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 and the redundant reserved icon T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 are erased by one frame of non-animation, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 211). (h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first The first pending icon display area 70B3 is erased without shift display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 211 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

Thereafter, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 211(i)). Here, in specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Also in the pre-reading effect target), normal zone effects (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 211(i)), and the effect pattern 70a is executed. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the time when is fully stopped.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 212, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first pending number U1 changes to "0". Based on the variable effect (target of the pre-reading effect) executed during display, the normal zone effect (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the announcement scenario. The look-ahead zone effect may be ended without execution. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a mode of performance such as mode A background, in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than that of the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 213. FIG. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

213 differs from the specific example 5 in FIG. 211 in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect and an icon change effect is executed. Explanations of common parts are omitted, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 213(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 213(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 213(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 213(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 213(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 213(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 213(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 213(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 213(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timing of P8 to P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 213(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the production design 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 213(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continued. is executed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the completion of the display of the pending icon T1, at the timing of P13, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. It will be scrolled. Specifically, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 213(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and icon change effect (the icon change effect) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 6, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 214, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 changes to "0". Based on the variable performance (subject to suggest the degree of expectation by the pre-reading effect) that is executed during the display, the icon changing effect and the pre-reading effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect effect sound) are continued according to the notice scenario. You may make it complete|finish the look-ahead production|presentation without executing it. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect effect (if it is displayed) is erased, and the expectation for a big hit is lower than the look-ahead effect effect, such as mode A background only. changed to a mode. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 215. FIG. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

215, the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading notice effect, and the effect of the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading notice effect (movable effect and light emitting effect). 215 in that this differs from the specific example 6 in FIG. 215, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In concrete example 7, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 6, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 215(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). At the same time (see FIG. 215(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a predetermined sound effect is output. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of times of the variable effect of the effect pattern 70a in the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 215(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 215(f)). At this time, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 215(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73, Fig. 215 (g) state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 215(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 215(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 215(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

It should be noted that, at the timing of P8 to P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 T12 is erased with one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 215). (h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shift-displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shift-displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, an action presentation of the first movable member 73 is executed along with the advance notice scenario, and a sound effect is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 215(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-reading notice effect and scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 215(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be received normally, the fluctuation production ( The target of the degree of expectation suggestion by the pre-reading advance notice effect) is also executed by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect (the icon change effect). Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in specific example 7, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 216, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 changes to "0". Icon change effects and pre-reading forewarning effects (movement effects and light emission effects of the first movable member 73) are continued in accordance with the forewarning scenario based on the variable effects (subjects for which the degree of expectation is suggested by the pre-reading effects) executed during display. You may make it complete|finish the look-ahead production|presentation without executing it. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the execution of the read-ahead notice performance is stopped, and the mode of performance is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the read-ahead notice performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "0". As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is " 3”, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. As described above, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (eg, three more than a predetermined number (eg, one)) When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the number of reservation icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the predetermined number. It is designed to display a number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first hold information), when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the hold number is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is not displayed and the number of hold icons is less than the specific number. Also, a number of pending icons less by two is displayed, and then a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (For example, four) when the number of reservations is displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is less than the specific number by one or two A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. FIG. 217 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 215(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

218 is the same as the specific example 5 in FIG. 210 up to the timing of P0 to P11, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is accompanied by the decrease in the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m from "1" to "0". is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 218(g) is obtained.

Next, at the timing of P13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 218(g) is maintained.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P12 ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a is continued (see FIG. 218(h)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Also, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of P12.

Thus, according to the eighth specific example shown in FIGS. 217 to 218, when the command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m while the variable production of the production pattern 70a is being performed, A performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance to perform a customer waiting demonstration performance. It is set not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 219, since the first reservation number U1 stored (knowed) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the game may be shifted to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Here, when the production control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the production design 70a may be permanently stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the production design 70a. In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (turning off). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 .

Thus, according to the modification of the eighth specific example shown in FIG. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the predetermined stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (finally stopped) at the stop position. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At the timings of P7, P11, and P13, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m will be sent to the production control unit 130m. is not received normally, the same processing will be performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "3" has been described, but the first pending number Even if the customer waiting state designation command is received in any one of states "4", "2" and "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. FIG. 220 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

218 and 221 are different in that the command received at the timing of P14 is the opening designation command, the description of the common parts is omitted here, and the different parts are only explained.

At the timing of P14, when the stop time of the special symbols elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot game is played. A process for starting the opening effect of is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. In addition, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined failure mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is permanently stopped in a failure mode (for example, turning off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 221 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol storage designation command from the main control unit 110m, The first pending number U1 displayed in the sub first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in non-animation for one frame (see FIG. 221 (j)) . FIG. 221(j) shows the case where the pending number of commands at the start is "1". At this time, a predetermined (same) performance symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the combination of the performance symbols 70a that results in a big win. For example, even if the combination of the production pattern 70a is "777" and the combination of "222" is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

At the timing of P7 to P13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the opening designation command is received in a state where the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3", but the first pending number is "4 , 2, or 1, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the ninth example shown in FIGS. 220 to 221, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stopped position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is played. is designed to display the opening effect image of. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 223(a)).

In specific example 10, based on the first pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 223(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a look-ahead zone effect (ordinary zone effect) is displayed in which a blue zone image is displayed with the characters "ZONE" scrolling in the horizontal direction, and zone BGM is output. ) is running. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 223(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 223(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 223 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 223(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 223(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 223(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 223(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 223(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 223(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, without continuing the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 223). (h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( The normal zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are not continuously executed according to the announcement scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the effect is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 223(h)). As described above, in specific example 10, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 223(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Ordinary zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the announcement scenario based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect).

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 224. FIG. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

223 and 224 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 10, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 223(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 11, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, and the whole or part is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 224(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 224(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image is continued, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 224(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 224(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 224(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 224(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 224(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 224(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T3 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon. Displayed as TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 224(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 224(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect and relevant icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not do. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect presentation is not executed, and the presentation mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead presentation, such as mode A background (see FIG. 224(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the production (target of the look-ahead production), the pre-reading effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (pending icon change production and the icon change production) are continued according to the notice scenario. You can also run

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 225. FIG. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

225 differs from the specific example 11 in FIG. 224 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (an action effect or an issue effect) as the pre-reading preview effect. Explanation of parts is omitted, and only different parts are explained.

In specific example 12, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 225(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 12, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 225(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. A sound effect is also output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 225(d)). It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 225(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 225(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 225(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 225 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 225(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 225(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserve icon T1 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 225(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 225(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading forewarning effect, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position and turns off or emits light in a more plain manner than the fore-reading forewarning effect. As shown in FIG. 225(h), the performance mode is changed to a performance mode in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than in the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 225(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect), the prefetching notice effect and the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed along the notice scenario.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1". As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first reservations changes from "2" to "0", that is, the reservation grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence between the number and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

In this way, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 3) of reserved icons ( When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons among the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but the necessary number of hold icons (eg, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first hold information), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 13 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 227(a)).

In specific example 13, based on the first pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 227(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a look-ahead zone effect (ordinary zone effect) is displayed in which a blue zone image is displayed with the characters "ZONE" scrolling in the horizontal direction, and zone BGM is output. ) is running. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 227(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 227(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 227 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 227(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 227(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 227(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 227(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 227(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 227(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 227(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 227(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 227 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( The normal zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are not continuously executed according to the announcement scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the effect is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 227(h)). Thus, in specific example 13, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 227(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Ordinary zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the announcement scenario based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect).

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 228. FIG. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

227 and 228 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 13, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 227(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 14, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 228(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed (see FIG. 228(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 228(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 228(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 228(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 228(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 228(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 228(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 228(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 228(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 228(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (drawing action) (see FIG. 228(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect and relevant icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not do. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect presentation is not executed, and the presentation mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead presentation, such as mode A background (see FIG. 228(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the production (target of the look-ahead production), the pre-reading effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (pending icon change production and the icon change production) are continued according to the notice scenario. You can also run

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 15 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 229. FIG. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

229 differs from the concrete example 14 in FIG. 228 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (an action effect or an issue effect) as the pre-reading notice effect. Explanation of parts is omitted, and only different parts are explained. In concrete example 15, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 14, the explanation is omitted.

In specific example 15, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 229(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 15, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 229(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). Together with this (see FIG. 229(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. A sound effect is also output. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be continuously executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a. be.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 229(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 229(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 229(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 229 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 229(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 229 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 229(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 229(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 229(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 229(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading forewarning effect, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position and turns off or emits light in a more modest manner than the fore-reading forewarning effect. As shown in FIG. 229(h), the effect mode is changed to a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than in the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 229(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect), the prefetching notice effect and the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed along the notice scenario.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, at the timing of P7 to P11, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the effect control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, at the timing of P12, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "0". As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is " 3”, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. Thus, in the specific examples 13 to 15, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

In this way, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of reserved icons ( When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons among the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but the necessary number of hold icons (eg, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first hold information), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 16 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. FIG. 230 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. 231(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is a production example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the number of first reservations stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. becomes. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the first lamp pattern is started in the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display device 81, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 231(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1" (see FIG. 231(b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 231(c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 231). (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance The first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the processing for starting the variable effect without changing the first reservation number U1 is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area A second pending icon T1 (CD icon) in 70B is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 231(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 231(e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 231(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (the SP reach production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach loss mode (“161”). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 231(g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (extinguishing). Main stop (see FIG. 231(h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display One pending icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 231(i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, so the icon TH is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 231 ( j) see).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P4, the production control unit 130m was able to receive normally the command (a winning command, a stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command sent from The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P5, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" has been described, but the first reservation number U1 is "0" to "0", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of pending (understanding) and the number of holding stored (understood) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the 16th specific example shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, a predetermined number of pending When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), the pending icons are shift-displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending number in the sub-first pending indicator 83 or the first pending number display area 70E, the number of pending When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the concrete example 16 shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, but the pending number is "0" while the icon is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of The pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, while displaying the number of reservations of "0" in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations is "0" When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of reservations of “0” is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than “0” (for example, one). ). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 17 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 and 233. FIG. FIG. 232 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area Two pending icons T1 displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 233(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 233(c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 233). (d)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance When the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", processing for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area A pending icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions of 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 233(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 233(e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 233(f)).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at winning, command at stop, command at start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the command (the winning command, the stopping command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m , start time command) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of P7, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" has been described, but the first reservation number U1 is "1". to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of pending (understood) is greater than the number of pending (understood) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the concrete example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 to 233, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area, the number of pending When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) greater than the specified number, after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), A specific number of pending icons are displayed by shifting the pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 to 233, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending number in the sub-first pending indicator 83 or the first pending number display area 70E, the pending number When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, 2) that is greater than a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is 1 more than the specific number (for example, 3) is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the concrete example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 to 233, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but the pending number is a predetermined number (for example, When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of 1), after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), these pending icons are shift-displayed. By doing so, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 to 233, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations is a predetermined number ( For example, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that is one), the predetermined number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

According to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the fluctuation period of the special design TZ and the lamp design , the output period of the changing BGM is extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even if the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol During the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the production that is shifted from the predetermined stop position After all the production patterns 70a including the pattern 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the variable display is started. . Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the lamp design are not stopped and displayed. The variable display is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol. In addition, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (immediately derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern can inform the player that the variable production is being performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command at start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon is displayed for the normal time (when the command at stop is received). It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than 10 frames of animation in the case of Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead forewarning effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m normally issues the start time command. When received, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed fluctuation effect. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-described specific example, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead forewarning effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m normally issues the start time command. When received, it is possible to execute an effect of contents according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Concrete example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 18 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235. FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the shift display of the pending icon is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first reservation number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E "1" remains, and the second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (see FIG. 235(a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display 3 corresponding to "3" of the first reservation number U1 without displaying the reservation icon T1 in the second area corresponding to "2" of the first reservation number U1 that could not receive the command at the time of winning of the area 70B. Second, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as an animation of 10 frames (see FIG. 235(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 235(c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turning off). (See FIG. 235(d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "2" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon display In the area 70B, the second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) and displayed. The three pending icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the top one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 235(e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 235(f)).

Next, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 235(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turning off). (See FIG. 235(h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 235(i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon Th is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (Fig. 235 ( j) see).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. is not normally received by the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, it is the same as when the effect control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. will be processed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first reservation number is "3" When the winning command is received As described above, when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "1" and the first reservation number U1 is "4" When the winning command is received, the production control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m is "0", the first reservation number U1 is either "2", "3", or "4". However, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the eighteenth specific example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the holding icon (first holding information ) is not displayed, when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command in which the reserved number is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to (eg, the second), the pending icon is displayed in an area (eg, the third) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 to 235, a number (eg, one ), when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command in which the number of reservations is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, display the number of reservations of the predetermined number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts instead of Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the eighteenth specific example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the holding icon (first holding information ) is not displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command with a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas A region corresponding to a specific number (for example, 4th) to display a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 to 235, a number (eg, one ) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the number of reservations more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the predetermined number is less than the specific number by one. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without displaying the number of pending counts. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

234 and 235, a predetermined number of reserved icons are not displayed in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start that the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the reservation icon is displayed in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the reservation After a specific number of reserved icons are displayed by additionally displaying a reserved icon in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of icon display areas, the reserved icons are shift-displayed to display a predetermined number of reserved icons. icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

234 and 235, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number (for example, the second number) that is larger than the predetermined number ( (e.g., 3)) without displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a specific number (e.g., 4) that is more than a predetermined number (e.g., 4). When the effect control unit 130m receives a start time command that is one less than the number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number of the pending icon display areas (for example, the second) and a number that is one more than the predetermined number ( (for example, 3) to display a specific number of reserved icons, and then shift-display those reserved icons to display a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 to 235, the icon corresponding to the first pending storage for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a pending icon. , the icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described specific example, in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of pending memories, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol reservation display 63 (first display), the number of reservations is continuously reduced even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, the main control board 110 has a specific number (the number of which is less than the main control board 110 by 2 or more) less than a predetermined number (4 or 3)), and the effect control board 130 When the command is normally received in the first image display device 70 (second display), the hold display (for example, the number of hold icons is 4 to 2 or 1, 3 to 1) are not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the pending display (display of the number of pending, pending icon) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, and the effect is performed during the pre-reading effect by the pending display. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the control board 130, the read-ahead effect by the pending display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the background display (for example, a background image that is different from the one normally used, such as the look-ahead zone background) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a big hit in advance. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance by the background display, the look-ahead performance by the background display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received. .
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is increased in advance by displaying text (for example, a telop or text such as "ZONE"), and execution of the pre-reading effect by displaying text. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during this, the read-ahead performance by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance by the degree of expectation display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame accessories, operation such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.), and abnormal reception or non-reception of commands in the production control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead production When an abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue the look-ahead effect until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance is possible, and an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance, and performance control is performed. When there is a jackpot in the reserve memory that the substrate 130 has missed, the read-ahead performance by the reserve display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, and the predetermined big prize winning opening can be opened. good.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame accessories, operation such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.), and abnormal reception or non-reception of commands in the production control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead production After an abnormality has occurred, when the command is received normally, the read-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously will not be performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a foreseeing effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 There are board accessories and frame accessories such as, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eyes of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a continuous look-ahead performance across a plurality of pattern variations based on the first suspension storage, it is stored after the first suspension storage. When the command corresponding to the second reserved memory is normally received, the read-ahead performance which was scheduled to be continuously executed based on the predetermined reserved memory is not performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of pending memories, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations (first display) continues to decrease even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, the main control board 110 has a specific number (the number of which is less than the main control board 110 by 2 or more) less than a predetermined number (4 or 3)), and the effect control board 130 when the command is normally received, the pending display (second display, for example, four pending icons from 2 or 1, from 3 to 1) are not displayed. On the other hand, in the reservation number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the reservation display (third display, for example, reservation number) that gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number is not displayed, It is designed to change to a specific number of pending display.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the production control board 130, the production pattern 70a in which the variable production is completed can be displayed in a temporary stop state (swing state). Even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop state (swing state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance based on the first suspension storage, the second suspension storage stored after the first suspension storage. When the command corresponding to is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the prefetching production (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed for the first reserved storage is not continued. Alternatively, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received performance pattern 70a fluctuating display is different from the first pending memory. Do not continue the pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously, or change the pre-reading effect to a display with lower expectations, or erase the pre-reading effect It's becoming
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continuously executed for the first reserved memory. The planned read-ahead performance (advance notification) by character display is not continued, or the read-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the read-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production design 70a, it is continuously with respect to the first reserved memory. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) due to the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed is not continued, or the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the pre-reading effect is erased. .
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. As advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in the period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, board accessories such as the first movable member 70, etc. There are frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chance eyes of the same color of production patterns. Then, based on the first reserved storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance executed in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances in the period before reach. After an abnormality has occurred, when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received performance symbol 70a fluctuating display with respect to the first pending memory The read-ahead performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed is not continued, the read-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the read-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when there is a jackpot in the command (reserved memory) missed by the performance control board 130 due to the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command in the performance control board 130, the memory is stored after the big win reserving memory or the big winning reserving memory. When the command corresponding to the pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the anticipation performance (advance notification) by the degree of expectation display scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. may not be performed continuously, the look-ahead effect may be changed to a display with a lower degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect may be deleted.
In this case, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or before the first pending memory is stored When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. can continue to run.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or before the first pending memory is stored When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. will not continue to run.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received effect pattern 70a fluctuating display shows the The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for one reserved memory, can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received effect pattern 70a fluctuating display shows the The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for one reserved memory, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, during execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, for the first pending memory The read-ahead performance (advance notification) by character display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, can be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, during execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, for the first pending memory The read-ahead effect (advance notification) by character display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the first pending memory It is possible to continue to execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the degree of expectation that was scheduled to be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the first pending memory The pre-reading effect (advance notification) due to the degree of expectation display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, will not be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. there is
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. there is
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, the first image display device 70 is used among the plurality of look-ahead performances until the command is normally received. While the first prefetch effect to be executed (for example, pending display) can be continuously executed, the second prefetch effect executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 ( For example, the action rendering of the first movable member 70, etc.) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, when the command is normally received, the first prefetch effect (for example, pending display) out of the plurality of prefetch effects ) can be executed continuously, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display, the motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. .
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, when the command is normally received, the first image display device 70 is used to execute one of the plurality of look-ahead performances. While the first prefetch effect (for example, pending display) can be continuously executed, among the plurality of prefetch effects, the second prefetch effect (for example, , motion effects of the first movable member 70, etc.) are not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the identification part (number) constituting the effect pattern 70a and the effect (EF) attached to the character are displayed. ) is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and a part of the decoration (for example, the bar image) attached to the character constituting the effect pattern 70a SG) is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the motion effect of the pending icon T is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

When the number of reservations stored in the main control board 110 is less than the number of reservations stored in the effect control board 130 by 2 or more, it is displayed on the liquid crystal (first image display device, second image display device) The number of reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved commands input from the main control board 110 is rewritten without performing the performance of gradually reducing the number of reserved icons that have been deviated.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Pre-notification (read-ahead effect) that increases the expectation of a big hit includes, for example, change of hold, character display for hold change, change of character display for hold change, character display (telop) that suggests transition to a mode consisting of multiple types. , Background color change, Background change, Return of appearing characters, Appearance of new characters, Display of expectations by multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), Predetermined production performed for the first period (before reach) from the start of fluctuation (Button vibration, movement of frame/board accessories, effect, thunder, character display, specific sound, predetermined lamp light emission) may be executed in parallel.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands via the state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the production pattern 70a is statically displayed (main stop), and according to the command Display processing may be executed.

Even if the effect control board 130 has abnormally received or not received the stop time command, the background image associated with each of the plurality of effect modes may be displayed. At this time, in a plurality of production modes, although a common display mode (shape and color) is displayed for suspension, simulation, group notice, etc., the degree of expectation may differ depending on the production mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a display of a light guide plate, a title display, and the like are displayed in a mode with different expectations for a big win depending on the production mode.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, if the next command is received normally, the previous look-ahead effect may not continue to be executed.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to execute a new effect (including, for example, changing the icon at that time).

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change the display mode to a display mode with a lower degree of expectation than the previous look-ahead effect (for example, change the pending display from a blue icon to a plain display).

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading production for changing the background display (mode, stage), abnormal reception or non-reception In the state, a look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading production of displaying the character display (for example, telop), abnormal reception or non-reception In the state of , the look-ahead effect of displaying characters (telop) may be continuously displayed.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormal reception or non-receipt state of the stop command during the pre-reading production that displays the expected value display (color change, effect, suspension), abnormal In the state of reception or non-reception, a look-ahead effect of displaying an expected value display (color change, effect, suspension) may be continuously executed.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, the variable performance is completed without being limited to displaying a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a after the completion of the variable performance in a temporary stop state (swing state). A part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a may be displayed in a temporary stop state (oscillating state), and the rest of the plurality of performance symbols 70a may be displayed in a permanent stop state (stationary state). For example, when a command of the production control board 130 is missed, the left and right two production patterns 70a are permanently stopped, while the central production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, and the left and right two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped. , and can be changed as appropriate, such as by permanently stopping the center effect pattern 70a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, an effect may be executed such that the identification part (number) constituting the effect pattern 70a in which the variable effect is finished operates. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

When a command of the production control board 130 is missed, an effect (for example, a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the production pattern 70a for which the variable production is completed is displayed. ) to operate. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

When a command of the production control board 130 is missed, decorations (for example, a stick-shaped image SG that is a part of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) that constitutes the production pattern 70a for which the variable production is completed. ) to operate. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the stick image SG and the symbol effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate (act effect). Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to continue the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ.

Even if the numerical information of the production pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ are different when the variable production of the production pattern 70a is started based on the normal command after the command of the production control board 130 is missed. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a of the losing mode is finally stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the same number as the production pattern 70a The main stop may be made in such a failure mode. In addition, when the production pattern 70a of the jackpot mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"). You may make it stop.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production design 70a (first special design storage designation command, production design designation command, first special design variation pattern specified command) is received by the effect control unit 130m, the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern is continued, but similar to the effect pattern 70a, it is instantaneously derived and displayed, and then the variable display is performed. You may start. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is being displayed, the icon TH is erased by one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TH upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for the shift display of the pending icon T, and the 10 frames required for the additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the start command is received while the number of pending icons greater than the number of pending icons is displayed, the surplus pending icons T1 are erased by one frame of non-animation. Any number of frames shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon T1, 20 frames for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the pending icon based on the reception of the stop command may be used, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased after a minute animation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, so that the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasp). If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the direction of increase) due to command abnormalities between the reserved number and the number of pending icons that are one more than the predetermined number Although a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed after being displayed, the predetermined number of pending icons may be displayed as they are without displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, so that the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasp). If there is an inconsistency between the pending number and the command abnormality (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the direction of increase), it will be executed according to the reception of this command at the start Although the icon is displayed during the variable effect, the icon may not be displayed during the variable effect executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of effect mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of the effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the prefetch designation command of the hold number designation command as the winning command are normally received, but the hold number designation command is received and the prefetch designation The pending icon may be displayed when the command is not received normally, while the pending icon may not be displayed when the prefetching designation command is normally received without the pending number designation command being received normally. and vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for the pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing operation effects (dialogue announcement effect, decision effect) was only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as a effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example During the effective period generated during the SP ready-to-play performance, an operation promoting performance for prompting the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever is executed, and the operation performance (decision performance, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever. may In this case, the decision effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) is more An operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a low rate (hardly executed).

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, an operation announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is not executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 that has become effective. In the first half period of the ready-to-win effect (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP ready-to-win effect), the operation announcement effect may be executed respectively. In this case, the operation announcement effect executed in the second half period of the ready-to-win effect is more likely than the operation announcement effect executed in the first half period of the ready-to-win effect. ) should be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member are not linked, but the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable performance, the movable member operates more in the case where the announcement performance with high jackpot expectation is executed than in the case where the announcement performance with low jackpot expectation is executed. It is preferable to make the ratio high (easy to operate).

In the present embodiment, as pending storage in the first image display device 70, the pending icon T1 (T2) is displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), and the pending number is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F). there is In this way, in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), the number of pending is displayed by the number of display of the pending icon T1 (T2), and in the pending number display area 70E (70F), the number of pending is displayed by the numeric information of the pending number. it's shown. The pending icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, character or symbol as in the "CD" shape of the present embodiment, but may be a combination of a plurality of pictures, figures, characters or symbols, or a It is possible to adopt an appropriate configuration, such as adding effects (effect production) and decorations to main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of holds, such as the hold icon change effect, is not limited to changing the hold icon alone. good. In addition, the change in the pending icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification) by character display, the example of scrolling the characters "ZONE" in the left and right direction was given, but the character display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but also symbols, pictures, drawings, or these. It may be a combination of Also, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may vary depending on the level of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, but may be zoomed in or out, panned or tilted, etc., to attract the attention of the player.

As the anticipation effect (advance notification) by the degree of expectation display, the blue effect image EF was exemplified, and the one by the color effect was mentioned, but it is not limited to the color effect. Appropriate displays can be employed, such as working effects such as being sucked in like a hall, or blowing wind. In addition, the degree of expectation display is not limited to accompanying the production pattern 70a or by the production pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed in the background or the like. Furthermore, the degree of expectation display is not limited to being displayed on the first image display device 70, and may be a winning device such as an accessory provided on the game board, a light-emitting device, or a starter, or an accessory or light-emitting device provided in the game frame. You may perform by light emission, etc., such as.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the degree-of-expectation display may be an effect executed only before the ready-to-win or an effect also executed after the ready-to-win. Moreover, when performing the degree-of-expectation display after reach, it may be displayed continuously in the form before reach, or may be changed so as to be displayed in a form different from the form before reach.

The look-ahead effect (preliminary notification) may proceed at a variable effect or at an appropriate timing according to the scenario drawn by lottery, but for each variable effect, the presence or absence of progress and the necessity of changing the degree of expectation A lottery may be held and progress may be made according to the results.

As the effect presentation represented by the effect, the design effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character and the color effect exemplifying the blue effect image EF were mentioned, but not limited to the color effect, for example, a halo is shining. It is possible to adopt an appropriate display such as a light emitting effect such as a black hole sucking in or a wind blowing effect.

In the present embodiment, a specific example was described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the command is normally received from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be normally received in the effect control unit 130m. When the icon TH is received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the effect control unit 130m described above, when the first special symbol holding display 63 can not normally receive the command (signal) from the main control unit 110m, the holding displayed by the first special symbol holding display 63 A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of reservations grasped (stored) by the effect control unit 130m diverge.
That is, the first special symbol reservation display device 63 (first display means) is capable of executing the first shift display that sequentially decreases the reservation memory by one each time the variable production is started, and the production control unit 130m In a state where there are a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories, when a command (signal) for a specific number of reserved memories (for example, two) less than the predetermined number by two or more is received from the main control unit 110m, the It is possible to perform a second shift display that reduces the reserved storage from a predetermined number to a specified number in a manner different from the one-shift display (directly reducing from four to two without going through three). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the effect control section 130m displays the effect symbols even when either the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variable performance of 70a is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.
According to this, therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In a specific example, it is possible to display the pending memory stored (grasped) by the effect control unit at a plurality of places. In this embodiment, the pending storage is displayed in two places, the pending icon display area 70B (70D) and the pending number display area 70E (70F) of the first image display device 70. For example, the first image display device The pending memory may be displayed on each of 70 and second image display device 71 , or at multiple locations on second image display device 71 .

In a specific example, in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to execute the first shift display in which the pending memory is decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. This first shift display, for example, is displayed such that the pending icon T1 (T2) is shifted one by one each time the variable effect is performed. Further, in a state in which, for example, four pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), when the effect control unit 130m receives commands corresponding to, for example, two pending storage, the pending The same display as the first shift display, in which the icons T1 (T2) shift from 4 to 3 and then decrease to 3 and then shift from 3 to 2, is not performed, and the reserved icon T1 (T2) is displayed. After the fourth item of , the second shift display is performed such that the number of items is shifted from three to two items. On the other hand, in the pending number display area 70E (70F) that displays the pending memory by the pending numbers (number information), the pending numbers are displayed so as to decrease one by one each time the variable effect is started. there is In a state where, for example, the pending number "4" is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F), for example, when the effect control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to two pending memories (the second shift display is executed ), instead of sequentially decreasing the reserved digits by one, the third shift display is performed to display the reserved digit "2" corresponding to two reserved memories from the reserved digit "4". It's becoming

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification), by executing a related effect in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects, it is possible to indicate that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Suggestion is feasible. "Related production" includes various productions such as production by actions and light emission by accessories provided on the game frame and game board, action and light emission such as vibration of operation buttons, and chance eyes of the same color of production pattern 70a. Even if the same performance is executed in each variable performance, the contents of the performance may be different for each variable performance, such as executing a different performance that increases the degree of expectation, for example, as the variable performance is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control unit 110m, the performance related to the look-ahead effect (advance notification) is continued. It doesn't matter if it's executed or not. In such a case, it is possible to attract the player's interest by continuously executing the related effects. Also, by not continuously executing related effects, the consistency of the effects can be maintained.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored after the target memory and becomes normal, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In addition, an effect related to the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory (for example, performing a large action effect of the first movable member 73) can be replaced with another related effect with a lower degree of expectation than the related effect (for example, the first movable member 73). The action effect of the member 73 may be reduced). Additionally, the associated effects of the look-ahead effects based on the target pending memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory, the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the expectation of the player can be improved by continuing the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled and becomes normal based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, it is possible to maintain the consistency of the production.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as JP 2018-118109 A, the main control board controls the main control board to operate the driving source for converting the large winning opening and the starting opening from the closed state to the open state. ing. However, in a conventional game machine, when a game board is replaced in a game arcade or a game board constituting the front side of the game board is replaced, the drive source that operates under the control of the main control board does not generate an activation trigger. is not easy, and it is difficult to check the operation of these driving sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 236 to 240 has a drive source (large winning opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) for which the main control board 110 performs operation control as a result of the game, and the main control The substrate 110 initially operates the drive source in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state before shifting to a playable state for controlling a game after power supply is started.
As a result, for a certain period of time limited to the state before the start of the game (pre-start state), the special electric role item, the normal electric role item, and the distribution mechanism in the big prize opening are operated, and the installation is confirmed by confirming the operation. In addition, it is possible to more reliably perform inspection and confirmation after part replacement.

As shown in FIG. 236, when a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the end of setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 237, when the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is set as the pre-start state. . In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, for example, after 7 seconds have passed since the transition to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the game result is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times, for example. After doing so, it is better to shift to a playable state.

As shown in FIG. 239, when a setting change device is installed, the state before starting is changing settings or checking settings.

As shown in FIG. 240, when the setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is the period from when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until when the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again. In this case, when shifting to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. Repeat until you move. In this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, payout of prize balls due to entry of a game ball into a winning opening, operation of a special symbol display device or special electric accessory due to entry of a game ball into a starting opening, and normal operation of a game ball The operation of the normal design display device or the operation of the normal electric accessory due to passing through the gate or winning the winning opening related to the operation of the design display device is invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so the launch of the game ball is not invalidated. Also, in the pre-start state, the performance display monitor should be extinguished (not displayed).

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, while the big winning hole is open in the pre-start state, the open signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. A power-on/power-recovery command should be transmitted when transitioning to the playable state, and the initial operation of the gimmick (accessory) should be performed after transitioning to the playable state. Then, during the operation of the large winning opening solenoid in the pre-start state, the large winning opening LED and the like should not emit light as in the case of a big win.

It is preferable that the performance display monitor performs full lighting for, for example, 5 seconds after the end of the scan mode, and then displays the base value. In addition, it is preferable to stop firing in the state of "other than power recovery" (state before start, during unrecoverable error).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means for controlling the presentation of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control means. (Production control unit 130m), the main control means (main control unit 110m) stores a pending memory based on establishment of a starting condition (a winning of a game ball to the starting ports 45 and 47). In addition, it is controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved displays 63, 64), and whether a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is performed based on the reserved memory. It is possible to determine whether or not, the secondary control means (effect control unit 130m) controls to display the pending memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) In addition, the second display means can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform the variable effect A first shift display (e.g., 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the pending memories by one each time is started, and a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of pending memories , when the slave control means receives from the main control means a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals that are two or more less than the predetermined number, the first shift indication (for example, 4 to 3); can execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number to the specific number in a different reduction mode, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display 63, 64 ) is suspended each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the memories can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4 ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by a pending memory (for example, icon change effect) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special The second display means (the first Even if the reserved memory displayed on the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) does not decrease to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be executed continuously, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display Units 63 and 64) complete the determination even when either the first shift indication (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift indication (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that it is possible to sequentially display the reserved memory one by one each time it is performed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4 ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by background display (for example, change to look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display In the means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the second display means during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) Even if the reserved memory displayed on (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) is not reduced to the specific number (for example, 2), It is possible to continue the pre-article notification, and the first display means (special symbol The holding indicators 63, 64) indicate whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. , the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time .

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4 ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by character display (eg, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means ( The second display means (second Even if the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, four) does not decrease to the specific number (for example, two), the preliminary The notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation The display devices 63, 64) make the determination regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed. It is characterized in that it is possible to sequentially display the reserved memory one by one each time it ends.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and based on undetermined pending storage In addition, advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high can be executed by the degree of expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display The device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved In the state in which the memory is displayed, the slave control means (production control section 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of pending memory signals that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means. (main control unit 110m), the reserved storage is reduced from the predetermined number (eg, 4) to the specific number (eg, 2) in a manner different from the first shift display (eg, 4 to 3) It is possible to execute the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) to decrease to, and the first display means (special symbol holding display 63, 64) reduces the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number ( The predetermined number of reserved memories displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) during the period in which the reserved memories are displayed so as to decrease one by one. (For example, four) to the specific number (for example, two) even in a predetermined state that does not decrease, it is possible to continue the prior notification, the first display means (special symbol holding display 63, 64) includes the first shift representation (eg, 4 to 3) and the Even when any of the second shift displays (for example, 4 to 2) is executed, it is characterized in that the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute the variation performance of the performance symbols, and each of the plurality of the variation performances By executing the related production (for example, the operation production of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of the variable production, the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. The second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute the notification, and the first shift that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started Display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the subordinate control means (effect control unit 130m) controls a predetermined number (for example, 4) ) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) is said first display means being capable of executing a second shift display (e.g. 4 to 2) for decreasing the reserved storage from said predetermined number (e.g. 4) to said specific number (e.g. 2) in a different decreasing mode; (Special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed. , Each time the determination is completed, it is possible to sequentially decrease and display the pending memory one by one, and the slave control means (production control unit 130m) is the first display means (special symbol holding indicators 63, 64) In spite of the increase/decrease of the reserved memory, the second display means (the first image display device 70, A predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, and the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notification. When, the advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related effect (for example, the action effect of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to control to display the reservation memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and an advantageous special game (jackpot) based on the reservation memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform, and the secondary control means (effect control unit 130m) displays the pending memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) In addition, the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the reserved memory is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing mode different from the first shift display. a second shift indication (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be performed, and the number of pending memories can be indicated by numerical information, and when said second shift indication is performed, said numerical information can be executed to display the numeric information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of the reserved storage without displaying the numbers sequentially decreasing one by one (for example, 4 to 2), and When the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64) performs any of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) However, each time the determination is completed, the reserved storage can be sequentially displayed with a decrease of one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The one-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer-waiting demonstration effect) when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, and the above-described It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memories by one each time the variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories is displayed. In the state, the slave control means (production control section 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means (main control section 110m). a second shift that reduces the reserved storage from the predetermined number (e.g. 4) to the specified number (e.g. 2) in a different decrementing manner than the first shift indication (e.g. 4 to 3) if received from Display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64) reserves from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). The reserved memory displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) during the period in which the memory is displayed so as to decrease by one is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, four) When it is in a predetermined state in which it does not decrease to the specific number (for example, two), the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and even if a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable production, the predetermined Without executing the production (for example, customer waiting demonstration production), the first display means (Special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed. , the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display etc.) can be executed, and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed, any one of changing the prior notification to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification, and erasing the prior notification based on the target reservation memory. characterized by

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) ) The display means (the first image display device 70 , the second image display device 71) can be executed by the background display (for example, the look-ahead zone background), and the display means ( When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the above-mentioned The pre-notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the retained memory stored after the target retained memory that is the target of the pre-notified, the pre-notification based on the target retained memory The prior notification based on the target reserved memory is changed to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification, and the previous notification based on the target reserved memory and erasing the pre-notification.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71) can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance The target pending memory does not continue to perform the advance notification based on the target pending memory when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory to be notified. any one of changing the pre-announcement based on the pre-announcement to another pre-announcement with a lower expectation than the pre-announcement, and erasing the pre-announcement based on the target reservation memory. characterized by performing

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. The advance based on the target reserved memory, wherein the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory. Any one of changing the notification to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification and erasing the prior notification based on the target reservation memory. do.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and by executing the related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of the variable performances, Undetermined It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the pending memory, and the display despite the increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, The advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, based on the target reservation memory The advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related performance (eg, the operation of the first movable member 73), and the performance related to the prior notification based on the target reservation memory (eg, the operation of the first movable member 73) is changed to another related effect with a lower expectation than the related effect; characterized by performing

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display ) can be executed, and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification is performed. When returning from the predetermined state based on the pending memory memorized after the target pending memory, the previous notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed based on the target pending memory. performing any one of changing the previous notification to another prior notification having a lower expectation than the prior notification and deleting the prior notification based on the target reservation memory, and displaying the display; Means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable effect is started. It is possible, and in a state where the secondary control means (production control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, the secondary control means (production control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) When a specific number of reserved storage signals smaller by two or more (for example, two) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a decrease mode different from the first shift display (for example, from four to three) The predetermined number of reserved memories (for example a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that decreases from the specified number (for example, 4) to the specified number (for example, 2); the numerical information is capable of displaying the number of pending memories; When the shift display is executed, a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the display means can execute a prescribed production (for example, a customer waiting demonstration production), and the main control means (main When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the control unit 110m), the While the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in the temporary stop state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in the temporary stop state. At the same time, even if a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable performance, the predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed, and the holding memory stored after the target holding memory that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is expected more than the advance notification and erasing the advance notification based on the target reservation memory.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in hold storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the preliminary notification can be continued and the target targeted for the preliminary notification is held. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in hold storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the preliminary notification can be continued and the target targeted for the preliminary notification is held. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before storage, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (for example, look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the pending storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the advance notification can be performed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the object of (1), the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (for example, look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the pending storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the advance notification can be performed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the object of (1), the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory to be notified, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notification (for example, a pending icon change effect) that can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) and suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high; The degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, an action performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances. is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the second advance notification is continued. and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory is associated. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notification (for example, a pending icon change effect) that can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) and suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high; The degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, an action performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances. is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the second advance notification is continued. and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory is associated. It is characterized in that the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.) is not executed from the continuation.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. The display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, from four to 3) can be executed, and in a state where the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) can execute a predetermined number (for example, When a specific number (for example, 2) of signals of reserved storage less than 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), reserved storage is performed in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. is reduced from the predetermined number (e.g. 4) to the specific number (e.g. 2) (e.g. 4 to 2), and the number of pending memories can be displayed by numerical information. Yes, and the second shift indication is executed If so, a third shift display (4 to 2) is executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of reserved storage without displaying the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory is continuously executed. First, the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) displays a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 ) can be executed, and in a state where the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four When a specific number (for example, 2) of signals of reserved storage that is less than the number of the reserved storage by 2 or more is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), reserved storage is performed in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. A second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be performed to decrease the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), and numerical information can display the number of pending memories. , when the second shift indication is executed In this case, it is possible to execute a third shift display (4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of reserved storage without displaying the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one. It is characterized by

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) at, and it is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and the variable production is started. When there is no reserved memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control unit 110m) can increase or decrease the reserved memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continued. When the predetermined state occurs, the target that is the target of the advance notification without executing the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demonstration effect) even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the reserved memory, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) at, and it is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and the variable production is started. When there is no reserved memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control unit 110m) can increase or decrease the reserved memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continued. When the predetermined state occurs, the target that is the target of the advance notification without executing the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demonstration effect) even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect. The pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the reserved memory.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. It can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the pending memory and the production pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporary stop state, an effect production (for example, a pattern effect image ZE) can be executed in the production pattern (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed. , the slave control means (production control unit 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals (commands) that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means (main control unit 110m ), the display rendering for gradually reducing the number of pending memories is not performed (for example, twice) by the difference between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the It is characterized by displaying a predetermined number (for example, two) of pending memories.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. Display is possible in the temporary stop state, and the display means (the first image display device 70, the second
When the predetermined state occurs, the image display device 71) continues to display the reserved memory, and displays at least the decorative portion of the performance design (70a) in a state of temporarily stopping the performance design (70a). In a state in which a part (for example, bar-shaped image SG) of action effects can be executed and a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories are displayed, the subordinate control means (effect control unit 130m) controls a predetermined number (for example, When a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals (commands) less than 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the display of gradually decreasing the number of reserved storage The performance is not performed for the number of deviations (for example, 2 times) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the predetermined number (for example, 2) of pending memories is displayed. and

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. It can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) displays the production pattern (70a) in the temporary stop state when the predetermined state occurs. state, the display of the pending memory can be continued, and the effect rendering of the pending memory can be executed. ) receives from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals (commands) that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the number of pending storage is not performed (for example, twice) by the number of deviations between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the predetermined number (for example, 2) is reserved is displayed.

(Image change effect)
The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) can execute various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a. In addition, as an effect display, on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71, an image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a partial area of the screen can be reduced, enlarged, transformed, rotated, or the like. It is possible to execute an image change effect that changes by combining one or more of. It can be said that the image change effect is to make the screen appear to be moving, such as by shaking the screen itself depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, timing during the execution period of the variable effect, timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

In the following description, in the drawings, the changing display of the screen on which the image changing effect is executed is referred to as "SV display", and the normal screen display on which the image changing effect is not executed is referred to as "normal display". and notation. In the image change effect, the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.: FIG. 242(a)) displayed on the screen in the normal display, and the change in the first image are displayed on the screen in the change display. 242(c)) (for example, a reduced effect pattern 70a, a reduced background image HG, etc.: FIG. 242(c)). It can also be said that the second image in the change display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in the normal display due to its shape and information.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable effect or the like. For example, the image change effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the start of the variable effect (synchronized), executed in the middle of the execution period of the variable effect, or in accordance with the timing of the end of the variable effect (synchronized ) may be executed. In addition, the image change effect is triggered by an external factor such as the winning of a game ball into the winning hole or the operation of the effect button device 16, or a predetermined effect pattern such as the selection of a predetermined game state or a look-ahead effect. Execution can be triggered by various conditions, such as internal factors such as the selection of .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured to be able to execute image change effects in the image display devices 70 and 71 in conjunction with light emission effects by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 . In addition, the image change effects in the image display devices 70 and 71 may be performed in addition to or instead of the light emission effects by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. , second movable member 74). Furthermore, the image change effects on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the audio output of the audio output device 9 .

(First movable accessory - action)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is driven by a driving force of a first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform an effect motion of moving vertically between the effect position located at . It should be noted that it is possible to detect that the first movable member 73 is at the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the rendering position. The first movable member 73 performs a predetermined effect action such as largely vibrating over the entire area between the standby position and the effect position or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. It is configured to be changeable from the first mode to the second mode.

(First movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting regions HK1 can emit light independently of other portions of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting area HK1 has a first state in which the first movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is extinguished and no dramatic light is emitted. It is possible to change the light emission state at any time. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished, the whole or a part of the range of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is in the dramatic light emission, the first state The first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state. It may be made darker, less bright than in the first state, or less saturated than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED that is lit or extinguished.

(Second movable accessory - action)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, is driven by a driving force of a second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), between a standby position (original position) positioned on the upper right side. It is possible to perform an effect motion of moving diagonally up and down between the effect position located in the lower left corner. It should be noted that it is possible to detect that the second movable member 74 is at the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the second movable member 74 moves obliquely downward from the standby position toward the rendering position. The second movable member 74 performs a predetermined effect action such as largely vibrating over the entire area between the standby position and the effect position, or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. It is configured to be changeable from the first mode to the second mode.

(Second movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting areas HK1, and the first light emitting areas HK1 can emit light independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting area HK1 has a first state in which the second movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is extinguished and no dramatic light is emitted. It is possible to change the light emission state at any time. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished, the entire or partial range of the second movable member 74 is darkened, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is in the effect light emission, The second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state. It may be made darker, less bright than in the first state, or less saturated than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED, which is lit or extinguished.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) moves back and forth in the second mode. You may make it perform production|presentation operation|movement by .

(Second light emitting region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided at least one of the parts different from the movable accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) as part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. A second light emitting region HK2 is provided. The parts of the board illumination device 76 that become the second light emitting area HK2 include, for example, the decorative frame 40, the space between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46). It may be an accessory attached to the game board 5 such as a prize winning hole lamp NR for emitting light in a predetermined manner, a general winning hole 43, a big winning hole 50, or the game board 5 itself. Further, the part of the frame lighting device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2 includes, for example, the glass frame 4 and the like. It should be noted that a part other than the movable accessory, such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the production button device 16, may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting region HK2 is provided at a plurality of locations. NR) and the frame illumination device 10 provided on the glass frame 4 function as the second light emitting area HK2. A plurality of second light emitting regions HK2 may be divided into different members such as the decorative frame 40 and prize winning openings, or may be plural in one member such as the decorative frame 40 .

The second light emitting region HK2 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting LEDs (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light-emitting region HK2 is capable of effecting light emission independently of the first light-emitting region HK1 and other second light-emitting regions. The first light emitting area HK2 changes the light emitting state between a first state in which the LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the LED is extinguished and the light is not emitted. is possible. By being in the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is extinguished, in the embodiment, the whole or a part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and the second light emitting region HK2 emits the effect light. By being in state 1, the periphery of the screen becomes brighter than when the first light emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state. Alternatively, the brightness may be lowered, or the saturation may be lowered from that in the first state. Also, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LED that is lit or extinguished.

(Specific example 1 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 1 of an image change effect executed in conjunction with effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 241 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 4 is a timing chart of specific example 1 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 242 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 1 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 242(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 242(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronously with) the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the winning entrance lamp NR changes from the first state to the second state in which it is turned off. Change. In addition, the second light emitting region HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 is maintained in the first state regardless of the change of the other second light emitting region HK2 in association with the first light emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to the change display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in synchronization with (synchronously with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display. 1 The change from the first mode to the second mode of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in Example 1, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. be.

As shown in FIG. 242(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. In Specific Example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are switched to the first state in the middle of the image change effect execution period. It is set (see FIG. 242(d)). Further, in Specific Example 1, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle. Here, in Specific Example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). ), but the switching timing may be staggered. Then, in the specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 are illuminated in the first state in the subsequent image change effect.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing display and the pending numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 242(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (in synchronization with) the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 242(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 242(f)) in synchronization with the start of the normal display at the timing of T5. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 1, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display on the screen, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. First, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes depending on whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in association with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 1, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 2 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 243 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 2 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 244 shows an effect example when the image change effect of specific example 2 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 244(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Also, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 244(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronously with) the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the winning entrance lamp NR changes from the first state to the second state in which it is turned off. Change. In addition, the second light emitting region HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 also changes from the first state in which the effect light is emitted to the second state in which the light is extinguished. Furthermore, in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started in synchronization with (synchronously with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display. 1 The change from the first mode to the second mode of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in Example 2, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. be.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 244(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to sway together. In Specific Example 2, part of the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and part of the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40) that were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect. is set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 244(d)). Further, in Specific Example 2, the remaining portion of the first light emitting region HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the remaining portion of the second light emitting region HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR, the lighting device for the frame) are used throughout the execution period of the image change effect. 10) is set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 244(d)). In specific example 2, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the execution of the image change effect. Here, in Specific Example 2, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). ), but the switching timing may be staggered.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing change display and the reserved numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second state is returned to the first state after the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 244(e)). The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started after the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 244(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode at a timing later than the start of the normal display (the end of the change display) at the timing of T5 (FIG. 244(f)). reference). The first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR , the frame illumination device 10) returns to the first state and effect light emission is performed. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change from the second state to the first state of the first movable member 73 is completed with a delay from the end frame update timing, and the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 return to the first state.

In the specific example 2, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state. First, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes between the change display in which the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed, and the normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 2, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in association with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is executed with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 3 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 245 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 3 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 246 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 3 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 246(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In specific example 3, at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, winning hole lamp NR, frame illumination device 10) changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 246(a)). Then, at the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the first light emitting region HK1 of the frame lighting device 10 are synchronized with (synchronized with) the start of transition to the change display. The second light emitting area HK2 changes from the second state to the first state, and effects light emission is performed (see FIG. 246(b)). At this time, the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position is changed to the second mode in which the action can be produced in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the transition to the change display. The first movable member 73 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as “Pickin” is output from the voice output device 9 . Note that the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting area HK1 of the prize winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state over the execution period of the image change effect.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to the change display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 3, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. The change from the first state to the second state of the second movable member 74 is started in synchronization with (synchronized with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display, and the change notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. be started.

As shown in FIG. 246(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. In the specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 that have been in the second state are set to switch to the first state in accordance with the start of execution of the image change effect (FIG. 246(d)). reference). Further, in specific example 3, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing change display and the reserved numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The second movable member 74 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 246(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of restoration from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (in synchronization with) the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 246(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

The second movable member 74 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 246(f)) in synchronization with (synchronously with) the start of the normal display at the timing of T5. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the second movable member 74 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 3, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. First, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the ease of visual recognition does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 3, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in association with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 3, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the change to the second mode of the second movable member 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the second movable member 74 is changed to the first mode in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In Specific Example 3, the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is changed to the second state slightly before the start of the image change effect, and is synchronized with the start of the image change effect (synchronized). d) performing the change to the first state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. A little before the start of the image change effect, the movable members 73 and 74 are changed to the second state, and together with (synchronized with) the start of the image change effect, or after the start of the image change effect, You may make it return the movable members 73 and 74 to a 1st state.

(Specific example 4 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 4 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 247 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 4 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 248 shows an effect example when the image change effect of specific example 4 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanying the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 248(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Also, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the normal display is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In specific example 4, at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) changes from the first state to the extinguished second state (see FIG. 248(a)). At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the first state. At timing T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the first mode to the second mode. At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the sound output device 9 outputs a change notification sound such as "Pickin" in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of transition to the change display. At the timing of T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting area HK2 of the prize winning entrance lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. do. Also, at the timing of T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position to the second mode in which the action can be produced.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to the change display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. Further, the change from the first state to the second state of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started with a delay from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. In response to this, output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 248(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 248(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. Further, in Specific Example 4, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing change display and the reserved numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second state are returned to the first state in synchronization with (in synchronization with) or with a delay from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 248(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

In specific example 4, at timing T5a before T5 when the image change effect ends, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10 ) changes from the second state to the first state, and effect light emission is performed. At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the second state. In addition, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the second state to the first state before timing T5a, which is before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, and at timing T5a, the first movable member 73 returns to the first mode and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second mode. Then, at the timing of T5, the change display returns to the normal display, and the image change effect ends.

At the timing of T5b after T5 when the image change effect ends, the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning entrance lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state. After changing, effect light emission is executed. Further, the second movable member 74 starts to change from the second state to the first state at the timing before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, and the first movable member 74 changes to the first state at the timing T5b. Stop back to. It should be noted that the return of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first mode may be started after the image change effect is completed, or in synchronization with the end of the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked to execute the light emitting effect of changing from the first state to the second state. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state. First, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visually recognizing the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In Specific Example 4, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change to the second state of the movable members 73 and 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change to the first mode of the movable members 73 and 74 is completed after the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Concrete Example 4 restores the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 to the first state with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, in the image change rendering, an effect EF decorating the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be either a moving image or a static image, and may or may not be changed according to the changing display. Further, the effect EF is displayed so as not to overlap the change display, whether it is superimposed in front of the change display (Fig. 249(a)) or behind the change display (Fig. 249(b)). (Fig. 250), or whatever.

In the image change presentation, when the effect EF is displayed together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape, color, or the like corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, when the degree of expectation is low, a blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 250(a)), and when the degree of expectation is high, a red effect EF is displayed. It should be noted that the degree of expectation displayed by the effect EF may be changed during the image change effect period.

In the image change effect, an effect linked with a light guide plate or other effect means may be performed. Further, in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70 , a linked effect may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71 . For example, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 are set to the second state, and the screen of the second image display device 71 is darkened in accordance with the effect of relatively darkening the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70. and so on.

In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon are not included in the change display, and the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon are fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display, for example, in the same manner as the normal display. It may be displayed (Fig. 251(a)). In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as a pending icon may not be included in the change display, and the pending icon may be erased or displayed so as not to be seen, for example, during the execution period of the image change effect ( FIG. 251(b)). In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the pending icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as in the normal display, such as fixedly displayed at the same position as in the normal display. .

Displayed on the screen are system information IF1, such as characters that induce right-handed hitting, which are included in the normal display (FIG. 252(a)), and game information IF2, such as characters that indicate the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot game is over. The information may be displayed as follows in the image display effect. For example, in the image change effect, the system information IF1 may not be included in the change display, and may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, such as by fixedly displaying the system information IF1 at the same position as the normal display (Fig. 252(b)). . Also, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 252(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the game information IF2 reduced in the change display may be displayed in an enlarged manner superimposed on the change display.

In the image change effect, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode of performing the effect action with the change display (Fig. 253(a)). Then, in the image change effect, for example, the motion effect and/or effect EF of the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode, such as the position of the change display being changed by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74, You may make it link with the change of a change display (FIG.253(b), (c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, an image change effect may be performed during the look-ahead continuous effect.

The start or end of the execution of the image change effect (the start of reduction of the normally displayed image or the return of the changed displayed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of the operation means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16. . For example, when the image change effect becomes executable, a button image is displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is executed, the image change effect is started to be executed. Incidentally, if the button image is commonly used in a plurality of presentation modes, the amount of data can be compressed. In addition, when a predetermined condition (for example, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is established by operating the operation means such as button operation of the effect button device 16, the effect EF or image displayed with the change display or the change display is changed (for example, , the glass will break). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or repeated hits) is established by operating the operating means, the effect EF or the image displayed along with the change display progresses (for example, the glass gradually ) may be used.

Image change effects may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the background image HG changes without including the effect pattern 70a are set. may be

A change display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in unison. For example, by forming an image larger than the displayable area of the screen, the frame image GG is made invisible in the normal display (Fig. 254(a)), and the variable display is made smaller than the displayable area of the screen. By changing, the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen (FIG. 254(b)). The change display can be rotated or oscillated (Fig. 254(c)), deformed so as to be stretched horizontally (Fig. 254(d)), tilted and stretched (Fig. 254(e)), or contracted.・It can be executed in various modes such as enlarging. Then, when the image change rendering ends, the change display may be changed so as to expand beyond the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 255(a) and (b)). Also, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, a switching effect such as a white-out momentarily displaying a white image may be interposed (FIG. 255(c)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285") (Fig. 255(d)). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion). Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Further, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (FIG. 255(e)).

As for the image change effect, the display effect of changing display is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, in accordance with the change of the change display, it is possible to execute other effects (sound effect, light emission, action of the character) other than the change display. Alternatively, other effects may be executed at a timing different from the change of the change display. Then, when returning from the state where the change display is changing to the normal display that does not change, the end timing of other effects (sound effects, light emission, movement of the character) other than the change display executed in accordance with the change display is It can be earlier, later, or the same as the change end timing of the change display.

At the start of the image change effect (when the change display shrinks), multiple effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) start at the same frame update timing, and at the end of the image change effect (change display expands), a plurality of effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change effect, a change display is started in which a predetermined image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.) that is in the normal position in the normal display is reduced toward the back of the screen and changed to the change position. The predetermined image, which was in the change position in the display, is enlarged from the depth side to the front side of the screen and returned to the normal position, thereby returning to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the change position should be longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the change position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display shrinks at the start of the image change effect (start period) should be made larger than the number of frames when the change display expands at the end of the image change effect (recovery period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, attracts attention to the image change effect, and enhances the amusement of the game. Also, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, and interest in the next change effect can be stimulated. Here, the operations of the movable members 73 and 74 and the changes of the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 that are executed in accordance with the reduction/enlargement change of the predetermined image in the image change effect are also executed in conjunction with the start period. , should be longer than those executed in conjunction with the recovery period.

A specific example of operating the movable members 73 and 74 in the image change effect was described above, but it is not necessary to operate the movable members 73 and 74, and the movable accessories 73 and 74 are stopped during the execution period of the image change effect. may

(If the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Next, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. When the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command is not received due to disconnection, partial disconnection, or connector disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 Communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or partial disconnection can be considered. In the following description, when the production control unit 130m can receive the command normally, it is represented by "O" in the figure, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command , are represented by "x" in the figure. Then, during a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs for the first time to before a command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be normally received. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state decorates a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a stick-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration portion made up of a design effect image ZE and an identification portion made up of a hexagonal base image and a number portion (identification character). Also, it is assumed that the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of an identification portion consisting of a number portion (identification character).

In the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C scroll left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, when the connectors of predetermined detection sensors (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, sensor 54a, etc.) are disconnected, abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the command line connector for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, usually describes the case where the production control unit 130m can not receive the command normally in the game state, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basic The flow is the same as the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the sub-first fluctuation display device 81, the sub-th 1 reservation display device 83, first reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, and first start port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special pattern storage designation command, first 2 special symbols, second special symbol display 61, second special symbol reservation display 64, sub second variable display 82, sub second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display The area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47 may be read as replacements.

(Specific example 1 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
256 and 257, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and the specific example 1 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 256 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and FIG. 257 is an effect example corresponding to the timing chart of FIG.

At the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, and the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m. When the command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the sub first fluctuation display 81 are started (see FIG. 257(a)).

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 257 (g)), , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design decision command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is changed, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 1 relates to the designation of the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance design 70a, and the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design in the performance control unit 130m. If the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the fluctuation of the production design 70a is started, and if the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production design 70a is not satisfied (missing), It swings and fluctuates in the production pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (production design designation command) and the performance regarding the designation of the production pattern 70a If at least one of the third conditions (variation pattern specification command) regarding the designation of the pattern production pattern is not satisfied (missing), (regardless of satisfaction (normal reception) or lack of abnormality of the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command)) , the production pattern 70a does not start to change. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 257 and Figure 258, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 2 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 258 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished), and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding and contracting operation as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 of the 1 lamp symbol is continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variable display of the performance design 70a is started. At the same time, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 257 (g)), The main stop is made when the first lamp pattern fails (for example, turning off).

At the P13 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 2 is, in the production control unit 130m, the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the production pattern (variation pattern) concerning the production design 70a When satisfying the 3 conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a is insufficient, based on the second condition It becomes the second state in which the shaking variation can be executed with the determined production pattern 70a. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the It becomes a state to start the same fluctuation production as in the 1st state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it becomes a state in which the same shake fluctuation as in the 2nd state can be executed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example 2, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design 70a are satisfied, the conditions regarding the game state (game state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient regardless of , If the conditions for stopping the fluctuation of the production pattern 70a (special pattern determination command) are insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is performed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the predetermined condition production pattern designation command). It is viable. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 257 and Figure 259, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 3 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 259 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 3 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding and contracting operation as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 does not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 257(g)), and the first sub-variation indicator 81 , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design decision command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is changed, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving the decorative part or expanding/contracting the whole or part of the decorative part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 3, in the production control unit 130m, the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the production pattern (variation pattern) concerning the production design 70a When satisfying the 3 conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command), start the fluctuation production of the production design 70a, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a is insufficient, the second condition (production design A swing variation can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient , control is possible so as not to start the variable production of the production pattern 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 4 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
257 and 260, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 4 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 260 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished), and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. Therefore, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (Fig. 257(c) reference).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production design 70a is not started because the fluctuation production is not started. The periods of the stop, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the real stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. Therefore, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (Fig. 257(c) reference).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design decision command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a The periods of the stop, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the real stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first sub-variable indicator 81 of one lamp symbol is started. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

P17 onwards are as described above.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 4, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a and the production pattern (variation) of the production design 70a When at least one of the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding pattern) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variation effect. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the production When the symbol variation is started and the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the swing variation can be executed with the effect symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 5 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 257 and Figure 261, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, specific example 1 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 261 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 5 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At P7 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is actually stopped. The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At P10 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At P13 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub first variable display device 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the sub first variable display device 81 The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P17, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P18, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is actually stopped. The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P19, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and 257(c)).

At the timing of P20, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P21, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P22, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving the decorative part or expanding/contracting the whole or part of the decorative part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 5, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design 70a are insufficient, the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a It is possible to control not to start the variable production regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (special symbol confirmation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 6 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
257 and 262, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 6 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 262 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 6 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished), and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first sub-variable indicator 81 of one lamp symbol is started. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 does not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 257(g)), and the first sub-variation indicator 81 , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design The period of the actual stop of the variable display of TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 6, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a and the production pattern (variation) of the production design 70a pattern) when the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the variation stop of the effect symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (effect symbol A swing variation can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient , It is possible to control so as not to start the variable production. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 263, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and the specific example 7 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 263 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60. - 特許庁At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. The effect control unit 130m determines that the internal state is the game state A based on the game state designation command that designates the game state A. In addition, the reception history of the game state designation command is stored in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P4 has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (timing of P1). Since it is a command, the internal state remains the game state A. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state B), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P7, has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (timing of P4). Since it is not a command, the internal state is switched to game state B. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command are produced and controlled. When the unit 130m receives normally, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state B) (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of the content, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B. It should be noted that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as part of the decorative portion moving and the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (Fig. 257(d) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation pattern designation command is produced and controlled. When the unit 130m receives normally, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 does not start, and the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the game state designation command designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of the content, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B.

At the timing of P15 after P14, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The first sub-variation display 81 remains in a stop state of one lamp pattern and does not change.

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern designation command is produced. When the unit 130m receives normally, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 does not start, and the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern are not started. Stopped state continues. In this case, the game state designation command designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of the content, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B.

At the timing of P18 after passing through P17, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The first sub-variation display 81 remains in the stop state of one lamp pattern and does not change.

Temporarily, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m is transmitted from the production control unit While 130m receives normally, if the production control unit 130m can not normally receive at least one of the production design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 The variable display of 1 lamp pattern is not started. In this case, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is a command with the same contents as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the effect control unit 130m does not switch the internal state, and the previous game is executed. remain in the state. On the other hand, the effect control unit 130m, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is not a command with the same content as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the game state designation command of this time switch the internal state to the game state determined based on

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 7, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), the game determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) If the state is the same game state as the first condition (game state designation command) specified last time, the game state grasped by the effect control section 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is different from the previously designated first condition game state designation command), the game state grasped by the sub is changed. The game state is changed to one determined based on the first condition (game state specifying command). Also, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is not satisfied (missing), other conditions (the second condition (special design designation command) concerning the designation of the performance design and the performance The game state is not changed regardless of the third condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding designation of the pattern effect pattern. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 8 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 264, a specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 264 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 264(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (hit design), and the variation pattern designation command (hit performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 are started. In this case, when the performance design 70a determined based on the performance design designation command is a win and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a win, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the drawing) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a command for ending the variable production is executed. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (hit design) and the variation pattern designation command (losing performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol of the sub-first variation display 81 are stopped. kept in good condition. In this way, while the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is a winning one, when the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a losing one, the variation performance does not start.

As shown in FIG. 264(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the effect pattern designation command (losing pattern), and the variation pattern designation command (losing effect) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is a losing one and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is a losing one, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the drawing) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a command for ending the variable production is executed. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the effect pattern designation command (losing pattern), and the variation pattern designation command (hit effect) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first fluctuation display device 81 are not started, and the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern of the sub-first fluctuation display device 81 are stopped. kept in good condition. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is a losing one, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a winning one, the variation production does not start.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 8, in the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the designation of the production design 70a is the winning one, and the production pattern of the production design 70a ( When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the variation pattern is a winning one, the effect pattern 70a can be started to vary. Similarly, in the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) related to the designation of the production design 70a is a lost one, and the production pattern 70a is related to the designation of the production pattern When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is a losing one, it is possible to start varying the production design 70a. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a Even when satisfying (receiving) the third condition for designation (variation pattern designation command), the production design 70a determined based on the second condition for designation of the production design 70a (production design designation command), and the production When the hit/loss is different from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the specification of the effect pattern of the symbol 70a, the variation of the effect symbol 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 265, a specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 265 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 265(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production design 70a determined based on the production design specification command is for the first special design, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern specification command is for the first special design. In that case, start the variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 are One lamp symbol is held in a stopped state. In this way, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the first special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special design. If it is one of, the variable production is not started.

As shown in FIG. 265(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the second special design, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special design. In that case, start the variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the production design 70a, the special design TZ, the sub-first variation display 81 One lamp symbol is held in a stopped state. In this way, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the second special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special design. If it is one of, the variable production is not started.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 9, in the production control section 130m, the second condition (production design designation command) relating to the designation of the production design 70a is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special design). In addition, when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the production pattern of the production design is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special design), the production design 70a can start fluctuating. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a Even when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding designation is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding designation of the production design 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special symbol), while the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the effect symbol 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special (for symbol) and another winning condition (for second special symbol or for first special symbol), variation of production symbol is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As a condition for executing the predetermined control in the production control unit 130m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m as described above was exemplified, but not limited to this, the passage of time, operation of the operation button, etc. event may be used as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 266, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the specific examples 1 to 9 described above), a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the above-described initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17, etc. can be executed. Specifically, in a period in which the production pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m, the main control unit 110m When the predetermined signal from is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during the period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not satisfied by the performance control unit 130m, the first movable member 73 and the like are movable while the shaking and fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen. Execute the initial operation of the character. Furthermore, in the period when the production control unit 130m does not meet the conditions and the production design 70a is actually stopped, when the production control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a which is stopped. is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In this way, in the embodiment, even if the condition that the production control unit 130m has (is not) met, if the initial operation condition based on the predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m is satisfied, the production pattern 70a is displayed. Regardless of the aspect, an initial operation is performed. In concrete example 10, the relationship between the condition that is (is not) aligned in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the specific examples 1 to 10 described above), a detection means for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and the main control means 110 become disconnected (disconnection of connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification (Disconnection notification, magnetic anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. This anomaly notification can be performed over a predetermined period. Specifically, in the period when the performance pattern 70a fluctuates even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. . Further, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Further, when the state of disconnection (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period in which the performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped due to the condition not being met in the performance control section 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. As described above, in the embodiment, even if the condition that the effect control unit 130m has (is not aligned with) any condition, if the abnormality notification condition to be in the disconnected state is satisfied, regardless of the display mode of the effect pattern 70a , anomaly notification is executed. At this time, in the image display devices 70 and 71, the abnormal notification may be performed by overlapping with the production pattern 70a in the changing, temporary stop or main stop state, or in the area overlapping with the production pattern 70a. Anomaly notification can be performed using the image display devices 70 and 71 in various ways, such as turning off the . In concrete example 11, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m, other events, actions, productions, operations, notifications, etc. described in the present embodiment may be executed in combination.

<Content I of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. As such a game machine, there is a game machine that transforms a display area of an image display device and also transforms an image being displayed in the display area (for example, JP-A-2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes between the first mode (stopping at the standby position) and the second mode (effect operation). possible movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and light emitting states provided in the movable accessories (73, 74) in a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). and a first light emitting region (HK1) capable of changing the light emission, and provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73, 74), emitting light in a first state (effect light emitting state) and a first light emitting state. A second light emitting region (HK2) capable of changing the light emitting state between two states (e.g., off) and display means (70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2), and in the variable effect, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, a normal display effect pattern 70a) and the first image It is possible to change to a second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) that is changed and displayed on the screen, and when the variation production that changes to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) is performed. , the light emitting effect of changing to the second state (for example, extinguished) by linking at least one of the first light emitting region (HK1) and the second light emitting region (HK2), and the display means (Image display devices 70 and 71) can display a third image (for example, a special symbol TZ) together with the first image, and the first image and the second image can be Three images (for example, special pattern TZ) can be displayed at the same position.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing the light-emitting state between a first light-emitting state (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). (HK1), provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished) in which light is emitted. and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, the production pattern 70a of normal display) and the first image change on the screen can be changed to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) displayed in the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display). At least one of the light-emitting region (HK1) and the second light-emitting region (HK2) can be linked to perform a light-emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished), and the display means (image display device) 70, 71), it is possible to display a third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) together with the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a), and the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a). etc.) is changed to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display), the visibility is changed, and the third image is changed regardless of whether it is the first image or the second image. (For example, the special pattern TZ) can be displayed without changing the visibility.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing the light-emitting state between a first light-emitting state (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). (HK1), provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished) in which light is emitted. and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, the production pattern 70a of normal display) and the first image change on the screen can be changed to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) displayed in the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display). At least one of the light-emitting region (HK1) and the second light-emitting region (HK2) can be linked to perform a light-emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished), and the display means (image display device) 70, 71), a third image (for example, It is characterized by being able to display a picture frame image GG).

<Content II of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Such a game machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the game machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. It is

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (production design specification command) can be executed in the production pattern (70a) determined based on, and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command), When at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (fluctuation pattern specification command) is satisfied, it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Production design designation command) The production design (70a) determined based on the second state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed, the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, but if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the same state as in the first state is entered in which the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it becomes a state in which shaking variation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) are satisfied, regardless of the satisfaction or lack of the conditions regarding the game state (game state designation command), When the fluctuation production is started and the condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the predetermined condition (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is determined based on It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the effect pattern (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, it is determined based on the second condition. Shaking fluctuation can be executed with the production pattern (70a) that is executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production pattern When at least one of the designated command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform control so as not to start the variable effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production design When at least one of the conditions (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) When the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied while lacking, the production pattern (70a) starts to change, and the production pattern (70a) When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop is insufficient, it is characterized by being able to execute shaking fluctuation with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command). and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), if the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) are insufficient, the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) and the production design (70a) It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (special symbol determination command) related to the variation stop.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) If the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) related to the variation stop of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Production design designation command) It is possible to execute shaking fluctuation in the production design determined based on, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient. When at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a ), when the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop is insufficient, the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) can be shaken and can be changed, In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, at least the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) It is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance when one of them is insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation is executed with the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). It becomes the possible second state, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition ( If the variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, it will be in a state where the variation effect is started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the shake variation can be executed as in the second state. It is characterized by being in a state of

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (the effect control board 130), the predetermined condition (the effect pattern designation command, the variable pattern designation command), regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command), to start the variable production, the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the production design (70a) (special design confirmation command ) is insufficient, it is characterized in that the shaking variation can be executed with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (the performance symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a ) regarding the fluctuation stop (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the production control means (production In the control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied. , When at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance design is insufficient, the variation performance is not started. It is controllable, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, while the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern When the specified command) is satisfied, the variation of the production pattern (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the production pattern (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (the production It is characterized in that the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the pattern designation command) can be shaken and varied.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (the effect control board 130), the predetermined condition (the effect pattern designation command, the variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (game state designation command) related to the game state and the condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production pattern (70a), start the variable production It is characterized by being controllable so that it does not occur.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient. , When satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the production design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the production design determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). , In the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) It is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance when one of them is insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special design determination command) is insufficient, the effect pattern (70a) determined on the basis of the second condition (performance design designation command) can execute shaking fluctuation, and the effect control means (effect control In the substrate 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, but at least one of the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and the production design (70a) is changed. When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop is insufficient, the second condition in which the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) allows the shaking fluctuation to be executed, In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied. When it does, it will be in a state to start the variation production as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it will be in a state where the shaking variation can be executed as in the second state. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production design (70a) can be executed variation production, in the production control means (production control board 130), predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) are satisfied. In the case, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the conditions (game state designation command) related to the game state, to start the fluctuation effect, if the condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the effect pattern (70a) is insufficient, the It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking variation with the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control board 130), the When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation performance is not started. It is characterized by being controllable.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, but the production design (70a) If at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the production pattern of the production pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable production, and the production When satisfying the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the control means (performance control board 130) , When the production pattern (70a) starts to fluctuate, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) based on It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the determined production pattern (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) variable production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), a predetermined condition (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) is insufficient. In the case, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (game state designation command) related to the game state and the condition (special symbol determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the effect symbol (70a), it is possible to control so as not to start the variable effect. It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the production design (70a) When the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a) fluctuation When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production design determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and the production control means (production In the control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is When it is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first Although the condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, when at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the fluctuation performance. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) determined based on the production design (70a) will be in a second state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed, and the production control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, but the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state and Similarly, when the state for starting the variable performance is reached and the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the state is such that the shaking variation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the production control means (production control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) are satisfied, the conditions related to the game state (game State designation command) regardless of the sufficiency or shortage, start the fluctuation production, if the condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the predetermined condition (production design designation command, It is characterized in that a shaking variation can be executed with the performance pattern (70a) determined based on the variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command ) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable production. do.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation) concerning the production pattern (70a) command) and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the performance pattern of the performance pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) In, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient while satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command), the production design (70a) When the variation is started and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of variation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) .

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), if the prescribed conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) are insufficient, conditions related to the game state (game It is characterized by being able to control not to start the variable performance, regardless of the sufficiency or shortage of the conditions (special symbol determination command) regarding the state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the performance symbols (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation) concerning the production pattern (70a) command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern definite command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production pattern determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and in the production control means (production control board 130), the second When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the variable performance. It is characterized by being possible.

(Regarding the time-saving game state)
The above-mentioned "low-probability short-time gaming state" is performed after the end of the jackpot game. You may set the "low-probability short-time gaming state of specified number of times fluctuation opportunity" triggered by being executed. "Low-probability short-time gaming state with a specified number of times fluctuation opportunity" is executed after a pattern change of a specified number of times, for example, 1000 times, is performed in a low-probability short-time gaming state including a low-probability short-time gaming state. In addition to the effect, it is possible to combine and execute a time-saving rush effect such as counting down the number of fluctuations until the time-saving occurs.

In addition, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" is, in addition to or instead of the "low-probability short-time gaming state after the jackpot" and / or "low-probability short-time gaming state based on a specific symbol combination", in the low-probability gaming state in advance A "low-probability short-time gaming state based on a specific symbol combination" triggered by the display of a specified combination of special symbols may be set. ``Low-probability short-time gaming state based on specific symbol combination'' is executed after specific symbols such as ``1, 2, 3'' and ``7, 8, 7'' are displayed in a low probability state, such as whether it is a big hit or not. In addition to the effect of , it is possible to combine the reach of whether or not the time saving occurs and other time saving rush effects.

(Playing a game ball into the starting gate)
The game machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start port 45 or the normal figure gate 44 when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to win the second starting port 47 which is opened according to the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol. The game machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start port 45 or the normal figure gate 44 when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to win the second starting port 47 which is opened according to the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easier to pass through the normal figure gate 44 when hitting the right side area of the game area 5a than when hitting the left side area of the game area 5a. Therefore, the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled than the "non-time-saving game state" in the open mode "time-saving game state" (specific game state) , the player who aims to hit the game ball in the right side area of the game area 5a to win the second start hole 47 is more likely to hit the game ball than the case where the game ball is hit in the left area of the game area 5a. It is possible to advance the game advantageously without consuming .

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and the game ball always wins directly below the stage portion 42 on which the game ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. A first starting port 45 (entering a ball) is provided. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is less likely to be controlled than the "time-saving game state" in the open mode In the "non-time-saving game state" (normal game state), the left side area of the game area 5a Aiming to hit the game ball to the first starting port 45 by hitting the game ball in the first start port 45 is advantageous for the player to play the game without consuming the game ball, rather than hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to proceed.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is designed to give a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player depending on which of the left side area and the right side area of the game area 5a the ball is shot. It is preferable to switch the embossed area of the area 5a. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game aiming at winning at the start ports 45 and 47 according to the game state. However, since it is up to the player's shooting operation to decide whether to hit the right side or the left side of the game area 5a, the player proceeds with the game aiming at winning the wrong starting ports 45, 47. There is a risk of

In addition, in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state", the same area (eg, left side area) of the game area 5a Even if it is a gaming machine that only needs to launch the game ball, the right side of the game area 5a or Since it is up to the player's shooting operation to decide which area on the left side the ball should be launched into, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game aiming at winning the wrong starting ports 45 and 47. No change.

(Production example 1)
268 and 269 are diagrams showing a concrete example 1 of the expectation level display, the hold icon change effect, the lamp change effect, the notification sound effect, the movable member operation effect, and the continuous advance notice effect by these. In addition, various effects that make players expect execution of a jackpot game may be referred to as hit suggestion effects.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section are displayed. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect, and the first effect that is shift-displayed in the second display portion 70B2. By changing the display mode of the pending icon to a blue character icon and displaying it, the pending icon change effect is started, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from a state in which it is turned off to a state in which it blinks in blue, thereby performing a lamp change effect. be started. In addition, an actuation presentation in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the operation effect in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 is started at the timing before the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the effect pattern 70 is scrolled at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation). .

After that, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image is changed to the zone background A, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are horizontally scrolled is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 268(d), after the production pattern 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss production pattern 70a of "259" and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. The first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a for starting the variable display, thereby starting the second effect of the continuous notice effect, and the pending icon change effect, the lamp change effect, and the zone effect are continued. remain. In addition, an actuation presentation in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 268(g), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the failure performance symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that becomes the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the third effect of the continuous advance notice effect. Displayed in high red. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates a higher expectation for the jackpot game than before. Also, the pending icon change effect is continuously displayed. In addition, by changing the state of the prize winning hole lamp NR from lighting in blue to blinking in red, a lamp change effect is executed in which the expectation for a big win is higher than in the case of lighting in blue. In addition, an operation effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an actuation effect in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the second movable member 74 vibrates in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification performed in the variable display provides a display with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the previous notification.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are stopped. It should be noted that the zone effect is displayed by switching from the zone background A to the zone background B, which is a display with a higher expectation for a big win.

As shown in FIG. 269(j), the mini-character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and, for example, the mini-character MCB moving across the screen produces an effect that stirs expectations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 269(k), for example, the line "CHANCE!" issued by the teammate is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 responds to the line. By displaying the voice "Your chance has arrived!"

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(l), while the production pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to the red character icon, so that the reserved icon change performance with higher expectations for the big win game than the blue character icon is executed. . Further, the winning hole lamp NR changes from red lighting to multicolor (rainbow color) light emission state along with it, so that a lamp change performance with a higher expectation for a big win than red lighting is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 269 (m), SP reach production is started, production pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased. Note that the performance pattern 70a displayed in reduced size is a decorative portion composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character. Then, the normal display mode composed of the hexagonal base image and the identification part consisting of the number part (identification character) is changed to the simple reduced display mode with only the identification part.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 269(n), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. "333" jackpot performance symbol 70a suggesting the type of jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance is completed.

It should be noted that while the SP and/or SPSP reach is displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lamp change effect is continued, or it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the expectation of winning the jackpot) ) The winning entrance lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting).

(Expectation display)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, it is possible to perform a so-called degree of expectation display, such as a color effect such as an effect image EF and a pattern effect image ZE, which makes the execution of a big winning game expected. . As shown in FIG. 270, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment provides a variable display of the production pattern 70a ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as special 1 variable display.), the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect (execution rate a3 < execution rate a1). That is, in the normal game state, the game ball is hit toward the left side of the game area 5a, which is the so-called left-handed shot. It is difficult to display expectations.

As shown in FIG. 270, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment provides a variable display of the production pattern 70a based on the second start condition established by the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 47 executed in the specific game state ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as special 2 variable display.), the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect (execution rate a3 < execution rate a4). That is, in the specific game state, the game ball is hit toward the right side of the game area 5a, so that the game ball is hit toward the right side of the game area 5a. It is difficult to display expectations.

With such an execution ratio of the degree-of-expectation display, it is not disadvantageous for the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The degree of expectation display is not limited to color effects, but may be characters and decorations that are superimposed on images such as background images and production patterns, or that are performed around images. Anything can be used as long as the game can be expected.

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 270 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation display by color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of expectation display by color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern A32 is not set), the production pattern A12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state However, the expectation level display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern A32 is not set), the production pattern A42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the expectation level display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the zone production accompanied by the scene change of the background image can be executed. The zone effect makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game over a predetermined period, and is either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions. is executable at the timing of

As shown in FIG. 271, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b1). That is, in the special game state, the zone effect in the special 1 fluctuation display is better in the case of hitting the left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b4). That is, in the special game state, the zone effect in the special 1 variation display is better in the case of hitting the left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

With such a zone effect execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 271 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern B32 is not set), the production pattern B12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state However, the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern B32 is not set), the production pattern B42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of times of variable display, and the zone effect may be performed by one time of variable display. Then, when it is possible to execute a hit hint effect such as a zone effect over a predetermined number of variable displays, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. However, the ratio of short times (including 0 times) may be large. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state executes a hit hint production such as a zone production of a pattern over a shorter number of fluctuation display times than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. It can be said that it is easy to be

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to change the scene such as the background, change the telop flowing on the screen, change the pattern decoration changing to the production pattern 70a for zone production, etc. However, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of scene change such as background, telop flowing on the screen, pattern decorative change changing to effect pattern 70a for zone effect, and the like.

Even if it is done in this way, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Players can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Notification sound production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. Also, as shown in FIG. 268(b), when the hold icon and the blue character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the second generated notification sound is used as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). (first change notification sound) is output. Further, as shown in FIG. 269(l), when a hold icon or a red character icon as the icon is generated (changed to), the third generated notification sound ( second change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (third change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at icon change.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in one of the modes. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three kinds of special change notification sounds may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 272, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. is smaller (execution rate c3<execution rate c1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the change notification sound in the special 1 fluctuation display is better than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 272, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is higher than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. is smaller (execution rate c3<execution rate c4). That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the change notification in the special 1 figure fluctuation display Sound production is difficult to execute.

With such an execution ratio of the change notification sound effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

The change notification sound production is not limited to when the pending icon changes, but may be executed with a stimulating sound at the time of winning, the start of fluctuation, or the stop of fluctuation.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 1 variation display in the normal game state At this time, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific game state At this time, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The notification sound effect is not limited to being performed in association with the pending (relevant) icon change. Button change sound when a buried operation button appears, operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, change start/return sound and specific design when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design It can be performed in association with various conditions, such as the complete sound when making a.

When the notification sound effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state rather than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The rate of execution may be the same or smaller, and the rate of execution of the notification sound effect may be smaller.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute the production by the fixed notification sound out of the information sound production, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the fixed notification It may be possible to regulate the execution of the production by sound. It should be noted that not only the confirmed notification sound but also the various notification sound effects described above can be performed in the same way. That is, in the special 1 variation display in the regular game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the effect by the predetermined notification sound out of the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the predetermined It means that it is possible to regulate the execution of the performance by the information sound.

By doing so, even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Hold icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, by changing the form and color of the pending icon, it is possible to execute the pending icon effect that makes the player expect a big winning game. The hold icon change of the present embodiment makes the execution of the jackpot game expected over a predetermined period, and a predetermined fluctuation display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined fluctuation based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions It can be executed at any timing during the display period.

As shown in FIG. 273, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the holding icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. is smaller (execution rate d3<execution rate d1). That is, in the normal game state, when the game ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a, so-called left-handed hitting is performed. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 273, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is higher than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. is smaller (execution rate d3<execution rate d4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the holding icon change in the special 1 fluctuation display It is difficult to execute the production.

With such an execution ratio of the pending icon change effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 273 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

The pending icon change effect is not limited to changing the color of the pending icon (including the relevant icon) or changing the mode of the icon itself, but also changes the icon itself or the effect attached to the icon, such as effects and characters attached to the icon. may Further, the pending icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to the character icon as in the embodiment, but may change the shape of a triangle, a square, or the like.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern D32 is not set), the production pattern D12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. However, the zone effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern D32 is not set), the production pattern D42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the pending icon change effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of pending icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Further, in the pending icon change effect, the CD icon may change stepwise from blue to red to rainbow or the like, or may selectively change from the CD icon to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current display mode of the pending icon to the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. may be less.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a pending icon change effect can be executed, but in the special game state 1 change display, execution of the pending icon change effect can be regulated. may be In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute a change effect that is performed when changing the pending icon change, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the change It may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect for use. Note that even when the pending icon effect is not executed, icon decorations displayed accompanying the pending icon, such as a pedestal on which the pending icon is placed and a frame surrounding the pending icon, may be displayed.

By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, it is a type of foreseeing forewarning effect that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp NR over one or a plurality of variable displays. A certain ramp change effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e1). That is, the lamp icon change in the special 1 fluctuation display is better in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. smaller (execution rate e3<execution rate e4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the lamp change effect in the special 1 fluctuation display is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the ramp change effect, it is not disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 274 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning entrance lamp NR. It may be executed in conjunction with the device.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change effect of the production mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern E32 is not set), the production pattern E42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change effect of the production mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer kinds of lamp change effects than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Further, in the lamp change effect, the color may be changed stepwise from no light emission→blue→red→rainbow, or the like, or may be selectively changed from no light emission to blue, red, or rainbow. Compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has fewer types of light emission modes that can be changed from the current light emission mode. good too.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, for example, a predetermined pattern of the ramp change effect can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the ramp change of the predetermined pattern. It may be possible to regulate the execution of the production.

As the light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect, for example, when the pending (relevant) icon changes, when the game ball enters the starting hole, when executing a decided effect (fixed effect) such as “Koon”, “Gyuin ”, the operation sound of the movable members 73 and 74, the change start/reset sound and the specific design when a plurality of movable members are combined to form a specific design. It can be performed in association with various conditions such as the completed sound when the design is made.

When the lamp change effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state rather than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The ratio to be executed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio to execute the ramp change effect may be smaller.

In the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, for example, among the lamp change effects, it is possible to execute the effect by the winning entrance lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device). , In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, for example, it is possible to perform the effect by the lighting device for the board or the lighting device for the frame, while it may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect by the winning hole lamp NR. That is, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, it is possible to execute the production by the predetermined part (area, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change production, but the special game state special In the 1-variation display, it is possible to regulate the performance of the predetermined part.

The pattern selected in the ramp change effect or the ramp change effect depends on the timing (for example, at the time of winning, at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, how many times in a row, start / stop / decide the operation of the movable member, vibration or operation of the operation button etc.). In the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing when winning a prize and a specific timing when the movable member is operated. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the ramp change effect at a predetermined timing and a specific timing.

From the execution period of the ramp change performance (predetermined pattern of lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ramp change performance performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. The execution period of (predetermined pattern of ramp change effect) may be shorter.

Special 1 variation in a specific game state from the number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state The number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the display may be smaller. In addition, from the range where light is emitted in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the light emission effect performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state ( The range in which light is emitted in the lamp change effect) may be smaller. Here, the light emission effect is a mode in which the number of light emissions and the light emission range changes in stages by changing the number of light emissions of the LEDs arranged side by side. Thus, the light emission mode may change.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Operation production of movable parts)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, by operating the first movable member 73 in an operating mode including a weak operating mode and a strong operating mode in which the weak operating mode is operated more (conspicuously) than the weak operating mode, the player can It is possible to execute an operation effect to expect that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the effect in the weak operation mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f11). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more weak in the special 1 fluctuation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. is difficult to execute.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the effect in the weak operation mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f41). That is, in the specific game state, the case of hitting the left in the specific game state is weaker in the special 1 figure fluctuation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. It is difficult to execute the operation effect of the mode.

With such an execution ratio of the operating effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Note that the execution ratio of the strong actuation mode in the actuation effect may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak actuation mode. Also, in the strong actuation mode, the relationship between the winning to the starting ports 45 and 47 and the game state may be the same as in the weak actuation mode, or may be reversed to the weak actuation mode, or the execution ratio may be the same. good too.

Here, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may have a smaller number of types of patterns of operation effects than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of patterns of operation effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the actuation effect of other movable parts such as the second movable member 74 may be the same as that of the first movable member 73 . In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be linked (associated) and operated.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode at the time of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), at the time of the special 1 variation display in the normal game state Although it is possible to execute the operation effect by the predetermined operation mode, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode at the time of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), at the time of the special 2 variation display in the specific game state Although it is possible to execute the operation effect by the predetermined operation mode, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The operation effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the weak operation and strong operation effects at a predetermined timing such as the start of the fluctuation and at a specific timing such as a final effect. , In the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state, it may be possible to perform the strong action at the specific timing while it is possible to regulate the execution of the strong action at the predetermined timing. In this way, it is also possible to provide a difference in the operation mode and whether or not the operation effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with a light emission effect by light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, for the light emission effect, it is possible to select light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as aspects in which the degree of expectation varies step by step, such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. Then, in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and the specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate execution of the operation effect in the predetermined light emission mode and to execute the operation effect in the specific light emission mode. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission mode such as blue light emission and a specific light emission mode such as rainbow light emission in the operation effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light emission effect of the predetermined light emission mode in the operation effect, and to be able to execute the light emission effect of the specific light emission mode. Further, when having a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed at the time of weak operation and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed at the time of strong operation, the specific The execution ratio of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display of the game state.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Display effect by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 276, the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70 displays the light guide plate image DG over one or a plurality of variable displays, thereby executing a jackpot game for the player. It is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect, which is a type of anticipatory forewarning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 276(a), in the first continuous notice effect, for example, at the start of the variable display, the light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 276(c), for example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in a pose different from that of the first display is displayed, and as shown in FIG. For example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in the same pose as the second time but in a different color (a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed. The timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the variation, but may be during the variation display or at the end of the variation display.

As shown in FIG. 277, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. is small (execution rate g3<execution rate g1). That is, the light guide plate display in the special 1 fluctuation display is better in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 277, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. is smaller (execution rate g3<execution rate g4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the light guide plate in the special 1 figure fluctuation display It is difficult to execute the display effect.

With such an execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of light guide plate display effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been described, but the display effect performed by display means different from the first image display device 71, such as the second image display device 71 and the 3D filter, is the same as the light guide plate display effect. However, different execution ratios may be used. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (associated) and executed.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern G32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern G32 is not set), the production pattern G12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. However, the light guide plate display effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern G32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern G32 is not set), the production pattern G42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the light guide plate change effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at a predetermined timing such as the start of the variation and at a specific timing such as a final effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing and to execute the light guide plate display effect at a specific timing. In this manner, a difference may be provided in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit indication effect such as an actuation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effects can be selected from light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as modes in which the degree of expectation varies stepwise, such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. In addition, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, other hit hints such as operation effects such as operating the light guide plate display effect of the predetermined display mode of blue light emission and the specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example However, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of other hit hint effects in the predetermined display mode, while other hit hint effects in the specific display mode can be regulated. may be executable. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined display mode such as blue light emission and a specific display mode such as rainbow light emission along with the operation effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of the predetermined display mode, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the specific display mode together with the operation effect. In addition, when having a predetermined display pattern (executable at weak operation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable at strong operation), special 1 variation display in normal game state or special 2 variation in specific game state The special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio of the predetermined display pattern than the display.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The display effect performed by other than the first image display device 71 is not limited to the light guide plate, and may be a sub-liquid crystal provided on the game board such as the second image display device, a sub-liquid crystal provided on the frame, or the like. Display effects may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous notice effect)
As shown in FIGS. 268, 269 and 276, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to execute a continuous notice effect, which is a kind of anticipatory notice effect. In the present embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, hold icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using a light guide plate, etc. are executed in a coordinated manner.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 271 to 275 and 277, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state, rather than a special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect is small. That is, in the normal game state, when the game ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a, so-called left-handed hitting is performed. is difficult to implement.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. That is, in the specific game state, the case where the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a is hit to the right side, and the case where the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the continuous notice effect, it is not disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The continuous notice effect is not only a linked effect that is performed continuously or in conjunction with multiple variable displays, but also the degree of expectation for the jackpot game is graded as the number of variable displays increases or as predetermined conditions such as the passage of time progress. It may include a development effect (such as a development stimulus effect, a step-up (SU) type effect, etc.) that becomes larger with a target or a continuous change. Note that the development effect may be a change effect such as a countdown or a timer effect in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is satisfied.

Indirect effects such as roulette effects, effects that increase the layout at the time of reaching, etc. Depending on the content, content suggestions that suggest the details of the event that will be executed after the performance, such as a notice effect that foretells the occurrence of an event that will lead to a big win such as prediction or reach, and a jackpot type suggestion effect (XX bonus). Directing effects such as long-pressing of the button on the image display device, continuous-pressing effects (a gauge accumulates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the button vibrates with each level reached), and a movable accessory (a dedicated movable part). (including characters with other functions such as characters and light guide plates) (weak notice (suggestion) operation, strong notice (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, decision effect) and operation such as vibration of operation buttons Other pre-notification effects such as effects may also have an execution ratio based on the relationship between the game state and the start condition described above.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect of the specific effect mode at the time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state At this time, the continuous advance notice effect in the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect in the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect of the specific effect mode at the time of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), special 2 variable display in the specific game state At this time, the continuous advance notice effect in the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect in the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variable display of the normal game state, the light emission effect of the special 1 start port 45 is executed at the winning timing of the game ball to the first winning port 45 and/or the variation start timing of the performance symbol 70a (first special symbol). It is possible, and the action rendering of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed. Similarly, in the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, the special 2 start opening 45 emits light at the timing of winning the game ball to the second winning opening 47 and / or the fluctuation start timing of the effect symbol 70a (second special symbol) In addition to being able to execute the production, the action production of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 may be executable.

On the other hand, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state, the special 1 start opening 45 , and the motion effect of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not executed. That is, when hitting left in the normal game state, the light emitting effect and action effect are executed, but when hitting left in the specific game state, the execution of the light emitting effect and action effect is regulated.

In this way, by making the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state different in the light emission effect and the action effect, in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, an erroneous left hand hit is made. Even in such a case, the player can be reminded that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

When the three production patterns 70a appear (stop) with a specific pattern (specific outcome = chance eye), it becomes a so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change), or SP reach (possibility of jackpot even in reach) It may be designed to develop into a high quality product). The variable display in which such a chance eye appears may be performed once or a plurality of times. In this case, the probability of appearance of the chance eye may be smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 2 change display or the special game state 2 change display. In addition, chance numbers may appear in a plurality of variations in the special game state special 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state special game state 1 fluctuation display or the special game state special game state 2 fluctuation display.

The effect pattern 70a can be displayed in various ways, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of identification parts such as numbers (1 to 9) and letters (A, B, etc.) and decoration parts such as characters, and a specific display mode consisting only of identification parts. You may select and display from the aspect. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of predetermined display modes. In addition to the production pattern 70a or instead of the production pattern 70a, a pseudo-continuous pattern such as "NEXT" is displayed, and it seems that it is changing multiple times regardless of one start condition (one winning). A performance (pseudo-ream) may be executed. Also, in addition to the production pattern 70a, or instead of the production pattern 70a, for example, changing pattern, mode entry pattern, development pattern, etc. By the appearance of these patterns, a different mode (for example, production mode) or production may be expected to be executed. Special symbols such as pseudo-continuous symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have information (expectation degree of execution of the jackpot game) different from the normal performance symbols 70a. Appearance of such a special pattern can also be one of the elements of the linked production.

The appearance ratio of the special symbols may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state (normal effect symbols + special symbols) is more than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may be less. In addition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of the link effect performed in conjunction with the appearance of the special symbol than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. It can be small.

Even in these cases, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 2)
A specific example 2 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display in normal game state)
278 and 279, the special 1 variation display in the normal game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 278, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45 is from "0" to "1". increase to At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 279(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 279(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 279(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 279(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("259"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 279(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 279 (f)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Also, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and after performing the preparatory operation, scrolling is started (see FIG. 279(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 279(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 279(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the production pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 279 (j)), and the first lamp. The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state according to the flow described above.

Although the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has been explained, the basic flow is special 1 fluctuation Same as display.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first Reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, first starting port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special design, second special design indicator 61, second special design Suspension display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second suspension display 84, second suspension number display area 70F, second suspension icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second start port 47 Just do it.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of specific game state)
280 and 281, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 280, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45 is from "0" to "1". increase to At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the pending icon T1 is not displayed (not shifted) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the production pattern 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the production pattern 70a remains in a stopped state. Also, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 281(f)), and the first lamp symbol is permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a remain in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the production pattern 70a remains in the stopped state, but the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 281(j)). , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state along the flow described above. In the above example, the effect pattern 70a is not changed, but the effect pattern 70a may be changed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variable display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. In the variable display, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, the above-described specific variation display is not executed, and the pending icon T1 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed. TZ is made to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variable display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. In the variable display, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the specific game state, from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, the above-described specific variation display is not executed, and the pending icon T2 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed. TZ is made to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the specific variation display, at least one of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be varied. For example, even if both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ fluctuate, even if the production pattern 70a fluctuates and the special pattern TZ does not fluctuate, the special pattern TZ fluctuates but the production pattern 70a is not displayed. There may be.

In the embodiment, in the normal game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number in accordance with the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner, only the reserved number.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number according to the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner, only the reserved number.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, information about the number of reservations is displayed by the reservation icon, the reservation number and the indicator, while the special 1 variation display of the specific game state It is intended to be displayed with reserved digits and indicators. That is, the total number of types of information related to the number of holds is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information on the number of holdings in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state.

Also, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the pending (relevant) icon may not be displayed, but may be displayed. Also, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, even if the hold (relevant) icon is not shift-displayed based on the increase or decrease in the number of holds, the special 1 change of the normal game state, such as not operating the hold (relevant) icon It may be displayed in a manner different from the special 2 variable display of the display or the specific game state. That is, in the special game state special 1 variation display or the special game state special 2 variation display, it is possible to shift display the pending icon, but in the special game state special 1 variable display, the execution of the pending icon shift display is performed. Regulatable. In addition, in the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the reserved icon is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is possible to regulate the execution of display in

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 3)
A specific example 3 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of the number of holds "1" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 282, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "1" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 282, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 282(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory action such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 282(b)).

At this time, the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a starts in the order of the left effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a, and the right effect pattern 70a (see FIGS. 282(c) to (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops in the order of the left production pattern 70a, the center production pattern 70a, and the right production pattern 70a (see FIGS. 282(f) to (h)). Further, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a also sway. (Direction action) is performed. In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIGS. 282(f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 282 (i)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

(Special 1 fluctuation display of the number of holds "4" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 283, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "4" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 283, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 283(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory action such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 283(b)).

At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a start scrolling at the same time (see FIG. 283(c)).

The first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. - 特許庁At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 283(d)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a are temporarily stopped at the same time (see FIG. 283(e)). Further, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a also sway. (Direction action) is performed. In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 283(e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 283 (f)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state with the variation pattern selected along the flow described above.

Although the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has been explained, the basic flow is special 1 fluctuation Same as display.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first Reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, first starting port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special design, second special design indicator 61, second special design Suspension display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second suspension display 84, second suspension number display area 70F, second suspension icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second start port 47 Just do it.

In the embodiment, the three production designs 70a shown in FIG. 282 start scrolling in order, and the three production designs 70a shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the 3 production patterns 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

As shown in FIG. 284, the average variation time of special 1 variation display in the normal game state is different between at least the number of holds "1" and "4". For example, the larger the number of holds, the longer the average variation time. . The special 1 variation display in the normal game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". Similarly, the average variation time of the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of holds "1" and "4". For example, the larger the number of holds, the longer the average change time. The special 2 variation display in the specific game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". In addition, even if the average fluctuation time is the same or different between the number of reservations "2" and the number of reservations "3", even if the average fluctuation times of the number of reservations "2" to "4" are the same or different, It can be anything.

On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is the same or different at least for the number of reservations "1" and "4". The average change time is the longest, and the average change time is the shortest when the number of holds is "4".

Here, from the difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "4" and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "1" when executing the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, in the specific game state The difference between the average variable display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variable display time with the number of reservations "1" when executing the special 1 variable display is smaller. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

In addition, from the difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds “4” and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds “1” when executing the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the special in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "4" and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "1" in the case of executing one-variation display is smaller. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

In addition, in the embodiment, the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number "1" of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the number of reservations "4" of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state The difference in the average fluctuation time with the number of holds "1" is smaller, and the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of holds "4" and the number of holds "1" of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, In the specific game state The difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller (normal special 1>specific special 2>special special 1).

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, the three production designs 70a shown in FIG. 282 start scrolling in order, and the three production designs 70a shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the 3 production patterns 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the variation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 283, and the variation pattern in Figure 283 is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the normal game state, the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined holding number. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined hold number is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 282 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 283, and the variation pattern in Figure 283 is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific game state, the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined hold number is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Then, in the case of executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the normal game state or in the case of executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the specific game state, it is determined by the number of reservations from "4" to "1" From the number of patterns of the variable display time, the variable display time determined by the number of holds determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1" when performing the special 1 variable display of the loss judgment in the specific game state The number of patterns in is smaller. In this way, when comparing the total number of patterns of variable display time that can be determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1" instead of comparing each number of holds as described above, determination of loss in the normal game state There are fewer special 1 fluctuation displays for loss determination in a specific game state than special 1 fluctuation display or special 2 fluctuation display for deviation determination in a specific game state. Even in this way, the above-described effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the variation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 283, and the variation pattern in Figure 283 is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" are higher in the case of performing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state than in the case of executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the normal gaming state. ” and the same variation pattern are executed at a high rate.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 282 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in Figure 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in Figure 283, and the variation pattern in Figure 283 is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" are higher in the case of performing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state than in the case of executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state. , the ratio of execution of the same variation pattern is high.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Regardless of the number of holds (hold number "4" and hold number "1") However, the execution ratio of the variation pattern of the same stop mode or start mode is large. And even if the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. I can say.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory actions such as partly moving the decorative part and expanding/contracting the whole or part of it. Execution of a jackpot game is expected depending on the presence or absence of such a preparatory action and the type of the preparatory action.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is more than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more preparatory in the special 1 fluctuation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to such execution ratio of the preparatory motion, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state has fewer types of preparatory motions than the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is greater than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement with the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has fewer types of preparatory motions than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H4). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is more than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement with the same pattern.

Due to such a number of types of preparatory motions, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even when the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, when temporarily stopped, the production pattern 70a is configured to slightly swing (swing display) so that the production pattern 70a moves up and down a predetermined stop position. A stop motion is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that are moving are fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

As shown in FIG. 286, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 286, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more preparatory in the special 1 variation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the stop motion, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state has fewer types of stop actions than the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement in the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of kinds of stop actions is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I4). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement in the same pattern.

With such a number of types of stop motions, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Only one of the preparatory operation and the stop operation may be performed instead of performing both.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 282, and the three performance symbols as shown in FIG. There is a variable stop pattern that stops all 70a. As shown in FIG. 287, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display to be judged. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" It is difficult to execute a mode in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together in the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped in order is higher in the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" A mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order in the variable display is likely to be executed.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 282, and the three performance symbols as shown in FIG. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped together. As shown in FIG. 287, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display to be judged. That is, the mode in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and stopped in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped in order is higher in the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, there is a mode in which the three production symbols 70a stop in order in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4". easy to implement.

As shown in FIG. 287, a special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the three production patterns 70a stop together Execution percentages are the same. Also, as shown in FIG. 287, it is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the special game state, or when the number of reservations is "1" in the special game state or the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state. In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the three production patterns 70a are changed in order to stop. Pattern execution percentages are the same.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is started in the loss determination, the variation start pattern of sequentially scrolling the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 282 and the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 283 are simultaneously scrolled. There is a variable onset pattern that causes As shown in FIG. 289, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and the scrolling is started is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which scrolling is started with all three effect symbols 70a aligned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 289, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is large. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" In the variable display, the mode in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is likely to be executed.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation start pattern for sequentially starting scrolling the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 282 and the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. There is a variable start pattern to start scrolling. As shown in FIG. 289, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and the scrolling is started is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, three performance symbols 70a are aligned and scrolling starts in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4". Aspects are difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 289, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination, the execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is large. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, three production patterns 70a sequentially start scrolling in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4". is easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 289, special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and start scrolling have the same execution ratio. Also, as shown in FIG. 289, it is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the special game state or the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state. In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the three production patterns 70a sequentially start scrolling. The execution ratio of the variation pattern is the same.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the displayed production pattern 70a does not scroll, or a special display mode such as a part of the decoration part such as the character disappears from the production pattern 70a, or the production pattern 70a is not limited to not being displayed. For example, the decoration part such as the character of the effect design 70a does not perform a predetermined operation while scrolling. That is, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is more likely than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the effect symbol 70a is the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special game state in the specific game state. It can be said that the ratio of display in a special mode different from the mode displayed in the special 2 variable display is high.

A special symbol such as the above-described pseudo consecutive symbol may be displayed superimposed on the effect symbol 70a or instead of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, by displaying the special pattern, all or part of the normal scrolling of the production pattern 70a and the action (preparation action and stop action) of the decoration part such as the character of the production pattern become invisible. . Then, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is more likely than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ratio or the range in which the normal pattern is hidden by the display of the special pattern. is getting smaller.

By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Production example 4)
Effect Concrete Example 4 of variable display will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), the production pattern 70a of "8" is stopped (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that was being variably displayed, and is produced in the central fluctuation display area. It is assumed that the ready-to-win effect for variably displaying the pattern 70a is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 290(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect patterns 70a change to a different display mode from the previous display mode (FIG. 290(b), thereby Then, a pattern size change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as inserting a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. The performance pattern 70a displayed in reduced size is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a stick-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character. The display mode changes from a normal display mode composed of a decoration part, an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character), to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification part.

As shown in FIGS. 289(d) and (f), the pseudo effect pattern (pseudo pattern) GZ is displayed so as to increase in three rows above and below, thereby increasing the expectation for the jackpot game. . After that, when the execution period of the ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. After the jackpot performance symbol 70a of "888" suggesting the type of game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), they are stop-displayed and the variable performance is completed.

In the embodiment, the variable display is displayed in the normal mode production pattern 70a and at the predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation, during the fluctuation, etc.) It can be executed with the production pattern 70a of the specific mode to be executed. The production pattern 70a of the specific mode is not only a changed production pattern 70a (change pattern) or a pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG. It may be a development pattern or the like that arouses the expectation of.

As shown in FIG. 290, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the special mode production pattern 70a than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (m32 <m12). That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 290, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the special mode production pattern 70a than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (m32 <m42). In other words, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a higher ratio of displaying the production pattern 70a in the normal mode than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 289, it is possible to execute a display size change effect for changing the display size of the effect pattern 70a in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 291, the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination performed in the specific game state changes the display size of the effect symbol 70a more than the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3<n1). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 291, the display size of the production pattern 70a is changed in the special 1 fluctuation display which is executed in the specific game state and becomes the loss judgment, rather than the special 2 fluctuation display which becomes the loss judgment in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3<n4). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed along with the ready-to-win effect, and can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of variation or during variation. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a predetermined condition such as a win suggestion effect such as an operation effect of a movable member, a pending number, or an operation of an operation button.

From the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state , The execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, which is a loss determination. From the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state , The execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, which is a loss determination.

Special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state, and special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state , the execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be the same. In addition, from the special 1 fluctuation display that will be the loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, special 1 that will be the judgment of the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the variable display, the execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller or larger.

As an effect (symbol change effect) to expect execution of a big hit game by changing the symbol, not only the display size change effect, but also the position where the effect symbol 70a is displayed is changed, or the display order of the effect symbol 70a is changed. Other aspects such as changing or doing may also be possible. In addition, if the pattern change effect has a plurality of patterns with different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., the special 1 in the specific game state is more likely than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The total pattern number of pattern change effects may be smaller in the variable display.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 290, the variable display is a ready-to-win effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, ready-to-reach development fan effect, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 292, the special 1 variation display that becomes a loss judgment executed in the specific game state has a smaller ready-to-win effect execution ratio than the special 1 variation display that becomes a loss judgment in the normal game state ( o3<o1). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 292, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in the specific game state and becomes the loss judgment than in the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes the loss judgment in the specific game state ( o3<o4). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Prior to the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-reach effect is repeated multiple times so that the second effect such as the roulette effect and the development effect is performed after the first effect such as the mode entry effect and the development effect is performed. By performing production, it is done to increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notification effect executed before the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may In other words, the ready-to-win effect executed from the advance notification effect is smaller in the special game state 1 variable display than in the special game state 2 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. In addition, the number of pre-notification effects executed before the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. good too. In other words, compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect after performing the advance notification effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the degree of expectation for shifting to the jackpot game after executing the ready-to-win performance is smaller than in the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and in the special game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state. The special 1 fluctuation display is less expected to shift to the jackpot game after the reach effect is executed (Special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state> Special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state> Special 1 in the specific game state variable display).

When the ready-to-win effect is selected from a plurality of patterns and executed, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is the total type of ready-to-win effect than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. The number may be small.

It is possible to select from a plurality of patterns and execute related effects such as the operation effect of the movable member and the vibration effect of the operation button performed in association with the ready-to-win effect at an appropriate timing such as during or before execution of the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the related effect performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In addition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller number of types of related effects performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

The rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SP reach is smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 1 change display or the special game state 2 change display. The execution period of the ready-to-win effect is shorter in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect over a plurality of variations is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Production example 5)
Effect specific example 5 of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 294. FIG. In addition, in the production example 5, the specific game state is set, and the first specific notification SR1 is performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to hit to the right.

As shown in FIG. 293, at the timing of P0, the second reservation number U2 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47 is from "3" to "4". increase to At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 is changed from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T2 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the second pending icon display area 70D (see FIG. 294(a)). Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "0". Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub display 83 is "0", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the second pending number U2 memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the second sub-variation display device 81 is started. After performing preparatory actions such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 294(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 294(c)).

Further, based on the winning to the first winning hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the central part of the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 294(c), the second specific notification SR2 in which voice output such as "Please hit to the right" is performed (see FIG. 294(c)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 294(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the production pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 294 (e)), and the second lamp. The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the second pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 2 The variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Further, the first reservation number U1 memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "2", and a process for starting the variable production is performed. Although the main control unit 110m also has a first pending memory based on the winning to the first winning port 45, the second pending memory based on the winning to the second start port 47 is given priority, and the variable effect is executed. will be

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second pending indicator 84 is changed from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the second sub-variation display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 294(f)).

At the timing of P6, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 294(g)).

Further, based on the winning to the first winning hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the central part of the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 294(g), the second specific notification SR2 in which voice output such as "Please hit the ball to the right" is executed.

After that, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode ("913"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 294(h)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the production pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("913") (see FIG. 294 (j)), and the second lamp. The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

In this way, in addition to the first specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 45 when executing the first specific notification suggesting that it is in the specific gaming state, and the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification performed by By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The second specific notification SR2 is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 in the specific game state, unlike the right-handed notification notified at the start of the jackpot game.

When executing only the first specific notification SR1, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (hit hint effect) such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a starting port, and a holding icon change effect, but the second specific report SR1 is executed. When doing so, it is possible to regulate the execution of a predetermined effect such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a start port, and a holding icon effect (execution of a winning hint effect). It can also be said that the second specific notification SR can be executed in place of the performance.

Also, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (hit hint effect) is smaller when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 6)
As a notification effect (pre-notification effect) that expects the execution of a jackpot game, the first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation), and the second notification is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of start-up winning). There is For example, in the embodiment, when the production pattern 70a (special pattern) starts to fluctuate, the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is blinked in blue, for example. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first notification with a second light emission mode (see FIG. 295(b)) in which the lamp NR (start ports 45, 47) is blinked in red, for example, different from the first light emission mode. In addition, when the game ball enters the start openings 45 and 47, the lighting device 76 for the board and the lighting device for the frame, such as the lighting device 76 for the board and the lighting device for the frame, are different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode. 295(d) and (e)) can be executed. Note that the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed even in the second notification. Further, as a notification effect, there is provided a fourth light emission mode (see FIGS. 296(c) and (f)) which is different from the first to third light emission modes and which does not involve light emission from the prize winning entrance lamp NR, for example.

As shown in FIG. 296, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is more suitable than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the light emission mode is small (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As the notification effects, the first notification can be executed in the first lighting mode, the second lighting mode and the third lighting mode, and the second lighting can be executed in the first lighting mode and the second lighting mode. In the notification, the third light emission mode may be disabled. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the second light emission mode and the third light emission mode is small (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

Even in this way, the player is made to notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 295, the operation button 17 performs vibration effects in conjunction with the notification effects described above. The vibration effect is to make the operation button 17 vibrate so that a big winning game can be expected, and may be executed in combination with the button light emission effect of causing the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is blinked in blue, for example, in a first light emission mode (see FIG. 295(a)), and the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is first emitted. The notification effect of the first notification can be executed in a second light emission mode (see FIG. 295(b)) that is different from the mode, for example, blinking in red. In addition, a second light emission mode that is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, a winning entrance lamp NR, and other light emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 and the frame lighting device 10 are combined to emit light. It is possible to execute the second notification by 3 lighting modes (see FIGS. 295(d) and (e)).

As shown in FIG. 297, in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is larger in the second notification than in the first notification (q12>q11). That is, in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the vibration performance is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. In addition, the execution ratio of the vibration presentation by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (r3<r1). That is, the vibrating effect is less likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

The vibration presentation may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is executed over a certain period of time, a pattern that is executed intermittently at predetermined intervals, and the like. Also, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns such as a weak effect pattern such as vibrating without emitting light, and a strong effect pattern such as vibrating while emitting light. Then, the total pattern of vibration effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the vibration performance of the weak performance pattern and the strong performance pattern can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the weak performance pattern. While it is possible to regulate the execution of the vibration performance of the pattern, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance of the strong performance pattern.

By doing so, the player is reminded that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The light emitting effect is not limited to the starting lamp NR, and other parts such as a game board or a frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 295, in accordance with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to execute the light emission performance by the winning entrance lamp NR, the operation performance of the first movable member 73, and the vibration performance of the operation button 17. . Here, the light emission effect includes a mode in which only the winning gate lamp NR emits light, the first movable member 73 other than the winning gate lamp NR, the operation button 17, the specific positions of the game board (board lighting device) and frame, etc. can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns, such as a mode of emitting light in combination with In addition, the light emission effect can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns of light emission colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors. Also, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak actuation and strong actuation. Furthermore, the vibration presentation of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns with different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 295, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light emitting effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the motion effect of the movable accessories (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are changed. It can be executed at the timing of start. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, even if it is possible to execute the light emission effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) at the timing of the change start. good. On the other hand, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emission effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing of the start of the change. It has become. In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emitting effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times. .

In this way, the total number of types of winning implied effects executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. . It should be noted that the timing of executing the effect may be, for example, when winning a prize, during variation, or when variation is stopped.

By doing so, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Modified examples of production examples 1 to 6)
Although the production pattern 70a is displayed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. good too. In addition, the production pattern 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, but in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. can be By doing so, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, even if the suspended icon is not displayed, a related display such as a pedestal decorating the suspended icon may be displayed.

The performance symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the performance symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared or separated. Further, the effect symbol 70a used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state may be shared or separated.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be separate without being shared. Also, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be separate without being shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Also, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special game state special 2 variation display and the special game state special 1 variation display.

The reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated. Also, the reserved number used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated.

Advance notice effects with different execution times can be combined and executed. At the time of start of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the start of variation of the performance pattern itself or characters of the performance pattern, the order of start of variation of the performance pattern, and the like. Further, at the end (stop) of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the start of variation of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, the order of starting variation of the performance pattern, or the like. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, in the first half (first period) of the variable display, the conversation notice, the cut-in notice, the development destination roulette effect, Long-press effect and repeated hit effect of the operation button 17, change of the pending icon and change of the icon, display effect of the light guide plate, operation effect of the movable members 73 and 74 (suggestion, development, decision effect), vibration effect of the operation button (suggestion, development/decision effect), timer effect, lamp light effect of the starting ports 45 and 47, etc. can be executed singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the second half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, development effects and final effects on the display means such as liquid crystal, display effects of the light guide plate (light emission according to the result of the final effect, etc.) , Vibration production of operation button 17 (suggestion, development, decision production), operation production of frame accessories and board accessories (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion production (XX bonus, etc.), timer production, pending change It is possible to execute the lamp light emission effect of the start ports 45, 47, etc., individually or in combination.

In this case, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Further, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

When there are a first performance performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance performed in the second half of the execution period as the advance notice performance, the first performance and the second performance are performed in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. However, while the first effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, the execution of the second effect may be restricted. Also, the first effect and the second effect can be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, but the first effect can be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. , the execution of the second effect may be regulated.

Even in this way, the player is made to realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The execution ratio of various effects that expect the execution of the jackpot game, which is performed in the special 1 variation display in the above-described specific game state (time reduction game state or variable probability game state), may be "0".

The above-described various effects (generally referred to as a winning hint effect) that expect the execution of the jackpot game may be set with only one effect (display) pattern, but may be set with a plurality of effect (display) patterns. can be selected and executed. The hit indication effect is not limited to the fact that the execution ratio is different in relation to the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. In the hit hint effect, the execution ratio of a plurality of selectable patterns in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state (special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state) is the same. may also be different.

For example, when the win suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the winning suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is selected. Even if the same or corresponding first pattern and the same or corresponding second pattern as the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state have the same execution ratio, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state and the execution ratio may be different. Due to such a difference in pattern execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

For example, when the expectation level display by the color effect is selected from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", selectable "red" can be selected in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the "red" color effect that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than that of the color effect. In this case, the execution ratio of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that this is not limited to the degree of expectation display, and can be similarly applied to various effects that make players expect execution of the above-described big win game. That is, when the winning hint effect is selected from a plurality of patterns, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is selected from the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. A specific pattern that is the same as or corresponding to the selectable predetermined pattern may have a smaller execution ratio. By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Here, the pattern selected for the winning hint effect or the winning hint effect is the timing (for example, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, or other patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, etc.) ), and the execution ratio may be different. For example, when a variation pattern in which three production patterns 70a stop in order is selected, from the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, The "red" color effect that is executed at the start of the fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the production pattern 70a is selected, "Red The execution ratio of the "red" color light emission effect executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller than the "color light emission effect". It should be noted that it is not limited to the degree of expectation display and the light emission effect of the starting opening, and can be similarly applied to various effects for expecting the execution of the above-described jackpot game. That is, when the winning hint effect is executed under a predetermined condition, the winning hint effect (predetermined pattern of the winning hint effect) performed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the winning hint effect (predetermined pattern of the winning hint effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be smaller. By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

From the execution period of the winning hint performance (predetermined pattern of winning hint performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the winning hint performance performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state The execution period of (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) may be shorter.

When it is possible to execute a joint effect in which multiple types of hit hint effects are performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. , the execution ratio of joint production may be small. When there is a joint effect that is a combination of multiple types of hit hint effects that are performed at the same time, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. However, the proportion of execution of the predetermined win suggestion effect in the joint effect may be small. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hint performances performed at the same time, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the predetermined winning hint performance and the specific winning hint Although the performance can be executed, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the predetermined win implied performance among the joint performances, while the specific win implied performance may be executable. .

As the confirmation effect (including the rich effect of the big win), at a predetermined timing, the movable members 73 and 74 are operated, the operation button 17 is vibrated, and a predetermined mode of display such as rainbow display or rainbow light emission is performed. There are a first effect and a second effect that is performed at a timing different from the first effect (for example, at the start of variation, during variation, at the time of stop of variation, etc.). The second effect is, for example, a fixed notification sound that is output at the start of the fluctuation, a hold change in the rainbow mode, or a probability change fixed effect that expects the execution of a probability change depending on the hit of the production such as winning the battle. It is viable and has multiple patterns.

The fixed effect is the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, and the execution ratio of the first effect and / or the first effect of the fixed effect is different. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state 2 fluctuation display or the special game state 2 fluctuation display. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 variable display than in the special game state 2 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first and second fixed effects is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. You may At this time, the execution ratio of the other of the first effect and the second effect of the fixed effect may be the same or different.

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the first production and the second production of the fixed production can be executed, but in the special 1 fluctuation production in the specific game state, at least the second production It is preferable to regulate the execution of a predetermined pattern among the above. For example, in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, the first effect accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the fixed effect, while the movable member The pattern of the second effect involving the actuation of 73, 74 and operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The hit hint effect in the variable display of the losing judgment has been explained, but even in the variable display of the hit judgment, the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state , may be the same as in the loss determination.

As described above, a player who has a sense of incompatibility with the execution degree and type of the performance expected in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state (hit hint performance) suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. can be considered. In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager will check the control part that governs the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the structure of the effect in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state described above, the structure of the board case described later makes it easy for the hall manager to confirm, and the stress of the player is reduced. can improve the interest of

◇ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, an expectation level display (e.g., color effect) for expecting execution of the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the fluctuation based on the first start condition in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display (for example, color effect) than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and a special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on the determination is performed for one predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or for a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on determination, and is based on the first starting condition in the specific game state rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and based on the determination, a notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when the hold icon changes) that makes the execution of the special game expected can be executed, and the first display in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) than the variable display based on the starting condition. characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and continuous or related effects (for example, color effect, notification sound effect, light emission effect, pending icon change effect, movable member operation effect, etc.) are executed in the above-mentioned variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is more effective than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. Informative sound production, light emission production, holding icon change production, movable member operation production, etc.) are characterized by a small execution ratio.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) Suspension in which a variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the suspension icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the starting condition is established changes from a normal mode (eg, CD icon) to a specific mode (eg, color character icon). An icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the change performance is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, a light emission effect (for example, light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on winning to the first winning means (first winning hole 45) can be executed, and the first winning means in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the light emitting effect (e.g., the lighting of the winning entrance lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means ( second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or the second winning Variation display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) on the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the means (second prize winning port 47). can be executed, and a display mode including a first mode (eg, blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (eg, rainbow color effect, etc.) in the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first mode (for example, the blue effect, etc.) in the means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and movable parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first actuation mode (for example, weak actuation) of actuation representation by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, an expectation level display (e.g., color effect) for expecting execution of the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the fluctuation based on the second start condition in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display (for example, color effect) than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and a special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on the determination is performed for one predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or for a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on determination, and is based on the first start condition in the specific game state rather than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, execute a notification sound effect (for example, notification sound at the time of change of the hold icon) that makes the execution of the special game expected based on the determination, and execute the second display in the specific game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) than the variable display based on the starting condition. characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and continuous or related effects (for example, color effect, notification sound effect, light emission effect, pending icon change effect, movable member operation effect, etc.) are executed in the above-mentioned variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is more effective than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. Informative sound production, light emission production, holding icon change production, movable member operation production, etc.) are characterized by a small execution ratio.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) Suspension in which a variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the suspension icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the starting condition is established changes from a normal mode (eg, CD icon) to a specific mode (eg, color character icon). An icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is more suitable for the holding icon than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the change performance is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (for example, light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on the winning to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and the second The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the light emitting effect (for example, the lighting of the winning entrance lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition of . and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (
second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or the second winning Variation display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) on the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the means (second prize winning port 47). can be executed, and a display mode including a first mode (eg, blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (eg, rainbow color effect, etc.) in the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first mode (for example, the blue effect, etc.) in the means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and movable parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first actuation mode (for example, weak actuation) of actuation representation by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a pending icon is displayed or operated from the start to the end of the variable display, and the production pattern 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ) can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination is performed. In a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the game state is the normal game state, and the game state is the above-mentioned It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) When executing the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is unexecutable It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the effect mode (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a pending icon is displayed or operated from the start to the end of the variable display, and the production pattern 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ) can be executed, and when the second starting condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination is performed. In a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the game state is the normal game state, and the game state is the above-mentioned It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) When executing the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is unexecutable It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the effect mode (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the normal game state, a holding display corresponding to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specified It is characterized in that, in the game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first starting condition can be displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, no operation or no display).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the specific gaming state, a holding display corresponding to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the second start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specific It is characterized in that, in the game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first starting condition can be displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, no operation or no display).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and the average variable display time and the maximum hold at the maximum number of holds (for example, 4) when executing the variable display of the loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal game state From the difference from the average fluctuation display time with a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) less than the number, the maximum number of reservations in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first start condition in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time at (for example, 4) and the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute the variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination by the first start condition in the normal game state, the specific game is determined from the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. It is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined holding number is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the normal game state, the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific game state The case where the variable display is executed is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the same fluctuation pattern between the first number of reservations (for example, 4) and the second number of reservations (for example, 1) is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and the average variable display time and the maximum hold at the maximum number of holds (for example, 4) in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the second start condition in the specific gaming state From the difference from the average fluctuation display time with a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) less than the number, the maximum number of reservations in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first start condition in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time at (for example, 4) and the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute the variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination by the second start condition in the specific game state, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations, the specific game It is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined holding number is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the second starting condition in the specific game state, the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific game state The case where the variable display is executed is characterized in that the rate of execution of the same fluctuation pattern between the first number of reservations (for example, 4) and the second number of reservations (for example, 1) is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the normal game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the action effects (for example, preparation action and stop action) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the normal game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition. The number of types of action effects (for example, preparation actions and stop actions) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and the variable display is composed of the symbols of the first mode (for example, 1 to 9) and the second mode displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, special symbols having no numerical information). symbols, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. , characterized in that the rate at which symbols of the second mode (for example, special symbols having no numerical information, etc.) are displayed is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the starting condition of 2. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the action effects (for example, preparation action and stop action) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the starting condition of 2. The number of types of action effects (for example, preparation actions and stop actions) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbols can be displayed in a first pattern in a predetermined mode (for example, 1 to 9) and a second pattern in a specific mode (for example, a special pattern that does not have numerical information). and the ratio of the first symbol to be displayed in the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific game state rather than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. is characterized by a large

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the period of the stop display are included. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, the time to stop is long), and when the number of holds is the maximum in the normal game state, the change display becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition, The variable display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short). It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and in the stop display mode in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, there is a first stop display mode ( For example, there is a simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbols (effect symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the normal game state The variation that becomes a loss judgment based on the first starting condition when the maximum holding number is in the specific game state from the change display that becomes a loss judgment based on the first starting condition when the maximum holding number The display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is higher.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the pattern change effect for changing the display size of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the period of the stop display are included. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, the time to stop is long), and when the number of holds is the maximum in the specific game state, the change display becomes a loss determination based on the second start condition. The variable display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short). It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and in the stop display mode in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, there is a first stop display mode ( For example, there is a simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbols (production pattern 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the specific game state The variation that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum hold number is in the specific game state from the change display that becomes a loss determination based on the second start condition when the maximum hold number is present. The display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is higher.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the pattern change effect for changing the display size of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A first specific notification (e.g. right-handed display) suggesting that the variable display is executable and the specific game state, and the first specific notification (right-handed display) are performed. In addition to the first specific notification (right-handed display), a second specific notification (display and notification different from right-handed display) can be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the winning means. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and light emission effects and movable accessories (for example, first movable member 73, second movable member 74) action effect can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.), and at the predetermined position (for example, starting gate lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the specific game state It is characterized in that it is possible to regulate the execution of the light emitting effect and the action effect of the movable accessory (eg, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) at a predetermined timing (eg, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.). do.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and as a notification performance to expect execution of the special game, a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) and a timing different from the first notification (when the start gate wins). A second notification can be executed, and as the first notification, a first mode (for example, starter lamp NR blue flashing) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, starter lamp NR red flashing). It is executable, and as the second notification, it is executable in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode (for example, the starter lamp NR and the light emission of the board and / or frame lighting device), The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, and the execution of the first to third modes in the notification effect It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the notification effect of the fourth mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR does not emit light) different from the first to third modes is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and as a notification performance to expect execution of the special game, a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) and a timing different from the first notification (when the start gate wins). A second notification can be executed, and the first notification includes a first mode (eg, starter lamp NR blue flashing), a second mode different from the first mode (eg, starter lamp NR red flashing), It can be executed in a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, the starter lamp NR and the light emission of the board and / or frame lighting device), and as the second notification, the first It is executable in the same mode as the mode and the second mode, and is unexecutable in the same mode as the third mode, and the specific game state is changed from the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state. , the variable display based on the first starting condition has a smaller execution ratio of the first to third modes in the notification effect, and a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, a starting port lamp NR does not emit light) is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effect is large.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A first light emission mode using the first prize winning means (starting entrance lamp NR) and other lighting effects in conjunction with the first prize winning means are provided as a light emitting effect capable of executing a variable display and expecting execution of the special game. and a second light emitting mode using a light emitting means (for example, a board and/or frame lighting device), and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the first light emitting In the second light emission mode, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button) is higher than in the mode, and the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is executed in the specific game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition to be set is characterized in that the execution ratio of the vibration effect is smaller.

(Fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 as a fifth embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements described in the embodiments and combinations thereof are essential to the solution of the present invention. do not have. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the same tall product as in the first to fourth and sixth embodiments may be denoted by different reference numerals. 332 apply.

[Description of Gaming Machine 100]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299. FIG. FIG. 298 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 299 is a perspective view of the game machine frame of the game machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. FIG. The gaming machine 100 shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when the game balls win in a specific prize winning device, the pachinko game pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. machine.

In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "X direction" as necessary, the rightward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "+X direction", and the leftward direction of the gaming machine 100 is referred to as the "-X direction." Also called direction. The vertical direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “Y direction”, and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “+Y direction”, and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the “−Y direction”. Furthermore, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Z direction", and in particular, the direction toward the back side of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction", and the direction toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is called the "Z direction". -Z direction”.

As shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, the game machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 attached to the island facility of the game arcade, and an inner frame rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 160. 170 and a glass frame 150 rotatably supported with the inner frame 170 on the front side of the inner frame 170 . A glass member 151 is detachably provided on the back side of the glass frame 150 . At a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, there is a lock unit 190 for making the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 160 and making the upper unit 180 removable. is provided. Furthermore, a glass frame open switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened. An inner frame opening switch (not shown) is provided for detecting that it has been opened.

The inner frame 170 is provided with main mechanisms, various parts, substrates, and the like that constitute the game machine 100, and the game board unit 102 is detachably provided thereon. A game area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the game board unit 102 . The game area 106 includes a game ball flow-down area where game balls flow down and a display screen area of the main display device 131 .

The game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A constituting a game area 106, a character unit 102B including various movable characters, a main display device 131, an effect control board unit 102C including a effect control board 320, and a main control board unit 102</b>D having a main control board 300 . The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is placed in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131 . In addition, in the game board unit 102, the surface facing the player is also called the front surface, and the back surface (the surface opposite to the front surface) is also called the back surface.

A production operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150 . The rendering operation unit BSU is provided with a sword handle unit 135 and rendering operation sticks 136 . Further, an upper plate 128 is provided on the far side of the effect operation unit BSU, and a firing handle device 103 is provided on the lower right side of the effect operation unit BSU. Further, on the upper side of the glass frame 150, an upper unit 180 that executes a predetermined related action when a predetermined game state is entered is provided so as to partially cover the upper portion of the glass frame 150. As shown in FIG. The upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and configured to engage with the glass frame 150 . A first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided on both left and right side surfaces of the glass frame 150 for effect display during game play and non-game play.

The upper plate 128 is a plate for storing game balls to be shot to the game area 106 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led out to a launch rail (not shown), guided to a guide rail (not shown) via the launch rail at a predetermined launch strength by the launch handle device 103, and played. It is launched to the area 106 (game ball flow-down area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the shooting handle device 103, the game ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 passes through the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball flowing area included in the game area 106. do. Specifically, when the player rotates the shooting handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 can pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the shooting handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball shot from the shooting handle device 103 can pass through the right route 106b.

A sword handle unit 135 that imitates the shape of the handle of a sword is arranged in the central part of the effect operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 includes a sword handle button that can be used to perform a determination operation (operation input) during a game, a sword handle button detection switch 137 for detecting the operation of the sword handle button, and a sword handle button. A button drive provided with a button drive motor for changing between a state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a button vibration motor for changing the sword handle button between the normal state and a vibrating state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner. A device and a button light-emitting LED for changing the sword handle button between a light-off state and a light-on state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner are provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 100. . On the left side of the effect operation unit BSU, a effect operation stick 136, which is a joystick operated by the player when adjusting the volume of the gaming machine 100, is provided.

In the game area 106, there are an upper accessory unit 154 on the back side of the upper part, a lower accessory unit 156 on the lower part of the game ball flowing down area, and a position sandwiched between these units and the game board 102A. A light guide panel unit 181 including a light guide panel arranged to cover the movable accessory and the main display device 131 is provided.

The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are movable accessories (so-called gimmicks) provided in the accessory unit 102B. It is designed to execute the production of Further, the light guide panel unit 181 includes a light guide panel made of resin such as transparent acryl, and a light emitting section for allowing light to enter the light guide panel. In the light guide panel unit 181, the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 is made visible through the light guide panel, and a pattern or the like is displayed by causing part of the panel to emit light with the light incident from the light emitting unit. can be displayed. In the present embodiment, "movable character" is interpreted to mean a moving character, and "character" is broadly defined to include both movable and immovable characters. shall be interpreted as

A first starting device 112 having a starting area in which a game ball can enter is provided in a substantially central lower area of the game area 106 . This first starting device 112 is a winning device of a general winning device type, and when a game ball wins, a jackpot random number is acquired, a jackpot determination is made, and predetermined prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. . In addition, above the first starting device 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails, mainly in the middle of the left route 106a of the game ball flowing-down area, so-called warp, and enters the first starting device 112. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate. A game ball entering the stage 140 may return to the game ball flow-down area from a predetermined notch of the stage 140 after remaining on the stage 140 .

A second starting device 115 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided in the lower right area of the game area 106 . The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and is provided with a starting port at its lower portion, and has a movable piece 115b above the starting port. It is movably controlled between a protruding state protruding from 102A and a retracting state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is retracted, the game ball is led into the second starting device 115 from the starting port, and the game ball easily enters the second starting device 115.例文帳に追加Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in a projecting state, the game ball does not enter the starting hole, and the game ball cannot win the second starting device 115.例文帳に追加That is, in the second starting device 115, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, there is no winning chance of the game ball, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the winning chance of the game ball increases. When a game ball wins, the second starting device 115 acquires a jackpot random number and performs a jackpot determination in the same manner as the first starting device 112. For example, the same prize ball (3 pieces) will be paid out.

In addition, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, there are a normal symbol operation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first big winning device 117 in which game balls can enter, and a game ball which can enter. A second big winning device 127 is provided. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the winning random number and the normal symbol random number are acquired, and the winning determination and the like are performed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the prize ball based on the passage is not paid out.

The first big prize winning device 117 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and has an opening at its lower portion and a movable piece 117b above the opening. 2 Similar to the movable piece 115b of the starting device 115, it is movably controlled between a projecting state of projecting from the game board 102A and a retracted state of being drawn into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is retracted, the game ball is guided from the opening into the first big winning device 117, and the game ball can win the first big winning device 117 (this state is "open" or " (also called “open state”). Also, when a game ball wins in the first big prize winning device 117, predetermined prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in a projecting state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win the first prize winning device 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state"). ).

The second big prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacker-type electric accessory, and has an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 127b on the upper side of the opening. 2 similarly to the movable piece 115b of the starting device 115 and the movable piece 117b of the first big prize winning device 117, the projecting state in which the game ball cannot win the second big prize device 127 by projecting from the game board 102A, and the game board By pulling the game ball into 102A, the movement of the game ball is controlled to the pull-in state in which the second big winning device 127 can win a prize. Also, when a game ball wins in the second big winning device 127, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10) are paid out. Also, above the second big prize winning device 127, a prize winning auxiliary device (not shown) is provided. This prize winning auxiliary device is designed to stay on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time when a plurality of game balls passing through the right route 106b of the game area 106 pass through the closed movable piece 127b. The movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of staying game balls are made to enter the second big winning device 127 at once, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

At the bottom of the game area 106, game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 are discharged. An out port 111 is provided for this purpose. In addition, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, a cover 116 is provided to cover the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 from the front side. The cover 116 is formed with a guiding portion protruding toward the game board 102A in order to guide the game ball to the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127. As shown in FIG.

A main display device 131 made up of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 106, and the main display device 131 displays an image during standby when no game is played. , to display an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, based on the winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, a plurality of performance symbols for informing the judgment result of the big hit are variably displayed, and a combination of specific performance symbols (for example, 777, etc.) is stopped and a fixed stop display is displayed, a big win is reported as a big win determination result. In other words, the effect symbol is, when the game ball wins in the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, the fluctuation of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 which will be described later. It is variably displayed according to the display, and is stop-displayed according to the stop-display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined variation time. That is, the timing of the variable display of the effect symbols by the main display device 131 and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 are synchronized. In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern, by displaying various images, characters, etc., or by displaying the read-ahead effect of the reserved display related to the special pattern, etc., a big win may be won. It is also designed to give the player a sense of expectation. In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used, or a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, or the like may be used. A display device may be used.

The main display device 131 is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 102, and variably displays three performance symbols to display various performances. The effect displayed on the main display device 131 is executed based on the effect pattern described later. Below, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 are also simply referred to as "display effects". In the display effect on the main display device 131, when a winner is won in the jackpot determination, which will be described later, that is, in the case of a jackpot, three performance patterns are finally stopped and displayed, and a jackpot pattern arrangement (for example, " 7, 7, 7”, etc.) are displayed. In addition, in the display effect, if you lose in the jackpot determination, which will be described later, that is, if you lose, finally, the three performance patterns are stopped and displayed, and the losing pattern array (for example, "2, 5 , 1”) is displayed. Thereby, the player can recognize the result of the big hit determination.

A display 125 is provided on the lower left side of the game area 106 . The display 125 includes a normal symbol display 118, a normal symbol reservation display 119, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol reservation display 123, and a second It has a special symbol reservation display 124 . Details of the display 125 will be described later.

When the player performs so-called "left-handed hitting" in which the shooting handle device 103 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 106 . On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed shot" in which the shooting handle device 103 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right area in the game area 106 . Therefore, when the ball is entered into the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127, "right hitting" is required.

The first starter 112 is a normally open starter. On the other hand, the second starting device 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the determination result of the hit determination on the condition that the game ball enters the normal symbol operation gate 113b. In this case, a state is created in which the game ball can easily enter. When the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, various random numbers (jackpot random number, small winning random number, time-saving random number), reach random number, and variation A pattern random number is obtained and the following three decisions can be made. (1) Determination of whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot determination). (2) Determination of a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) indicating whether or not it is a big hit for notifying the result of the determination of a big hit on the display 125 (hereinafter also referred to as symbol determination). (3) In the display effect on the main display device 131, determination of whether to perform reach (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination), determination of which variation pattern to use among a plurality of variation patterns (hereinafter , also called fluctuation pattern judgment).

Here, the "jackpot game" is composed of a plurality of round games (eg, 10R), and in each round, the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 117 or the second This is a special game for opening the big winning device 127 . However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the first prize winning device 117 or the like. Also, the "small winning game" is a game in which the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 is opened within a time (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which a game ball can win. Furthermore, "ready-to-win" means that two of the three performance symbols that are variably displayed on the main display device 131 are stopped and displayed, and the two performance symbols are the three performance symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol array. It refers to the case where two of the above are formed. For example, in the main display device 131, two of the three performance symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed, and the two performance symbols are in the same state. In this case, the performance symbols constituting two of the three performance symbols constituting the jackpot symbol array are also called ready-to-win symbols. In the following description, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball that has passed through the first starting device 112 wins is also referred to as "special 1 jackpot judgment" or "first special symbol judgment", and the second starting device 115 The judgment executed on the condition of the winning of the game ball is also called "special 2 jackpot judgment" and "second special symbol judgment".

In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, a hit random number is obtained, and determination as to whether or not the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 is to be opened is executed. In the following, the determination that is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b is also referred to as "hit determination" and "normal symbol determination". In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning in normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is released, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100. FIG.

The movable piece 117b of the first big winning device 117 is opened according to the result of the big win determination. The first big winning device 117 is normally closed by this movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big win determination is a big win, a big win game in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first big winning device 117 is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not performed. The movable piece 127b of the second big winning device 127 operates in substantially the same manner as the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 is opened at the time of the big winning game according to the judgment result of the big winning judgment.

(Explanation of display 125)
The display device 125 mainly displays information about jackpot symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display device 120, a second special symbol display device 122, a first special symbol reservation display device 123, and a second special symbol reservation. It has a display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol reservation display 119. Although the display 125 is not specifically illustrated, it is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and it is determined that each LED corresponds to each of the above-described indicators such as the first special symbol display 120. It also has an easy-to-use display.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 120 variably displays the special symbol and then stops displaying, and according to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, the determination result of the jackpot determination in the first special symbol determination. to be notified. On the first special symbol display device 120, as the determination result of the big win determination, a big winning symbol indicating a big hit or a losing symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a losing is displayed. .

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display device 122 variably displays the special symbols and then displays them in a stopped state. to be notified. On the second special symbol display 122, as the determination result of the big win determination, a big winning symbol indicating a big hit or a losing symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a losing is displayed. .

By the way, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball newly wins the first starting device 112, such as during the variable display of the special symbols related to the special symbol determination or during the jackpot game, the first game ball is triggered by this winning. 1 Special symbol determination and variable display of symbols are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspension function of suspending the first special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of suspension information. The first special symbol reservation display 123 displays the number of reservation information (first reservation number) for the first special symbol determination stored in this way. Similarly, the gaming machine 100 suspends the second special symbol determination when a game ball newly wins the second starting device 115, such as during the variable display of the special symbols related to the special symbol determination or during the jackpot game. , It also has a reservation function of storing four pieces of random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of reservation information. The second special symbol reservation display 124 displays the number of reservation information (second reservation number) for the second special symbol determination thus stored.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 118 variably displays the normal symbol and then stops displaying, and notifies the determination result of the hit determination by the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. By the way, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, such as during the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display device 118, the normal symbol determination and the normal symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination are not immediately executed. It's becoming Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a suspending function of suspending the normal symbol determination and storing the information of the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol determination as the suspending information. The normal design reservation display 119 displays the number of reservation information for normal design determination stored in this way.

The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-handed lamp lights up during a jackpot game state described later and a time-saving game state described later, and recommends the player to hit right (details will be described later). The round lamp is composed of two or more lamps, and shifts from the off state to the on state at the time of the big win. The round lamp indicates the number of round games according to the jackpot type at the time of jackpot by lighting. For example, when there are two round lamps, lighting of one round lamp suggests that the round game will be executed three times (that is, a 3R jackpot), and the other round lamp is lit. lights up, suggesting that the round game will be played 10 times (that is, suggesting a 10R jackpot).

(Internal configuration of gaming machine 100)
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. The game machine 100 includes a main control board 300 , a payout control board 310 , an effect control board 320 , an image control board 330 , a lamp control board 340 , a launch control board 350 and a power supply board 360 .

As shown in FIG. 300, the main control board 300 controls basic operations of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 has a one-chip microcomputer 301 . The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also has an input port and an output port for main control (both not shown).

The main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal symbol operation gate 113b, and a first starting device for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting device 112. A device detection switch 304, a second starting device detection switch 305 for detecting that a game ball has entered the second starting device 115, and a first winning device for detecting that a game ball has entered the first big winning device 117. A detection switch 306a, a second winning device detection switch 306b for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning device 127, and a payout control board 310 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through this input port for main control.

Further, the output port for main control includes symbol displays 118, 120, 122 for displaying special symbols and normal symbols for opening and closing the movable piece 115b, etc. Symbol reservation indicators 119, 123, 124 for displaying the number of reservation information for the game, a game information output terminal board 309 for outputting an external information signal, a payout control board 310, and an effect control board 320 are connected. Various signals are output from the main control board 300 through this output port for main control.

Note that the game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 309 is wire-connected to the main control board 300, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting with a hall computer or the like of the game parlor.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads the program stored in the main ROM 301b based on the input signal from each detection switch and the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device. Alternatively, a command is sent to another board according to the result of arithmetic processing.

In addition, on the surface side of the main control board 110, RWM ( RAM) Clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b for inputting a signal for shifting to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, base value B and setting values for displaying the actual performance of the game machine. An information display 302c and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 302c is composed of four 7-segment displays (302ca to 302cd) arranged in the horizontal direction, details of which will be described later. Then, these four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd display a set value, which will be described later, and a base value B in the normal game state. Dynamic lighting is performed when the base value B is displayed, and static lighting is performed on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd from the right when displaying a two-digit set value. there is

The payout control board 310 performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 310 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM based on input signals from a payout ball measuring switch 311 for detecting whether or not a game ball has been paid out, a door opening switch 312, and a timer, and performs arithmetic processing. and transmits corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on the processing. The output side of the payout control board 310 is connected with a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to pay out a predetermined prize. Pay out the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

The effect control board 320 mainly controls each display effect such as during a game or during standby. This effect control board 320 includes a sub CPU 320a, a sub ROM 320b, and a sub RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 320b based on input signals from various commands and units received from the main control board 300, the effect operation stick 136, the sword handle button detection switch 137, and the timer. Arithmetic processing is performed, and corresponding data is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 based on the processing. The production control board 320 includes the volume of the production sound output from the audio output device 331, display devices (main display device, first side display device, second side display device, etc.) and various lighting devices (production lighting A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the device, etc.).

For example, when the sub CPU 320 a receives a variation start command from the main control board 300 , the main display device 131 , first side display device 132 , second side display device 133 , audio output device 331 , sword handle unit 135 , upper unit 180 , the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, the accessory mechanism section 158, the light guide panel unit 181, the illumination device for presentation 342, etc., determine the effect pattern for executing the game effect, and the effect pattern is determined. An effect pattern designation command for execution is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 . The details of the determination of the effect pattern will be described later. The sub-ROM 320b stores programs for effect control, data necessary for determination of various games, and a plurality of tables. Details of these tables will be described later. Further, the sub RAM 320c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 320a, and stores game states, effect patterns, effect symbols, counters, shooting operation information, and the like. A plurality of storage areas are provided in the sub-RAM 320c. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

The image control board 330 includes an image CPU, a control ROM, a control RAM, a CGROM, a VRAM, and a VDP (not shown) for performing image display control of the main display device 131, an audio CPU, an audio ROM, and an audio RAM. . This image control board 330 is connected to the effect control board 320 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the audio output are connected to the output side thereof. Device 331 is connected. Also, the image CPU performs control to display a predetermined image on the VDP based on a command received from the effect control board 320 . The control RAM functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. In addition, the control ROM stores programs for control processing of the image CPU, animation patterns for displaying animations based on production patterns, animation scene information, and the like. The CGROM stores a large number of image data such as effect patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the main display device 131 and the like. is read out, predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is developed in the VRAM, and control is performed to display the image data developed in the VRAM on the main display device 131 or the like, thereby realizing a display effect. The audio ROM stores a large number of audio data for output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a predetermined program based on the production pattern designation command transmitted from the production control board 320, Audio output control is performed in an audio output device 331 such as a speaker provided in the glass frame 150, the first side display device 132, and the second side display device 133, and audio effects are realized.

The lamp control board 340 controls various movable accessories (LEDs, etc.), the sword handle unit 135 (button driving device, button light emitting LED), and the light guide plate panel unit 181, and the lamp built in the firing handle device 103, and control of the lighting device 342 for presentation such as a lamp as a decorative member provided on the glass frame 150 . Specifically, the lamp control board 340 drives and controls the motors provided in each of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the accessory mechanism section 158. By doing so, the movable role production is realized by the movable role (movable body) of the unit. In addition, the lamp control board 340 controls the light-emitting LEDs of various movable accessories and the light-emitting portion of the light-guide panel unit 181 to realize the light-emitting performance by the light-guide panel, and to turn on/off the lighting device 342 for performance. A lighting performance by the lighting device 342 for performance is realized by performing blinking control. The lamp control board 340 is connected so as to be able to receive predetermined signals from the handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, and the like.

The firing control board 350 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 provided in the firing handle device 103, and based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 352, controls the energization of the firing solenoid 353 and the ball feed solenoid 354. I do. The touch sensor 351 is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance due to the player touching the firing handle device 103, and detects that the player has touched the firing handle device 103. , outputs a touch signal that permits energization of the firing solenoid 353 to the firing control board 350 . The firing volume 352 is composed of a variable resistor. A constant voltage (eg, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 is divided by the variable resistor and the divided voltage is supplied to the firing control board 350 . Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 350 . As a result, the number of game balls shot per minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shot solenoid rotates once. That is, one game ball is shot approximately every 0.6 seconds. A touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and a voltage signal from the emission volume 352 are input to the effect control board 320 . As a result, the production control board 320 can detect the launch of the game ball.

The power supply board 360 has a backup power supply made up of a capacitor and supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100 . Specifically, power supply voltage is supplied to the main control board 300 , the payout control board 310 , the effect control board 320 and the launch control board 350 . It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 100 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 301a stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

(Electrical Configuration of Main Control Board 300)
The electrical configuration of the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 to 304. FIG. FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot/hit determination table T1. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol determination table T2. 304 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 301, the main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games. , a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5 are stored.

The jackpot/hit determination table T1 is a table for performing jackpot determination based on a jackpot random number. (Time-saving game state 4), the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A referred to when determining which one to lose (jackpot lottery), and the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation on the second special symbol display 122. It includes a special 2 jackpot determination table T1B that is referred to when playing, and a hit determination table T1C that is referred to in the hit determination for determining whether or not the result of stopping the fluctuation of normal symbols is a hit. In the jackpot/hit determination table T1, the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B have different jackpot random numbers set according to a plurality of set values, and the probability of being determined as a jackpot is the set value. It is configured differently for each. Specifically, for example, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A, the setting value is set in four stages of "1" to "4", and when the setting value is "1", the probability of being determined as a jackpot About 1/300, about 1/290 when the set value is "2", about 1/280 when the set value is "3", and about 1/270 when the set value is "4". is set to Also, in the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the set value is set in four stages from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the probability of being determined as a jackpot is about 1/30. , about 1/29 when the set value is "2", about 1/28 when the set value is "3", and about 1/27 when the set value is "4". there is When these set values are displayed on the information display 302c, they are displayed as "01" to "04" on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd.

The symbol determination table T2 is a table referred to when determining a stop symbol such as a special symbol on the symbol display device 125 based on a jackpot symbol random number, a small symbol random number, a time-saving symbol random number, and a normal symbol random number. , a jackpot design determination table, a small hit design determination table, a losing design determination table, a time reduction design determination table, and a normal design determination table. Details of these determination tables will be described later.

The reach determination table T3 is a table referred to when performing reach determination based on reach determination random numbers. The reach determination table T3 includes various tables that can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol, such as a special 1 normal time reach determination table, a special 2 short time reach determination table, and the like. Specifically, for example, the special 1 normal reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the normal game state, The special 2 time-saving reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach in the display effect based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2. In addition, details of various game states such as non-probability variation gaming state and probability variation gaming state will be described later.

The first variation pattern table T4 is a table for performing variation pattern determination based on the variation pattern random number, and the average variation seconds (average presentation time) is shorter than the second variation pattern table T5, This table is selected when the hold order information at acquisition, which will be described later, is "3" or "4". The first variation pattern table T4 includes four variation pattern tables, that is, the first special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special 1 probability fluctuation fluctuation pattern table T4B, and the first special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T4C. and the first special second probability variation time fluctuation pattern table T4D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the 1st special 1 normal time variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol based on the entry ball to the 1st starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The 1st special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The 1st special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol based on the entry ball to the 2nd starting device 115 in the non-probability variable gaming state. The 1st special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

The second variation pattern table T5 is a table for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number, and the average number of variation seconds is longer than the first variation pattern table T4. This table is selected when the information is "1" or "2". The second variation pattern table T5 includes four variation pattern tables, that is, the second special 1 normal fluctuation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 probability fluctuation fluctuation pattern table T5B, and the second special 2 normal fluctuation pattern table T5C. and the second special second probability variation time fluctuation pattern table T5D. These four variation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal time variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The second special 1 probability variation time variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variation gaming state. The 2nd special 2 normal time variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol based on the entry ball to the 2nd starting device 115 in the non-probability variation gaming state. The 2nd special 2 probability variation time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variation gaming state.

It should be noted that one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of variation pattern determination, and not selected at the same time. Also, the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 have various variation patterns. Specifically, pseudo continuous production, normal losing production, normal reach (losing or hitting) production, SP reach (losing or hitting) production (development production after reach formation production execution), SPSP reach (losing or hitting) production ( Development production after execution of SP reach production), SP SP reach revival (hit) production, production in which a losing pattern array is formed, production in which a jackpot pattern array is formed in a specific pattern Variation that combines various effects It's a pattern. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect (or pseudo-continuous variable effect) means that during the variable display of the special symbols, the effect pattern is variably displayed, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the effect pattern is again variably displayed. It is an effect that repeats the variable display of . In this case, in the pseudo continuous effect, the effect pattern is temporarily stopped, but it is not limited to this. good.

Here, various game states in this embodiment will be described. First, there are "low probability state (non-probability variation gaming state)" and "high probability state (probability variation gaming state)" as states related to jackpot determination, and "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a low probability state and non-time-saving gaming state "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)", a low probability state and time-saving gaming state "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 2/time-saving game state 3/time-saving game state 4)”, and “high-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)”, which is a high-probability state and time-saving state, are provided, and the details will be described later. The initial game state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the "normal game state", and the "normal game state" is set during the jackpot game, but the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, it becomes a game state different from the normal game state.

First, "low probability state (non-probability variable gaming state)" means, for example, if the set value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game as described above, is "1", the first A game state in which the probability of a big hit is set as low as about 1/300 in a big win determination performed on the condition that a game ball has entered the starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 . On the other hand, "high probability state (probability variable gaming state)" means that if the setting value is "1" as described above, the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/30. Refers to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the probability state. It should be noted that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is performed after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the "non-time-saving game state" means that in the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the probability of hitting is set as low as 1/20, and the variation of the normal symbol. It refers to a game state in which the average display time is set to about 30 seconds and the opening time of the second starting device 115 in the case of winning is set to 0.180 seconds. On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that the hit probability in the normal design determination is set as high as 19/20, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal design is set to about 3 seconds, and if it is a hit By setting the opening time of the second starting device 115 to 3 to 6 seconds, the consumption of the game ball is suppressed because the game ball enters the second starting device 115 more easily than in the "non-time-saving game state". It means a game state that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the "time-saving gaming state" than the "non-time-saving gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal design, the opening time of the second starting device 115 and the winning probability are advantageous, but the normal design , the opening time of the second starting device 115, and the winning probability may be set to be advantageous. Also, although the hit probability in the "non-time-saving gaming state" is 1/20, the hit probability may be set to 0/20 so as not to be determined as a hit. In such a case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the game ball does not enter (win) the second starting device 115 .

As shown in FIG. 302(a-1), in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A, the jackpot determination results (jackpot, The value of the big hit random number corresponding to the small hit, time saving 4, loss) is set. And, although details will be described later, for example, when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, a big hit pattern (special pattern A1, etc.) is displayed, and when a small hit is won, a small hit pattern (special pattern K) is displayed. When winning, a time-saving design (special design J1) suggesting a transition to a time-saving gaming state 4, which will be described later, is displayed, and when a loss occurs, a losing design (special design H) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 302(a-2), in the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the jackpot determination results (jackpot, The value of the big hit random number corresponding to the small hit, time saving 4, loss) is set. In addition, although the jackpot winning probability is the same between the big hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 and the big winning determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115, the small winning winning probability and the time reduction 4 The probability of winning is different. In addition, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, it is possible to win the short time 4 in the low probability state, but it is not possible to win the short time 4 in the high probability state.

Here, the big win determination with reference to the special 1 big win determination table T1A and the special 2 big win determination table T1B will be described. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment refers to the game state (low-probability state or high-probability state) when the game ball wins, and determines each game state in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. Select the corresponding table. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a jackpot random number (the random number range is a numerical value "0" to "598") obtained when a game ball wins in the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. , The setting of the special 1 big hit determination table T1A or the special 2 big hit determination table T1B is compared, and if they match, it is determined that the big hit, the small hit, or the short time 4 is won, and if they do not match either , is determined to be lost. In addition, in the jackpot determination with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the probability of winning a small hit, and The probability of winning the short time 4 is the same probability.

As shown in FIG. 302 (b), in the hit determination table T1C, determination results of hit determination in each state of non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state based on the passage of the game ball of the normal symbol operation gate 113b (hit, lose) The value of the hit random number corresponding to is set. Here, hit determination with reference to the hit determination table T1C will be described. First, the main CPU 301a of the present embodiment refers to the game state (non-time-saving game state or time-saving game state) when the game ball wins, and selects a table corresponding to each game state in the hit determination table T1C. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a hit random number (the random number range is a numerical value "0" to "19") obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b as described above, and the hit determination table T1C. The setting and are compared, and if they match, it is determined as hit or miss.

As shown in FIG. 303, the symbol determination table T2 includes a big-hit symbol determination table referred to when determining a stop symbol (big-hit symbol) when a big-hit determination is made, and a small-hit determination table when a big-hit determination is made. A small hit design determination table that is referred to when determining the stop design (small hit design) when it is done, and a stop design (losing design) that is determined when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination. It includes a losing pattern determination table and a time-saving design determination table referred to when determining a stop design (time-saving design) when time-saving 4 is determined in the jackpot determination. In addition, the normal symbol determination table X referred to when determining the stop symbol (long open symbol, short open symbol) when it is determined to be a hit in the hit determination, and the stop symbol when it is determined to be lost in the hit determination It also includes a normal symbol determination table Y referred to when determining (losing symbol).

As shown in FIG. 303(a-1), in the jackpot symbol determination table, the one for the first special drawing to be referred to when the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 is determined to be a jackpot. And, those for the second special figure to be referred to when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115, are set. Here, the symbol determination with reference to the big hit symbol determination table will be described. First, in the main CPU 301a of the present embodiment, in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the first special figure or the second special figure in the jackpot symbol determination table Select one of the tables in Next, the main CPU 301a generates a jackpot pattern random number (the random number range is a numerical value "0" to "99") obtained when a game ball wins in the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. and the setting of the jackpot symbol determination table. It should be noted that the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol specifying command capable of specifying stop symbol data (kind of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols.

Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, and the jackpot symbol random number obtained when the first starting device 112 wins is between "0" and "59", the main CPU 301a sets the stop symbol to "01 ( By determining the special symbol A1)", the special symbol A1 is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 120, and "E0H" and "01H" are generated as effect symbol designation commands. In addition, for example, when it is determined as a big hit in the jackpot determination, and the jackpot symbol random number obtained at the time of winning to the second starting device 115 is "70" to "99", the main CPU 301a selects "05 (special symbol)" as the stop symbol. B2)" is determined, the special symbol B2 is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device 122, and "E1H" and "02H" are generated as effect symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 125, the first probability variable length, the first probability variable short, the first normal length, the second probability variable length, and the second probability variable length corresponding to each special symbol are displayed. A jackpot game such as 2 normal long win is started. As described above, the jackpot game is composed of a plurality of round games, and a long hit (eg, 10R) is a short hit (eg, 3R). It is composed of a large number of rounds. The total opening time of the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 is large.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a-2), in the small hit symbol determination table, the first special figure to be referred to when it is determined to be a small hit in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 and a second special figure that is referred to when a small hit is determined in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115. Here, the symbol determination with reference to the small hit symbol determination table will be described. First, in the main CPU 301a of the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the first special figure or the second special figure in the small winning symbol determination table Select one of the special tables. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a small winning symbol random number (random number range is "0" to "99") obtained when a game ball wins in the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. ) and the setting of the jackpot symbol determination table. It should be noted that the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol specifying command capable of specifying stop symbol data (kind of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols. Specifically, for example, even if it is determined to be a small hit in the big hit determination, and the small hit symbol random number obtained at the time of winning the first starting device 112 is any of "0" to "99", the main CPU 301a stops the symbol. By determining "11 (special symbol K)" as a special symbol K, the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 120, and "E0H" and "0AH" are generated as the effect symbol designation commands. . In this way, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 125, a small winning game is started.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a-3), in the losing pattern determination table, the one for the first special symbol to be referred to when it is determined to be a failure in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112. And, the one for the second special figure to be referred to when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115, is set. Here, the symbol determination with reference to the losing symbol determination table will be described. First, in the main CPU 301a of the present embodiment, in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, Select one of the tables to determine the stop symbol. It should be noted that the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol specifying command capable of specifying stop symbol data (kind of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols. Specifically, for example, when the big hit determination based on the winning to the first starting device 112 is determined to be a loss, the main CPU 301a determines "00 (special symbol H)" as the stop symbol, thereby The special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 120, and "E0H" and "00H" are generated as production symbol designation commands.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a-4), in the time saving pattern determination table, it is referred to when it is determined as time saving 4 in the big hit determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115 are set in common for the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115 . Here, the symbol determination with reference to the time-saving symbol determination table will be described. The main CPU 301a of the present embodiment corresponds to time-saving pattern random numbers (the random number range is a numerical value "0" to "99") obtained based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115. to determine the stop symbol. It should be noted that the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol specifying command capable of specifying stop symbol data (kind of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of special symbols. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot determination is time saving 4, and the jackpot symbol random number obtained at the time of winning the first starting device 112 is "0" to "70", the main CPU 301a determines "21" as the stop symbol. (Special symbol J1)" is determined, the special symbol J1 is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 120, and "E0H" and "11H" are generated as production symbol designation commands. Thus, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 125, the game state shifts to the time saving game state 4 as described later, and the time saving game is started.

At this time, more specifically, for example, the first special symbol display device 120 is variably displayed over about 40000 ms, and the main display device 131 performs a normal reach effect described later, and then shifts to the time saving game state 4. is notified, or after a predetermined time-saving transition effect of about 40000 ms is executed on the main display device 131 (an effect of a mode in which the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is notified), the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is performed. You may do so. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 120 is variably displayed over about 60000 ms, and the main display device 131 performs a normal reach effect and an SP reach effect (losing), which will be described later. The transition is notified, or after a predetermined time-saving transition effect (an effect in which the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is notified) is executed on the main display device 131 for about 60000 ms, the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is performed. You may

As shown in FIG. 303 (b-1), (b-2), in the normal symbol determination table X, refer to when it is determined to be a hit in the hit determination based on the passage of the game ball at the normal symbol operation gate 113b. In the normal symbol determination table Y, the normal symbol determination table Y is set to be referred to when it is determined to be lost in the hit determination based on the passage of the game ball at the normal symbol operation gate 113b. Incidentally, these normal symbol determination tables are common in various game states. Here, the symbol determination with reference to the normal symbol determination table will be described. The main CPU 301a of the present embodiment selects either the normal symbol determination table X or the normal symbol determination table Y according to the determination result of the hit determination, and determines whether the game ball at the normal symbol operation gate 113b. A stop symbol is determined by comparing with a normal symbol random number (random number range is "0" to "10") obtained based on passage. It should be noted that the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command capable of specifying stop symbol data (kind of special symbol) at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Concretely, for example, when it is determined that it is hit by the hit determination, and the normal symbol random number obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b is "2" to "10", the main CPU 301a determines the stop symbol. By determining "02 (short open symbol)", the short open symbol is stop-displayed on the normal symbol display 118, and "E8H" and "02H" are generated as production symbol specifying commands. Thus, after the special symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol, lost symbol) are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the second starting device 115 corresponding to each special symbol is opened or closed. be. Note that the long opening (for example, 6 seconds) is a state in which the second starting device 115 is opened for a longer time than the short opening (for example, 3 seconds). 115 is not opened.

As shown in FIG. 304(A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 301a, and has a plurality of storage areas. It has a reservation information determination area 301cy, which is a determination area in which design determination is performed based on the reservation information. The main RAM 301c also has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as a high accuracy flag, a time saving flag, and a jackpot flag, which will be described later) and various recorded values are stored.

As shown in FIG. 304(B), the pending information storage area 301cx has four pending information areas (first information area, second reserved information area, third reserved information area, fourth reserved information area), and four reserved information areas (first reserved information area, second A reserved information area, a third reserved information area, a fourth reserved information area) are provided. In the pending information area corresponding to the first special symbol of the pending information storage area 301cx, the priority order of storing the pending information is the first pending information area is stored with the highest priority, and the pending information is stored in the first pending information area. If it is stored, then the second reserved information area is preferentially stored, then the third reserved information area is preferentially stored, and finally the fourth reserved information area is stored. selected. The same applies to the reserved information area corresponding to the second special symbol. Regarding the presence or absence of storage of pending information, the pending information area where pending information is stored is indicated by "○", and the pending information area where pending information is not stored is indicated by "-". It is Further, the acquisition pending order information stored in the pending information area of the pending information storage area 301cx is information representing the pending order when the pending information is acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area stored when the hold information is acquired. For example, when pending information is acquired, if the pending information is stored only in the first pending information area, the pending information will be stored in the second pending information area. The information becomes "2". When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area Since it will be stored, the hold order information at the time of acquisition becomes "4". That is, in FIG. 304(B), when the third pending information is acquired, the pending information is already stored in the second pending information area and the third pending information area, and the third pending information The information is stored in the first reserved information area, and the fourth reserved information is stored in the fourth reserved information area.

(Electrical configuration of production control board 320)
The electrical configuration of the effect control board 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 and 306. FIG. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing details of the effect control board 320. As shown in FIG. FIG. 306 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a prior determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The production control board 320 determines a production pattern based on commands (including variation patterns, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 300, and sends production pattern designation commands based on the production pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the image control board 330 is electrically connected to the main display device 131 and the like, and the lamp control board 340 is electrically connected to the sword handle unit 135 and the like. With such a configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 execute display effects, sound effects, lighting effects, and character movement effects based on the effect pattern designation command transmitted from the effect control board 320. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 305, the sub ROM 320b stores a basic display effect designation table TS1, a effect symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3. The basic display effect designation table TS1 is based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, the above-mentioned normal losing effect, normal reach (losing or winning) effect, SP reach (losing or winning) effect, SPSP reach (losing or winning) effect. This is a table for designating any one of a win) effect and an SPSP ready-to-reach revival (win) effect as a base effect in the display effect (hereinafter also referred to as a base display effect). In this embodiment, the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display effects correspond one-to-one. A plurality of basic display effects may be associated with the variation pattern, and the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 may select the basic display effect by lottery. In this way, even if the variation pattern is the same, the effect contents can be changed. Also, one basic display effect may correspond to a plurality of variation patterns. The performance symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining a combination of performance symbols for temporary stop display and fixed stop display, and a ready-to-win symbol for ready-to-win in the display performance based on the performance pattern. The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in the display effect. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect for executing a display effect different from the normal effect and increasing the expectation of a big win compared to the normal effect.

As shown in FIG. 306, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a reserved storage area 320c1 and a prior determination information storage area 320c3. The sub-RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) in which predetermined flags (continuous execution effect flag, pseudo-continuous effect execution flag, etc.) are stored. The reserved storage area 320c1 includes the first reserved area, the second reserved area, the third reserved area, and the fourth reserved area corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved area corresponding to the second special symbol, the second It is divided into eight areas, a reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area, each of which can store one reservation flag. In the reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation storage area 320c1, the priority order of storage of the reservation flag is the first reservation area to be stored with the highest priority, and the reservation flag is stored in the first reservation area. For example, next, the second reservation area is preferentially targeted for storage, then the third reservation area is preferentially targeted for storage, and finally the fourth reservation area is selected for storage. The same applies to the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the production control board 320 receives the pending command from the main control board 300, the pending area in which the pending flag is stored is specified in the pending storage area 320c1, and the pending area to be preferentially stored next to the pending area. store the pending flag in However, if the pending command is received while the pending flag is stored in the fourth pending area, the pending flag is not stored. Also, the order of priority for erasing the pending flag is the reverse of the order of priority for storing it. Then, the third reservation area is preferentially targeted for erasure, then the second reservation area is preferentially targeted for erasure, and finally the first reservation area is selected for erasure. When the performance control board 320 receives the symbol determination command from the main control board 300, the reservation area in which the reservation flag is stored is specified in the reservation storage area 320c1, and the reservation flag of the reservation area to be preferentially erased is erased. . In addition, when the reservation flag is not stored in the first reservation area, the erasing process is not performed.

The pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing the pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbol, pre-determination variation pattern and acquisition reservation order information), corresponding to the type of special symbol, respectively , four storage areas (first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area) are provided. In addition, in each storage area, a jackpot determination information column for storing jackpot determination information based on the special symbols for preliminary determination, a jackpot pattern information column for storing jackpot pattern information based on the symbols for preliminary determination, and a variation for preliminary determination Variation pattern information column for storing variation pattern information based on the pattern, acquisition pending order information column for storing acquisition pending order information, and continuous performance presence/absence information for storing continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether continuous performance is activated A column and a are provided. Note that the continuous effect presence/absence information includes continuous effect activation information and continuous effect non-activation information.

The hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (special symbol for pre-determination, fluctuation pattern for pre-determination, and hold order information at the time of acquisition). The prior determination information storage area 320c3 stores these prior determination information in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing the pre-determination information is that the first storage area is the storage target with the highest priority, and if the pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area, then, The second storage area is preferentially targeted for storage, then the third storage area is preferentially targeted for storage, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as an object for storage. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state where the pre-determination information is already stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the pre-determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, reservation order information "4 ”) is stored (see FIG. 306), information representing “4” is stored in the acquisition reservation order information column of the fourth storage area, and “variation pattern 7B” is stored in the variation pattern information column of the fourth storage area ", information representing "specific symbol A" is stored in the jackpot symbol information column of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area.

In addition, in FIG. 306, as the preliminary determination information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information of "losing" in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "none" in the jackpot symbol information column, and the variation pattern information column information of "variation pattern 1" is stored in the column, and information representing "3" is stored in the reservation order information column at the time of acquisition. As the pre-determination information in the second storage area, "Loss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot pattern information column, and "Variation pattern 2AX" information in the variation pattern information column. Information indicating "1" is stored in each reservation order information column. As the pre-determination information in the third storage area, "Loss" information in the jackpot determination information column, "None" information in the jackpot pattern information column, and "Variation pattern 4BX" information in the variation pattern information column. Information indicating "2" is stored in each of the reservation order information columns. Further, in the continuous effect presence/absence information column, continuous effect activation information indicating whether or not to execute a continuous effect is stored in a look-ahead process described later. In addition, in the continuous effect presence/absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, "○" is indicated as the continuous effect activation information, which is information indicating the activation of the continuous effect, and in the other storage areas, "-" is shown as continuous effect non-execution information, which is information indicating that the continuous effect is not to be activated.

(Description of game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, transition of the game state when the game progresses will be described. FIG. 307 is a diagram explaining the transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 307, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, similarly to the conventional gaming machine, from the "normal game state" through the "jackpot game" transition to the "time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)" In the case of ((a) → (2)) and in the "time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1 or time-saving game state 2)", when it is determined to be a big hit by the big hit determination process, the "jackpot game" is executed (( C)), and on the other hand, if it is not judged as a big hit, the game moves to the "normal game state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when "predetermined conditions are established" in the "normal game state", the system shifts to the "time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4)" without going through the jackpot game. ((b)) is possible. It should be noted that, in the case of transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" through the "jackpot game", the number of possible games in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1)" becomes "100 times". , and the number of playable times of the “low-probability short-time gaming state (short-time gaming state 2)” is “100”. On the other hand, in the case of shifting from the "normal game state" to the "low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4)" without going through the "jackpot game", the number of possible games is "700 times". It has become. In other words, from the "normal game state" to the "jackpot game" than the number of times that can be played in the case of transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state", "predetermined condition established" without going through the "jackpot game" In the case of shifting to the "time-saving gaming state", the number of possible games in the "time-saving gaming state" is greater. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state is about 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the set value is "1"). The possible number of games such as "700 times" in the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4 may be set.

Further, the possible number of games in the "time saving game state 4" may be set differently according to the game state in which the time saving symbols are stop-displayed. For example, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the "time saving game state", it may be made to be a larger number of times than when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the "normal game state". The number of times may be reduced.

Here, "establishment of a predetermined condition" is defined as a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition in the present embodiment. The first predetermined condition is when the accumulated number of times "n", which is the number of times of variable display of the special symbols executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the accumulated number of times "n", which is the number of times the special symbols are changed and displayed in the "low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state)". When the cumulative number of times "n" to be counted and stored reaches a predetermined number, the "low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" shifts to the "low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state 3)". ing. In addition, as the second predetermined condition, it is a case where it stops at a preset "time saving pattern (specific losing pattern)". 4)”. In addition, the rate at which the "time saving pattern" is determined may be any rate. For example, it may be a probability that is the same as or similar to the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, or a probability that is easy to determine. good. Further, "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, or may include two conditions. Conditions other than conditions may be provided.

As the predetermined number of times in the first predetermined condition, an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of determining a big win for each set value. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state is about 2.5 times or more of the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the set value is "4"). The predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" so as to be 3.0 times or less. Furthermore, as the "starting point", for example, it is possible to set the point in time when the "jackpot game" ends, or the point in time when the RAM is cleared, such as when the above setting is changed. That is, in the area that counts and stores the cumulative number "n" of the main RAM 301c, at the time of transition to the "jackpot game", at the end of the "jackpot game", or at the time the RAM is cleared, the cumulative number "n" is counted. Initialization processing will be executed. In addition, as the second predetermined condition "time saving pattern", a plurality of types of patterns may be set in advance, and the number of possible games in the time saving game state 4 is set to a different number of times for each type of "time saving pattern". may be

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, thereby reducing the number of players who blindly play the game. In addition, for example, when the predetermined number of times is about "800 (times)", it is possible to give relief measures to players who have not been able to obtain big wins for a long time, which leads to prevention of leaving the game. Furthermore, when shifting to the "time-saving gaming state" due to the "satisfaction of the predetermined condition", the "low-probability short-time gaming state (shorter working hours gaming state 2)" than the case of transitioning to the "low-probability short-time gaming state (time-saving gaming state 2)" through the "jackpot game" Since the number of possible games in the game state (time-saving game state 3 or time-saving game state 4) increases, it is possible to make the player actively try to play the game in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)". , the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Here, the counting process of the cumulative number of times "n" in the area for counting and storing the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the main RAM 301c will be described. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 301a sets "800" as the initialization process of the accumulated count "n" when the "starting point" such as the end of the "jackpot game" is reached, and the "time saving game state 2 ” or “Normal game state”, every time the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability game state is completed, subtraction processing of “1” from the cumulative number of times “n (800)” is executed. Then, when the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0", the main CPU 301a determines that the first predetermined condition is established, and executes the process of shifting the game state to the "time-saving game state 3". It should be noted that even after the game state shifts to the "time-saving game state 3" in this way, the main CPU 301a continues to execute the subtraction process, but again becomes the "starting point" and the cumulative number of times "n" is reached. is updated to "800", the transition processing to the "time saving game state 3" based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition for the second time is not executed. Also, in the jackpot determination, the subtraction process is executed even when the fluctuation display of the special symbol, which is the determination result of the small hit and the time saving 4, ends. With such a subtraction process, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 800 times or more in the low-probability game state, it is possible to prevent the cumulative number of times "n" from being updated unless the "starting point" is reached. Therefore, it is possible to suppress enlargement of the storage capacity of the main RAM 301c and the control capacity of the main CPU 301a.

In addition, in the state of "time saving game state 2 (low probability time saving game state)" in the game state, if the above-described first predetermined condition or second predetermined condition is satisfied, in the state of "time saving game state 2" "time saving You may control so that it may shift to the game state 3” or the “time-saving game state 4”. With such a gaming machine, in the "time saving game state 2", the "time saving game state 3" or "time saving game state 4" is continued, and the game continues in the "time saving game state". Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game. On the other hand, even if the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the state of "time saving game state 2", only "time saving game state 2", "time saving game state 3" or " It may be controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state 4”. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming significantly advantageous.

Furthermore, in the state of "time saving game state 3 (low probability time saving game state)" in the game state, if the second predetermined condition described above is satisfied, "time saving game state 4" in the state of "time saving game state 3" You may control to shift. Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to continue playing in the "time-saving gaming state" in the same manner as described above, thereby further improving the gaming interest. On the other hand, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the state of "time saving game state 3", it is only "time saving game state 3" and is controlled so as not to shift to "time saving game state 4". may Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming significantly advantageous in the same manner as described above. In addition, as described above, there is no case where the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the state of "time saving game state 3", so that the state of "time saving game state 3" is shifted to "time saving game state 3" is not controlled by

Then, in the state of "time saving game state 4" in the game state, if the above-described first predetermined condition or second predetermined condition is satisfied, "time saving game state 3" or "time saving game state 3" in the state of "time saving game state 4" It may be controlled to shift to game state 4”. Specifically, for example, when the first predetermined condition is established when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 600 times in the state of "time saving game state 4", "time saving game state 4" is terminated. From the 601st variable display of special symbols, without shifting to "time-saving game state 3", until the 700th variable display of special symbols, the state is changed to "time-saving game state 4" and "time-saving game state 4", 701 You may control so that it may shift to the state of only the "time saving game state 3" from the first time. Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to continue playing in the "time-saving gaming state" in the same manner as described above, thereby further improving the gaming interest. On the other hand, in the state of "time saving game state 4", even if the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, only "time saving game state 4", "time saving game state 3" or " It may be controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state 4”. Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming significantly advantageous in the same manner as described above.

(List of processing in the main control board 300)
Next, with reference to FIG. 308, the processing executed by main control board 300 will be described. FIG. 308 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 308, when power is supplied, the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 executes main processing based on a program stored in the main ROM 301b. As main processing, the main CPU 301a performs power restoration processing for restoring the gaming state from power shutdown to the game state before the power shutdown, and the stage of the degree of advantage of the game based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b (judgment is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination). setting change processing for changing (updating) the set value (probability that the RWM clear switch 302a is operated); RAM clear processing for initializing the main RAM 301c based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 302a; Setting confirmation processing for displaying the saved setting values on the information display 302c is executed, and initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers) are updated. In addition, the main CPU 301a repeats timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, switch processing, special symbol processing, normal symbol processing, large winning device opening control) at regular intervals (for example, 4 millisecond intervals) during execution of the main processing. processing, payout processing, command transmission processing). Various types of processing will be described below.

The setting change process shifts to a setting change mode in response to a predetermined operation (for example, pressing for two seconds or more) of the setting key switch 302b, displays the current setting value on the information display 302c, and exits the setting change mode. 2) is a process of changing the setting value according to a predetermined operation (for example, the number of times the setting key switch 302b is pressed for one second or less). Also, in the setting change process, a predetermined operation (for example, pressing for two seconds or more) of the setting key switch 302b during the setting change mode terminates the setting change mode and sets the changed setting value. can also Further, in the setting confirmation process, when the setting key switch 302b is not in the setting change mode, it is shifted to the setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation (for example, pressing for one second or less), and the current setting is displayed on the information display 302c. The value is displayed, and the setting confirmation mode is ended in response to a predetermined operation (for example, pressing for one second or less) of the setting key switch 302b during the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value on the information display 302c is ended. It is a process to

The random number update process is a process of updating various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers, hit random numbers, reach random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, time-saving pattern random numbers, normal pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers. The switch process is a process that is executed when a detection signal is input from each switch, and when the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 detects the entry of a ball, a jackpot random number or the like is acquired and held as hold information. A starting device switch process to be stored, a gate switch process to acquire and store a normal symbol random number when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate 113b, and a first large during the execution of the jackpot game (at the time of the jackpot game state) It is a process including a big winning device switch process for detecting a game ball that has won the winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 . In addition, the starting device switch processing includes preliminary determination processing for executing a big hit determination, a big hit symbol determination, and the like based on the reservation information.

The special symbol processing is a processing related to a special symbol corresponding to the processing result of the switch processing (the first starting device 112, the second starting device 115) and the special symbol special electric processing data to be described later, and the variable display of the special symbol is When finished, the pending information shift process for shifting the pending information and the pending order information at the time of acquisition in the pending information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c, and the big hit random number of the pending information shifted to the pending information determination area 301cy by the pending information shift process. / A jackpot determination process for executing a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination table T1, and a jackpot symbol (special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number and the symbol determination table T2 included in the reservation information when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot ), the reach determination process for executing reach determination based on the reach random number and reach determination table T3 included in the reservation information, and the variation pattern table and the variation pattern random number of the reservation information. A process including a variation pattern setting process for setting a pattern and a special symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the variation display of the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122 (details will be described later). be.

The normal design process is a process related to the normal design according to the processing result in the switch process (normal design operation gate 113b), and is a hit determination process that performs a hit determination based on a hit random number and a hit/jackpot determination table T1. , Normal pattern determination processing for determining normal symbols based on normal symbol random numbers and normal symbol determination table T6 when there is normal symbol reservation information, and operation pattern of movable piece 115b when normal symbol determination determines hit and an opening/closing member control process for opening/closing the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 based on the operation pattern set in the operation pattern setting process.

The big winning device opening control process is a process related to opening and closing control of the first big winning device 117 and the second big winning device 127 based on the special special electric processing data to be described later. An open pattern setting process for setting a pattern, turning off a jackpot game flag when the last ending performance of a jackpot game is completed, a high-probability flag indicating a high-probability game state, and a time-saving game state 1/time-saving game A game state setting process for turning on a time saving 1/time saving 2 flag or the like indicating state 2 and setting the number of times the time saving game can be played to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

The payout process is a process of controlling the payout of prize balls according to the detection result (winning of game balls) in the switch process. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting to the effect control board 320 various commands generated in the above process and information necessary for determining the contents of the effect.

(Processing list in production control board 320)
Next, with reference to FIG. 309, processing executed by the effect control board 320 will be described. FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the effect control board 320. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 309, when power is supplied, the sub CPU 320a of the effect control board 320 executes the effect main process based on the program stored in the sub ROM 320b. The sub CPU 320a performs power restoration notification processing corresponding to the power restoration processing executed by the main control board 300, setting change notification processing corresponding to the setting change processing executed by the main control board 300, and main control board 300 as production main processing. RAM clear notification processing corresponding to the RAM clear processing executed in 300 and setting confirmation notification processing corresponding to the setting confirmation processing executed in the main control board 300 are executed. In addition, the sub CPU 320a repeats production timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, command reception processing, production button processing, command transmission processing, etc.) at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during the execution of the production main processing. to run. Various types of processing will be described below.

In the power restoration notification process, during execution of the power restoration process in the main control board 300, the power restoration screen is displayed for a predetermined period ( For example, 30 seconds), the production lighting device 342 is fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply from the audio output device 331 (power failure This is a process of executing a power restoration notification such as outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that the power supply has been restored for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The RAM clear notification process displays an initial screen (background image and (initial production pattern “135”)), the production lighting device 342 is fully lit in a prescribed emission color (for example, white) for a prescribed period (for example, 60 seconds), or the storage area from the audio output device 331 is displayed. This is a process of executing a power-on notification such as outputting a power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). .

The setting change notification process displays a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed on the main display device 131 or the like during the setting change mode while the main control board 300 is executing the setting change process. All the production lighting devices 342 are lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the settings are being changed, or a setting change notification sound ("Settings are being changed") is generated from the voice output device 331 to indicate that the settings are being changed. ) is a process for executing setting change notification such as outputting In addition, the setting confirmation notification process displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting confirmation is being performed on the main display device 131 or the like in the setting confirmation mode during execution of the setting confirmation process in the main control board 300, The production lighting device 342 is fully lit in a predetermined emission color (e.g., white) while the setting is being checked, or a setting confirmation sound ("Checking setting value It is a process of executing a setting confirmation notification such as outputting "".

The random number update process is a process of updating various random numbers (for example, effect symbol determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers) used for effects. The command reception process is a game state setting process for setting the game state based on a game state designation command, etc., which will be described later, and a process based on various commands, etc., sent from the main control board 300. A look-ahead process for determining whether or not to perform a continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, an icon change effect, etc., and an effect for determining the effect pattern based on the basic display effect specification table TS1, the effect symbol determination table TS2, and the chance up determination table TS3. pattern determination processing; storage of a pending flag in the pending storage area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c when the pending command is received; and pending processing of setting a pending display command for pending display on the main display device 131; Pre-determination information shift processing for executing the shift processing of the pre-determination information in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub-RAM320c when the Normal pattern production processing, which is a process for performing a corresponding production, Pattern confirmation processing, which is a process for confirming and stopping display of the production pattern that is fluctuating on the main display device 131 based on the pattern confirmation command, and in the jackpot game It is a process including a jackpot process for executing an opening effect, an ending effect, and a round effect corresponding to an opening designation command. The effect button process is a process of detecting an input via the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button detection switch 137) or the effect operation stick 136 and executing a predetermined effect. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting various commands generated by the various processes described above to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 .

Here, the continuous effect is an effect that can be executed in the main display device 131, and is an effect that can be executed during the variable start effect over a plurality of variable displays of the special symbols. This continuous effect may consist of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the continuous performance includes multiple types of performances, one performance may be selected and executed from the multiple types of performances. Also, the continuous effect may be executed for one time variation display in the special symbol. Also, the pseudo-continuous effect may consist of only one type of effect, or may include a plurality of types of effects. When the pseudo-continuous effect includes a plurality of types of effects, one of the plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed. Furthermore, the icon change effect is that a special game is executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the main display device 131 in a special display mode (special icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). It is a production that suggests the degree of expectation (possibility). The special display mode (special icon) has various modes in terms of coloring, size, and shape. For example, normal icons are white, but special icons are blue, green, red, and gold. , and the expectations are set to increase in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold.

In addition, as the effect main process, the sub CPU 320a performs effect mode update process in addition to the above process. Specifically, an effect mode (effect stage ) update conditions (change in game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss, etc.) are established, and if the update conditions are established, the production mode is changed. A process for updating to any one of a plurality of presentation modes is performed. Here, as the “production mode”, the production modes A to C set in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) and the production time-saving game state 1 (high-quality time-saving game state) to be described later A mode D, an effect mode E set in a time-saving game state 2 (low-probability short-time game state) described later, and an effect mode F set in a time-saving game state 3 (low-probability short-time game state) are provided. When the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the setting, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the setting, etc.), the first effect mode is always the effect mode A. Also, regarding "BGM", the variation BGM 1 to 3 output during the variation display of each of the production modes A to C in the normal game state, and the variation output during the variation display in the production mode D in the time saving game state 1 BGM4, variation BGM5 output during variation display of performance mode E of time saving game state 2, and variation BGM6 output during variation display of performance mode F of time saving game state 3 are provided. Furthermore, normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM, SPSP reach BGM, etc. are provided as BGM output during execution of various reach effects. As will be described later, the setting of the variable BGM can be changed according to the player's operation.

(Description of special symbol stop processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the transition from the game state to the time saving game state 3 or the time saving game state 4 will be described. FIG. 310 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol stop process, which is one of the processes in the main control board 300 described above. Figure 311 is a flow chart explaining the transition determination process to the time saving game state and the end determination process of the time saving game state, (a) is a flow chart explaining the time saving 3 transition decision process, (b) is a time saving 4 It is a flow chart for explaining the transition determination process, (c) is a flow chart for explaining the time-saving gaming state end determination process.

As shown in FIG. 310, immediately after the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the main CPU 301a first executes time saving 3 transition determination processing to determine whether or not the gaming state has transitioned to time saving gaming state 3 ( S231), after that, a time saving 4 transition determination process for determining whether or not the gaming state has transitioned to the time saving gaming state 4 is executed (S232). In addition, the detail of these time-saving 3 transition determination processing and time-saving 4 transition determination processing is mentioned later.

Next, the main CPU 301a determines whether or not the display wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (S233). , waits until it is determined that the display wait period has ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display wait period has ended (YES in S233), the next step is executed. The display wait period is a period provided for the player to be able to recognize the stop display of the special symbol in the game. That is, until the display wait period ends, the variable display (variation start) of the special symbols in the next game is prohibited.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes time-saving game end determination processing for determining whether or not the time-saving game has ended (S234). The details of the time-saving game end determination process will be described later. Next, the main CPU 301a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state of the game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301c (S235), and determines whether the special symbol stopped in the game is a jackpot symbol. (S236), and if it is determined to be a jackpot pattern (YES in S236), the special figure special electric processing data is set to "3" (large winning device opening control processing) (S237). Here, the special symbol special electric processing data is used in the special prize device opening control process to control the operation of the first special symbol display device 120, the second special symbol display device 122, and the movable pieces 117b and 127b of the special prize device. The data to be used, for example, in the case of "3", the movable piece 117b or the like is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern of the jackpot game state after the execution of the opening effect of the big win game, and in the case of "4", the small After execution of the opening effect of the winning game, the movable piece 117b etc. is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern of the small winning game, and in the case of "0", the movable piece 117b etc. is set not to be opened.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a jackpot initialization process for initializing various information (S238). In this jackpot time initialization process, for example, the high probability flag that is ON in the high probability game state is changed to the OFF state while shifting to the low probability game state, or the time reduction flag that is ON in the time reduction game state is turned OFF. It changes to a state and shifts to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, an initialization process for initializing the cumulative number of times "n" described above to "800 (times)" is executed, and the number of remaining games that can be played in the time-saving game state (remaining) " M” is initialized to “0”. In addition, the time saving flag includes a first time saving flag that is ON in the time saving game state 1, a second time saving flag that is ON in the time saving game state 2, and a third time saving flag that is ON in the time saving game state 3. And, there is a fourth time-saving flag that is turned ON in the time-saving game state 4, and all the time-saving flags are changed to the OFF state in the jackpot time initialization process. In addition, the possible number of games "M" is the number of possible games "M1" in the time saving game state 1, the possible number of games "M3" in the time saving game state 2, the possible number of games "M4" in the time saving game state 3, There is one corresponding to each time-saving game state, such as the possible number of games "M4" in the time-saving game state 4, and all the possible number of games "M" are initialized in the jackpot initialization process. .

Next, the main CPU 301a determines a pattern for opening the movable piece 117b of the first big prize winning device 117 and the movable piece 127b of the second big prize winning device 127 in the big win game according to the special symbol (type of big win), and starts the big win. Preparatory processing is executed (S239), an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in a performance transmission data storage area (S240), an opening time corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S241), and special symbols are set. End the stop processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S236 that the special symbol stopped in the game is not the big winning symbol (NO in S236), it determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is the small winning symbol. Then (S242), when it is determined that it is a small winning pattern (YES in S242), the special pattern special electric processing data is set to "4" (large winning device opening control processing) (S243), and when the special pattern is stopped End the process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that the special symbol stopped in the game is not the small winning symbol in the above-described step S232 (NO in S242), the main CPU 301a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" (S243 ), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

In addition, in step S233 of the above-described special symbol stop processing, the display wait period when shifting to all the time-saving gaming states was assumed to be constant, but it is not limited to this, and various aspects can be used. good too. For example, the display wait period when the time saving pattern (special pattern J1, etc.) is stopped and displayed may be longer than the normal display waiting period, more specifically, the display when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed. The time of the wait period may be the same as the time of the ending period of the jackpot game. In addition, in the display wait period when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, a time saving rush effect that is an effect suggesting a transition to the time saving game state 4 may be executed, or after the end of the display wait period. You may make it transfer to time saving game state 4. FIG. Furthermore, when the time-saving rush effect is executed when shifting to the time-saving game state 4 after the end of the display wait period, the later-described effect symbols and small symbols may be displayed during the display wait period. It does not have to be.

As shown in FIG. 311(a), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving 3 transition determination process, first, it determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in the game (S261), and determines that a jackpot has been won. In case (YES in S261), the time saving 3 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S261 that the jackpot has not been won (NO in S261), the main CPU 301a determines whether or not it is in the low-probability game state (normal game state or time-saving game state 2). (S262), when it is determined that it is not in the low probability gaming state (NO in S262), the time saving 3 transition determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S262 that it is in the low-probability gaming state (YES in S262), it subtracts the numerical value "1" from the accumulated number "n" (S263), and the accumulated number " n" is the first "0" after the update (after executing the initialization process at the time of the jackpot or the RAM clear process in S238) (S264), and if it is not the first "0" after the update If determined (NO in S264), the time saving 3 transition determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S264 that the cumulative number of times "n" has become "0" for the first time after updating (YES in S264), the initial value is set to the remaining number of games M3 in the time-saving gaming state 3. "700" is set (S265), the time saving 3 flag is updated to the ON state (S266), and the time saving 3 transition determination process is terminated.

In this way, when the time saving 3 transition determination process is executed immediately after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122, the jackpot is not won, and the low In the case of the probability game state, the cumulative number of times "n" is subtracted. In addition, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clearing process is executed, the transition to the time saving game state 3 is performed only once, and the time saving is performed twice or more. It means that there is no transition to the game state 3. It should be noted that the main CPU 301c, when the possible number of games "M3" is set to the initial value, transmits a time-saving 3 remaining number of times command indicating the possible number of games "M3" to the effect control board 320, or terminates the game. You may make it transmit the time saving 3 accumulation number command which shows the time saving 3 remaining number of times command and the accumulation number "n" when starting. With such a configuration, for example, even if the possible number of games "M3" or the cumulative number of times "n" is deleted in the effect control board 320, the effect control board 320 periodically receives time saving 3 remaining You can refer to the command and the time saving 3 cumulative number command.

As shown in FIG. 311(b), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving 4 transition determination process, it first determines whether the current game is in the low probability non-working time saving game state (S281), When it is determined that it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state (NO in S281), the time-saving 4 transition determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that it is in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state in step S281 (YES in S261), the time-saving design J1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122. It is determined whether or not the stop display has been made (S282), and if it is determined that the time saving pattern J1 has been stopped and displayed (YES in S282), the initial value "100" is set to the possible number of games "M4" in the time saving game state 4. It sets (S283), updates the time saving 4 flag to the ON state (S286), and ends the time saving 4 transition determination process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving pattern J1 is not stopped and displayed in step S282 (NO in S282), the time saving pattern J2 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 or the second special symbol display device 122. (S284), and if it is determined that the time saving pattern J2 is stopped and displayed (YES in S284), the initial value "700" is set to the number of possible games "M4" in the time saving game state 4. is set (S285), the time saving 4 flag is updated to the ON state in step S286, and the time saving 4 transition determination process ends. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S284 that the time saving pattern J2 is not stopped and displayed (NO in S284), the main CPU 301a ends the time saving 4 transition determination process as it is.

In this way, when the time reduction 4 transition determination process is executed immediately after the stop display of the special design on the first special design display device 120 or the second special design display device 122, the time reduction design J1 is stopped as the special design. , it will shift to the time saving game state 4 with the possible number of games "100 (times)", and when it stops at the time saving pattern J2, the possible number of games will be "700 (times)" Time saving game state 4 will move to Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game than in the time-saving game state 4 in which the possible number of games is constant. Note that, in the same manner as when executing the time saving 3 transition determination process described above, the main CPU 301c determines whether the number of times that the game can be played is set to the initial value "M4" or when the game ends or starts. A time saving 4 remaining number of times command indicating the number of times “M4” may be transmitted to the effect control board 320 .

As shown in FIG. 311 (c), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving end determination process, first, it determines whether the time saving 1 flag or the time saving 2 flag is in the ON state (S301), and the time saving 1 flag. Or when it is determined that the time saving 2 flag is OFF (NO in S301), it is determined whether or not the time saving 3 flag is ON (S305), and it is determined that the time saving 3 flag is OFF. In the case (NO in S305), it is determined whether the time saving 4 flag is ON (S309), and if it is determined that the time saving 4 flag is OFF (NO in S309), the time saving end determination End the process. That is, when the gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving end determination process is not executed. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot game is started in the special symbol stop processing, all the time saving flags of the time saving 1 flag, the time saving 2 flag, the time saving 3 flag, and the time saving 4 flag by the jackpot time initialization processing is changed to the OFF state (S238 in FIG. 310), the main CPU 301c will not execute the time saving end determination process during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving 1 flag or the time saving 2 flag is ON in step S301 (YES in S301), the number of possible games in the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2 is "M1". (S302), determines whether or not the number of possible games "M1" is "0" (S303), and determines that the number of possible games "M1" is "0" In (YES in S303), the time saving 1 flag or the time saving 2 flag is turned off (S304), and the process proceeds to step S305. Further, when the main CPU 301a determines that the number of possible games "M1" is not "0" in step S303 (NO in S303), the process proceeds to step S305. By executing the processing from step S301 to step S304, the possible number of games "M1" in the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 is indicated by the initial value "100" unless the jackpot is won. Thus, the time saving game in the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2 can be continued up to 100 times.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving 3 flag is ON in step S305 (YES in S305), the number "1" is subtracted from the possible number of games "M3" in the time saving game state 3 ( S306), it is determined whether or not the number of possible games "M3" is "0" (S307), and if it is determined that the number of possible games "M3" is "0" (YES in S307), time saving is performed. 3 flag is turned off (S308), and the process proceeds to step S309. Further, when the main CPU 301a determines that the possible number of games "M3" is not "0" in step S307 (NO in S307), the process proceeds to step S309. By executing the processing from step S305 to step S308, as long as the jackpot is not won, the time saving game is performed as indicated by the initial value "700" of the possible number of times "M1" in the time saving game state 3. The time saving game in state 3 can be continued up to 700 times.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving 4 flag is ON in step S309 (YES in S309), the number "1" is subtracted from the number of possible games "M4" in the time saving game state 4 ( S310), it is determined whether or not the number of possible games "M4" is "0" (S311), and if it is determined that the number of possible games "M4" is "0" (YES in S311), time saving is performed. 4 flag is turned off (S312), and the time saving end determination process is terminated. Further, when the main CPU 301a determines that the possible number of games "M4" is not "0" in step S311 (NO in S311), the main CPU 301a ends the time saving end determination process. By executing the processing from step S309 to step S312, as long as the jackpot is not won, the time saving game is performed as indicated by the initial value "700" of the possible number of times "M1" in the time saving game state 4. The time saving game in state 4 can be continued up to 700 times.

Thus, in the time-saving end determination process, when the time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1, time-saving game state 2, time-saving game state 3, time-saving game state 4) end opportunity is established, corresponding to the time-saving game state By changing the time-saving flags (time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, time-saving 4 flag) to the OFF state, the time-saving game state is terminated. In addition, in the time saving end determination process, each time the variable display is stopped in either of the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122, the number of possible games "M (M1, M2, M3, M4 )” is to be subtracted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time saving end determination process, each time saving game state, when the number of possible games "M (M1, M2, M3, M4)" becomes "0", the so-called first special symbol display device 120 and When the total number of times of variation display on the second special symbol display device 122 reaches the number of times indicated by a predetermined initial value, the end is made, but it is not limited to this and may be various aspects. good. For example, the trigger that the total number of times of variation display in the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 reaches 50 times, the trigger that the number of times of variation display in the second special symbol display device 122 reaches 5 times , and the first opportunity to win the small hit, each time-saving game state may be terminated at the first opportunity. In addition, in each time-saving game state, the timing for ending may be different. For example, the time-saving gaming state 1 is triggered when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 reaches 50 times, and when the number of variable displays on the second special symbol display device 122 reaches It is assumed that the time-saving game state 3 ends at the first opportunity of the opportunity of reaching 5 times and the opportunity of winning the small hit first, and the time-saving game state 3 is the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display. The first of the opportunity when the total number of times of variable display on the device 122 reaches 500 times, the time when the number of times of variable display on the second special symbol display device 122 reaches 20 times, and the time when the small win is won 4 times It is assumed that it ends when it is established, and the time saving game state 4 is the moment when the total number of times of fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 reaches 30 times, the second special symbol display The game may end at the first opportunity of the moment when the number of variable displays on the device 122 reaches 6 times and the moment when the small win is won three times.

With reference to FIG. 312, the end time of the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4 will be described here. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating the end of the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4, and (a) is a diagram explaining the case where the time saving game state 3 ends with a jackpot game during the time saving game state 3 , and (b) is a diagram for explaining a case where a jackpot game is played during the time saving game state 4 and the time saving game state 4 ends. In addition, in FIG. 312, the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period), the operating periods of the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 3, and the time-saving game state 4, and the possible number of games "M1", "M3 ” and “M4” are exemplified.

As shown in FIG. 312 (a), when the jackpot game is started at the time tb1 in the time saving game state 3, the jackpot initialization process is executed at the time tb1, so in the time saving game state 3 at the time tb1 The possible number of games "M3", which is "500", is updated to "0", and the time-saving game state 3 ends. Further, at time tb2 when the jackpot game ends, the possible number of games "M1" in the time saving game state 1 is set to the initial value "100", and the time saving game state 3 is changed. never restarted. In this way, when a jackpot is won during the time-saving game state 3, the time-saving game state 3 is not restarted after the big win game so that the maximum number of times ``700 (times)'' that can be played in the time-saving game state 3 can be consumed. , the time-saving game state 3 may be ended without completing the maximum number of times “700 (times)” that can be played.

As shown in FIG. 312 (b), when the jackpot game is started at time tc1 in the time saving game state 4, the jackpot initialization process is executed at time tc1, so the time saving game state 4 game at time tc1 Although the possible number of times "M4" is "10", it is updated to "0", and the time saving game state 4 ends. Further, at time tc2 when the jackpot game ends, the possible number of games "M1" in the time saving game state 1 is set to the initial value "100", and the time saving game state 1 is entered, resulting in a time saving game state 4. is never restarted. In this way, the time saving game state 4 is restarted after the jackpot game so that the maximum number of times ``700 (times)'' that can be played in the time saving game state 4 can be consumed even when a jackpot is won in the time saving game state 4.例文帳に追加There is a case where the time saving game state 4 is ended without completing the maximum number of times "700 times" that can be played.

(Description of information display 302c)
Next, the information display 302c of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314. FIG. FIG. 313 is a diagram illustrating details of the information display 302c. FIG. 314 is a diagram explaining a specific example of the counting period of the base value B. FIG. Here, the base value B is divided by the number of outs (total number of game balls launched) against the total number of prize balls paid out in a specific section of the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state). It is a numerical value calculated by The number of outs is the number of game balls detected by an out ball detection switch (not shown). This is the number of game balls that have entered a winning device such as the winning device 117 or a general winning hole (not shown) and are detected by the out ball detection switch.

As shown in FIG. 313(a), first, various counters (base calculation out counter, base calculation prize ball counter, total out counter) provided in the main RAM 301c display the base value B on the information display 302c. It is used for control. The base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. For example, every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch, the numerical value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter. It will happen. The base calculation prize ball counter counts the number of prize balls in a specific section. If a winning device such as the first big winning device 117 is won, the numerical value "15" is added, and if a starting device such as the first starting device 112 is won, the numerical value "3" is added. The total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") after the power is turned on for the first time. Then, in the main CPU 301a, the base value B for a specific section is calculated by dividing the value of the prize ball counter for base calculation by the value of the out counter for base calculation and multiplying the result by the value "100". Each time a defined interval ends, the base value B for that interval is stored (saved). In this embodiment, the base value B is saved each time the number of outs reaches 60000. More specifically, the main CPU 301a adds the number "60000" to the total out counter. Then, the base value B is calculated from the current values of the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter and stored, and the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized. In this embodiment, the period during which the base calculation out counter and the base calculation prize ball counter are added may be referred to as the "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be referred to as the "non-counting period". .

As shown in FIG. 313(b), next, 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, and 60,000 outs are counted in section 1. The display on the information display 302c when the number of outs is counted and section L (the number of outs is less than 60000 (0 to 59999)) is started will be described. Here, the base value B of section 3 is "B3", the base value B of section 2 is "B2", the base value of section 1 is "B1", and the base value B of section L is "BL". . In the information display device 302c in such an interval L, the base value BL of the interval L (real time), the base value B1 of the interval 1, the base value B2 of the interval 2, and the base value B3 of the interval 3 are approximately It is displayed so as to switch every 5 seconds. When the number of outs in section L reaches 60000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B of the newest section, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B of the next new section. , the base value B2 of interval 2 is stored as the base value B of the third newest interval, and the base value B3 of the oldest interval 3 is discarded. That is, when one interval ends (60000 outs are counted), the base value B of that interval is saved as the base value B of the previous interval, and the base value B of the oldest interval is discarded. It will happen. In this embodiment, these base values B are continuously displayed on the information display 302c, including the period during which the game can be played.

As shown in FIG. 313(c), the information display 302c is composed of four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd. In the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, as described above, as the two-digit base value B, the base value BL, the base value B1, the base value B2, and the base value B3 are displayed in this order approximately every 5 seconds. displayed to switch. When the base value B is larger than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed (the dot display portion lights up). Also, the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb correspond to the base value B displayed by the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, and it is possible to identify in which interval the base value B is displayed. identification information "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" are displayed. Specifically, in the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb of the information display 302c, the identification information "bL" is displayed during the period in which the base value BL of section L is displayed, and the base value B1 of section 1 is displayed. The identification information “b1” is displayed during the period in which the base value B2 of the interval 2 is displayed, the identification information “b2” is displayed during the period in which the base value B2 of the interval 3 is displayed, and the identification information “b3” is displayed during the period in which the base value B3 of the interval 3 is displayed. is displayed.

Here, the manner of display on the information display device 302c in each section from section L to section 3 will be described in more detail. For example, when the total number of outs is less than 60000, the base value B may not be calculated during the periods when the identification information "b1", "b2", and "b3" are displayed. When the total number of outputs is less than 60,000, the 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb flash each piece of identification information, and the 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd light up the special symbol "--". be. Also, if the total number of outs is 60000 or more but less than 120000, the base value B1 can be calculated, but the base value B2 of the identification information "b2" and the base value B3 of the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. There is Thus, when the total number of outs is 60000 or more and less than 120000, the identification information "b1" is lit and the base value B1 is lit and displayed during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed. During the period in which the identification information "b2" and "b3" are displayed, each identification information is displayed blinking and the special symbol "--" is lit. Furthermore, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, the base value B1 and the base value B2 are calculated, but the base value B3 of the identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this way, when the total number of outs is 120000 or more and less than 180000, during the period when the identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed, the identification information is lit and displayed, and the base value B1 or the base value During the period in which B2 is lit and the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information blinks and the special symbol "--" is lit. As described above, in the present embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. It may be difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In such a case, for example, when the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is flashed, and when the number of normal outs is 6000 or more, the identification information " bL” may be illuminated. With such a display mode, whether or not the number of normal outs in the section L is sufficiently large is substantially notified, so that the administrator of the gaming machine 100 can understand that the number of normal outs in the section L is sufficient. The base value B can be evaluated after considering whether or not.

By the way, before a player actually plays a game, it is normal for an administrator to check the operation of the gaming machine 100. For this operation check, various detection switches (out ball detection switch, etc.) are operated. Confirmation is included as to whether or not the game ball is normally detected. When the operation is confirmed in this way, for example, in a configuration in which the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are added immediately after the power is turned on for the first time in the gaming machine 100, the first power supply The base value B calculated immediately after insertion may differ from the base value B calculated when the game is actually played. In such a case, in this embodiment, the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined numerical value (for example, the numerical value "300"). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the base values from being different immediately after the power is turned on for the first time.

Here, it is one of the processes executed in the main process in the main control board 300, and the number of prize balls and the number of outs are calculated in order to calculate the base value B of the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) The counting process, which is the process of counting, and the base display process, which is the process of displaying the base value B on the information display 302c, will be specifically described. When the main CPU 301a executes the counting process, when a game ball enters the general winning hole and is detected by the general winning detection switch in the normal game state, the main CPU 301a sets the value " 10" (the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening) is added, and when a game ball is detected by the first starting device detection switch 304 or the second starting device detection switch 305, the numerical value "3" is added, and the first When a game ball is detected by the winning device detection switch 306a or the second winning device detection switch 306b, the numerical value "15" is added. Further, the main CPU 301a adds a numerical value "1" to the base calculation out counter when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch in the normal game state. In game states other than the normal game state, no numerical values are added to the base calculation winning ball counter and the base calculation out counter. After executing the counting process, the main CPU 301a calculates the base value from the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-described counting process, and displays the identification information and the base value B on the information display 302c. Execute the base display processing, which is processing. By executing this base display process, the identification information and the base value B are displayed on the information display 302c in the manner described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, a specific example of the counting period, which is the period for executing the counting process required when displaying the base value B on the information display 302c described above, will be described. First, FIG. 314(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after shifting from the low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) to the short-time gaming state 3. FIG. Also, FIG. 314(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after being shifted from the low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) to the short-time gaming state 4 . Furthermore, FIG. 314(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after being shifted from the low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state) to the short-time gaming state 4 . Note that a counting period in the following description is a period during which the above-described counting process is executed, and a non-counting period is a period during which the counting process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 314 (a), here, the 800th game (variation display of special symbols) in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started at time tn1, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the 800th game. In this case, at time tn2, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and the accumulated count "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0". In such a case, the low-probability short-time gaming state before time tn2 is the counting period, and the time-saving gaming state 3 after time tn2 is the non-counting period. In addition, without winning the jackpot game in the state of the time-saving game state 3, the final game in the time-saving game state 3 (variation display of the 700th special symbol) is started at time tn3, and the final time at time tn4. A case will be described in which the losing symbols in the game are stopped and displayed, and the number of possible games becomes "0 (times)". In such a case, after the time point tn4, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is entered, and the counting period is restarted from the time point tn4. In the above description, the time point tn2 is set as the start time point of the non-counting period when shifting to the time saving game state 3, but it may be set to the time point tn1. In addition, although the restart point of the counting period at the time of transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3 was set to time tn4, it may be time tn3.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), here, the game in which the time saving pattern J2 is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time point tо1, and the time saving pattern J2 is stop-displayed at time point tо2. do. In such a case, the low-probability short-time gaming state before time tо2 becomes the counting period, and the time-saving gaming state 4 after time tо2 becomes the non-counting period. In addition, without winning the jackpot game in the state of the time-saving gaming state 4, the final game in the time-saving gaming state 4 (variation display of the 700th special symbol) is started at the time point tо3, and the final round at the time point tо4. A case will be described in which the losing symbols in the game are stopped and displayed, and the number of possible games becomes "0". At this time, it is assumed that the accumulated count "n" of the first predetermined condition is not "0". In such a case, the low-probability non-time-saving game state is entered after time tо4, and the counting period is restarted from time tо4. In addition, for example, when the time saving pattern J1 or the like is stopped and displayed in the final game of the time saving game state 4, the counting period is restarted in the same manner as when the losing pattern is stopped and displayed as described above. You may do so. Further, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the final game of the time saving game state 4, the counting period may be restarted after the small winning game is finished. Furthermore, in the above description, the start point of the non-counting period at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 4 is set to the point of time tо2, but it may be set to the point of time tо1. In addition, although the restart point of the counting period at the time of transition to the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 4 is set to time point tо4, it may be set to time point tо3.

As shown in FIG. 314(c), here, the game in which the time saving pattern J2 is stop-displayed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tp1, and the time saving pattern J2 is stop-displayed at time tp2. do. In such a case, the low-probability short-time gaming state before time tp2 is the counting period, and the short-time gaming state 4 after time tp2 is the non-counting period. In addition, without winning the jackpot game in the state of the time-saving game state 4, the final game of the time-saving game state 4 (700th special symbol fluctuation display) is started at time tp3, and the final time at time tp4. A case will be described in which a losing symbol in a different game is stopped and displayed, and the possible number of games becomes "0". At this time, it is assumed that the accumulated count "n" of the first predetermined condition is "0". In such a case, the time saving game state 3 is entered after time tp4, so the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. In addition, when the cumulative number of times "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0" in the game that is the final round of the time saving game state 4, the time saving pattern J1 or the like or the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the game. However, the non-counting period will continue.

(Production display example for each production mode)
With reference to FIGS. 315 and 316, an effect display example for each effect mode (pre-variation action, pre-stop action, etc.) and an effect display example of the number of reservations on the main display device 131 will be described. FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an example of effect display for each effect mode (pre-fluctuation operation, pre-stop operation, etc.) on the main display device 131, and FIG. is.

As shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the main display device 131 displays various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect performed while the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, and a variable display of the effect symbols 50a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols (pre-variation operation, update variation). There are a variation performance, a special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) variable display (update variation) performed during execution of the special symbol variation display, and a big win performance performed during the execution of the jackpot game. The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 131 shows a variable display area for displaying three production patterns 50a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a production mode related to the execution of the variable production. A mode display area and the like are formed for this purpose. In addition, the main display device 131 has a first pending icon display area 50b for displaying the number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to the number of first pending in the normal gaming state, and in the time saving gaming state The second pending icon display area 50d (not shown) for displaying the number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number, and the icon indicating that the variable effect is being executed The icon display area 50c for displaying (execution information), the first pending number display area SA for numerically displaying the first pending number, and the second pending number display for numerically displaying the second pending number Regions SB and the like are formed.

The production pattern 50a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", etc., and is a variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 120 and the second special pattern display device 122. The variable display is started in response to the start, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols. Also, the effect pattern 50a is stop-displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) for notifying the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 50a such as "777" and "555", and the losing mode is other modes. The variable display of the production pattern 50a is scrolled vertically, but it may be scrolled horizontally, or may be switched on the spot or rotated (rotated). good. In addition, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 50a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 131 or the like according to the result of the big hit determination. Players' expectations for the execution of the jackpot game (special game) are heightened.

The first pending icon display area 50b includes a first display section 50b1 (first area), a second display section 50b2 (second area), and a third display section 50b3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 50c. , and the fourth display portion 50b4 (fourth area), and the first display portion 50b1 to the fourth display portion 50b4 display the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number. . Specifically, the first display portion 50b1 displays the first suspension icon indicating the first suspension information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 50b2 displays the second , the first reserved icon indicating the first reserved information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display portion 50b3 is the first icon in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed thirdly. A first pending icon indicating the pending information is displayed, and the fourth display portion 50b4 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending information in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. The second pending icon display area 50d is divided into a first display section 50d1, a second display section 50d2, a third display section 50d3, and a fourth display section 50d4 from the side closer to the icon display area 50c. , the first display portion 50d1 to the fourth display portion 50d4, the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of the second pending is displayed.

The icon display area 50c is larger than each display part of the first reserved icon display area 50b so as to be clearly distinguished from the first reserved icon display area 50b and the second reserved icon display area 50d. , the displayed icon is also displayed in a larger manner than the first reserved icon. Specifically, for example, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b is moved toward the icon display area 50c with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 50a). By moving (shifting) one by one, the first pending icon displayed in the first display unit 50b1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 50c, becoming the icon, and the first special symbol (effect symbol 50a). When the variable display ends, the icon disappears (erases) (disappearance effect (delete effect) of the icon). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 50a).

As shown in FIG. 315(a), in the production mode A (normal game state), the mode A background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the first mode (rectangular game mode). shaped base image BG, character image CG, number image SG surrounded by hexagonal images), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common manner (number image) common to all production modes, and the above-mentioned cumulative number " A cumulative number image RK indicating the number of games corresponding to "n" is displayed. Then, the effect symbol 50a of the first mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, but as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is performed for 0.75 seconds, and as a pre-stop action suggesting the end of the scroll display, the character image CG shakes its head at the symbol stop position for 0.9 seconds. It is supposed to be done. Also, in the icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the first form (hexagon). Then, the normal icon of the first mode always performs a swinging motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) leaning to the left, to the second posture leaning to the right, and then to the first posture again in one cycle of 2 seconds. It is designed to be repeated. Also, during the variable display in the production mode A, the variable BGM1 is output. Furthermore, the accumulated number image RK is hidden before the accumulated number "n" in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 780 times), and is displayed after reaching the predetermined number. It is started, and every time one game in the normal game state ends (stopped display with a losing pattern or the like), the image is updated with a numerical value incremented by "1".

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in production mode B (normal game state), the mode B background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and production pattern 50a is displayed in the second mode (paper lantern (a base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a hexagonal image), and the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common manner (number image) common to all the production modes, and the above-mentioned production mode A A cumulative count image RK in the same manner as is displayed. Then, the effect pattern 50a of the second mode performs downward scrolling display (update change) in the variable effect, but the effect pattern 50a is displayed in a reduced size as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update operation). is performed for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation before ending this scroll display (update operation), the production pattern 50a is reduced at the pattern stop position → normal display is performed for 0.5 seconds. It is designed to Further, in the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the second mode (shuttle shape). Then, the normal icon of the second mode is displayed on the main display device 131 as a swinging motion (drawing motion) from the first posture (initial posture) leaning to the left, to the second posture leaning to the right, and then to the first posture again. During the display, it is always repeated with one period of 2 seconds. Also, during the variable display in the production mode B, the variable BGM2 is output.

As shown in FIG. 315(c), in the production mode C (normal game state), the mode C background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the third mode (R A chamfered rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, and a number image SG surrounded by a chamfered hexagonal image), and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes. , and the cumulative number image RK is displayed in the same manner as in the effect mode A described above. The effect symbol 50a of the third mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, and an enlarged display of the effect symbol 50a is performed as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update variation). is performed for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation before ending this scroll display (update fluctuation), the rotating display of the effect symbol 50a is performed at the symbol stop position for 0.7 seconds. It's like Further, in the icon display areas (the first reserved icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c), normal icons are displayed in the third mode (star shape). Then, the normal icon of the third mode rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then reverts to the first posture. operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds. Also, during the variable display in the effect mode C, a variable BGM3 is output.

In the production modes A to C described above, the cumulative number image RK has a common form, but it may have a different form depending on the production mode. For example, the character font may be different. Alternatively, the sizes may be different. Further, the cumulative number image RK is supposed to be displayed after the cumulative number of times in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times), but it is always displayed during the normal game state. can be Furthermore, although the cumulative number image RK indicates the number of games corresponding to the above-described cumulative number "n", it is not limited to this. For example, it may be a display mode that indicates the number of games played until the transition to the time-saving game state 3, specifically, "20 more times until the game time starts (shift to the time-saving game state 3)!" It may be a mode in which a wording that makes the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 expected is also displayed.

As shown in FIG. 315(d), in production mode D (time-saving game state 1), the mode D background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( rectangular base image BG, number image SG), the special pattern TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes, and the remaining number of times that can be played in the time-saving game state 1 (number of times that can be played) (corresponding to "M1") is displayed, and a right-handed shot image MG is displayed, suggesting a right-handed shot. Then, the effect symbol 50a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, and floats upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation suggesting the end of the scroll display, a bound display that floats upward from the symbol stop position and then descends downward is displayed for 0.4 seconds. It is designed to be carried out over a period of time. Note that the bound display as the pre-stop action is similar to the floating display as the pre-variation action in terms of presentation, but the bounce display has a higher moving speed of the presentation pattern 50a and a lower floating height. . In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds. Also, during the variable display in the production mode D, a variable BGM4 is output. Further, the remaining number of times image JK is updated to an image of a numerical value decremented by "1" each time one game in the time-saving game state 1 is completed (stopped display with a losing symbol or the like). The right-hand shot image MG is displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is lit, and is not displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 315(e), in production mode E (time-saving game state 2), the mode E background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( Rectangular base image, number image), special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (number image) common to all production modes, and the remaining number of times that can be played in time-saving game state 2 (number of times that can be played "M2 ) is displayed, and a right-handed shot image MG is displayed, suggesting a right-handed shot. Then, the effect symbol 50a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update variation) in the variable effect, and floats upward from the symbol stop position as a pre-variation operation suggesting the start of this scrolling display. The display is performed for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation suggesting the end of this scroll display, the rotating (small) display of the effect symbol 50a is displayed at the symbol stop position for 0.4 seconds. It is designed to In addition, in the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fourth mode (round shape). Then, the normal icon of the fourth mode rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the internal black point is positioned at the top, passes through the second posture in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds. Also, during the variable display in the effect mode E, a variable BGM5 is output. Further, the remaining number image JK is updated to an image with a numerical value decremented by "1" each time one game in the time-saving game state 2 is completed (stopped display with a lost symbol or the like). The right-hand shot image MG is displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is lit, and is not displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 315 (f), in production mode F (time-saving game state 3), the mode F background image is always displayed in a state of horizontal scrolling or scene change (production operation), and production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( rectangular base image, numeric image), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common mode (numerical image) common to all production modes, and the remaining number of times that can be played in the time-saving game state 3 (the number of times that can be played "M3" ) is displayed, and a right-handed shot image MG is displayed, suggesting a right-handed shot. Then, the effect pattern 50a of the fourth mode performs downward scrolling display (update change) in the variable effect, and the reduction display of the effect pattern 50a is reduced to 0 as a pre-variation operation suggesting that this scroll display starts. .4 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation suggesting that the scroll display is finished, a bound (small) display that floats upward from the symbol stop position is performed for 0.4 seconds. It's becoming Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in the fifth form (pentagon). Then, the normal icon of the fifth aspect rotates from a first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is positioned at the top, passes through a second posture in which the specific top is moved, and then returns to the first posture (representation). operation) is always repeated in one cycle of 3 seconds. Also, during the variable display in the production mode F, a variable BGM6 is output. Furthermore, the remaining number of times image JK is updated to an image of a numerical value decremented by "1" each time one game in the time saving game state 3 is completed (stopped display with a losing symbol or the like). The right-hand shot image MG is displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is lit, and is not displayed while the right-hand shot lamp is extinguished.

In addition, even if the production pattern 50a performs any of the plurality of types of pre-variation actions (floating display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the fluctuation production, the pre-variation actions and scroll display (update) of the three production patterns 50a variation) are set to the same start order (left → middle → right), but depending on the types of multiple types of pre-variation operations, the three production patterns 50a are pre-variation operations and scroll display (update variation) (floating display: left→middle→right, enlarged display: center→left→right, reduced display: right→middle→left, etc.). Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of pre-variation motions of the performance pattern 50a for each performance mode so that the degree of expectation for the big win is different. In addition, when the production pattern 50a executes any of a plurality of types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) in the variable production. However, the order of the pre-stop actions and temporary stops of the three production patterns 50a is the same (left → right → middle), but there are three types of pre-stop actions according to the types of multiple types. The order of the pre-stop motion and temporary stop of the production pattern 50a may be changed (head shaking display: left→right→middle, rotating display: left→middle→right, etc.). Moreover, it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of modes of operations before the stop of the performance pattern 50a for each performance mode so that the degree of expectation for a big win is different.

Also, although the details of the production mode corresponding to the time saving game state 4 are not described, it may be the same as the production mode F corresponding to the time saving game state 3, and the above production modes A to F It may be of a different mode, for example, a mode in which the background image and the BGM of the mode G are composed of the mode G background image and the BGM7 as the mode G. And, the aspect of the production pattern 50a in the time saving game states 1 to 4 may be different in each. In this way, in the time-saving game states 1 to 4, since the background image, BGM, etc. are different in each, the player, after transitioning to the time-saving game state 1-4, the type of the current time-saving game state can be easily recognized. In addition, in the time-saving game states 1 to 4 described above, although the production mode is different for each, the game is executed in the same production mode during each time-saving game, but according to the number of possible games during each time-saving game It may be a mode in which the production mode is changed by pressing the button. For example, in the time-saving game state 3, when the number of possible games "M3" becomes "100" (when the game in the time-saving game state 2 is executed 600 times), the production mode F is changed to a different production mode. It may be in such a mode.

Furthermore, in the above-described production modes D to F (time-saving game states 1 to 4), the remaining number image JK has a common form, but it may be a different form depending on the production mode, For example, the character font may be different, or the size may be different. In addition, depending on the production modes D to F described above (time-saving game states 1 to 4), the remaining number image JK may or may not be displayed. Furthermore, the remaining number of times image JK may be always displayed during each time-saving gaming state, or until a predetermined number of games are executed after transition to each time-saving gaming state, or the number of possible games " M" may be displayed only after reaching a predetermined number of times or during a predetermined period during the time-saving game state. For example, in the time-saving game state 1 (production mode D) and the time-saving game state 2 (production mode E), the remaining number of times image JK is displayed, and in the early game after the transition to the time-saving game state 3 (production mode F), etc. After the possible number of games "M3" in the time saving game state 3 is subtracted to "100" without displaying the number of times image JK, the display of the remaining number of times image JK may be started.

The above-described first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second pending icon display area 50d are assumed to be a common aspect in each production mode, but for example, a different aspect for each production mode , and may have, for example, different colors, different decorations, or different shapes. In addition, in the above-described production modes D to F, a display suggesting the current game state may be displayed, for example, "time saving 1 mode", "time saving 2 mode", "time saving 3 mode", etc. The display may be displayed on the top of the main display device 131 . Furthermore, in the above-described first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB, and special symbol TZ, the display positions in production modes A to C and the display positions in production modes D to F are Although they are shown in different forms, they may be displayed in the same position, for example, in the lower right corner or lower left corner of the main display device 131 .

Here, the time-saving performance design corresponding to the time-saving design and composed of predetermined three performance designs 50a will be described. As described above (see FIG. 303 (a-4).), as the time-saving design, the number of possible games is 700 times and a special design J1 corresponding to the shift to the time-saving gaming state 4 with 100 possible times. A special symbol J2 corresponding to the transition to the time saving game state 4 is set. As the time-saving production design corresponding to these special designs J1 and J2, for example, the same production design 50a (for example, "151") may be configured, or each different production design 50a (for example, " 151" and "515"), or a plurality of types of time-saving performance symbols corresponding to each special symbol may be set.

Further, as the time-saving production pattern, the production pattern 50a is mainly composed of patterns showing numbers, etc., but it is not limited to this, and various modes may be used. For example, the time-saving production design may be configured such that it includes a dedicated design mainly composed of only characters such as "time-saving". Specifically, the time-saving production pattern may have a configuration such as a "1" production pattern 50a, a "time-saving" dedicated pattern, and a "1" production pattern 50a. , After the temporary stop of the production pattern 50a of two "1", the special pattern of "time saving" may be temporarily stopped. In such a mode, in the case of the game with the variable pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, the exclusive pattern is not included in the effect pattern 50a during the variable display during the period in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed, and the exclusive pattern is executed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. may be displayed. In addition, in a game that is not stopped and displayed in the time-saving performance pattern (a game determined that time-saving 4 is not won in the jackpot determination process), the temporarily stopped special design is changed to the normal performance design 50a. good too. In such a mode, even if the game is not stop-displayed with time-saving patterns, the degree of expectation for transition to the time-saving game state 4 can be improved by the stop-display with time-saving patterns. Furthermore, in the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 according to the cumulative number of times, the stop display of the production pattern 50a is a pattern such as the above-mentioned dedicated pattern (a mode different from the production pattern 50a corresponding to the time-saving production pattern and the big hit/small hit) And, for example, a pattern composed of characters "Time saving game start!") may be stopped and displayed at the time of transition.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), first, when the pending number is "0" and the customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c, and the first pending number "0" is displayed in each of the display area SA and the second pending number display area SB.

As shown in FIG. 316(b), next, when the game ball wins the first starting device 112 and the first reserved number becomes "1", the first display portion of the first reserved icon display area 50b normally The pending icon HI in the display mode is additionally displayed (increased display), and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display). At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

As shown in FIG. 316(c), next, when the first reserved number is reduced to "0" and the first special symbol is started to be changed, it is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 50b. Shift display (decrease display, change display) of the pending icon HI toward the icon display area 50c is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "0" (decrease display). At this time, the pending icon HI is displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the performance action (shaking action) is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(d), when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed as the icon TI in a size larger than the pending icon HI and is opaque. operation) continues.

As shown in FIG. 316(e), and when the game ball wins the first starting device 112 and the first reservation number becomes "1", normal display is performed on the first display part of the first reservation icon display area 50b. Additional display (increase display) of the pending icon HI of the mode is started, and the pending number of the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (increase display). At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image and is a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size. That is, in a state where the special symbols are variably displayed, the display of the hold icon HI may not start from the first posture (initial posture).

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(f), when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode has a normal size and is opaque. It is displayed, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(g), and when it is determined that the game ball wins the first starting device 112 and the first reserved number becomes "2" and the icon change effect is executed, Additional display (increase display) of the pending icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is started in the second display portion of the first pending icon display area 50b, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is "2". is updated (increased display) to At this time, the additionally displayed hold icon HI has a performance action (rotating action) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is positioned at the top. It starts and is enlarged and displayed from a semi-transparent extra-small size to a normal size with an effect image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(h), when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) ends, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) The HI is of normal size and is displayed opaquely, and the effect action (rotation action) is continuously performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(i), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the stop display is performed, the erasing display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c is started. At this time, the disappearing icon TI gradually increases in transparency with the effect image and disappears.

As shown in FIG. 316(j), next, when the first pending number is reduced to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, it is displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b. Shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 50c is started for the two reserve icons HI, and the reserve number in the first reserve number display area SA is updated to "1" (decrease display). At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(k), when the shift display of the two pending icons HI is completed, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first display portion of the first pending icon display area 50b is changed to The icon TI has a size larger than that of the pending icon HI and is displayed opaquely, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI of the first special mode displayed in the second display portion of the first hold icon display area 50b is displayed in the normal size and opaquely in the first display portion. Although it changes to the 2nd special display mode (red) by , the production operation (rotation operation) is continuously performed.

As shown in FIG. 316 (l), and when the game ball wins the first starting device 112 and the first reservation number becomes "2", normal display is performed on the second display part of the first reservation icon display area 50b. Additional display (increase display) of the pending icon HI of the mode is started, and the pending number of the first pending number display area SA is updated to "2" (increase display). At this time, the additional display of the pending icon HI starts a production action (shaking action) so as to be synchronized with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and is accompanied by an effect image to create a semi-transparent minimal icon. The display is enlarged from size to normal size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 316(m), when the additional display (increase display) of the hold icon HI in the normal display mode is finished, the additionally displayed hold icon HI in the normal display mode has a normal size and is opaque. It is displayed, and the performance action (shaking action) is continuously performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(n), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the stop display is performed, disappearance display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c is started. At this time, the disappearing icon TI gradually increases in transparency with an effect image and disappears.

As shown in FIG. 316(o), next, when the first pending number is reduced to "1" and the first special symbol is started to be changed, it was displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b. Shift display (decrease display) toward the icon display area 50c is started for the two pending icons HI during the production operation, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (decrease display). be. At this time, the two pending icons HI are displayed translucently with the degree of transparency changing from opaque, but the effect action (swaying action, rotating action) is continuously performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(p), here, for example, if the condition for switching from production mode A to production mode B is satisfied, the main display device 131 displays a shielding image (blackout image BO, blackout image BO, Whiteout image WO etc.) is displayed, and while the pending numbers of the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are visible, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c Visibility of icons is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 316(q), in the layer behind the shielding image, the normal display of the suspended icon HI corresponding to the rendering mode B is maintained while the display mode and rendering operation (rotating operation) of the icon TI are maintained. The status is switched to the pending icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in the first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is started from there.

As shown in FIG. 316(r), when the shielding image is erased, the normal display state of the suspended icon HI displayed in the first suspended icon display area 50b and the second suspended icon HI displayed in the icon display area 50c It becomes possible to visually recognize the icon TI in the special display mode.

In addition, when two or more suspended icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal A production operation is performed so that a plurality of pending icons in the display mode are synchronized. In addition, although the pending display example in the production mode A has been mainly described here, the display mode of the pending icon and the operation production mode are different in other production modes, but basically the same pending number display (production (including display at the time of mode switching) is performed. In addition, the timing of starting the display of the decrease in the pending number may be earlier than the timing of starting the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (the shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon). The timing of completion of the decreasing display of the pending number may precede the timing of completion of the change display of the icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon). Also, the timing at which the increasing display of the pending number starts and the timing at which it ends may precede the timing at which the increasing display of the pending icon starts. Further, not only the transparency but also the shape may be changed between when the increased display of the pending icon is started and after the increased display is completed.

It should be noted that the timing of synchronizing the effect action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the effect action of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of the display or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display. It may be the hour, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display. Also, in the case of resuming the performance action of the pending icon after the shift display of the pending icon, even if the pending icon resumes the performance action from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (the pending icon display area, the icon display area). good.

In addition, even when the special symbol (effect pattern) is stopped and displayed and the icon disappears, the icon continues to perform the effect action, but the effect is produced by the stop display of the special symbol (effect pattern). You may make it complete|finish operation|movement. In addition, a plurality of icons displayed in the normal display mode (holding icons, holding icon and the icon) are synchronized to perform the production operation, but the production operation is not performed in complete synchronization. , may be performed substantially in synchronism with each other. It should be noted that the timing of substantially synchronizing the rendering operation of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode with the rendering operation of the other pending icons based on the newly started winning may be at the start of display or a predetermined time after the start of display. It may be at the time when the shift display is started, or at the time when the shift display is completed.

(Production display example for each time-saving game state)
With reference to FIGS. 317 to 319, specific examples of display effects in time-saving game states 1 to 4 will be described. FIG. 317 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving rush effect executed when transitioning to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 and the display effect executed before the end of the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 ( a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1, etc., and (a-3) is before the end of the time-saving game state 1, etc. (b) is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transition to the time-saving game state 1 and the like. Figure 318 is a diagram for explaining the display effect executed before and after the transition to the time-saving game state 3 or the time-saving game state 4, (a-1) and (a-2) transition to the time-saving game state 3 It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the display effect before and after, (b-1) is a diagram explaining various display effects before and after the transition to the time saving game state 3, (b-2) is a time saving game state 4 is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after transition to 4. FIG. FIG. 319 is a diagram for explaining the display effect at the end of time saving game states 1 to 4, (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of time saving game state 1 and time saving game state 2, (b-1) is a diagram for explaining the display mode before and after the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2 are ended, and (b-2) is a diagram for explaining the display mode before and after the time saving game state 3 is ended. , (b-3) are diagrams for explaining display modes before and after the time-saving game state 4 ends.

As shown in FIGS. 317 (a-1) and (a-2), when the jackpot game state ends and shifts to the time saving game state 1 or the time saving game state 2, the time saving game state 1 etc. is started. Execute a short rush production that suggests. Then, in the time saving rush effect such as the time saving game state 1, the main display device 131 displays, for example, a rush time background image corresponding to the time saving rush effect as a background image, and shifts to the time saving game state 1. A rush image CT that is a notification image, a prevention image CH that is an image that is an image that notifies the prevention of forgetting to take out a game card inserted in the gaming device, and a right-hand shot image MG that is an image suggesting right-hand shot. Is displayed. Thereafter, instead of the prevention image CH, a warning image nh, which is an image warning against game dependence, is displayed. It should be noted that the right hitting image MG is shifted to the jackpot game state, is displayed from the start of the jackpot game to during the jackpot game, and continues to be displayed even after the shift to the time-saving game state 1 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 317 (a-3), before the time saving game state 1 or the time saving game state 2 ends, the main display device 131 displays, for example, the remaining number of times that can be played in the time saving game state 1 etc. (corresponding to "M1"/"M2") is displayed. In addition, the remaining number of times image GJ starts to be displayed when the number of possible games becomes a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or less, and one game in the time-saving game state 1 etc. ends (stop display with a losing pattern etc. ), the number of times "1" has been subtracted is displayed. At this time, since the main display device 131 is in the time-saving game state 1, the mode D background image, the remaining number of times image JK, and the production pattern 50a (variation display) are displayed as described above (see FIG. 315(d)). or stop display), special pattern TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (second pending icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), The icon TI and the like are displayed, and the remaining number of times image GJ is displayed in a large size in front of the main display device 131 so as to cover the effect symbol 50a substantially in the center. In addition, in the last game in the time-saving game state 1, etc., the remaining number image GJ may be displayed in a mode of "LAST". In addition, the remaining number image GJ is displayed before the end of the time saving game state 1 or the time saving game state 2, but it is also displayed in the same manner before the end of the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4. You may do so.

As shown in FIG. 317(b), before and after shifting to the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2, the display effects are executed in the order of jackpot middle effect→time saving rush effect→time saving middle effect. Here, the time th1 is the time when the round period in the jackpot game ends and the ending period starts, and the time th2 is the time when the ending period ends. First, during the round period of the jackpot game before the point th1, the performance symbol 50a, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the mid-jackpot background image corresponding to the mid-jackpot performance is displayed. In the state, the effect during the jackpot is executed, which is composed of a moving image or the like in a predetermined mode. Next, in a period from time th1 to time th2, the effect symbol 50a is not displayed, and the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are displayed in a state where the rush background image is displayed. (See FIGS. 317(a-1) and (a-2).). However, as for the prevention image CH and the warning image nh in the period, only the prevention image CH is displayed for a predetermined period from the start, and after that, the prevention image CH is hidden after the predetermined period has passed, and the prevention image CH is displayed. The prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed at the same time, for example, the warning image nh is displayed instead of the CH. Then, in the period during the time saving game state 1 etc. after the time saving th2, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are hidden, and in the state where the time saving background image such as the mode D background is displayed, While the variable display by the production|presentation pattern 50a of a 4th mode is displayed, the production|presentation during reduction of working hours comprised by the moving image etc. of a predetermined mode is performed. Note that the period during which the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed is not limited to the period described above, and may be various periods. For example, during the period in which the prevention image CH is displayed, the warning image nh may also be displayed in at least part of the period. In addition, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh may be displayed at the start of execution of the time-saving production or immediately before the end of the time-saving game state 1 or the like. Furthermore, in the period from time th1 to th2, after displaying the rush image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, the mode D background image, the fourth mode production pattern 50a, etc. Please start!” may be displayed in such a size as to cover almost all of the three production symbols 50a. Then, when the right-handed start image is displayed, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

As shown in FIG. 318(a-1), next, before the shift to the time-saving gaming state 3, the main display device 131 displays, for example, the accumulated number of games in the normal gaming state (accumulated number "n" A cumulative number of times image AK, which is an image for notifying the response), is displayed. In addition, the accumulated number image AK indicates the number of remaining games until the shift to the time saving game state 3, and the display starts when the accumulated number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 795 times). Each time one game in a game state or the like is finished (stopped display with a lost pattern or the like), the number of times "1" is subtracted is displayed. At this time, the main display device 131 displays the mode A background image, the cumulative number image RK, and the effect symbol 50a (variable display or stop display), special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), An icon TI and the like are displayed, and the accumulated number image AK is displayed in a large size in front of the main display device 131 so as to cover the effect symbol 50a substantially in the center. Also, the cumulative number image AK is displayed immediately after the start of the game, and disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, a period of time shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation period) has elapsed. With such a display time of the accumulated number image AK, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the accumulated number image AK displayed in the relevant game is also displayed during the next game. In addition, the accumulated number image AK may be displayed in the form of "LAST" in the game immediately before shifting to the time saving game state 3, or may be displayed as "two more times until the chance time". A mode may also be adopted in which a message to expect the transition to state 3 is also displayed.

As shown in FIG. 318(a-2), when the normal game state ends and shifts to the time saving game state 3, a time saving rush effect suggesting the start of the time saving game state 3 is executed. Then, in the time-saving rush effect of the time-saving game state 3, the main display device 131 displays, for example, a rush-time background image corresponding to the time-saving rush effect as a background image, and notifies that the time-saving game state 3 will be entered. A rush image CT that is an image to be displayed is displayed. At this time, the main display device 131, in order to shift to the time-saving gaming state 3, as described above (see FIG. 315 (f).), the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode (fluctuation display or stop display), right Hit image MG, special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), Icons TI and the like are displayed, and the rush image CT is displayed in a large size in front of the main display device 131 so as to cover the effect symbol 50a substantially in the center. The entry image CT is displayed in the time reduction rush effect when transitioning to the time reduction game state 3, but it is displayed in the same manner in the time reduction rush effect when transitioning to the time reduction game state 4. may be made.

As shown in FIG. 318 (b-1), before and after the transition to the time-saving game state 3, normal medium production → time-saving rush production → time-saving medium production as shown in the above-described FIG. 318 (a-1) Display effects are executed in order. Here, the time ti1 is the time when the normal game state shifts to the time-saving game state 3 . First, in the normal game state before time ti1, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed. Production pattern 50a such as mode (variable display or stop display), cumulative number image AK (predetermined period as described above), cumulative number image RK, special symbol TZ, reservation number display area (first reservation number display area SA, Second pending number display area SB), icon display areas (first pending icon display area 50b, icon display area 50c), icon TI and the like are displayed. Next, in the period after time ti1, first, the time saving effect is executed, for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the background image is changed from the normal background image to the rush background image. In the displayed state, the rush image CT, the fourth mode production pattern 50a switched from the first mode etc., the special pattern TZ, the pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB ), an icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, and the like are displayed. Then, when the time-saving rush production ends, the time-saving medium production is executed. In the state displayed instead of the time saving background image (mode F background), the fourth aspect production pattern 50a, special pattern TZ, reservation number display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB) , the icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, and the like are displayed. Incidentally, the time saving rush effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game after shifting to the time saving game state 3 is executed (whether or not there is a hold when moving to the time saving game state 3). Further, when there is a hold at the time of shifting to the time-saving game state 3, and when the special symbols are variably displayed at the time of transition and the variably-displayed performance symbols 50a are displayed, the background image of the time-saving medium performance is displayed. It is good also as a time saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving rush effect, after displaying the rush image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, with the mode D background image, the fourth mode effect pattern 50a, etc. displayed, "Start hitting right. Please!” may be displayed in such a size as to cover almost all of the three production symbols 50a. Then, when the right-handed start image is displayed, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 at the time of shifting to the time saving game state 3 as described above (variable display of the game when the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0"), the variable time is not longer or shorter than usual, and a dedicated variable time corresponding to only the time of transition to the time saving game state 3 is not set. On the other hand, after the shift to the time saving game state 3, in the game during the time saving game state 3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol display device 122 is longer or shorter than usual. A time may be set. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state 3 after the RAM clearing process, the fluctuation time dedicated to the time-saving gaming state 3 is not set, and in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state 3 after the jackpot state , a variable time dedicated to the time-saving game state 3 may be set.

As shown in FIG. 318 (b-2), before and after the transition to the time saving game state 4, the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the order of normal medium production (time saving transition production) → time saving rush production → time saving medium production. A display effect is executed. Here, the time tj1 is the time when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the previous game, and the normal game state shifts to the time-saving game state 4.例文帳に追加First, in the normal game state before time tj1, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed. Production pattern 50a such as mode (variation display, stop display, stop display with time saving pattern), cumulative number image RK, special pattern TZ, reservation number display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB ), an icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, and the like are displayed. Next, in the period after time tj1, first, the time saving effect is executed, for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the background image is changed from the normal background image to the rush background image. In the displayed state, the rush image CT, the fourth mode production pattern 50a switched from the first mode etc., the special pattern TZ, the pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB ), an icon display area (the second reserved icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, and the like are displayed. Then, when the time-saving rush production ends, the time-saving medium production is executed. In the state displayed instead of the time saving background image (mode F background), the fourth aspect production pattern 50a, special pattern TZ, reservation number display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB) , the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, and the like are displayed. Incidentally, the time-saving rush effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game after transition to the time-saving game state 4 is executed (whether or not there is a hold at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 4). Further, when there is a hold at the time of shifting to the time-saving game state 4, and when the special symbols are variably displayed at the time of transition and the variably-displayed performance symbols 50a are displayed, the background image of the time-saving medium performance is displayed. It is good also as a time saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving rush effect, after displaying the rush image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, the mode D background image, the fourth mode effect pattern 50a, etc. are displayed. Please!” may be displayed in such a size as to cover substantially all of the three production symbols 50a. Then, when the right-handed start image is displayed, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

In addition, in the normal production (see FIG. 318 (a-1)) before shifting to the time saving game state 3, the icon display area is displayed even during the display of the accumulated number image AK. It is possible to execute the display effect of the pending change. Here, for example, during the display of the cumulative number image AK in the normal medium effect before shifting to the time saving game state 3, execution of the pending change display effect may be restricted. In the normal production before transition to the time-saving game state 3, the player does not pay attention to the effect of the holding change, and the display of the cumulative number image AK allows the player to wait until the transition to the time-saving game state 3. It becomes easy to grasp the number of remaining games. In addition, during the display of the accumulated number image AK, in the normal medium effect before shifting to the time-saving game state 3 that limits the execution of the display effect of the pending change, the accumulated number image AK is not displayed, and the accumulated number image JK is displayed. may be displayed only. Even in the normal performance before transition to the time-saving game state 3, the player does not pay attention to the pending change effect until the transition to the time-saving game state 3 is performed by displaying the cumulative number image JK. It becomes easy to grasp the number of remaining games.

Here, the time-saving rush performance when shifting to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 and the time-saving rushing performance when shifting to the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4 are compared. First, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 1, etc., the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed, but the effect symbol 50a, the special symbol TZ, the reserved number display area, etc. are not displayed. . On the other hand, in the time saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time saving game state 3 etc., although the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are hidden, the effect symbol 50a, the special symbol TZ, the pending number display area etc. are displayed. I'm trying This is a time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1, etc., which is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. This is because there is no need to check the result, and rather, there is a high need for alerting with the prevention image CH and the warning image nh. On the other hand, it is necessary for the player to be alerted by the prevention image CH and the warning image nh in the time-saving rush performance at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3 or the like executed during a period other than the ending period of the jackpot game. This is because there is a high need to check the result of the big hit determination by the production pattern 50a, the special pattern TZ, the reserved number display area, and the like. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 etc., by hiding the prevention image CH and the warning image nh, which are less necessary for the player to confirm, are displayed on the main display device 131. It is also possible to prevent the player side from failing to confirm information that is highly necessary based on the excessive amount of image information. Furthermore, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of shifting to the time-saving game state 3, etc., the special design TZ may be displayed although the performance design 50a is not displayed. Even in such a mode, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to check highly necessary information based on the excessive amount of image information displayed on the main display device 131 .

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game states 1 to 4 described above, the rush image CT is mainly displayed so that the player can recognize that the time-saving game states 1 to 4 have been shifted. However, as long as the player can recognize it, it is not limited to this mode, and various other modes may be used. For example, the special symbol TZ may always be displayed in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to any one of the time-saving game states 1 to 4. More specifically, in the time-saving rush effect when shifting to the time-saving game state 1 or the time-saving game state 2, the stop display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the big hit pattern is displayed, and the time-saving when moving to the time-saving game state 3. In the rush performance, the stop display of the special symbols TZ corresponding to the lost symbols is displayed, and in the time-saving rush performance when shifting to the time-saving game state 4, the stop display of the special symbols TZ corresponding to the time-saving symbols is displayed. Become. In such a mode, the player can easily recognize the type of the time-saving game state after transition by the display of the special symbol TZ during the time-saving rush effect.

In addition, in the time-saving rush production at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 described above, the production pattern 50a, the right-handed image MG, the special pattern TZ, the icon display area, the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Although the rush image CT was displayed so as to cover the , even in a mode in which the rush image CT is displayed with only the production pattern 50a hidden among these displayed images, etc. good. In such a mode, the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 in which the special symbol TZ, the icon display area, etc. are not displayed (Fig. 317 (a-1) etc.) and the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3 make it easier for the player to recognize the type of the time-saving game state that has been transferred. In addition, in each of the time-saving rush effects when transitioning to the time-saving game states 1 to 4 described above, any mode may be used as long as the player can easily recognize the type of the time-saving game state. For example, in the time-saving rush production at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 3, at least one element is displayed among the production pattern 50a, the right-handed image MG, the special pattern TZ, the icon display area, the icon TI, etc. Similarly, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 4, elements different from those displayed in the time-saving game state 3 may be displayed. . In such a mode, although the rush image CT is displayed in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to each time-saving game state, the elements displayed other than the rush image CT are different. can easily recognize the type of time-saving game state after transition.

As shown in FIG. 319(a), at the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2, the main display device 131 displays, for example, information about profits obtained during the periods of the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving gaming state 1. A result image GP is displayed. Also, in the result image GP, the number of jackpot games (for example, 3 times) in the period (advantageous period) from winning the jackpot game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving game state (advantageous period), and in the advantageous period The total number of awarded balls (eg, 4515) is displayed. At this time, on the main display device 131, the effect pattern 50a is hidden by being covered with the result image GP, and the result image GP, the right-handed image MG, and the special pattern are displayed in a state in which the result background image is displayed as the background image. TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (second pending icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), icon TI, etc. are displayed be. Note that the total number of prize balls in the result image GP includes the prize balls based on the winning in the big winning devices such as the first big winning device 117, the starting devices such as the first starting device 112, and the general winning openings. Prize balls paid out based on incoming balls are not included. However, the total number of prize balls in the result image GP may include the prize balls paid out by entering the general prize winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 319 (b-1), next, at the end of the time saving game state 1 and the time saving game state 2, normally, from the time saving game state 1 etc. to the low probability non-time saving game state (normal game state) transition to Here, the time tk1 is the time when the last game such as the time-saving game state 1 (the game determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination) is started, and the time tk2 is the time when the end of the last game is suggested ( It is the point in time when the performance symbol 50a is temporarily stopped by the losing symbol), and the point in time tk3 is the point in time when the time-saving game state 1 or the like ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. First, at the time point tk1, the result image GP is not displayed, and the time-saving medium production in the time-saving game state 1, etc., and the variable display by the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode are displayed. Next, at time tk2, the result image GP is displayed as described above. Then, at time tk3, the result image GP is hidden, and a left-handed start image suggesting the start of left-handed hitting, such as "Please return to left-handed hitting!", covers almost all of the three performance symbols 50a. , and a normal medium effect such as a normal game state is displayed. That is, the result image GP is displayed from the middle of the last game in the time saving game state 1 to the end. In addition, the left-handed start image is displayed regardless of whether the first game is executed after the shift from the time-saving gaming state 1 or the like to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (regardless of the number of reservations). be. Furthermore, when the left-hand start image is displayed, a sound instructing to start a left-hand game may also be output.

As shown in FIGS. 319 (b-2) and (b-3), at the end of the time saving game state 3 or the time saving game state 4, normally, from the time saving game state 3 or the time saving game state 4 to the low probability non-time saving It shifts to a game state (normal game state). Here, the time tl is the time when the time saving game state 3 or the time saving game state 4 ends and shifts to the low probability non-time saving game state. Since the result image GP is not displayed around the time point tl, in the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, although the left-handed start image is displayed at the end, the result image GP is not displayed. It will end. Also, in the same manner as described above, the left-hand start image is regardless of whether the first game is executed after the transition from the time-saving gaming state 3 or the like to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (depending on whether or not the number of reservations is displayed). In addition, when displaying the left-handed start image, a sound instructing that the left-handed game should be started may also be output. Here, unlike the time saving game state 1 and the like, the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4 are not states shifted after the jackpot game, so the first big winning device during the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4 There is no chance of winning a big prize such as 117. Therefore, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0", and the total number of prize balls is "0". That is, at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, the result image GP indicating that the number of jackpot games is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0" is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lost when such a result image GP is displayed. At the end of the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4, the main display device 131 may display an image indicating the end of the time saving game state 3 or the like such as "Time saving end".

Although the result image GP is not displayed at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4 described above, the result image GP may be displayed. Thus, at the end of time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4, when the result image GP indicating that the number of jackpot games is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0" is displayed. , the player can easily recognize that the time-saving game state 3 or the like has ended. In addition, the result image GP displayed at the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 etc. is displayed for the predetermined period as described above, but the predetermined period may be other various periods. . For example, the display of the result image GP is started at the end of the last game in the time-saving game state (time-saving game state 1 to 4), then the second pending number is subtracted to "0", and the second special symbol display After the variable display on the device 122 is stopped, the result image GP may be hidden. That is, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variable display of the first special symbol display 120 can be started after the transition to the low-probability short-time gaming state. Furthermore, the above-described left-handed start image is displayed regardless of whether the first game in the low-probability short-time gaming state is executed, but is not limited to such a mode. There may be. For example, on the condition that the first game after the transition from the time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming states 1 to 4) to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, the left-handed start image is displayed and the left-handed game is started. It is also possible to output a voice instructing to do so.

Here, after the time-saving game state 3 is ended, like the case where the number of possible games 'M3' becomes '0' without winning a jackpot during the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 3 is ended, will be explained. As described above, in the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clearing process is executed, the transition to the time saving game state 3 is performed only once, and the transition to the time saving game state 3 is performed twice or more. It is configured so as not to shift to the time saving game state 3. Therefore, for example, after the end of the time-saving game state 3, it may be configured such that it is notified that the time-saving game state 3 has already ended. It can be easily recognized that 3 has ended. Specifically, during the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3, in the cumulative number image RK displayed on the main display device 131, by displaying the number of times exceeding "800 times", It may be a mode in which it is notified that the time saving game state 3 has already ended. In addition, after the time-saving game state 3 ends, the main display device 131 displays a transition completion notification image such as "time-saving 3 completed" indicating that the time-saving game state 3 has been entered and ended. A mode in which the fact that the state 3 has ended may be notified. It should be noted that the cumulative number of times image RK and the transitioned notification image displayed after the end of the time-saving game state 3 are displayed until the RAM clearing process is executed or the jackpot game is executed after the time-saving game state 3 is ended. You may make it always displayed. Further, the cumulative number image RK and the transitioned notification image displayed after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3 are displayed on the main display device 131 after the power is supplied even if the power is once turned off during the display and then the power is supplied. You may do so. Furthermore, after the end of the time-saving game state 3, when the power is turned off once and then the power is supplied, a transitioned notification image of a size that covers the entire surface of the main display device 131 is displayed or notified by voice or the like. It may be in such a mode. Furthermore, in the normal game state after the time saving game state 3 ends, a production mode different from the production modes A to C in the normal game state before transition to the time saving game state 3 (for example, after the time saving game state 3 ends A production mode peculiar to the normal game state) may be executed during normal production. With such a mode, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state 3 .

[Overview of Display Mode on Main Display Device 131 after Stopping Fluctuation]
With reference to FIGS. 320 and 321, an outline of the state transition of the gaming machine 100 and the display mode of the main display device 131 after the fluctuation is stopped will be described. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the state of the gaming machine 100 and the outline of the display mode of the main display device 131 after the fluctuation is stopped. FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

As shown in FIG. 320, when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, for example, the number of reservations such as the first number of reservations is "0" and there is no winning of game balls to the first starting device 112 is in a customer waiting state, demonstrating waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds) → second demonstration waiting period B1 (100 seconds) → second customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds). → . . . and so on, the demonstration standby period B1 and the customer waiting demonstration period B2 are alternately repeated. The demonstration standby period B1 is a period during which the three production patterns 50a are displayed in a stopped state on the main display device 131, and is a period in which a customer waiting demonstration production, which will be described later, is in a standby state. The customer waiting demonstration period B2 is a period during which the main display device 131 displays the customer waiting demonstration effect. As for the duration of the demonstration standby period B1, the first demonstration standby period B1 is longer than the second and subsequent demonstration standby periods B1, and the second and subsequent demonstration standby periods B1 are of the same length. period. On the other hand, the customer waiting demonstration period B2 has the same length as the first customer waiting demonstration period B2 and the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration periods B2.

As shown in FIG. 320(a), first, on the main display device 131 while the special symbols are changing, for example, a background image such as a mode A background image or the like scrolling sideways, and three production symbols 50a in front of it. A state in which two of the performance symbols 50a are stop-displayed and one performance symbol 50a is scroll-displayed is displayed. In addition, in front of the background image, a first pending icon display area 50b in which a first pending icon HI corresponding to the first pending number is displayed, and an image of the icon TI that is an animation that swings left and right are displayed. The selected icon display area 50c is displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, the first reservation number display area SA and the second reservation number display area SB in which the numbers corresponding to the first reservation number and the second reservation number are displayed are displayed, and the special symbol TZ is scrolled. It is displayed in the state of

As shown in FIG. 320(b), next, during the demonstration standby period B1, the main display device 131 displays a background image such as a mode A background image or the like that horizontally scrolls, and three images in a stopped state in front of the background image. A production pattern 50a is displayed. Also, in front of the background image, a first pending icon display area 50b in which the first pending icon HI is not displayed and an icon display area 50c in which the image of the icon TI is not displayed are displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, the first reservation number display area SA and the second reservation number display area SB indicating that the first reservation number and the second reservation number are "0" are displayed, and the special symbol TZ stops The combination numbers corresponding to the three performance symbols 50a in the closed state are displayed in a stopped state. Then, in front of the background image and the three production patterns 50a, a sound control image OC indicating that the volume of BGM or the like can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 320(c), the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demonstration period B2 displays a customer waiting demonstration effect, which will be described later. A first reservation number display area SA and a second reservation number display area SB indicating that the number of 1 reservations and the number of second reservations are "0" are displayed. During the customer waiting demonstration period B2, the main display device 131 displays the three effect symbols 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the special symbol TZ that were displayed during the demonstration standby period B1. is not displayed. Also, in the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demonstration period B2 (displaying the customer waiting demonstration effect), the special symbol TZ is displayed together with the first reserved number display area SA and the second reserved number display area SB. good too.

With reference to FIG. 321, the display mode of the customer waiting demonstration effect will be described. The customer waiting demo effect (80 seconds) is "variable effect demo (25 seconds)" → "character introduction (25 seconds)" → "model name (5 seconds)" → "manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "immersion This is an effect displayed in this order. In other words, these contents are displayed on the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 321(a), first of all, the "variation effect demo" in the customer waiting demo effect is a mode in which various variable effects displayed on the main display device 131 are displayed during the variable display of the special symbols. It is a performance. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variable effects such as SPSP ready-to-win resurrection effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, pseudo continuous effect, normal ready-to-win effect, etc. are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big win. In this "demonstration of variable effects", when each variable effect is displayed, it may be displayed in a manner in which characters explaining the contents of the effect and the degree of expectation are added.

As shown in FIG. 321(b), next, the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demo effect includes a plurality of characters displayed during various variable effects and a plurality of characters which are part of the structure of the effect pattern 50a. This is an effect in which a character or the like is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a character introduction background including an image simulating a stage is scroll-displayed as a background image. Character displays CP1 to CP3 are displayed. Further, the character display CP1 includes a character that is displayed in a variable effect with a high degree of expectation such as an SP ready-to-win effect, for example, and the character display CP2 is displayed in a variable effect with a relatively high degree of expectation such as an SP ready-to-win effect. A character is included, and the character display CP1 includes a character displayed in a variable effect such as a normal reach effect, for example. During the display of "character introduction", the character display CP1 is displayed for a longer time than the other character displays CP2 and CP3. That is, during the display of the "character introduction", the character display CP1 is displayed at a higher rate than the character displays CP2 and CP3. In addition, in the character displays CP1 to CP3, the images of the characters and the character display of the names may be moving images that operate in various manners different from each other.

As shown in FIG. 321(c), next, the “model name” in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which a model name display KH indicating the model name of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a model name background made up of white and blue gradations is scrolled as a background image, and the model name display KH suddenly appears in front of the background image. be done. Here, the change of the mode during the display time of the "model name" of 5 seconds will be described. During the five seconds of the display time of the "model name", after the display of the model name display KH on the main display device 131 starts (switching the display from "character introduction") to the completion of display (for example, one second), The display mode is changed such that the model name display KH is hidden.

As shown in FIG. 321(d), next, the “maker name” in the customer waiting demo effect is an effect in which a maker name display MH indicating the name of the maker that manufactured the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white manufacturer's name background is displayed as a background image, and the frame portion of the manufacturer's name display MH is displayed so as to suddenly appear in front of the background image, and "Surprise!" , “Inc.”, and “Logo mark” appear in order from the left. Alternatively, all of the shading of "Bikkuri. Co., Ltd. (logo mark)" may be displayed so as to gradually increase in density from a light state. Here, the change of the mode during the display time of "manufacturer name" of 5 seconds will be described. During the 5 seconds of the display time of the "manufacturer name", after the start of display of the manufacturer name display MH (switching the display from the "model name") on the main display device 131 and the completion of display (for example, 3 seconds), , the manufacturer name display MH is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 321(e), the "calling attention to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demo effect consists of characters with content to call attention to the player against excessive execution of the game on the gaming machine 100. This is an effect in which the warning display NH is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white attention-calling background is displayed as a background image, and is displayed in front of the background image, the first stepped portion NB1 displayed as the top row, and below the first stepped portion NB1. A second stepped portion NB2 and a third stepped portion NB3 displayed below the second stepped portion NB2 are displayed so as to appear in order from the top. In addition, the first stepped portion NB1 is composed of a red frame and red characters such as "Be careful not to get stuck in the frame." It is composed of black characters, and the third stepped portion NB3 is composed of a black frame and black characters such as "This is a game to be enjoyed moderately."

As shown in FIG. 321(f), the "movable character demonstration" in the customer waiting demonstration is the operation of the movable character such as the upper character unit 154 and the lower character unit 156 during various variable effects. It is a rendition that operates in a manner similar to the mode. Specifically, for example, on the main display device 131, a movable character object demonstration background composed of radial lines is displayed as a background image, and the lower character object unit 156 operates in front of the background image with an SPSP reach effect or the like. While moving to the position where it does, it operates in the same mode as the SPSP ready-to-win effect (a mode in which the movement etc. and the light emitting effect etc. by the LED etc. are combined). In addition, in the “movable accessory demo”, various effects may be performed not only by the lower accessory unit 156 but also by the upper accessory unit 154 and the light guide plate panel unit 181 .

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the second demonstration waiting period B1 (100 seconds) is longer than the demonstration waiting period B1 (120 seconds), which is the period from the stoppage of fluctuation to the start of the first customer waiting demonstration effect. is shortened. In such a customer waiting state, the player may continue to play immediately after the fluctuation is stopped. As compared with the case where the customer waiting demonstration effect is started immediately after the fluctuation is stopped, it is possible to reduce the player's displeasure such as the annoyance caused by the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect immediately after the fluctuation is stopped. On the other hand, during the customer waiting state, by shortening the interval at which the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed a plurality of times and increasing the display frequency of the customer waiting demo effect, the game appeals and the customer waiting state is displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In addition, as a mode in which the game can be strongly appealed by the customer waiting demonstration effect which is frequently displayed in this way, after the first customer waiting demo period B2 has elapsed (after the first customer waiting demo effect is displayed), two Even if the first demonstration waiting period B1 does not pass, the customer waiting period B1 (120 seconds)→customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds)→second customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds)→... A mode in which the demonstration period B2 is continuously performed may be used. In such a mode, two customer waiting demonstration effects are continuously displayed in the customer waiting state, so that the player can be impressed with the content of the customer waiting demonstration effect. You can make a strong appeal of the game.

According to the customer waiting demonstration effect as described above, the character display CP1 is displayed for a longer time and at a higher rate than the character displays CP2 and CP3 during the display of the "character introduction". In such a customer waiting demonstration effect, the character (for example, character display CP1) related to the highly expected variable effect is displayed for a long time and at a high rate, so the customer waiting demo effect is visually recognized. A player can easily recognize characters that are likely to be displayed in highly anticipated variable performances.

According to the customer-waiting demonstration effect as described above, the display time (10 seconds) of "calling attention to prevent addiction" is longer than the display time (5 seconds) of "model name". With such a customer-waiting demonstration effect, it is possible to effectively call attention by "calling attention to prevent addiction", which is more important than information related to the model name.

According to the customer-waiting demonstration effect as described above, the movable object is moved to the advance position during the variable effect as the "movable object demo", and the movable effect demonstration is executed. With such a customer waiting demonstration effect, it is possible to more effectively appeal the gaming machine to the player as compared with the conventional gaming machine in which the movable accessory is not operated in the customer waiting demonstration effect.

According to the customer waiting demonstration effect as described above, since the first reservation number display area SA, the second reservation number display area SB, and the special pattern TZ are displayed on the main display device 131, the number of reservations at the present time (reservation The player can easily recognize not only that the number is "0") but also that the variable display is not being performed. In particular, in the customer waiting demonstration stage, as described above, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes in various ways (FIGS. 321(a) to (f)). Nevertheless, the player may misunderstand that it is a variable effect during variable display, and the display of the first pending number display area SA, the second pending number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ makes such Misunderstanding of the player can be prevented.

According to the customer waiting demonstration effect as described above, the time from the start to the completion of the display of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" is longer than the time from the start to the completion of display of the model name display KH in the "model name". can be lengthened. In the case of such a customer waiting demonstration effect, the player recognizes it at the start of the game, etc., rather than the information related to the "model name" that the player is likely to recognize at the start of the game or during the game. Information about the unlikely "manufacturer name" can strongly impress the player. It should be noted that various modes may be used to make the player more impressed with the information about the "manufacturer name" than the information about the "model name". For example, in the above customer waiting demonstration, the display time of the "manufacturer name" is longer than the display time of the "model name", such as "model name (3 seconds)" and "manufacturer name (5 seconds)". It may be a long aspect. Specifically, during the three seconds of the display time of the "model name", the display of the model name display KH on the main display device 131 starts (switching the display from "character introduction") to the completion of display (for example, one second ), the display mode is changed such that the model name display KH is hidden. On the other hand, the display time of "manufacturer name" of 5 seconds is the same as described above. That is, not only is the display time of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" longer than the display time of the model name display KH in the "model name", but also the display of the model name display KH in the "model name" is completed. The time from the completion of the display of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" to the non-display is longer than the time from the display to the non-display. Therefore, even in such a customer-waiting demonstration effect, similarly, the information regarding the "manufacturer name" can impress the player more strongly than the information regarding the "model name".

[Specific example 1 in the case where the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the customer waits state]
322 to 324, a specific example 1 in the case where the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the demonstration waiting period→customer waiting demonstration period will be described. FIG. 322 is a timing chart (1) when the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the customer waits state, and FIGS. 323 and 324 show examples of effects at various timings in FIG. . In addition, although the case where it is production|presentation mode A is demonstrated here, since production|presentation modes B and C are fundamentally the same, description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 322, first, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 120 is executed with the first reserved number being "0". At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 123 and the first reservation number display area SA are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the center one and three special symbols TZ among the three effect symbols 50a are updated and changed (scrolling display, switching display). Also, the first suspended icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and although the suspended icon HI is not displayed in the first suspended icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c is displayed in the normal display mode. is displayed. Also, the variation BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is audibly output (see FIG. 323(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the central effect pattern 50a that has been scrolled and displayed (updated and fluctuated) at a low speed temporarily stops, the characters of the three effect patterns 50a perform a pre-stop effect action (before stopping shaking the head). operation) is performed, and the three performance symbols 50a are in a state of being temporarily stopped with a losing roll ("537"). Then, at the timing of T2, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the first special symbol display 120 Lost special symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 323(b)).

Next, at the timing of T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts disappearing by animation, and the effect symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") are displayed. Stop display is started. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearing display of the icon TI in animation ends. Also, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 323(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the customer waiting state. Demo waiting period. At this time, as for the background image, the mode A background image similar to that during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 is being horizontally scrolled, and as for the BGM, it is sufficient that some BGM is continuously output. For example, the same variation BGM1 as before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120 is continuously audibly output, or is different from before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, and the demo standby period ( A predetermined BGM (for example, BGM8) corresponding to the customer waiting state) may be started to be output. Here, it is assumed that the same variation BGM6 as before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120 is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 323(d)).

Next, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the first special symbol display device 120, the variable BGM1 that has been audibly output is stopped and becomes silent (Fig. 323 ( e) see). In the period from T4 to T6 when the variable BGM1 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM1 is changed according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 by the player, and the setting of the volume of the output volume is changed. It is possible.

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, it is suggested that the volume of the variable BGM or the like can be adjusted by operating the effect operation stick 136. A sound adjustment display OC to be played is displayed in front of the production design 50a (see FIG. 323(f)). In the sound adjustment display OC, the currently set sound volume display (volume gauge) and the operation direction of the effect operation stick 136 are displayed. In addition, according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the volume display (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment display changes, and the setting of the output volume is changed.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the main control board 300 transmits a customer waiting demonstration effect start command to the effect control board 320, and a predetermined A customer waiting demonstration effect is started for a period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the production pattern 50a and behind the reservation display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB), a customer waiting demonstration over a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) The fade-in of the image (gradually becoming opaque from the transparent state) is started, and the effect pattern 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special pattern TZ fade out ( The state gradually changes from an opaque state to a transparent state, and erasing) is started. That is, the three production patterns 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, the disappearing display of the special pattern TZ gradually disappearing, and the customer waiting demonstration image (character image, customer waiting demonstration background ) is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the occurrence display that gradually appears. In addition, since the pending display areas (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they cannot be visually recognized (shielded) by the customer waiting demo image. (See FIG. 324(g)).

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demonstration image is completed, the production pattern 50a and the like are hidden (invisible state), and the "variation production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "character introduction (20 seconds)" is displayed. )” → “model name (10 seconds)” → “manufacturer name (10 seconds)” → “reminder to prevent addiction (10 seconds)” → “movable character demonstration (10 seconds)”. A demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 324(h)). In other words, when there is no winning of the game ball in the customer waiting state, when the demonstration waiting period (120 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo effect for appealing the game to the player is performed. is started, and furthermore, if there is no game ball win or the like during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the customer waiting demo effect is displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

With reference to FIG. 324(i), the case where the player operates the effect operation stick 136 to change the volume of the fluctuating BGM1 during the period from T5 to T6 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 324(i), when the effect operation stick 136 is operated during the period T5 to T6 during which the variable BGM1 is being output, the main display device 131 starts displaying the sound adjustment display OC ( The sound adjustment display OC being displayed ends when there is no operation of the effect operation stick 136 for a predetermined period (2 seconds). It is output with a period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined sound effects and listening sounds associated with the start of the display of the sound adjustment display OC are output at the timing corresponding to the timing of starting the display of the sound adjustment display OC (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). However, even if the timing does not correspond to the timing of ending the display of the sound adjustment display OC (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, the timing before the end of the display of the sound adjustment display OC) ) output is terminated. In addition, based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, the volume of the variable BGM 1 changes, and the display (volume gauge) of the volume in the sound adjustment display OC changes, and the output The setting of the volume of the BGM or the like to be played is changed. Furthermore, along with the display of the change in the volume gauge based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the audio output device 331 outputs a predetermined viewing sound at the changed volume for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). be. Here, the predetermined viewing sound is output at a timing corresponding to the timing of starting the display of changes in the volume gauge based on the operation of the effect operation stick 136 (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). Even if the timing does not correspond to the timing when the display of the change in the gauge is completed (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, the timing before the completion of the display of the change in the volume gauge), the output is finished. be.

A case where menu images MN1a and MN1b are displayed by operating the hilt unit 135 in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the customer waiting state, the operation effective period of the sword handle unit 135 (sword button) is set by the effect control board 320 that has received the customer waiting state designation command. When the sword handle unit 135 is operated, a predetermined signal based on the operation of the sword handle button detected by the sword handle button detection switch 137 is transmitted to the effect control board 320, and a predetermined signal from the effect control board 320 is transmitted. , the lamp control board 340 and the button driving device vibrate the sword handle unit 135 in a predetermined manner. Further, when the display of the menu image MN1a or the like is started based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135 or when the state of the menu image MN1a or the like is changed by the operation of the sword handle unit 135, the predetermined effect sound is constant in the voice output device 331. It is output in a period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined sound effect is produced at a timing corresponding to the timing of starting the display of the menu image MN1a and the like based on the operation of the hilt unit 135 and the display of the change in mode (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). Although it is output, even if the timing does not correspond to the timing when the display of the menu image MN1a or the like or the display of the mode change is completed (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, the display of the menu image MN1a or the like, Timing prior to the completion of the display of the change in mode) output is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 324(j-1), for example, if the sword hilt unit 135 is operated during the display of "character introduction" during the operation valid period in the customer waiting state, A menu image MN1a is displayed. In the menu image MN1a, a "model description" tag, a "effect customization" tag, and a "pachi log" tag are displayed, and any one of the tags can be selected and determined according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. It has become. When the "description of model" tag is selected and determined, an explanation regarding the game flow, features, etc. of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Data relating to the game results of the gaming machine 100, such as the number of times the player has won a jackpot, is displayed. The operation effective period is set as a period that continues during the customer waiting state, and when the sword hilt unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN1a is being displayed, the menu image MN1a disappears. there is

As shown in FIG. 324(j-2), when the "effect customization" is selected and determined while the menu image MN1a is being displayed, the menu image MN1b is displayed. In the menu image MN1b, along with the characters “select your favorite character”, tags of a plurality of character names that can be selected and determined according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 are displayed. Then, for example, when a tag of one character name is selected in this menu image MN1b, when the effect symbol 50a including the selected character is displayed during the game, a character such as "preferred character" is displayed for the effect symbol 50a. is displayed with the . If the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the menu image MN1b is displayed, the menu image MN1b disappears.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the display time (80 seconds) of the customer waiting demonstration effect is longer than the time (30 seconds) from when the fluctuation stops to when the output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped. is. In such a customer waiting state, since there is a high possibility that the player continues the game immediately after the fluctuation stop, the continuation of the game can be encouraged by continuously outputting the fluctuation BGM. In addition, since the output time of the fluctuating BGM after the fluctuation is stopped is shorter than the display time of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the continuous output of the fluctuating BGM after the fluctuation is stopped is too long. Discomfort of the player of the machine can be suppressed, and the game can be appealed to the players of the other game machines around by displaying the customer waiting demonstration performance for a long period of time.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed after the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, rather than the time (40 seconds) from when the fluctuation stops until the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. The time to (80 seconds or 60 seconds) is the longer period. In such a customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is not displayed for a predetermined period after the fluctuation is stopped, so that the player during the game is made to pay attention to the fluctuation performance, etc., and the game is continued immediately after the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by the display of the sound adjustment display OC for the player who is playing the game. In addition, the period from when the sound adjustment display OC is displayed to when the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed is sufficiently long, and the display of the customer waiting demonstration effect does not make it difficult to visually recognize the sound adjustment display OC. A player in the waiting state can easily recognize that the volume of BGM or the like can be adjusted.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the main display device 131 displays the sound adjustment display OC, the change of the volume gauge, the display of the menu image MN1a and the like, and the change of the mode. To make the output timing of the predetermined effect sound or the predetermined audition sound in the audio output device 331 earlier than the timing of the change of the display mode (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). can be done. In such a customer waiting state, for example, while the sound control display OC is being displayed to adjust the volume to a desired level, the operator wishes to quickly win a prize for the first starting device 112 or the like while operating the effect operation stick 136. For the player who is operating the firing handle 103 for the purpose, the variable display by the performance symbol 50a starts before the display of the change in the volume gauge is completed on the main display device 131, and the player cannot see the volume gauge. Even if the user does not pay attention to the display of the change, it is possible to recognize that the adjustment to the desired volume is completed by the predetermined audition sound output before the display of the change of the volume gauge is completed. . In other words, the player can change the settings of the gaming machine 100 according to his/her own operation using a predetermined sound effect or audition sound without visually confirming the completion of the change of the display mode on the main display device 131 based on his/her own operation. has been completed.

(Example of production when winning while waiting for customers)
With reference to FIG. 325, an example of an effect when a prize is won during the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a prize is won while waiting for a customer. Here, a description will be given of an example of an effect when winning a prize during the period T4 to T6 of the demonstration standby period while waiting for customers.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), during the period of T4-T6, which is the customer waiting state and the demonstration standby period, as described above, the stop time of the special symbols has passed and the main control board 300 performs the effect control. A customer waiting state specifying command is transmitted to the substrate 320, and the demonstration waiting period for stop-displaying the effect pattern 50a is reached. At this time, in the main display device 131, as the background image, the mode A background image similar to that during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 is being horizontally scrolled, and as for BGM, the first special symbol display 120 is displayed. The same fluctuation BGM1 as before the stop display of is continuously audibly output.

As shown in FIG. 325(b), here, when the game ball wins the first starting device 112, the first reserved number becomes "1", and the first display part of the first reserved icon display area 50b Additional display of the pending icon HI in the normal display mode is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1". In addition, the fluctuating BGM1 is continuously audibly output, and an effect sound suggesting that the player has won a prize is output. Furthermore, as the background image, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is continuously output. In other words, when the game ball wins the first starting device 112 while the variable BGM is being output during the demonstration standby period of the customer waiting state, the variable BGM that was output before the winning continues. will be output as

As shown in FIG. 325(c), and when the first pending number is reduced to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the pending displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b Shift display (decrease display, change display) of the icon HI toward the icon display area 50c is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "0" (decrease display). Further, in front of the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image, the three effect symbols 50a which have been stopped and displayed are floating-displayed as a pre-variation operation, and the scrolling display of the special symbols TZ is started. Furthermore, at this time as well, the fluctuating BGM1 is continuously audibly output. At this time, for example, if the effect mode is changed, the variable effect is displayed in a state where the background image, the effect pattern 50a, the pending icon HI, the icon TI, the variable BGM, etc. are changed. good too.

(Example of effect when sword handle unit 135 is operated during variable display)
With reference to FIG. 326, a description will be given of an example of effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the variable display of special symbols. FIG. 326 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the sword hilt unit 135 is operated during variable display. In addition, here, after it is determined that the first special symbol is a jackpot, the case where the SPSP ready-to-win effect is set as the variable effect pattern will be described. Further, in the effect control board 320, when the SPSP ready-to-win effect (jackpot) is set as the variable effect pattern, an operation valid period (10 seconds) during which the operation of the sword handle unit 135 is valid is set. Furthermore, the operation effective period (10 seconds) is not limited to the SPSP reach effect (jackpot), and is set with multiple types of variable effect patterns such as SPSP reach effect (loss), SP reach effect (jackpot), pseudo-continuous effect, etc. It is what is done.

As shown in FIG. 326(a), first, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped in the final phase of the SPSP reach effect and the decision effect is started, an promotion image prompting the operation of the sword handle button of the sword handle unit 135 is displayed. is displayed and the sword hilt button operation effective period (10 seconds) is started. Specifically, the main display device 131 displays an operation facilitating image SSG modeled on a sword handle button, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped (no output), and the voice output device 331 produces the effect of "press". A sound is output. At this time, the reduced performance pattern 50a is variably displayed in the upper left corner of the main display device 131. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 326(b), when the sword handle button of the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the valid operation period (10 seconds), a determined success effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed. executed. Specifically, as the lower role product unit 156 moves to the performance position, a plurality of light-emitting LEDs provided on the lower role product unit 156 blink. In addition, the determination success image SEF is displayed in front of the SPSP reach background of the main display device 131, and the sound effect of “Kyuin kyuin” is output from the audio output device 331. FIG. Furthermore, the sword handle unit 135 is vibrated by the button driving device. By temporarily stopping the reduced performance symbol 50a at the upper left corner of the main display device 131 at "5", the three performance symbols 50a are temporarily stopped at the big hit ("555"). If the sword hilt unit 135 is not operated during the valid period of operation, the above-described operation prompting image SSG disappears, and a success presentation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 326(c), and when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect has passed, the pre-stop effect suggesting that the effect pattern 50a is stopped and displayed (the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc. are displayed in 0.5 seconds. After the shielding image to be shielded (display of the eye-catching image including the model name) is executed, the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is resumed, and the effect symbol 50a is moved to the position before the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect and the first position. It returns to the mode and becomes a state in which the temporary stop display is displayed. Also, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c displaying the icon TI are displayed again. At this time, the sound output device 331 does not output sound for a predetermined period (for example, until the stop display of the effect symbol 50a).

If it is a variable effect in which the operation effective period is set as described above, the operation effective period (10 seconds) set according to the variable effect pattern is set by a plurality of types of variable effect patterns, so the customer waiting state Compared to the operation effective period (once) set during the operation period, it can be set more times, and compared to the operation effective period set during the customer waiting state (set during the customer waiting state) can be as short a period as possible. In the case of such a variable performance, the variable performance by setting the operation effective period during the variable performance improves the player's expectation, and many types of variable performance patterns are implemented in a short operation effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the variable presentation. Furthermore, since the long operation effective period is set with a small number of times (once), the player's boredom can be reduced, and the effect by setting the operation effective period during the customer waiting state can be reduced. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific example of when the variable effect in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the customer waits state]
Using FIGS. 327 to 329, a specific example of the case where the variable effect in the time-saving game state 3 ends when the number of possible games "M3" is not "0" and the demonstration standby period→customer waiting demonstration period will be explained. FIG. 327 is a timing chart when the variable effect in the time saving game state 3 ends and the customer waiting state is entered, and FIGS. 328 and 329 are diagrams showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. In addition, although the case where it is the production|presentation mode F is demonstrated here, since the production|presentation modes D and E which are the production|presentation modes of a time-saving game state are fundamentally the same, description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 327, first, at the timing of T0, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 122 with the second reserved number being "0". At this time, the second special symbol reservation display 124 and the second reservation number display area SB are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode F background image during horizontal scrolling, the center one and three special symbols TZ among the three effect symbols 50a of the fourth mode are updated and changed (scrolling display, switching display). In addition, the remaining number of times image JK (a mode for notifying that the remaining number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state 3 is "101 times") is displayed, and the second reserved icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c is displayed, and although the suspended icon HI is not displayed in the second suspended icon display area 50d, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50c. Also, a right-handed shot image MG is displayed, and a variation BGM6 corresponding to the effect mode F is audibly output (see FIG. 328(a)).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the central production pattern 50a that has been scrolled and displayed (updated and fluctuated) at a low speed temporarily stops, the three production patterns 50a perform the production operation (bound (small) display) as the operation before stopping. It goes and it will be in the state where the three production|presentation patterns 50a were temporarily stopped by the loss roll ("537"). Then, at the timing of T2, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the second special symbol display 122 Lost special symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the right-hand shot image MG and the remaining number of shots image JK are displayed, and the variation BGM6 corresponding to the effect mode F is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 328(b)).

Next, at the timing of T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts disappearing by animation, and the effect symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") are displayed. Stop display is started. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation ends. In addition, the right shot image MG and the remaining number of shots image JK are displayed, and the variation BGM6 corresponding to the effect mode F is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 328(c)). Although not shown, in the remaining number of times image JK, an image of "100 remaining times" is displayed by an animation such that "1" is subtracted from the number of possible games of "101" when the disappearance display of the icon TI ends. Become so.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a demonstration standby period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed. is sent. At this time, as for the background image, the mode F background image similar to that during the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 is being horizontally scrolled, and as for the BGM, it is sufficient that some BGM is continuously output. For example, the same variation BGM6 as before the stop display of the second special symbol display 122 is continuously audibly output, or is different from before the stop display of the second special symbol display 122, and the demo standby period ( A predetermined BGM (for example, BGM8) corresponding to the customer waiting state) may be started to be output. Here, it is assumed that the same variation BGM6 as before the stop display of the second special symbol display 122 is continuously audibly output. Also, the right shot image MG and the remaining number of shots image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(d)).

Next, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the second special symbol display 122, the variable BGM6 that has been audibly output is stopped, and the state becomes silent. Also, the right shot image MG and the remaining number of shots image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(e)). In the period from T4 to T6 when the variable BGM6 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM6 is changed according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 by the player, and the setting of the volume of the output volume is changed. It is possible.

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the second special symbol display 122, it is suggested that the volume of the fluctuating BGM or the like can be adjusted by operating the effect operation stick 136. A sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the effect pattern 50a. Also, the right shot image MG and the remaining number of shots image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(f)). In the sound adjustment display OC, the currently set sound volume display (volume gauge) and the operation direction of the effect operation stick 136 are displayed. In addition, according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the volume display (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment display changes, and the setting of the output volume is changed.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started for a predetermined period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the production pattern 50a and behind the reservation display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB), a customer waiting demonstration over a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) Fade-in of the image (gradually becoming opaque from a transparent state) is started, and the production pattern 50a, the right-handed image MG, the remaining number of times image JK, the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c, the mode The F background image and the special pattern TZ start fading out (gradually changing from an opaque state to a transparent state and disappearing). That is, the three production symbols 50a, the right shot image MG, the remaining number of times image JK, the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c, the mode F background image, the disappearance display of the special symbol TZ gradually disappears, and the customer waiting At least a part of the generation display in which the demonstration image (character image, customer waiting demonstration background) appears gradually is displayed so as to overlap. In addition, since the pending display areas (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they cannot be visually recognized (shielded) by the customer waiting demo image. (See FIG. 329(g)).

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demonstration image is completed, the production pattern 50a etc. becomes non-display (invisible state), "variable production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "character introduction (20 seconds)" )” → “model name (10 seconds)” → “manufacturer name (10 seconds)” → “reminder to prevent addiction (10 seconds)” → “movable part demo (10 seconds)”. A demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 329(h)). In other words, when there is no winning of the game ball in the customer waiting state, when the demonstration waiting period (120 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demonstration effect for appealing the game to the player is performed. is started, and furthermore, if there is no winning of a game ball or the like during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the customer waiting demo effect is displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

With reference to FIG. 329(i), the case where the player operates the effect operation stick 136 to change the volume of the variable BGM 6 during the period from T5 to T6 will be described. As shown in FIG. 329(i), when the effect operation stick 136 is operated during the period T5-T6 during which the variable BGM6 is being output, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. Then, according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, the volume of the variable BGM 6 changes, and the display (volume gauge) of the volume in the sound adjustment display OC changes, and the volume of the output BGM and the like changes. setting is changed. It should be noted that, at this time, a predetermined listening sound is output at the changed volume in accordance with the change in the display of the volume according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 . Further, when there is no operation of the effect operation stick 136 for a predetermined period of time (2 seconds), the sound adjustment display OC disappears.

A case where menu images MN2a and MN2b are displayed by operating the hilt unit 135 in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. When the display of the menu image MN2a or the like is started or when the mode is changed by operating the hilt unit 135 while the menu image MN2a or the like is being displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). . As for this sound effect, similarly to the relationship between the menu image MN1a and the like and the sound effect described above, the timing of the display of the menu image MN2a and the like and the mode change (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) and the predetermined A mode in which the timing of outputting the sound effect does not match is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 329 (j-1), in the customer waiting state, the operation effective period of the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button) is set by the effect control board 320 that has received the customer waiting state designation command. For example, if the sword handle unit 135 is operated during this operation valid period and during the demonstration standby period, the mode F background image, the three stop design symbols 50a, the right-handed image MG, the remaining count image JK, A menu image MN2a is displayed in front of the second pending icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c. In the menu image MN2a, a “model description” tag and a “MUSIC selection” tag are displayed, and selection and determination of any of the tags can be made according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. FIG. When the "description of model" tag is selected and determined, a description of the game flow, features, etc. of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. If the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN2a is being displayed, the menu image MN2a disappears.

As shown in FIG. 329(j-2), when the "MUSIC selection" tag is selected and determined while the menu image MN2a is being displayed, the menu image MN2b is displayed. In the menu image MN2b, along with the characters “MUSIC selection”, tags of a plurality of song names that can be selected and determined according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 are displayed. Then, for example, when the tag of one song name is selected in this menu image MN2b, the BGM of the selected song name is output, and the volume of the BGM of the selected song name is adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136. can be adjusted. If the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the menu image MN2b is being displayed, the menu image MN2b disappears. Also, the sound adjustment image OC may be displayed when adjusting the volume of the BGM of the song title selected while the menu image MN2b is being output.

Here, when the customer waiting state in the normal game state (before the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0") as described above (see FIGS. 322 to 324), and the time-saving game state 3 After the number of times “n” becomes “0”), the customer waiting state (see FIGS. 327 to 329) and the customer waiting state are compared, and the different elements and the same elements and will be explained. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the case of waiting for a customer in the normal game state is "normal customer waiting", and the case of waiting for a customer in the time-saving game state 3 is "waiting for three customers. ”.

First, the elements that are different between normal customer waiting and short-time three-customer waiting will be described. As a first factor, the background image displayed from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect is different between the normal customer waiting and the short three-customer waiting. Specifically, in normal customer waiting, it is a mode background image corresponding to one of production modes A to C, and in time saving 3 customer waiting, mode F background corresponding to production mode F dedicated to time saving game state 3 It is an image. As a second factor, the aspect of the production pattern 50a displayed from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the customer waiting demonstration production differs between the normal customer waiting and the short three-customer waiting. Concretely, it is one of the first mode to the third mode in normal customer waiting, and it is the fourth mode in time saving three customer waiting. As a third factor, the BGM that is output in a predetermined period after the stoppage of variation differs between normal customer waiting and three-time short customer waiting. Specifically, it is one of BGM1 to BGM3 when waiting for a normal customer, and BGM6 when waiting for three short-time customers. As a fourth factor, the mode of the pending icon display area displayed from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect differs between the normal customer waiting and the time saving three customer waiting. Concretely, it is the first pending icon display area 50b in normal customer waiting, and the second pending icon display area 50d in time saving three customer waiting. In addition, as described above, when the display modes of the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second pending icon display area 50d are different in each production mode, normal customer waiting and time saving three customer waiting It becomes a different aspect. Further, in the three-customer waiting period, the right-handed image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are displayed from the time when the variation stops until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, but they are not displayed in the normal customer waiting period. Furthermore, in the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode, when the display indicating the current gaming state is displayed as described above, the "time-saving 3 mode" is displayed, but it is not displayed in the normal customer waiting mode. In addition, in the first to fourth elements described above, the normal customer waiting and the short-time three-customer waiting are different aspects, but they may be the same aspect.

Next, the elements that are the same in the normal customer waiting and the three-time short customer waiting will be described. As a first element, the sound adjustment image OC displayed from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect is the same for the normal customer waiting and the short three customer waiting. The second element is the display (volume gauge) of the volume level in the sound adjustment image OC that is displayed from the fluctuation stop to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the normal customer waiting and the short three customer waiting. This is the same as the audition sound (short sound) that is output when adjusting the volume. As a third element, the customer waiting demonstration effect displayed after the demonstration waiting period after the stoppage of variation is the same in both the normal customer waiting and the short-time three-customer waiting. As a fourth element, the special pattern TZ displayed from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect is the same in the normal customer waiting and the time saving three customer waiting. The fifth element is the period during which the BGM is output after the fluctuation stops, the period until the display of the sound adjustment image OC starts after the fluctuation stops, and The demonstration standby period B1 is the same time. In addition, as described above, when the display position of the special symbol TZ is the same in each production mode, the display position is the same between the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three-customer waiting. Further, in the above-described first to fifth elements, the mode is the same for normal customer waiting and short-time three-customer waiting, but different modes may be used. In particular, in the fifth element, all three periods may be different times between normal customer waiting and short time three customer waiting, or at least one or two of the three periods may be different times. may Specifically, in the time saving three customer waiting, the period in which the BGM is output after the fluctuation stops and the period from the fluctuation stop to the start of the sound adjustment image OC display are compared to the case of the normal customer waiting. If it is shortened, for the player who wants to adjust the volume of the output sound before starting the game in the time-saving game state 3, the volume of the BGM is confirmed at an earlier timing than the normal customer waiting, and then the volume is adjusted, thereby saving the time. Since the game in the game state 3 can be played, the interest in the game is not lost. In addition, when the demo waiting period B1 is made longer than in the case of normal customer waiting in the time saving three customer waiting, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed to the player who desires to execute the game in the time saving game state 3 even immediately. It is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the feeling of annoyance caused by the game.

In addition, when the customer waiting state in the normal game state (state not elected to the time saving 4 in the jackpot determination process) (see FIGS. 322 to 324), and the time saving game state 4 (time saving 4 in the jackpot determination process A comparison of the state of waiting for a customer in the state of winning the lottery and the state of waiting for a customer in the state of winning will be described. In these customer waits, the elements that are different or the same are the same as in the case of comparing the above-described normal customer wait and the short-time three-customer wait.

[Concrete example 2 in the case where the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the customer waits state]
330 and 331, a specific example 2 in the case where the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the demo standby period→customer waiting demonstration period will be described. FIG. 330 is a timing chart (2) when the variable effect in the normal game state ends and the customer wait state is entered, and FIG. 331 shows examples of effects at various timings in FIG. In addition, although the case where it is production|presentation mode A is demonstrated here, since production|presentation modes B and C are fundamentally the same, description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 330, first, at timing T0, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 120 is executed with the first reserved number being "0". At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 123 and the first reservation number display area SA are displayed as "0". In addition, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the center one and three special symbols TZ among the three effect symbols 50a are updated and changed (scrolling display, switching display). Also, the first suspended icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and although the suspended icon HI is not displayed in the first suspended icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c is displayed in the normal display mode. is displayed. Also, a variation BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T1, when the central effect pattern 50a that has been scrolled (updated and changed) at a low speed is temporarily stopped, the characters of the three effect patterns 50a perform a pre-stop effect action (before stopping by shaking the head). operation) is performed, and the three performance symbols 50a are in a state of being temporarily stopped with a losing roll ("537"). Then, at the timing of T2, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, a stop command (symbol confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320, and the first special symbol display 120 Lost special symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously audibly output.

Next, at the timing of T3, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts disappearing by animation, and the effect symbol 50a ("537") and the special symbol TZ ("537") are displayed. Stop display is started. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation, the disappearance display of the icon TI in animation ends. Also, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously audibly output.

Then, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, it becomes a customer waiting state and becomes a demonstration standby period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the effect control board 320. is sent. At this time, the background image is the same Mode A background image as during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120, and the BGM is the same as before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120. is continuously audibly output (see FIG. 331(d)).

Next, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the first special symbol display device 120, the effect operation stick 136 is operated in a state where the variation BGM1 is continuously audibly output. A sound adjustment display OC indicating that the volume of variable BGM or the like can be adjusted is displayed in front of the production pattern 50a. In the sound adjustment display OC, the currently set volume level and the operation direction of the effect operation stick 136 are displayed. In addition, according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, the display of the volume level in the sound adjustment display is changed, and the setting of the output volume level is changed (see FIG. 331(e)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has passed since the stop display of the first special symbol display device 120, the variable BGM1 that has been audibly output is stopped and becomes silent (Fig. 323 ( f) see). Even if the variable BGM1 is not output after T7, the volume of the variable BGM1 is changed according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 by the player, and the volume of the output volume is set. Change is possible. For example, when the effect operation stick 136 is operated in a silent state, a short sound (preview sound) of the set volume is output, allowing the player to confirm the set volume. It is possible.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started for a predetermined period (80 seconds). Specifically, in front of the production pattern 50a and behind the reservation display area (first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB), a customer waiting demonstration over a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) The fade-in of the image (gradually becoming opaque from the transparent state) is started, and the effect pattern 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special pattern TZ fade out ( The state gradually changes from an opaque state to a transparent state, and erasing) is started. That is, the three production patterns 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, the disappearance display of the special pattern TZ gradually disappearing, and the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background ) is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the occurrence display that gradually appears. In addition, since the pending display areas (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, they cannot be visually recognized (shielded) by the customer waiting demo image. will not be.

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demonstration image is completed, the production pattern 50a and the like are hidden (invisible state), and the "variation production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "character introduction (20 seconds)" is displayed. )” → “model name (10 seconds)” → “manufacturer name (10 seconds)” → “reminder to prevent addiction (10 seconds)” → “movable character demonstration (10 seconds)”. A demonstration effect is started (see FIG. 324(h)). In other words, when there is no winning of the game ball in the customer waiting state, when the demonstration waiting period (120 seconds) elapses from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo effect for appealing the game to the player is performed. is started, and furthermore, if there is no game ball win or the like during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the customer waiting demo effect is displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

[Action and effect of the present embodiment]
According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time has passed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( After 40 seconds) have passed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and even if the variable display ends in the customer waiting state, the fourth display is displayed. It is possible to continuously output the variable BGM until the time (30 seconds) has elapsed. With such a gaming machine, for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the end of the variable display, the BGM that enhances the interest of the game is continuously output. As compared with the conventional game machine in which BGM or the like is not output during the waiting state, the appeal of continuing the game can be enhanced, and the amusement of the presentation during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effect even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( After 40 seconds) have passed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting state, even if the variable display ends, the fourth display is displayed. (30 seconds) has passed. The volume of the variable BGM can be adjusted according to the operation of . With such a gaming machine, while the player is waiting for a customer, the player can change the volume to a desired volume while listening to the BGM, etc., and then continue the game with the BGM, etc. at the desired volume. As compared with the conventional game machine in which the player cannot adjust the sound volume while listening to BGM or the like, the appeal of the continuation of the game can be enhanced, and the amusement of the performance during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 and 321 as described above, during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the first display (“model name”), which is the display regarding the title of the gaming machine, and the game It is possible to display a second display (“Attention to prevent addiction”), which is a display to call attention to the player regarding addiction to the game, and a third display (sound adjustment display OC) can be displayed in the customer waiting state. The demonstration standby period is executed until the first time (120 seconds) has passed since the end of the variable display, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed for the second time (80 seconds) after the first time has passed. seconds) has elapsed, the first display is displayed before the second display, and the third display is displayed after the third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variable display. , the second effect (second customer waiting demo effect) can be performed again after the second time has elapsed. With such a gaming machine, after the first display regarding the title of the gaming machine, etc., containing the contents of the player's favorite content, etc., the second display for calling attention is displayed. Compared to the conventional game machine in which the first display related to the title of the game machine, etc. is displayed after the prompting display, the display is made later for the player who is still paying attention to the first display displayed first. It is possible to effectively call attention by the second display, and by extension, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the performance during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the first time (120 seconds) has passed since the variable display ended. As a demonstration standby period until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed until the second time (80 seconds) passes after the first time passes Further, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as a second and subsequent customer waiting demo effect even after the second time has passed, and the third time (40 seconds) has passed after the end of the variable display. After that, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that enables the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. During execution of the variable display, the main display device 131 displays the first character (character display CP1 ) or second characters (character displays CP2 and CP3), and during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the customer waiting state, the first character is displayed at a higher rate than the second character on the main display device 131. can do. With such a gaming machine, a player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo effect can recognize the first character with a high degree of expectation and continue the game. Compared to the conventional game machine in which the display ratio of the character and the second character is substantially the same, the expectation when the first character appears in the production during the game can be enhanced, and the production during the customer waiting state. can improve the interest of

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the first time (120 seconds) has passed since the variable display ended. As a demonstration standby period until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed until the second time (80 seconds) passes after the first time passes Further, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as a second and subsequent customer waiting demo effect even after the second time has passed, and the third time (40 seconds) has passed after the end of the variable display. Afterwards, a sound control display OC is displayed that enables the user to recognize that the sound volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting demonstration effect, "prevention of addiction" is displayed to warn the player about the addiction to the game. "Attention" is displayed, and this display may comprise a first display portion NB1 and a second display portion NB2 below the first display portion NB1. In such a game machine, since the display of "Caution to prevent addiction" is composed of a plurality of sentences, for example, one row displayed as a long sentence in the horizontal direction of the main display device 131 Since the player can easily recognize the content of the display in a short period of time compared to the only mode, the attention can be effectively called by the display, and by extension, the performance during the customer waiting state can be improved. Interest can be enhanced appropriately.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 and 326 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 displays the first display after the variable display ends. Until time 1 (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling of the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, a second time (80 seconds) is displayed. The customer waiting demo effect is displayed until the second time elapses, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time elapses, and the third time after the end of the variable display. After the time (40 seconds) has elapsed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, and during the operation valid period during the variable display, the player If the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player, the first mode effect (FIG. 326(b)) is executed, and if the player operates the sword handle unit 135 during the operation valid period during the customer waiting state, , the second mode effect (display of the menu image MN1) can be executed. With such a game machine, the effective period of operation during the customer waiting state is not set, and even if a production button such as the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the customer is waiting, the production like the second mode production is performed. To prevent a decrease in interest in a game machine for a player who is waiting for a customer, and to improve the interest of a performance during the customer waiting state, as compared with a conventional game machine which does not execute can be done.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the customer waiting demo effect is displayed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effect even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( 40 seconds) has elapsed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that enables the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, and continues even if the variable display ends in the customer waiting state. The variable BGM can be output until a fourth period of time (30 seconds) elapses, and the third period of time is longer than the fourth period of time and shorter than the first period of time. can be With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed from the time when the fluctuation is stopped until the customer waiting demo effect is started. Before the start of the game, the user can set a desired sound volume while confirming the sound adjustment display OC, and then continue the game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 320, 321, 330, and 331 as described above, the main display device 131 ends the variable display in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed. After the first time (120 seconds) has passed, an effect including scrolling the mode background image according to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, the second time ( The customer waiting demo effect is displayed until 80 seconds) elapses, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effect even after the second time elapses, and the variable display is completed. After a third period of time (30 seconds) has elapsed from , a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that enables the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting state, the variable display is Even if it ends, the variable BGM can be output continuously until the fourth time (40 seconds) elapses, and the third time is shorter than the first time and the fourth time can do. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed from the time when the fluctuation is stopped until the customer waiting demo effect is started. It is possible to set the desired sound volume while confirming the sound adjustment display OC before the start of the game, and to continue the game after that, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, while the player is waiting for a customer, the player can listen to the BGM, etc. and change the volume to a desired one, and then continue the game with the BGM, etc. at the desired volume. Compared to the conventional game machine in which the sound volume cannot be adjusted while listening to the sound, the appeal of continuing the game can be enhanced, and the amusement of the performance during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 325 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time has passed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( After 40 seconds) have passed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and even if the variable display ends in the customer waiting state, the fourth display is displayed. It is possible to continuously output the variable BGM 1 until the time (30 seconds) of (30 seconds) elapses. It is possible to continuously output the variable BGM1 even after the variable display is started. With such a game machine, even if a prize is won while the BGM is being output while the customer is waiting, the game continues without interruption of the BGM. As compared with conventional game machines in which the BGM being output is interrupted or changed at the start of display, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the interruption of the BGM, etc., and even during the customer waiting state. It is possible to improve the interest of the production of.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time has passed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( 40 seconds) has elapsed and during a time other than the second time, a sound adjustment display OC can be displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136. With such a game machine, since the sound adjustment display OC that is not related to the contents of the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed during the customer waiting demonstration, the player who wants to pay close attention to the customer waiting demonstration will not be able to understand the customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration performance can be seen without worrying about the sound adjustment display OC which is not related to the customer, and the amusement of the performance during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time has passed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( After 40 seconds) have passed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that enables the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and the effect mode set before the end of the variable display is displayed. The demo wait period can be performed differently depending on the mode background image. With such a gaming machine, for example, the production mode before the fluctuation stop is a production mode with a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to set the demonstration standby period by the mode background image corresponding to the production mode as it is, so that the game Players can be urged to continue the game while maintaining the expectation that they will win a big prize if they win during the demonstration standby period. Therefore, when a prize is won during the demonstration standby period, compared to the conventional game machine which starts variable display in a specific performance mode regardless of the performance mode before the stop of variation, the appeal of continuation of the game can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance during the customer waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the main display device 131 waits for the first time after the variable display ends. Until (120 seconds) elapses, an effect including scrolling the mode background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time elapses, the second time (80 seconds) elapses. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time has passed, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demo effects even after the second time has passed, and the third time after the end of the variable display ( 40 seconds) has elapsed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and during the customer waiting demonstration production, the character introduction is displayed. It is possible to display a plurality of characters, and when the player operates the sword hilt unit 135 while displaying a plurality of characters, the character can be selected and selected from among the plurality of characters as the recommended character in accordance with the player's actions. Can be set. With such a gaming machine, for example, after confirming the character by displaying "character introduction" during the customer waiting demonstration, customization according to the player's favorite character or the like can be performed. Compared to conventional game machines in which customization is not possible while confirming the content of customer waiting demo effects, the entertainment of the effects during the customer waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 and FIGS. 327 to 329 as described above, the main display device 131 ends the variable display in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed. After the first time (120 seconds) has passed, an effect including scrolling the mode background image according to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, the second time ( The customer waiting demo effect is displayed until 80 seconds) elapses, and the customer waiting demo effect can be displayed as the customer waiting demo effect for the second and subsequent times even after the second time elapses, and the demo standby in the normal game state. The period B1 and the demonstration standby period B1 in the time-saving game state are displayed in different modes, and when the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demonstration standby period B1 in the normal game state, the first setting is made. (Recommended character selection) can be performed, and when the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo standby period of the time-saving game state, the second setting (MUSIC selection) can be performed. is. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to customize according to the preferences of the player according to the gaming state of the gaming machine. It is possible to improve the interest of the production of.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments are described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of rendering in another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 332, in this embodiment, the scroll pattern SZ is displayed at a position that does not hinder the visibility of the effect pattern 50a of the main display device 131 during the variable effect. The scroll pattern SZ is composed of three patterns. In each pattern, ``■'', ``□'', ``●'', ``○'', and ``◎'' are variably displayed (scrolled) and then stopped. be done. In addition, in FIG. 332, the case of the production mode A is explained, but since the other production modes B to F are the same, the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 332(a), first, after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the scroll symbol SZ is started at the timing of the start of the variable display of the three effect symbols 50a. As shown in FIG. 332(b), and before the special symbols are stopped and displayed while at least one of the three performance symbols 50a is being variably displayed, the scroll symbol SZ is stopped and displayed. At this time, the order in which the three symbols of the scroll symbol SZ are stopped and displayed may be such that they are stopped in order from the left side, or may be stopped in order from the right side. In other words, when the game ball wins the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the variable display of the scroll pattern SZ is performed. Incidentally, in the stop display of the scroll pattern SZ, the sub-RAM 320c of the effect control board 320 stores the number of times that three patterns are stop-displayed in the same combination of patterns.

As shown in FIG. 332(c), for example, when the "pachi log" tag is selected and determined by operating the effect operation stick 136 while the menu image MN1a is being displayed in the customer waiting state, the menu image MN3 is displayed. You may do so. The menu image MN3 displays a list of the number of times the three symbols in the scroll symbols SZ for the past three days have been stop-displayed in the same combination and the types of the stop-displayed symbols. In such an embodiment, the player can confirm information such as the number of times the three same symbols in the scroll symbol SZ have been stopped and displayed during the customer waiting state, and furthermore, based on this information, Since it is possible to guess the setting value of the game machine 100, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-described embodiment, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed during the customer waiting state. Small may be displayed on the main display device 131 and disappear when the effect operation stick 136 is not operated for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds). In such an embodiment, the sound adjustment display small during the variable effect is smaller than the sound adjustment display OC in the customer waiting state and has a shorter display period, which hinders the visual recognition of the variable effect on the main display device 131. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that the mode of the sound adjustment display during the variable effect may be various modes that do not hinder the display of the variable effect on the main display device 131, for example, the display on the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. may be made. Even in such a mode, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Also, a case where the sound volume of the output sound such as BGM is adjusted by operating the performance operation stick 136 when shifting to the customer waiting state from before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols will be described. Specifically, during the fluctuation of the special symbols, it is possible to adjust the sound volume according to the operation of the effect operation stick 136 in a state where the sound adjustment display small is displayed, and the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped and the customer waiting state is entered. At the timing, the sound adjustment display small disappears and the volume adjustment becomes impossible, and after the transition to the customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed and the volume adjustment becomes possible by operating the production operation stick 136. . With such an embodiment, the player can adjust the sound volume at his/her desired timing even when the game machine is in any state, such as during special symbol changes or in a customer waiting state.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the "model name" during the customer waiting demonstration was displayed earlier than the display of the "reminder to prevent addiction" and was displayed for a short period of time. It may be displayed earlier than the display of "Alert" and may be displayed for a long time. In such an embodiment, the display time of the "model name" is longer than the display of the "reminder to prevent addiction", so that the player can be more impressed with the contents of the gaming machine. Since the display of ``calling attention to prevent addiction'' is displayed after the display of ``model name'', the attention calling by the display of ``calling attention to prevention of addiction'' can be sufficiently impressed on the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the display of the "manufacturer's name" and the display of "calling attention to prevent addiction" were separately displayed in the customer waiting demonstration effect. "Warning" may be displayed at the same time, and furthermore, the display "Warning for addiction prevention" may be displayed in the middle of the display of "Manufacturer name". Specifically, it is possible to display "manufacturer name & addiction prevention alert (10 seconds)", or display "manufacturer name" and 3 seconds after the start of addiction prevention alert. In such an embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously display the "maker's name" and the "reminder to prevent addiction", which are the contents to be impressed on the player. By shortening the display time of the customer waiting demonstration effect, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the display of the customer waiting demonstration effect for a long time. In addition, since the "reminder to prevent addiction" is displayed from the middle of the display of the "manufacturer name", compared to conventional game machines that simply display in order, the customer waiting demonstration effect is rich in variety and can impress.

In the above-described embodiment, during the display time of the "call for attention to prevent addiction" of the customer waiting demonstration effect, only the attention call display NH is displayed. An image with content such as announcing a warning or the like may be displayed. For example, as an image with content that notifies caution other than the caution display NH, a prevention image CH (FIG. 317(a-1)) that notifies prevention of forgetting to remove a game card inserted into the game device is used. See.), images warning about illegal acts on gaming machines, etc., and images warning about smoking in designated areas. At least one of these images may be displayed during the display time of the "call for attention to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demonstration effect, or each image may be displayed in order. good. That is, during the display time of the "call for attention to prevent addiction" in the customer waiting demonstration effect, the image for notifying other cautions may be displayed while the attention call display NH is always displayed. . In such a mode, by causing a change in the mode during the display time of the "call for attention to prevent addiction" of the customer waiting demonstration effect, compared to the mode where only the attention call display NH is displayed, It is possible to make the attention-calling display NH, which has the highest degree of importance, more likely to remain in the player's impression.

In the above-described embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed after a predetermined period of time (10 seconds) has elapsed after the variable BGM that has been output continuously after the variable stop is stopped. However, the sound adjustment display OC may be displayed at the same time when the variable BGM is stopped. In such an embodiment, by displaying the sound adjustment display OC at the same time when the variable BGM is stopped, rather than displaying only the sound adjustment display OC, it is more effective that the player can adjust the volume. can be recognizable.

327 to 329 described above, when the possible number of games "M3" is not "0", that is, when the variable effect in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the customer wait state is entered Although an example has been described, the timing of entering the customer waiting state may be various other than this. Here, for example, a case where a customer waiting state is entered at the time of transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3 will be described. In this way, in the case of the customer waiting state when shifting from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 in the game in which the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0" is stopped. When this is done, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the production modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to (c)) to the production mode F (see FIG. 315 ( f)), and becomes a customer waiting state (see FIGS. 328(d) to (f) and FIG. 329) in the display mode of the time saving game state 3. At this time, the right-handed lamp is turned on, and the main display device 131 starts displaying the right-handed shot image MG, and displays the remaining number image JK such as "700 shots remaining". Then, when the second starting device 115 is won in the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state 3, an effect corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed, and the main display device 131 , the right hitting image MG is continuously displayed (the right hitting lamp is also continuously lit). However, when it is in the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state 3, although the above-mentioned time-saving rush effect is not executed, the time-saving rush effect is executed by winning the first second starting device 115 in the time-saving game state 3. It's in a good shape. It should be noted that the time-saving rush performance is not executed when the customer is waiting in the time-saving game state 3, but the time-saving rush performance may be executed. Further, for example, on the main display device 131, the cumulative number image RK displayed in the normal game state before the customer waiting state is changed to "800 times" even if the customer waiting state is reached in the time-saving game state 3. It may be displayed and hidden at the same time as the start of the first game in the time saving game state 3, and the remaining number image JK such as "remaining 700 times" may be displayed.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state when shifting from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, the display mode on the main display device 131 is changed from any of the production modes A to C to the production mode F. may be when the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-saving game state 3 is started, in addition to the timing as described above. In such a mode, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the normal game state (any of the production modes A to C), and the right-handed lamp as described above is lit (although the right-handed lamp is lit). The beat image MG and the remaining count image JK are not displayed, and the customer waiting state (see FIGS. 323(d) to (f) and FIG. 324) is entered. Then, when the second starting device 115 wins in such a customer waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the production modes A to C to the production mode F (FIG. 315 (f)). The display of the right shot image MG is started, or the remaining number image JK such as "700 remaining times" is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the first game in the time saving game state 3 is executed. Further, for example, in the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state as described above, the accumulated number image RK such as "800 times" remains displayed, and is hidden at the same time as the start of the first game in the time saving game state 3. , and “700 times remaining” may be displayed.

Next, for example, a case where the customer waiting state occurs when shifting from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 4 will be described. In this way, in the case of the customer waiting state at the time of shifting from the normal game state to the time saving game state 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 in the game won in the time saving 4 in the jackpot determination processing is stopped. In addition, the display mode on the main display device 131 is the production mode A to C as described above (see FIG. 315 (a) to (c)). It changes to G and becomes a customer waiting state in the display mode of the time saving game state 4.例文帳に追加The change in the mode on the main display device 131 and the like in such a mode is when the customer waiting state occurs at the time of transition from the normal game state to the time-saving game state 3, and the cumulative number of times "n" is "0 " is the same as the case where the mode changes when the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in the game. Also, for example, in the case of a customer waiting state when shifting from the normal game state to the time saving game state 4, when the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time saving game state 3 starts, The display mode on the main display device 131 is from one of the above-described production modes A to C (see FIGS. 315 (a) to (c)) to the production mode G corresponding to the time-saving gaming state 4 It may change. The change in the mode in the main display device 131 etc. in such a mode is when the customer waiting state is entered at the time of transition from the above-mentioned normal game state to the time saving game state 3, and the first time in the time saving game state 3 It is the same as the case where the mode changes when the second special symbol display 122 starts the variable display.

Next, for example, a case where a customer waiting state occurs at the time of transition from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state will be described. In this way, in the case of the customer waiting state at the time of transition from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the game in which the number of possible games is "0" is stopped. In addition, the display mode on the main display device 131 is any of the production mode F (FIG. 315(f)) to the production modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to (c)). , and becomes a customer waiting state (see FIGS. 323(d) to (f) and FIG. 324) in the display mode of the normal game state. At this time, the right-handed lamp is turned off, the right-handed shot image MG and the remaining count image JK are not displayed on the main display device 131, and the left-handed start image is displayed for a predetermined period. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the left-handed start image is hidden, the transition completion notification image is displayed, and the player waits for a customer in the display mode of the normal game state. Further, for example, on the main display device 131, the remaining number of times image JK displayed in the time-saving game state 3 before entering the customer waiting state becomes the customer waiting state in the normal game state, such as "remaining 0 times". may be displayed, and may be hidden at the same time as the start of the first game in the normal game state, and a shift notification image such as "time saving 3 completed" may be displayed.

In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state at the time of transition from the time-saving game state 3 to the normal game state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from the production mode F to one of the production modes A to C. In addition to the timing as described above, it may be when the first variable display of the first special symbol display 120 in the normal game state starts. In such a mode, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains the time-saving game state 3 (production mode F), the left-handed start image is displayed for a predetermined period, and the right-handed lamp is turned off. The right shot image MG and the remaining count image JK as described above are not displayed, and the player waits for customers. Then, when the first starting device 112 wins in such a customer waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from the production mode F to one of the production modes A to C, and a shift notification image is displayed. is started, and an effect corresponding to the first game in the time saving game state 3 is executed. Further, for example, in the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state as described above, the cumulative number image RK such as "800 times" remains displayed, and is hidden at the start of the first game in the normal game state. A transition completion notification image such as "time saving 3 completed" may be displayed.

◇ A gaming machine having a first configuration for solving the above problems executes a variable display of identification information (special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and predetermined sound (BGM). ) for controlling the sound output means (audio output device 331), and the volume control means (effect operation stick 136 ), wherein, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the display control means keeps the first customer waiting until a first time (demonstration standby period) elapses after the variable display ends. 323(d)-(f), FIG. 328(d)-(f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed. (Second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the third time has passed since the end of the variable display, it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means. possible sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the predetermined sound until the fourth time has elapsed even after the variable display ends. The gist of this is that sound can be output (FIGS. 323(d) and 328(d)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine of the second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the identification information (special symbols) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and predetermined sound (BGM). ) for controlling the sound output means (audio output device 331), and the volume control means (effect operation stick 136 ), wherein, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the display control means keeps the first customer waiting until a first time (demonstration standby period) elapses after the variable display ends. 323(d)-(f), FIG. 328(d)-(f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed. (Second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the third time has passed since the end of the variable display, it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means. possible sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the predetermined sound until the fourth time has elapsed even after the variable display ends. A sound can be output (Fig. 323(d), Fig. 328(d)), and at the fourth time, in a state in which the player can confirm the predetermined sound, the player operates the sound volume control means. The gist is to make the volume of a predetermined sound adjustable (FIGS. 324(i) and 329(i)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine with a third configuration for solving the above problem, the variable display of identification information (special symbols) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the 323(d)-(f), FIGS. 328(d)-(f)) and the second effect (customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321). A first display (model name display KH) and a second display (attention calling display NH) can be displayed during execution of the effect, and a third display ( A sound adjustment image OC) can be displayed, the first effect is executed until the first time (demonstration standby period) elapses after the end of the variable display, and the second effect is performed during the first time. After the elapse of the second time (customer waiting demonstration period), the first display is displayed before the second display, and the third display is performed after the end of the variable display. The second effect can be executed again after the second time has passed, the first display is a display related to the title of the gaming machine, and the second display is , The gist of the display is that it is a display that calls the player's attention to his addiction to the game. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the identification information (special symbols) is variably displayed based on the fulfillment of the starting condition, and the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound generated by the operation of the player. A volume adjustment means (effect operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output from the output means (audio output device 331), and the display control means, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, display the first customer waiting effect (Figs. 323(d)-(f), Figs. 328(d)-(f)) until the first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the end of the variable display; A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is displayed until the second time (customer waiting demo period) elapses after the first time elapses. Furthermore, the second customer waiting effect can be displayed even after the second time has passed (second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the third time has passed after the variable display ends , a sound controllable display (sound control image OC) enabling recognition that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means is displayed, and during execution of the variable display, a first character (character Display CP1) or second characters (character displays CP2, CP3) can be displayed, and during execution of the second customer waiting effect in the customer waiting state, the first character is displayed at a higher rate than the second character on the display means. The gist is to display. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the identification information (special symbols) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound generated by the operation of the player. A volume adjustment means (effect operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output from the output means (audio output device 331), and the display control means, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, until the first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the end of the variable display, the first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to (f), FIGS. 328(d) to (f)) is executed, After the first time has passed, the second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until the second time (customer waiting demo period) passes. Furthermore, the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed (second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the third time has passed after the end of the variable display, , a sound controllable display (sound control image OC) enabling recognition that the sound volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the sound volume control means is executed, and in the second customer waiting effect, attention is given to the player regarding immersion in the game. The attention-calling display (attention-calling display NH) prompting the etc.). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the identification information (special symbols) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, , in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a volume control means (effect operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331); motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) capable of detecting the motion of the player; an effective period setting means (effect control board 320) capable of setting an effective period during which the movement of the player can be detected by the movement detecting means during the variable display and during the customer waiting state; 323(d) to (f ), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, a second time different from the first customer waiting production is performed until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes. A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321) is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed (second customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321). 321), and a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, and if the movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means during the valid period during the variable display, the first mode effect (Fig. 326) is executed, In the effective period, when the action of the player is detected by the action detection means, a second mode effect (FIGS. 324(j-1), (j-2), FIG. 329) different from the first mode effect (j-1), (j-2)) are executed. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a game machine with the configuration 7-1 for solving the above problem, the identification information (special symbol) is displayed variably based on the establishment of the start condition, and the identification information is displayed in a predetermined special mode. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound. Sound control means (production control board 320) for controlling sound output means (audio output device 331) for outputting (BGM), and volume control means (production operation and a stick 136), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, displays the first After the first period of time has passed, the second period of time (customer waiting demonstration period) has passed. A second customer waiting effect different from the first customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) is executed until the second customer waiting effect is performed, and the second customer waiting effect is performed even after the second time has passed. It is executable (second customer waiting demonstration effect: Fig. 321), and the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means after the third time has passed since the end of the variable display. The sound control means executes a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) capable of recognizing the A predetermined sound can be output (Fig. 323(d), Fig. 328(d)), and the third time is longer than the fourth time and shorter than the first time. (Figs. 322 and 327). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a game machine with the configuration 7-2 for solving the above problem, the identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, and the identification information is displayed in a predetermined special mode. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when stopped, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound. Sound control means (production control board 320) for controlling sound output means (audio output device 331) for outputting (BGM), and volume control means (production operation and a stick 136), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, displays the first After the first period of time has passed, the second period of time (customer waiting demonstration period) has passed. A second customer waiting effect different from the first customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) is executed until the second customer waiting effect is performed, and the second customer waiting effect is performed even after the second time has passed. It is executable (second customer waiting demonstration effect: Fig. 321), and the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means after the third time has passed since the end of the variable display. The sound control means executes a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) capable of recognizing the The gist is that a predetermined sound can be output (Fig. 331), and the third time is shorter than the first time and the fourth time (Fig. 330). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a game machine having an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, the identification information (special symbol) is displayed variably based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and predetermined sound (BGM). ) for controlling the sound output means (audio output device 331), and the volume control means (effect operation stick 136 ), wherein, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the display control means keeps the first customer waiting until a first time (demonstration standby period) elapses after the variable display ends. 323(d)-(f), FIG. 328(d)-(f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed. (Second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the third time has passed since the end of the variable display, it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means. possible sound adjustable display (sound adjustable image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues even after the variable display ends until a fourth time elapses. A sound is output (Fig. 323(d), Fig. 328(d)), and when the variable display of the identification information is started based on the establishment of the starting condition before the fourth time elapses, The gist is that the predetermined sound is continuously output even after the variable display is started (Fig. 325). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, the identification information (special symbols) is displayed variably based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. , in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a A volume adjustment means (effect operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331), and the display control means controls the customer waiting time when the variable display is not being performed. 323(d)-(f), FIGS. 328(d)-(f)) until the first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the end of the variable display. is executed, and a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demonstration effect) different from the first customer waiting effect is performed until a second time (customer waiting demo period) elapses after the first time elapses. : FIG. 321) is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has passed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321). After a third period of time has passed since and during a period of time other than the second period of time, a sound adjustable indication (sound adjustment The gist is to perform image OC). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having a tenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the identification information (special symbol) is displayed variably based on the fulfillment of the starting condition, and the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, , in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, a predetermined image including mode images (production modes A to G: FIG. 315) corresponding to a plurality of modes set according to the state of the game is displayed. Display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling possible display means (main display device 131), and volume capable of adjusting the volume of sound output from sound output means (audio output device 331) by player's operation and adjusting means (effect operation stick 136), wherein the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, determines that a first time (demonstration standby period) has elapsed after the variable display is completed. The first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to (f) and FIGS. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the first time has passed, and after the first time has passed, the second time (customer waiting A second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is executed until the demo period) elapses, and the second customer waiting effect is the second time. (second customer waiting demonstration effect: FIG. 321), and after the lapse of the third time from the end of the variable display, the volume is adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means. A sound adjustment possible display (sound adjustment image OC) that enables recognition of adjustment is executed, and the first customer waiting effect is performed in a different manner depending on the mode image corresponding to the mode set before the end of the variable display. (Figs. 323(d)-(f), Figs. 328(d)-(f)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a gaming machine having an eleventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player, a display control means (effect control board 320) for controlling a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound generated by the operation of the player. A volume control means (effect operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of sound output from the output means (audio output device 331), and a motion detection means (sword unit 135) capable of detecting the motion of the player. In addition, in the customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, the display control means displays the first customer waiting effect (Fig. 323(d) ~ (f), Figures 328 (d) ~ (f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) passes, different from the first customer waiting effect The second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321) is executed, and the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: Fig. 321). ), and after the lapse of the third time from the end of the variable display, a sound controllable display (sound control image OC) enabling recognition that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means is displayed. During execution of the second customer waiting effect, a plurality of characters can be displayed (FIG. 321(b)). 324 (j-1), (j-2), display of one of a plurality of modes selected according to the player's motion detected by the motion detection means (Fig. 324 (j-1), (j-2)) is the gist. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a game machine having a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a variable display of identification information (special symbols) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, the game is played. A display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image is controlled in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to players and shifting to an advantageous game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the special game is finished. display control means (effect control board 320) and motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) capable of detecting the motion of the player. , the first customer waiting effect (Figs. 323(d)-(f), Figs. 328(d)-(f)) is executed until the first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the end of the variable display. , until the second time (customer waiting demo period) elapses after the first time has elapsed, a second customer waiting effect (first customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321) different from the first customer waiting effect is performed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting effect can be executed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demo effect: FIG. 321), and the first customer waiting effect (FIG. 323) in the normal game state and the second customer waiting effect can be executed. , the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous game state (Fig. 328) is executed in a different mode, and the action of the player is detected by the motion detection means during the execution of the first customer waiting effect in the normal game state. , it is possible to perform the first setting (FIGS. 324 (j-1), (j-2)), and during the execution of the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous game state, the action of the player is detected by the action detection means. is detected, the second setting different from the first setting can be performed (Fig. 329 (j-1), (j-2)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Sixth embodiment)
(About game state)
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the same components as in the fifth embodiment may be denoted by different reference numerals, in which case the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 293 are applied.
As shown in FIG. 333, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, similarly to the conventional gaming machine, from the "normal game state" through the "jackpot game" to the "time-saving game state (first advantageous game state)" In the case of transition ((a) → (2)) and in the "time-saving game state (first advantageous game state or second advantageous game state)", when it is determined to be a big hit by the big hit determination process, the "jackpot game" is executed. ((c)), and on the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit, there is a transition to the "normal game state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when "predetermined conditions are established" in the "normal game state", the system shifts to the "time-saving game state (second advantageous game state)" without going through the jackpot game ((b) ). It should be noted that, in the case of transition from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" through the "jackpot game", the possible number of games in the "high probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state)" is, for example, "80 times". or "100 times", and the number of playable times of "low-probability time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state)" is a predetermined number of times such as "80 times" or "100 times" . On the other hand, when the "normal game state" transitions to the "low-probability short-time gaming state (third short-time gaming state or fourth short-time gaming state)" without going through the "jackpot game", the number of possible games is, for example, " 700 times." In other words, from the "normal game state" to the "jackpot game" than the number of times that can be played in the case of transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state", "predetermined condition established" without going through the "jackpot game" In the case of shifting to the "time-saving gaming state", the number of possible games in the "time-saving gaming state" is greater. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state is about 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the set value is "1"). The number of possible games such as "700 times" in the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state may be set. The first time-saving gaming state and/or the second time-saving gaming state may be referred to as the first advantageous gaming state. The third time-saving game state and/or the fourth time-saving game state may be referred to as the second advantageous game state.

Further, the possible number of games in the "fourth time-saving game state" may be set differently according to the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stop-displayed. For example, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the "time saving game state", the number of times may be greater than when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the "normal game state". On the other hand, The number of times may be reduced.

Here, "establishment of a predetermined condition" is defined as a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition in the present embodiment. The first predetermined condition is when the accumulated number of times "n", which is the number of times of variable display of the special symbols executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the accumulated number of times "n", which is the number of times the special symbols are changed and displayed in the "low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state)". When the cumulative number of times "n" to be counted and stored reaches a predetermined number of times, "low probability non-time saving game state (normal game state)" to "low probability time saving game state (third time saving game state)" It's becoming In addition, as the second predetermined condition, it is a case where it stops at a preset "time saving pattern (specific losing pattern)". game state)”. In addition, the rate at which the "time saving pattern" is determined may be any rate. For example, it may be a probability that is the same as or similar to the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being determined to be a big hit for each set value, or a probability that is easy to determine. good. Further, "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, or may include two conditions. Conditions other than conditions may be provided.

As the predetermined number of times in the first predetermined condition, an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of determining a big win for each set value. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state is about 2.5 times or more of the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the set value is "4"). The predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" so as to be 3.0 times or less. Furthermore, as the "starting point", for example, it is possible to set the point in time when the "jackpot game" ends, or the point in time when the RAM is cleared, such as when the above setting is changed. That is, in the area that counts and stores the cumulative number "n" of the main RAM 301c, at the time of transition to the "jackpot game", at the end of the "jackpot game", or at the time the RAM is cleared, the cumulative number "n" is counted. Initialization processing will be executed. In addition, as the second predetermined condition "time saving pattern", a plurality of types of patterns may be set in advance, and the number of possible games in the time saving game state 4 is set to a different number of times for each type of "time saving pattern". may be

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, thereby reducing the number of players who blindly play the game. In addition, for example, when the predetermined number of times is about "800 (times)", it is possible to give relief measures to players who have not been able to obtain big wins for a long time, which leads to prevention of leaving the game. Furthermore, when moving to the "time-saving gaming state" due to the "satisfaction of a predetermined condition", the "low-probability Since the number of possible games in the time-saving game state (3rd time-saving game state or 4th time-saving game state) increases, it encourages players to actively try to play the ``low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)''. It is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

(Mode of the first advantageous gaming state)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the first advantageous game state advantageous to the player in the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times or 100 times) after the execution of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 334, the first advantageous gaming state is executed out of a predetermined number of types (for example, a plurality of types such as three types) (bonus mode). In each mode of the first advantageous game state, for example, the background image, the effect pattern 70a, the type, the number of types, the effect mode of the effect such as the notice or the suggestion executed in the variable display are all or partially different. . The mode of the first advantageous game state can be selected by the operation of the player, or can be internally set based on the performance of the jackpot game or other predetermined conditions regardless of the player's selection. and so on.

(Transition to first advantageous gaming state)
When shifting (plunging) into the first advantageous gaming state, a bonus entering image BTG is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 335(a)). At this time, the background image is a background at the time of entry that is different from the bonus background described later. Note that the bonus entry image BTG may be changed for each mode. In addition, on the first image display device 70, a right-handed shot image MUG for notifying right-handed shots and a remaining number image ZKG for notifying the number of fluctuations in which the first advantageous game state can be executed are displayed (FIG. 335 ( b)). Then, after the bonus background corresponding to the mode of the background image is displayed, and if necessary, the production pattern 70a (confirmed pattern) that triggered the jackpot game of the transition to the first advantageous game state is displayed (Fig. 335 (c )), a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 2 variable display) is executed based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 47 . When the game ball wins to the second winning hole 47, the second reserved icon display for displaying the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) which is the number of the current second reserved memory. After the second pending icon is displayed in the area 70D, the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed. Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 335(d-1)). Also, when the game ball wins to the second winning hole 47, the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). be. Furthermore, when the variable display is started, the number of the remaining number image ZKG is changed so as to decrease.

When the game ball wins into the first winning hole 45 by hitting the left by mistakenly hitting to the right, the number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) which is the number of the current first reserved memory is displayed. The first suspended icon is not displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B for displaying the 1 suspended icon (see FIG. 335(d-2)). In addition, there is no effect such that the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed, and the icon is displayed. Instead, a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 1 variable display) is started based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. is executed (see FIG. 335 (d-2)). On the other hand, when the game ball wins to the first winning hole 45, the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). be done. Furthermore, when the variable display is started, the display is changed so that the number of the remaining number image ZKG is decreased.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can display the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 1 start condition based on the winning to the first winning hole 45 by the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70 . Also, the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 2 starting condition based on the winning to the second winning hole 47 can be displayed by the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70 . Then, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, the holding icon can be displayed, but when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, the display of the holding icon (the icon) can be restricted. It has become. In this way, in the case of the special 1 variable display, by limiting the display of the pending icon, it is possible to make the player aware that an operation error or an abnormality has occurred, such as the wrong winning slot being aimed at. can. In addition, when the special 1 start condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, even if the reserved icon (the icon) is displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted according to the variable display, or does not disappear. It may be a mode different from the case where the special 2 start condition is established in the advantageous game state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special 2 starting condition is established in the first advantageous gaming state, the holding icon is displayed, and when the variable display based on the special 2 starting condition is displayed, the number of the remaining number image ZKG is reduced. A count effect can be executed. On the other hand, if the special 1 start condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, the hold icon is not displayed, but when the variable display is performed based on the special 1 start condition, a count effect can be executed such that the number of the remaining number image ZKG is reduced. is. By doing so, it is possible to notify the progress of the game while making the player aware of the occurrence of an operation error or an abnormality such as the wrong winning hole being aimed at.

(Production example 1 in the first advantageous game state)
As shown in FIGS. 336 and 337, in the variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, a first advantageous predetermined effect suggesting a shift to a situation advantageous to the player, such as a big win or reach, is displayed at the start of variation. It can be executed at a predetermined timing such as middle, just before the fluctuation is stopped, or at the time when the fluctuation is stopped. As such a first predetermined advantageous effect, for example, a cut-in effect (FIGS. 336(b), 337(b)) by a cut-in effect image CIG that is executed during fluctuation, a hold icon that changes the hold icon Effect (Fig. 336(c), Fig. 337(d)), movable member effect in which the movable member 73 operates (Fig. 337(d)), technique effect image HWG corresponding to the motif of the gaming machine 1 (Fig. 337(c) ), etc., a symbol enlargement effect (FIG. 337(e)) in which the effect symbol 70a is enlarged and displayed so as to return to its original size, and other effects can be executed singly or in combination. More specifically, the first advantageous predetermined effect includes a weak first advantageous predetermined effect (for example, a hold icon change effect and a cut-in effect), a weak first advantageous predetermined effect and the player's expectation (jackpot). There is a strong first advantageous predetermined performance with a different degree of reliability (for example, a high degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot). For example, if it is a holding icon change effect, a rainbow color change or a character change is a stronger effect than a blue change, and if it is a movable member effect, it is closer to the front of the liquid crystal than to move small around the liquid crystal. A larger movement that overlaps will result in a stronger effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the first advantageous gaming state can be executed in the variation display of a specific number of times (for example, 80 times), the first half 40 times in the first half) is executed. A second period (for example, a period of 40 times in the latter half of the variable display), which is a period different from the first period, is greater than a period (for example, a period of 40 times in the first half of the variable display). The first predetermined advantageous effect is likely to be executed at the timing (see FIG. 338). In addition, the first period may be in the middle or the latter half of the first advantageous gaming state, the second period may be earlier than the first period, or there may be periods other than the first period and the second period. may In this way, during the second period of the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous predetermined effect is easily executed, so that the player's expectation can be strengthened and weakened every period, and the player's interest can be attracted, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In the first advantageous gaming state, if the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in a specified number of fluctuation displays (for example, 80 times), from the first period (for example, the first half of the 40 times of the variable display), A second period (for example, a period of 40 times in the latter half of the variable display), which is a period different from the first period, should preferably facilitate execution of the strong first advantageous predetermined effect at a predetermined timing in the variable display. For example, in the latter half of the first advantageous game state, the strong first advantageous predetermined effect is easily executed, so that the expectation of the player can be aroused and the player's interest can be aroused, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be done.

In the first advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, whereas in the second advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. may be the same. Further, in the first advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect is higher in the second period than in the first period, whereas in the second advantageous game state, the predetermined effect is executed in the second period than in the first period. The magnitude relationship of the ratio may be different, such as lowering the ratio. At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executed in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state.

In the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of pending memories is the same, the length of the losing variable display time may be different between the variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period. That is, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of reserved memories is the same, the fluctuation display in the second period is longer (or shorter) than the fluctuation display in the first period. good. For example, in the first half period of the first advantageous game state, it is difficult to execute the strong first advantageous predetermined effect, which is longer than the weak first advantageous predetermined effect, so that the variable display in the first advantageous game state is quickly digested. It is possible to increase the number of chances per hour for the player. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes it easy to select an effect or a variation pattern with a relatively short time in the period before the first advantageous gaming state, thereby speeding up the digestion of the variation display, and after the first advantageous gaming state. It can be said that by permitting the execution of effects and variation patterns that take a relatively long time in the side period, the interest of the player is attracted for a long time.

In the first advantageous gaming state, even if the number of reserved memories is the same in the first period and the second period, the losing fluctuation display time is likely to change, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the first period and the second period. In the case of the same number of reserved memories, the loss variation display time may be likely to be the same. In addition, in the case of the same reserved memory number in the first advantageous gaming state, the second period tends to be longer (shorter) in the loss fluctuation time than the first period, whereas the same reserved memory in the second advantageous gaming state In the case of numbers, the magnitude relationship of time may be different, for example, the second period tends to be shorter (longer) than the first period. At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executed in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the second advantageous gaming state, when the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in the second advantageous gaming state, the variable display is performed a specific number of times (for example, 80 times), the first period (eg, the first half of the variable display a period of 40 times) and a second period (for example, a period of 40 times in the latter half of the variable display), which is a period different from the first period. In particular, in the second advantageous gaming state, the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, if the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in 80 variable displays, the first half 40 times) is executed. A second period (for example, a period of 40 times in the latter half of variable display), which is a period different from the first period, is more variable than a first period (for example, a period of 40 times in the first half of variable display). The number of types of the first advantageous predetermined effect that can be executed at predetermined timing in the display may be increased.

For example, in the first half period of the first advantageous gaming state, the number of types of the first advantageous predetermined effects is relatively small, so that the variable display in the first advantageous gaming state can be completed quickly, and the player can spend more time. can give you more chances. To increase the interest in a game by raising the expectation of a player and attracting the player's interest by having a relatively large number of types of the first predetermined advantageous performance in the latter half of the first advantageous game state.例文帳に追加can be done.

In the first advantageous gaming state, in the case of the variable display started with the same holding number, the variable display started in the second period (for example, the second half) is better than the variable display started in the first period (for example, the first half) However, the losing pattern variation time may be shortened. In addition, the first advantageous gaming state may have fewer types of effects (announcement, prefetching, etc. in the variation) than the normal gaming state. Furthermore, in the first advantageous gaming state, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (announcement, look-ahead, etc. in the variation) may be higher in the special 2 variation display than in the special 1 variation display. In addition, in the special 1 variable display, a predetermined effect (for example, advance notice, pre-reading, etc.) may not be executed. In the first half of the first advantageous gaming state, when the reserved memory number is other than 4, the left→middle→right stop mode is likely to be executed, whereas in the second half, the left→right→middle stop mode is executed. easy to be

In the first advantageous gaming state, the number of types of predetermined effects is different between the first period and the second period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of types of predetermined effects is different between the first period and the second period. may be the same. Also, in the first advantageous gaming state, the number of types of predetermined effects is larger (smaller) in the second period than in the first period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the second period is larger than the first period. The number of types may be different, such as the number of types of effects being small (many). At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executed in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state.

The specific number of times is not limited to 40 times, and may be any other number of times. The first period is not limited to the first half, and may be the second half of the first advantageous gaming state, the middle, or any other period. .

(Production example 2 in the first advantageous game state)
As shown in FIG. 338, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number of times reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state, Execution of the first advantageous predetermined effect can be restricted. The number of specific fluctuations is set to "4", which is the same as the number of reserved storages that can be reserved, for example. For example, if the number of times the variable display can be executed in the first advantageous gaming state is 80 times, the first advantageous predetermined effect can be executed in the first to 75th variable display, but the 76th time to the 80th variable display, the execution of the first predetermined advantageous effect is restricted. It should be noted that, in the first advantageous game state, an effect (for example, ready-to-win) with a specific condition or more is executed before reaching 80 rotations from the specific fluctuation number (76 spins), and if the effect succeeds.

By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the contradiction that the variable display after the number of executable times of the first advantageous game state has passed, suggesting that a situation advantageous to the player will occur, and the player will not be mistaken. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of anticipation.

In the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number of times reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state, the fluctuation display after the executable number is a predetermined suggesting the execution of the big win. It is possible to limit the execution of the effect, and in the second advantageous game state, after the executable number of times from the variable display before the predetermined number of fluctuations to reach the executable number of variable displays set in the second advantageous game state. It is also possible to limit the execution of a predetermined performance suggesting execution of a big win by the variable display of . The specified number of fluctuations in the first advantageous gaming state and the predetermined number of fluctuations in the second advantageous gaming state may be the same or different.

In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state, the fluctuation display after the executable number suggests the execution of the big win. While it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined effect to be performed, in the second advantageous game state, after the variable display of the predetermined number of times before reaching the executable number of times of the variable display set in the second advantageous game state Even if there is, the execution of the predetermined effect may be executable. In a second advantageous game state, a predetermined effect suggesting execution of a big win in the variable display after the executable number of times from the variable display of the predetermined number of variations before reaching the executable number of times of the variable display set in the second advantageous game state. While it is possible to limit the execution of, in the first advantageous gaming state, even after the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number of times reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state , execution of a predetermined effect may be executed.

(Production example 3 in the first advantageous game state)
As shown in FIG. 338, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable display set in the first advantageous gaming state, the last round effect is executable. For example, when the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state is 80 times, the final effect is executed at the 80th variable display. Specifically, at the start of the final variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the final game image "LAST" is displayed (Fig. 339(c)), and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling (Fig. 339 ( d)). In the middle of the variable display, a cut-in effect in which the cut-in image CIG is displayed is executed (FIG. 339(e)), and after the left side effect symbol 70a stops, the right side effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. A ready-to-win performance is executed by the pattern-flashing effect ZAEF that emphasizes the pattern 70a (Fig. 339(f)). When ready-to-win is established, a predetermined ready-to-win performance is executed, and when ready-to-win is not established, the middle performance symbol 70a is stopped, and the variable display is performed for the number of executable times set in the first advantageous game state. has been executed. In this way, the player is kept from getting bored until the end by executing the ready-to-win excitement effect that arouses the expectation of the ready-to-win in the final variable display.

In the first advantageous game state, in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of times of the variable display set in the first advantageous game state, it is possible to display the image for the final time, whereas in the second advantageous game state. In the game state, in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the second advantageous game state, the display of the final image may be executed or may not be executed. In the first advantageous game state, in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous game state, the ready-to-win effect can be executed, whereas in the second advantageous game state. , in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the second advantageous gaming state, the ready-to-win effect may be executed or may not be executed (the execution ratio is the first (Including being higher or lower than the advantageous playing state.). At this time, in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the display mode of the production pattern 70a may be the same or different, or the type of the ready-to-win fan effect may be the same or different.

(Production example 4 in the first advantageous game state)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous game state, when the variable display for the number of executable times set in the first advantageous game state is executed, the variable display remains undigested until the final round of the variable display. Based on the hold (start condition), it is possible to (additionally) execute the variable display with the number of fluctuations for the number of remaining hold memories (for example, up to 4) (hereinafter referred to as the remaining hold lottery). Specifically, when the variable display of the final round fails (Fig. 340(g)), a result display screen displaying the number of game balls acquired so far in the first advantageous game state is displayed (Fig. 340(g)). 341(a)). At this time, when there is a pending memory, the first display (result background A: (Fig. 341 (b-2-1))) and the second display (result background B: (Fig. 341 (b-2-2))) However, when there is no pending memory, only the first display (result background A: (Fig. 341(b-2-1)))) can be executed. By doing so, even when there is no pending memory (remaining pending lottery is not executed), the common first display is displayed, and the expectation of the player can be retained. In addition, a result screen is displayed in the final round of the losing variation in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, when the losing variation is stopped), and this result screen is continuously displayed even during the remaining pending lottery. When the final variable display in the first advantageous gaming state is a hit, the result screen is not displayed in the final variable display.

While the remaining pending lottery can be executed in the first advantageous gaming state, in the second advantageous gaming state, when the variable display is executed for the number of executable times set in the second advantageous gaming state, the final Based on the remaining hold (start condition) that could not be digested by the time of the change display, even if the change display is executed with the number of changes for the number of remaining hold memories (for example, up to 4), do not execute it. good too. In addition, while the result display screen can be displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, in the second advantageous gaming state, when the variable display is executed for the number of executable times set in the second advantageous gaming state , the result display screen may or may not be displayed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, depending on the type of the result display screen, a win in the remaining pending lottery is suggested. Specifically, the second display (result background B: (Fig. 341 (b-2-2))) is better than the first display (result background A: (Fig. 341 (b-2-1))). , the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot in the remaining pending lottery is set high (the second display is more likely to win). To explain an example of the process of winning, for example, the result display screen of the second display is displayed, and the small symbols LZ are varied (FIGS. 342(a) and (b)). Then, the operation button 17 vibrates, and a winning suggestion image is displayed (FIG. 342(c)). Win confirmation effects such as the display of the winning confirmation image, the lighting effect of the operation button 17, and the operation effect of the movable member 73 are executed (FIG. 342(d)). It should be noted that, when winning, the ready-to-win effect of the small pattern LZ and the ready-to-win effect are not executed. The type of win is displayed (FIG. 342(e)), and at this time, the result display screen of the third display different from the first display or the second display is displayed. Then, on the display screen that displays the game ball or the like to be obtained, the determined small symbol LZ is displayed (Fig. 342(f)). Here, in the remaining reservation lottery, the small pattern LZ is variably displayed instead of the production pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ at a position different from the production pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ. In the embodiment, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the three small symbols LZ on the left and right start to fluctuate at the same time and stop fluctuating at the same time. Incidentally, the special symbol TZ may be used as the small symbol LZ in the remaining reserved lottery.

Even when the result display screen of the first display is displayed, the jackpot may be won. In this case, the jackpot may be won through the performance process as described above, or the jackpot may be achieved without the performance process as described above. In the case of the specific state after the predetermined number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state are executed in the first advantageous gaming state, the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed. It can be said that it is easier to perform a specific effect (for example, display of a winning suggestion image, vibration effect of the operation button 17, action effect of the movable accessory 73, etc.) in the remaining reservation lottery.

In the normal game state, the effect pattern 70a consisting of numbers and characters is used as a variation mode when the effect display of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and the effect pattern 70a is changed in a predetermined order or simultaneously according to conditions such as the number of reserved memories and advance notice. It is executed in a first variation mode in which it starts and stops varying in a predetermined order or at the same time according to conditions such as the number of reserved memories, reach, and advance notice. In the first advantageous game state other than the remaining pending lottery, as a variation mode when performing the effect display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a mainly composed of numbers is used, depending on the conditions such as the number of pending memories and the notice. It is executed in a second variation mode in which fluctuation is started in a predetermined order or at the same time, and fluctuation is stopped in a predetermined order or at the same time according to conditions such as the number of reserved memories, reach, and notice. On the other hand, in the first advantageous gaming state, after the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 rotations) (result display screen), and in a state where the predetermined number of times has been reached, the variable display based on the reserved memory. is performed (remaining pending lottery), the variation display is performed in the third variation mode by variation of only the small symbol LZ, which is not performed in the first variation mode and the second variation mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of winning in the remaining reservation lottery, and to improve the amusement of the game. Note that the variation mode includes the configuration and display mode of the pattern, the order of starting and stopping the variation of the pattern, the variation mode such as scrolling, and the display position, arrangement, size, and the like.

In the normal game state, when performing a variable display with the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, it is possible to execute the first production (normal game state ready-to-win production) to incite the possibility that the production pattern 70a or the special pattern TZ will become a reach. is. In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state other than the remaining pending lottery, when the variable display is performed with the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the first production (first It is possible to execute reach fanning production of advantageous game state). On the other hand, in the first advantageous gaming state, after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 rotations) (result display screen), and in a state where the predetermined number of times has been reached, the variable display based on the reserved memory. In the case of a specific state (remaining pending lottery) in which the is executed, the first production (the production pattern 70a or the reach fanning production of the normal game state by the special pattern TZ) and the second production (the production pattern 70a or the first advantage by the special pattern TZ A third performance different from the first performance and the second performance (for example, no reach promotion, a direct hit of the small pattern LZ, and a fluctuation start performance of the small pattern LZ are not executed without executing the ready-to-win excitement performance of the game state). etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of winning in the remaining reservation lottery, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the remaining pending lottery in the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of remaining pending is the same, the display time of the result display screen when winning is constant. In the remaining pending lottery in the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of remaining pending is the same, the display time of the result display screen when losing is constant. By doing so, it becomes difficult to recognize winning/losing depending on the display length of the result display screen, and the unexpectedness of winning in the remaining reserved lottery can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Production example 1 of the normal game state immediately before entering the second advantageous game state)
As shown in FIG. 343, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment performs a predetermined variation execution count (eg, 200 times), it is possible to execute a second advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can limit the execution of a normal predetermined effect (advance notice, foreseeing effect, etc.) from a specific variation number (296 rotations) before a predetermined condition is satisfied (reaching the ceiling 300 times) in a normal game state. It's becoming The specific fluctuation count is set to "4", which is the same as the number of holds that can be held, for example. For example, if the predetermined condition is 300 times, it is possible to execute the normal predetermined effect in the 1st to 295th variable displays of the starting point, but in the 296th to 300th variable displays, the normal predetermined effect is performed. Limited execution. In addition, in the normal game state, an effect (for example, ready-to-win) exceeding a specific condition is executed from a specific fluctuation number (296 rotations) until a predetermined condition is established (reaching the ceiling of 300 rotations), and the effect is successful.

By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the contradiction that the variable display after the number of times the normal game state can be executed (second advantageous game state) suggests an advantageous situation for the player, and the player can It is possible to prevent giving false expectations to

In the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number of times reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state, a predetermined fluctuation display after the executable number suggests a big win. It is possible to limit the execution of effects, and in the normal game state, execution of normal predetermined effects (effects such as advance notice and prediction) from a specified number of fluctuations (296 rotations) before a predetermined condition is satisfied (reaches the ceiling 300 times). It may be restricted. At this time, the type or the number of types of predetermined effects to be restricted may be different between the first advantageous game state and the normal game state. for example,
In one advantageous game state, a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal game state from the number of types of predetermined effects to be limited from the specified number of variations before the number of times of variation display that can be executed set in the first advantageous game state is reached. The predetermined effect limited from the specific variation count (296 rotations) before the establishment (reaching the ceiling 300 times) may be increased (or decreased). It should be noted that the number of specific fluctuations in the first advantageous gaming state and the number of specific fluctuations in the normal gaming state may be the same or different.

In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific fluctuation number reaching the executable number of fluctuation display set in the first advantageous gaming state, the fluctuation display after the executable number suggests the execution of the big win. While it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined effect to be performed, in the normal game state, it may be possible to execute the predetermined effect even if it is a specific fluctuation number before the predetermined condition is satisfied. In the first advantageous game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect even from the variation display before the specific variation number of times before reaching the executable number of variation display set in the first advantageous game state, while the normal In the gaming state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the predetermined effect from the number of times of specific variation before the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Production example 2 of the normal game state immediately before entering the second advantageous game state)
FIG. 344(a) shows a state in which the 296th round losing variation has stopped from a predetermined starting point (jackpot game, memory clear, etc.) in the normal game state. A hold icon is shift-displayed, and 1 is added to a change number image GSG showing the number of times of loss change from the starting point, and 1 is subtracted from a countdown image CDG showing the number of times of loss change until entering the second advantageous game state. It is assumed that the calculation effect is performed, the 297th effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate (FIGS. 344(b), (c)), and the fluctuation stops due to a loss (FIG. 344(d)). Then, the hold icon is shifted and displayed, and 1 is added to the change number image GSG showing the number of times of loss change from the starting point, and 1 is subtracted from the countdown image CDG showing the number of times of loss change until entering the second advantageous game state. Calculation effect is performed, and the 298th change of the effect symbol 70a is started (FIGS. 344(e), (f)). In this way, in the normal game state, the first image display device 70 can display the calculated effect until the second advantageous game state is started. In this way, by performing the calculation effect of displaying the countdown to the second advantageous game state, it is possible to attract the player to continue the game. Note that the calculation effect may be performed by display means other than the first image display device 70, or may be performed by other means recognizable by the player, such as voice output.

(Production example 3 of the normal game state immediately before entering the second advantageous game state)
The calculation effect can be hidden or hidden by the operation or setting of the manager or the player. You may make it display. FIG. 345(a) shows a state in which the 296th round losing variation has stopped from a predetermined starting point (jackpot game, memory clear, etc.) in the normal game state in which the calculated effect is not displayed. Even if the holding icon is shift-displayed and the variable display is repeated, the calculation effect is not displayed, so the number of times of loss variation from the starting point and the number of times of variation up to the second advantageous game state cannot be known. However, in the embodiment, when the 297th variable display is started, the number of variable times up to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed by the notification effect of the chance notice image CHCG "two more times" (Fig. 345(a)). )). in this way. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the calculated effect is not displayed on the first image display device 70, when the number of times until the start of the second advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number, a predetermined notification different from the calculated effect , it is possible to notify that the start of the second advantageous gaming state is near. It should be noted that the number of times until the start of the second advantageous gaming state is not limited to two times, and may be one time or three times or more. You may also make a notification. Further, the notification is not limited to numbers, and may be a notification that does not have numerical information such as characters or mini-characters. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player to continue the game by suggesting that the second advantageous game state is approaching.

(Example of production at the time of entering the second advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 346, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the final variation display stops (main stop) under a predetermined condition (reaching the ceiling 300 times), before the next variation display starts, the normal game The internal state is switched from the state to the second advantageous game state. Further, when the final fluctuation display under a predetermined condition (e.g. reaching the ceiling 300 times) stops (main stop), the first right-handed image MUG1 notifies the right-handed player and the rush suggestion effect TNEF is displayed (Fig. 347(b)). In this way, when the variation display of the final round under predetermined conditions is stopped (main stop), the right-handed display can be executed, so that the player is quickly notified of the need to switch the launch route of the game ball. can contribute to the profits of the players.

Then, at the start of the variable display following the final round, the specific notification is executed by the chance entry image CTG indicating that the game has shifted to the second advantageous game state (Fig. 347(d)). That is, the specific notification is not executed until the next variable display after the final round (the first variable display after shifting to the second advantageous game state) is started. By doing so, the value of having shifted to the second advantageous gaming state is increased, and the profit from the second advantageous gaming state can be enjoyed from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 347(d), in the variation display in which the specific notification for notifying the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is executed by the chance entry image CTG, the first hitting to right notification by the first hitting to right image MUG1, 2nd hitting to right information by second hitting to right image MUG2 can be executed. The first hitting right notification and the second hitting right notification are displayed so that part (embodiment) or all of the notification period overlaps, and in the embodiment, the first hitting right notification precedes the second hitting right notification It is executed, and the first hitting-to-right notification and the second hitting-to-right notification end simultaneously. Further, in the embodiment, the second right-handed notification is executed in the same period as the specific notification by the chance entry image CTG indicating that the second advantageous game state has been entered. Thus, by being able to execute the first right-handed notification and the second right-handed notification, it is possible to more reliably inform the player that it is necessary to switch the launching route of the game ball, thereby benefiting the player. can contribute to

As shown in FIG. 346, when the second advantageous game state is entered, the first stage (the stage in the normal game state) shifts to the second stage (the stage in the second advantageous game state). Then, the specific (first) hitting to right notification in the second advantageous gaming state (the hitting to right notification by the first hitting to right image MUG1) starts in the first stage and ends before shifting to the second stage. Also, at the start of the variable display following the final round, after the specific notification by the chance entry image CTG indicating that the state has shifted to the second advantageous gaming state is executed (Fig. 347(d)), the variable display by the second stage. is performed, and at this time, the third hitting to the right display is performed by the third hitting to the right image MUG3 (FIG. 348(f)). In the second stage, the chance time display image CTHG indicating the second advantageous gaming state is displayed (Fig. 348(g)).

As shown in FIG. 347(e), it is determined in what mode the second advantageous gaming state is to be executed after the specific notification for notifying the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed by the chance entry image CTG. , is notified by the chance mode image CMF.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the normal game state, when the final fluctuation display that satisfies the condition for shifting to the second advantageous game state (for example, fluctuation of 300 times from the starting point) is stopped, the normal game state It is possible to switch from to the second advantageous game state. Then, when the final variable display is stopped, it is possible to execute the first hitting-to-right notification by displaying the first hitting-to-right image MUG1 before starting the next variable display. Here, even if the internal state is switched to the second advantageous game state when the variable display is stopped in the final round, various effects such as stopped effect symbols 70a, background images, sound output such as music, etc., remain in the normal game state. It has become. In addition, the chance entry image CTG is not displayed until the next variable display is started, and there is basically no change from the normal game state except for the execution of the first hitting to right notification. In other words, when there is no pending memory at the time of stopping the variable display for the final round, various effects in the normal game state are held while the first right hitting notification is performed. Furthermore, if there is no pending memory, a demo effect (standby effect) may be executed based on a standby transition condition such as no operation over a set time or no winning, but even if the standby transition condition is satisfied, the demo You may make it restrict|limit the execution of production|presentation. Even if the display on the image display device is not switched to the demonstration effect, the sound may be changed to that for the demonstration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a transition suggestive effect by displaying, for example, the rush suggestive effect TNEF before starting the next variable display when the final variable display is stopped. The transition suggesting effect is executed before the chance entry image CTG that clearly indicates the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. The rush suggestion effect TNEF and the chance rush image CTG are displayed superimposed on the background image of the normal game state, and when the final variation display stops, the transition suggestion effect is executed with the background image of the normal game state. be.

In the normal game state, the normal game state is switched to the second advantageous game state when the final variation display that satisfies the condition for shifting to the second advantageous game state (for example, fluctuation of 300 times from the starting point) is stopped. It is possible. On the other hand, in the first advantageous game state, when the final fluctuation display that satisfies the condition for shifting to the normal game state (for example, 80 fluctuations from the starting point) is stopped, the first advantageous game state Switching to the normal game state can be restricted. Specifically, if there is a pending memory when the final variable display stops, the remaining pending lottery can be executed in the first advantageous game state, and the pending memory is stored when the final variable display stops. If not, the internal state may be switched to the normal game state.

When starting the next variation display after the last time when the condition for shifting from the normal game state to the second advantageous game state (for example, 300 times variation from the starting point) is established, the fact that the second advantageous game state has been transferred is indicated. specific notification (for example, display of a chance time rush image) can be executed. On the other hand, when starting the next variation display of the final time when the condition for shifting from the first advantageous game state to the normal game state (for example, 80 times of variation from the starting point) is established, the transition to the normal game state is performed. It is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined notification indicating that the event has occurred. Specifically, if there is a pending memory when starting the next variation display of the final time when the condition for shifting from the first advantageous game state to the normal game state (for example, 80 times variation from the starting point) is established A remaining pending lottery is entered, and the result background is displayed as an image at this time. Even if there is no reserved memory, when starting the next variation display of the final time when the condition for shifting from the first advantageous game state to the normal game state (for example, 80 times variation from the starting point) is established, normal The predetermined notification indicating transition to the game state is not executed. In this way, when switching from a game state other than the normal game state to the normal game state, the predetermined display indicating the transition to the normal game state may not be executed in the first variable display after switching to the normal game state. .

In the normal game state, when the final variation display that satisfies the condition for shifting to the second advantageous game state (for example, 300 times variation from the starting point) stops, the right-handed display can be executed. On the other hand, in the first advantageous game state, when the final variation display that satisfies the condition for shifting to the normal game state (for example, 80 times variation from the starting point) is stopped, the execution of the right-handed display is performed. Can be restricted. When the variable display of the final round stops and the result background is displayed, the right-handed display that has been displayed so far is erased.

In the variable display in which the notification image (chance time entry image) that notifies the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed, different modes (for example, differences in display modes, differences in display positions, and notification means (for example, images, sounds, etc.) ) It is possible to execute a plurality of types of right-handed notifications such as ). In the variable display (remaining pending lottery) in which the notification image (result background image) that suggests the transition from the first advantageous gaming state is displayed, different aspects (for example, differences in display aspects, differences in display positions, and notification means (for example It is possible to limit the execution of multiple types of right-handed notifications such as differences in images and sounds.

When the normal game state changes to the second advantageous game state, the first stage of the normal game state is shifted to the second stage of the second advantageous game state. Specifically, when the variable display of the final round when changing from the normal game state to the second advantageous game state is stopped, it switches to the second advantageous game state, and at this time, the first stage remains, but the right-handed information (the 1 right hitting image) is started. Then, when the variable display next to the final round is started, and the shift to the second stage (after the display of the chance mode image and the screen switching effect such as white (black) out), the right-handed notification is terminated. be. In this way, when the normal game state changes to the second advantageous game state, it has a right-handed notification that can be executed over a plurality of stages. When changing from the first advantageous game state to the normal game state, the normal stage of the first advantageous game state passes through a special stage for result display, and then the normal stage of the normal game state is entered. At this time, when the final variable display is stopped in the first advantageous game state, the hitting right display is displayed in the normal stage, but this hitting right display is not continuously displayed in the special stage and the normal stage.

In the second advantageous gaming state, by performing so-called right hitting, a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 2 variable display) is displayed based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 47. executed. When the game ball wins to the second winning hole 47, the second reserved icon display for displaying the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) which is the number of the current second reserved memory. After the second pending icon is displayed in the area 70D, the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed. Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 348 (X-1)). Also, when the game ball wins to the second winning hole 47, the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). be. Furthermore, when the variable display is started, the number of the remaining number image ZKG is changed so as to decrease.

In the second advantageous game state, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 45 by hitting the left hand by mistake instead of hitting the right hand, the first special symbol reserved number (U1 ) is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first pending icons (see FIG. 348(Y-1)). In addition, there is no effect such that the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed, and the icon is displayed. Instead, a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 1 variable display) is started based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started. is executed (see FIG. 348 (Y-2)). On the other hand, when the game ball wins to the first winning hole 45, the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). be done. Furthermore, when the variable display is started, the display is changed so that the number of the remaining number image ZKG is decreased.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can display the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 1 start condition based on the winning to the first winning hole 45 by the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70 . In addition, the number of reserved memories based on the establishment of the special 2 starting condition based on the winning to the second winning opening 47 or the number of reserved memories based on the establishment of the special 2 starting condition based on winning the second winning opening 47 The number of pending icons can be displayed on the single-image display device 70 . Then, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the holding icon can be displayed, but when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the display of the holding icon (the icon) can be restricted. It has become. In this way, in the case of the special 1 variable display, by limiting the display of the pending icon, it is possible to make the player aware that an operation error or an abnormality has occurred, such as the wrong winning slot being aimed at. can. In addition, when the special 1 start condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, even if the reserved icon (the icon) is displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted according to the variable display, or does not disappear. It may be a mode different from the case where the special 2 start condition is established in the advantageous game state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the holding icon is displayed, and when the variable display based on the special 2 starting condition is displayed, the number of the remaining number image ZKG is reduced. A count effect can be executed. On the other hand, if the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the hold icon is not displayed, but when the variable display is performed based on the special 1 starting condition, it is possible to execute a count effect such that the number of the remaining number image ZKG is reduced. is. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the game is progressing while making the player aware of an operational error or an abnormality such as the wrong winning hole being aimed at.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the holding icon (the icon) The display mode of (including non-display) is the same. Also, in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, it is possible to execute a count effect such that the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is reduced during the variable display based on the special 1 start condition.

(Second Advantageous Game State Mode)
As shown in FIG. 349, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can select and execute modes (chance modes) from a predetermined number of types (for example, one type or a plurality of types such as two or more types) in the second advantageous gaming state. be. Each mode of the second advantageous game state differs, for example, in the background image, the effect pattern 70a, and the effect such as the notice or suggestion executed in the variable display. The mode of the second advantageous game state can be made selectable by the operation of the player, or can be internally selected based on the effect of the jackpot game or other predetermined conditions. Here, as the mode of the second advantageous game state, part or all of the mode of the first advantageous game state may be shared. For example, the mode executed in the second advantageous gaming state may be one of the selectable modes in the first advantageous state. Also, in the second advantageous game state, only a specific mode may be executed (the mode cannot be selected).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has more types of selectable modes at the start of the first advantageous gaming state than at the start of the second advantageous gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to create a difference between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state to increase variations and improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the number of types of selectable modes may be smaller at the start of the first advantageous game state than at the start of the second advantageous game state.

After clearing the RAM, it is not possible to select the pattern for executing the second advantageous game state in the specified condition (for example, 300th) rotation variation display, but after the big win, the specified condition (for example, 300th) variation is displayed. A pattern for executing the second advantageous game state can be selected in the display.

A part or all of the notice, look-ahead, and other effects executed in the first advantageous game state may be executed in the second advantageous game state, and vice versa.

While the mode can be selected in the case of the first advantageous gaming state, the mode may not be selected in the case of the second advantageous gaming state. Also, the same kind of mode may be executed in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state.

(Production example - continuous production)
As shown in FIG. 350(a), for example, in the normal game state, it is assumed that a continuous effect entry image is displayed and a continuous effect is started. In the embodiment, the action effect of the movable member 73 is also executed at the start of the continuous effect. The icon TH is changed to one for continuous effect (FIG. 350(b)), and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is performed. The variable display of the effect pattern 70a can be executed a predetermined number of times including 1 (for example, 7 times) during a predetermined period notified by the countdown of the timer image TMG (FIGS. 350(b) to (e)). In each of the variable displays of the performance symbols 70a executed in a predetermined period, an acquisition performance for obtaining a predetermined right can be executed, and when the acquisition performance is executed, the right is displayed as the performance symbols 70a on the middle side. (((c) to (e) in FIG. 350). Also, if the acquisition effect is not executed, the fluctuation stop of the effect pattern 70a on the middle side is performed in the usual display mode (numbers + characters) (((FIG. 350 ( b)) There are one type or a plurality of types of rights described above, and although four types of rights are set in the embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the first right is acquired, a display image (first acquisition display) simulating the operation button 17 is displayed ((c) in FIG. 350), and when the second right is acquired, the effect symbol A display image (second acquisition display) suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous variation of 70a is displayed ((e) in FIG. 350), and when the third right is acquired, the gaming machine 1 ((f) in FIG. 350) is displayed ((f) in FIG. 350). Then, the first acquisition display to the third acquisition display are displayed as the middle side production pattern 70a. After that, it is displayed so that it is accumulated in order on the horizontal side of the screen.It should be noted that a plurality of (for example, three) accumulation displays of the first acquisition display to the third acquisition display can be displayed, and all the acquisitions are the same. Indications are accumulated, acquisition indications that are different in whole or in part are accumulated, and change depending on the result of the acquisition effect. A display image (fourth acquisition display) suggesting a change in a predetermined effect is displayed ((d) in FIG. 350). Note that unlike the first to third acquisition displays, the accumulation effect is not performed in the fourth acquisition display.

In the acquisition effect and accumulation effect of the embodiment, the effect symbol 70a fluctuates a plurality of times during a period in which the lamp symbol 81, the special symbol 60 and the special symbol TZ are displayed once. In addition, the relation of the number of fluctuations between the effect symbol 70a and other symbols is not limited to the embodiment.

After a predetermined period during which the acquired effect can be executed has passed, as shown in FIG. Digestion effects that are executed in the order in which they are executed are performed. It should be noted that the acquired display that has been executed is erased, gray-reversed, or displayed in a neutralized manner so that it can be understood that it has been executed. For example, when the first right indicated by the first acquisition display is executed, the first acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, and the color change effect, the operation guidance effect of the operation button 17, the icon change, and the background image change. A predetermined effect such as a change in effect such as a change is performed (Fig. 351(a)). For example, when the second right indicated by the second acquisition display is executed, the second acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, suggesting that pseudo-continuous variation of the effect symbol 70a is executed, and the color A predetermined effect such as a change effect, an operation guidance effect of the operation button 17, an operation guidance effect of the operation button 17, a change in the icon, a change in the background image, a change in the effect such as a reach-flavor effect, etc. is performed (Fig. 351(c)). ). For example, when the second right indicated by the third acquisition display is executed, the third acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, suggesting that a special effect will be executed, and the color change effect and the operation button 17 are displayed. Predetermined effects such as an effect to guide the operation of , changes in effects such as changes in the icon and changes in the background image are performed (FIG. 351(e)).

Here, the first right, the second right, and the third right may all have the same degree of expectation for the jackpot, but it is preferable to change the degree of expectation for the jackpot. The degree of expectation may be increased in the order of second right < third right. Moreover, even if the contents of rights are different, some or all of the types of effects to be executed may be the same. In addition, the expectation of a big win may be higher when the same right is redeemed more than when one right is redeemed. After that, the effect due to the right of digestion is made to be stronger than the first effect.

The digestion effect of the embodiment is a period in which the lamp pattern 81, the special pattern 60, and the special pattern TZ are variably displayed once, and the effect pattern 70a fluctuates a plurality of times. Further, the continuous effect (acquisition, accumulation and digestion effect) of the embodiment is a period in which the lamp pattern 81, the special pattern 60 and the special pattern TZ are variably displayed once, and the effect pattern 70a fluctuates a plurality of times. In addition, the relation of the number of fluctuations between the effect symbol 70a and other symbols is not limited to the embodiment. Note that the continuous effect of the embodiment can be said to be a kind of pseudo-continuous effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the effect symbol 70a based on the second acquisition display and/or the third acquisition display is changed from the variable display of the effect symbol 70a based on the first acquisition display among the rights acquired in the acquisition effect of the continuous production. is more likely to execute a specific effect (among the common effects set for the first right to the third right, for example, a color change effect) in the continuous effect. By doing so, it is possible to create different expectations depending on the right acquired, and to improve the interest in the game. Note that the effect is not limited to the color change effect, and other effects may be used.

Rather than the variable display that consumes the right to execute the second effect (for example, the operation button 17), the variable display that consumes the right for the first effect (for example, a pseudo pattern other than the operation button 17, an image related to the motif of the game machine 1, etc.) It may be easier to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting an operation of the operation button 17) in the consumption effect for consuming the right acquired in the acquisition effect. Similarly, from the variable display that digests the right to execute the second effect (hold change), the right of the first effect (for example, the operation button 17 other than the hold change, the pseudo pattern, the image related to the motif of the game machine 1, etc.) is digested. It may be easier to execute the specific effect (suspended change effect) in the consumption effect of digesting the right acquired in the acquisition effect. In this way, by making it difficult for the content indicated by the right to be consumed to appear in the content of the specific effect in the digested effect, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the game.

In addition, the fluctuation display that consumes the right to execute the second effect (for example, pseudo symbols other than the operation button 17, the image related to the motif of the game machine 1, etc.) is changed to consume the right to the first effect (for example, the operation button 17). The display may make it easier to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting an operation of the operation button 17) in the consumption effect for consuming the right acquired in the acquisition effect. Similarly, the right of the first effect (suspended change) is extinguished from the variable display that extinguishes the right to execute the second effect (for example, the operation button 17 other than the pending change, the pseudo pattern, the image related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) It may be easier to execute the specific effect (suspended change effect) in the consumption effect of digesting the right acquired in the acquisition effect. In this way, by facilitating the content indicated by the right to be consumed to appear in the content of the specific effect in the consumption effect, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the pending icon change effect in the acquisition effect when the fourth right is obtained in the acquisition effect, but accumulates when the first to third rights are obtained in the acquisition effect. After performing the effect, the pending icon change effect can be executed in the digest effect. By doing so, it is possible to create different expectations depending on the right acquired, and to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that the effect is not limited to the hold icon change effect, and may be a vibration effect of the operation button 17, blowing air with a steering wheel or the like, or other effects.

In the execution effect, even if the right of either the first effect (for example, change on hold) or the second effect (images related to operation buttons 17 other than change on hold, pseudo symbols, and motifs of the game machine 1) is digested, the specific effect (for example, pending change effect) can be executed. When the right to execute the first effect (suspended change) is consumed in the consumption effect and the specific effect is executed, the digest effect is executed without going through the accumulation effect during the acquisition effect, and the pending change effect is executed. It's getting easier. On the other hand, in the digestion effect, when the right to execute the second effect (such as the operation button 17 other than the pending change, the pseudo symbol, the image related to the motif of the game machine 1, etc.) is digested and the specific effect is executed, the acquired effect The rate of execution of the consumption effect during the execution is lower than the right of the first effect, or the consumption effect is not executed during the acquisition effect. Then, in the digested effect, when the right to execute the second effect (such as the operation button 17 other than the pending change, the pseudo symbol, the image related to the motif of the game machine 1, etc.) is digested and the specific effect is executed, after the acquired effect is completed It is executed (after passing through the accumulation effect). Therefore, when the right to execute the first effect is consumed in the consumption effect and the specific effect is executed, and when the right to execute the second effect is consumed in the consumption effect and the specific effect is executed, the obtained effect is The time from acquisition of the right to be executed to execution of the specific effect in the digested effect is different.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the fourth right is obtained in the acquisition performance, execution of the accumulation performance is restricted, but when the first to third rights are obtained in the acquisition performance, the accumulation performance can be executed. It has become.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the second right and/or the operation button 17 are closely related to the operation button 17 by the second acquisition display, which is less related to the operation button 17 than the first right by the first acquisition display imitating the operation button 17. The vibration effect of the operation button 17 is more likely to be executed for the third right based on the third acquisition display, which has a weaker relationship.

In addition, the aforementioned continuous effect may be executed not only in the normal game state but also in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state.

(Production example - Hold change production)
As shown in FIG. 352, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can repeatedly execute a change suggestion effect suggesting execution of a pending icon change effect a predetermined number of times. Specifically, a change suggesting image HSG that suggests the possibility of execution of the change effect of the pending icon is displayed at a position away from the pending icon on the screen, and a streak of light or the like is displayed from the change suggesting image HSG toward the pending icon. 352(a) and (b)). The number of execution times of the change suggesting effect is executed in a plurality of patterns, making it difficult to understand the timing of the change. There may be a plurality of types of content of the change-suggestion production. Then, at a predetermined timing among the plurality of change suggesting effects, a pending change effect in which the color, shape, etc. of the pending icon is changed is executed (FIGS. 352(c) and (d)). In this way, the pending icon change effect can be executed at a predetermined timing after the change suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of the pending change effect, and to improve the amusement of the game. Although the icon TH is changed in the embodiment, a pending icon other than the icon may be changed.

The hold change effect is set with a reliability that will be a big hit in multiple stages depending on the color and shape of the hold icon. The case where the pending change effect is executed at a relatively late timing among the plurality of change suggesting effects is more favorable than the case where the pending change effect is executed at a relatively early timing among the multiple change suggesting effects. Pending changes with high confidence are likely to be executed. Even if the pending change effect is executed at a relatively early timing among the multiple change suggesting effects, if the content of the pending change effect is of a predetermined type (for example, rainbow change), the transition to the jackpot is made. may be made to have a higher reliability.

It should be noted that the aforementioned pending change effect is not limited to being executed in the normal game state, and may be executed in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state.

(Production example - reach-inciting production)
The gaming machine of the embodiment can execute the ready-to-win effect in multiple types of modes. As an example of the ready-to-win effect, when the effect pattern 70a of a certain number "for example 7" temporarily stops on the left side and the right-side effect pattern 70a is about to stop, the effect pattern 70a is emphasized by the ready-to-win effect or the like. (Fig. 353 (a-1)). Then, if the right side effect pattern 70a temporarily stops with the same number as the left side effect pattern 70a, reach is established (Fig. 353 (a-2)), and a predetermined reach effect (SP, SPSP, etc.) is executed. (Fig. 353 (a-3)). Also, if the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops with a different number from the left performance symbol 70a, the reach is not established.

For example, when the production pattern 70a with a certain number "for example 2" is temporarily stopped on the left side and the production pattern 70a on the right side is about to stop, the production pattern 70a is emphasized by the reach swing effect or the like (Fig. 353(b) -1)). At this time, it is possible to execute a specific stimulating effect such as Shake Vision, in which the screen shrinks, shakes, and returns to its original state (FIG. 353(b-2)). Then, if the right performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped with the same number as the left performance symbol 70a, reach is established, and a predetermined reach performance (normal, SP, SPSP) is executed (FIG. 353 (b-3)). Also, if the right side effect pattern 70a temporarily stops with a number different from the left side effect pattern 70a, the ready-to-win state is not established.

In this way, in the variable display, the production pattern 70a having the second number information (for example, 2) is more likely to reach the reach than the first production that fuels the possibility that the production pattern 70a having the first number information (for example, 7) will become a reach. In the second effect that arouses the possibility of becoming, a specific inciting effect (for example, Shake Vision) is more likely to be executed. In this way, the ease with which the specific fanning performance in the ready-to-win fanning performance is executed differs depending on the difference in the numeric information of the performance pattern 70a, so that the numeric information can be given significance and the interest in the game can be further improved. can.

Here, the reach-inducing effect and the specific inciting effect are not limited to the above-mentioned shake vision, but also include pending change effects, effects, characters (for example, "maybe reach?"), actuation, light emission, and operation of the movable members 73 and 74 Vibration and light emission of the button 17, light emission of the prize winning entrance lamp, and the like may be performed by the image display device 70 and the accessory alone or in combination.

In the variable display, the possibility that the production pattern 70a having the first numerical information (for example, 7) will become a ready-to-win is more likely than the second production that fuels the possibility that the production pattern 70a having the second numerical information (for example, 2) will become a ready-to-win. The rousing first effect may make it easier to execute a highly reliable ready-to-win effect (SP and SPSP are more likely to be executed than normal). That is, although the second effect of the second numerical information is more likely to execute the specific fanning effect, the first numerical information is more likely to execute a highly reliable ready-to-win effect when reaching reach.

In addition, in the variable display, the production pattern 70a having the second number information (for example, 2) is more likely to be a ready-to-win than the first production that fuels the possibility that the production pattern 70a having the first number information (for example, 7) is ready. The sex-inflaming second effect may make it easier to execute a highly reliable effect (SP or SPSP is more likely to be executed than normal) as a ready-to-win effect. That is, the second effect of the second numerical information makes it easier to execute the specific fanning effect, and the second numerical information makes it easier to execute a highly reliable ready-to-win effect when reaching a ready-to-win state.

In the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state, the specific fanning effect may be executable for any of the effect symbols 70a of the numerical information. That is, the second ready-to-win fanning effect in the variable display in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state performs the specific fanning effect rather than the first ready-to-win fanning effect in the variable display in the normal game state. easy.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a of the second number information is more likely to be executed and the ready-to-win is more likely to be established during the high-probability than during the low-probability. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the ready-to-win effect of the effect symbol 70a of the first number information is more likely to be executed during the high-probability than the low-probability, and the ready-to-win is less likely to be established.

It should be noted that the aforementioned ready-to-win effect is not limited to being executed in the normal game state, and may be executed in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state.

(Production example - Continuous production 2)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as an example of a continuous effect, a special effect symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (Fig. 354(a)), and one variable effect (a period in which the special symbol 60 fluctuates once ), it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation production that can execute the start of fluctuation of the production pattern 70a (symbol fluctuation production) multiple times. Specifically, when the first special effect symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (Fig. 354(a)), a continuous fanning effect is executed by a discrimination effect image or the like (Fig. 354(b)). If the continuous fanning production fails, the pseudo-fluctuation production ends. In addition, when the continuous fanning production succeeds, the pseudo-fluctuation production is continued. In the fluctuating display that follows after the success of the first continuous fan effect, the second special effect symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (Fig. 355(a)), and the continuous fan effect such as a discrimination effect image is executed. (Fig. 355(b)). If the continuous fanning production fails, the pseudo-fluctuation production ends. In addition, when the continuous fanning production succeeds, the pseudo-fluctuation production is continued. In the fluctuating display that follows after the success of the second continuous fan effect, the third special effect pattern (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (Fig. 356(a)), so that the continuous fan effect by the discrimination effect image etc. is executed. (Fig. 356(b)).

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of Embodiment 1 has a ratio of success in the first swaying effect of the first time in one pseudo-fluctuation effect, and the second swaying effect that is executed after the first swaying effect is successful. 2 The success ratio of the fanning effect is higher than that of the fanning effect. It should be noted that, when the second continuous fan effect is successful, the execution of the third pseudo-fluctuation effect may be determined.

The pseudo-fluctuation effect can be executed before and/or after the reach, and the continuous fan effect is more likely to succeed when executed after the reach rather than before the reach.

In addition, the aforementioned continuous effect may be executed not only in the normal game state but also in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state. Note that the continuous effect of the embodiment can be said to be a kind of pseudo-continuous effect.

(Production example - specific image production)
In the effect example shown in FIG. 357, the first image CRCG1 and the second image CRCG2 are displayed, and the display of the first image CRCG1 and the second image CRCG2 is in a predetermined state (for example, the first image is pressing the second image). etc.), and stoppage of the loss of the production pattern 70a is performed. Here, when a predetermined state is reached, the ratio of losing may be higher than winning.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 358, the first image CRCG1 and the second image CRCG2 are displayed, and the display of the first image CRCG1 and the second image CRCG2 is in a specific state (for example, when the second image is for example, pressing the first image). In the effect example shown in FIG. 358, when the specific state is reached, the third image CRCG3 is additionally displayed after the display effect of the specific image is executed (FIG. 358(e)). A specific effect in which the display of the first image CRCG1, the second image CRCG2, and the third image CRCR3 is in a special state different from the predetermined state or the specific state (for example, the first image and the third image are pressing the second image). is executed and hits the mark. It should be noted that even if the predetermined state is reached, the transition to the special state does not always occur, and the transition to the special state may fail. Then, when there is no transition from the specific state to the special state, the ratio of losing may be higher than winning. In addition, it may come off after entering a special state.

The first image CRCG1 and the third image CRCG3 can use characters that suggest a favorable situation for the player, and the second image CRCG2 can use characters that suggest a disadvantageous situation for the player. can be used. That is, the predetermined state appears to be proceeding in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the specific state appears to be proceeding in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, and the special state is the predetermined state. And it is set so that it appears that the player is progressing to a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment executes the specific image effect in which either the display effect of the predetermined state advantageous to the player or the display effect of the specific state disadvantageous to the player is selectively displayed in the variable display. It is possible. In the specific image effect, the specific effect (the first (display rendering by the image CRCG1, the second image CRCG2, and the third image CRCR3) can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the ready-to-win effect that is executed immediately after the display effect of the special state is more reliable than the ready-to-reach effect that is executed immediately after the display effect of the predetermined state and the specific state ( For example, SPSP reach) is likely to be executed.

It should be noted that the aforementioned specific image effect is not limited to being executed in the normal game state, and may be executed in the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state. Moreover, although the embodiment is described as a kind of ready-to-win effect, it may be applied to the effect before reaching to reach.

In the variable display, there are two types of loss: a loose loss, where the reach is not established, and a reach loss, where the reach is established and then lost. The fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is set longer for the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous gaming state. For example, when a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variation times are set in each of the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous It can be said that the variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the game state. It should be noted that it is also possible that when the number of reserved memories (for example, 1) is small, the program with the long variable time is more likely to be executed, and when the number of reserved memories (for example, 2 or more) is relatively large, the program with the shorter variable time is more likely to be executed. .

Special 1 variation display of losing in the first advantageous game state can be executed with a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variation times. In addition, it is possible to execute the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state with a plurality of types of variation patterns with different fluctuation times, but the variation patterns that can be executed in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state. less than the number of types of For example, while it is possible to execute the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state with two types of variation patterns with different variation times, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state It can be made executable with one type of variation pattern with different times. In this case, the special 1 variable display of losing in the second advantageous game state is always variably displayed in the same variable time even if the conditions such as the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of performance execution change.

The execution ratio may be the same between the notice effect performed by the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state and the notice effect performed by the special 1 change display of the loss in the second advantageous game state. In addition, the number of executable types is the same between the advance notice effect performed in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the notice effect performed in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state. may Note that the advance notice effect may not be executed.

The advance notice effect performed by the special 1 change display of the loss in the first advantageous game state may be easier to execute than the notice effect performed by the special 1 change display of the loss in the second advantageous game state. In addition, the number of executable types of the notice effect performed by the special 1 change display of the loss in the second advantageous game state is smaller than the notice effect performed by the special 1 change display of the loss in the first advantageous game state. may be

The effects described above are not limited to images, and can be replaced with events that can be recognized by the player, such as movable members, sounds, operation buttons, prize winning openings, and other lamps, either singly or in combination.

(Example 1 of production)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment will be further described.

(basic performance)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a basic effect of displaying the effect pattern 70a (symbol display) and displaying a background image (for example, a movie or an image that is repeatedly displayed) (background display) in the variable display. . The basic effect can be executed in each of the normal game state, the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, in the mode (content) set for each state (see FIGS. 359, 360 and 361). Here, the basic effect is a effect that is normally (minimally) executed when playing a game with variable display, and may include sound output, light emission, and the like. It should be noted that the basic production can be said to be a production that does not include a production that makes the player expect (suggests) the execution of a jackpot game such as a notice production and a fanning production.

(Notice production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (which may include prefetching) that make (suggest) a big win (shift to a big win game). As shown in FIG. 359, for a specific effect out of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state (variable display based on the starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning hole 45) It is executable. As the specific effect, for example, a light emission effect such as a starting lamp (Fig. 362(a)), a hold change effect (Fig. )), a simulated advance notice effect (Fig. 362(c)) suggesting that the change in the effect pattern 70a continues, a button effect such as vibration and light emission of the operation button 17 (Fig. 363(c)), and a movable member 73, 74 operation and movable member effects such as light emission (Fig. 363(b)). Incidentally, the variable display based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning hole 47 may be called special 2 variable display.

As shown in FIG. 360, for a specific effect (all types of advance notice effects may be used) among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the execution is limited by special 1 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state. It is different from the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 361, for a specific effect (all types of the advance notice effect may be used) among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the execution is restricted by special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. , which is the same as the first advantageous game state, but different from the special 1 variation display in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 359(a), in the normal game state, in the entire period of one variation (the period from when the special symbol starts to vary once to when it stops), the symbol variation display effect and image by the effect symbol 70a It is possible to execute a basic effect by a background effect (for example, a running movie, a repeated background, etc.) on the display device 70 . As shown in FIG. 360, in the first advantageous gaming state, in the entire period of one variation (the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate once to when it stops), the symbol variation display effect and image display by the effect symbol 70a It is possible to execute a basic effect by a background effect (for example, a running movie, a repeated background, etc.) on the device 70 . As shown in FIG. 361, in the second advantageous gaming state, in the entire period of one variation (the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate once to when it stops), the symbol variation display effect and image display by the effect symbol 70a It is possible to execute a basic effect by a background effect (for example, a running movie, a repeated background, etc.) on the device 70 .

(Specific fluctuation)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the basic performance during the entire period of one fluctuation (the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate once until it stops), but limits the execution of all advance notice production. It is possible to execute a specific change that In addition, although it is not necessary to perform the specific variation in the normal game state, the specific variation may be performed (Fig. 359(b)).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can store a plurality of pending memories based on the starting condition due to the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45 . It is possible to store a plurality of pending memories based on the starting condition due to the winning of the game ball to the second winning hole 47 . The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the variable display in the same variable time regardless of whether the reserved memory is the minimum or the maximum, and can execute the basic effect during the entire period of one time of the variable display. and it is possible to execute a specific change that restricts the execution of a plurality of types of advance notice effects. That is, the variable display for which the specific variation is executed has a constant variable time regardless of the number of pending memories.

As shown in FIG. 360, the notice effect can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the execution of the notice effect in the special 1 change display in the first advantageous game state may be restricted. Further, as shown in FIG. 361, the notice effect can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, but the execution of the notice effect in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state may be restricted. .

(Comparison of game state effects 1-1)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different between the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state. In the embodiment, an effect with a longer specific variation is more likely to be selected for the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state than the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state. From the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the special 1 variation of the loss in the second advantageous game state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 variation display. In the case of the display, it is easier to select an effect with a longer specific fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations is 4, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state is more specific variation than the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. It is easier to choose a long production.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the second advantageous game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 1-2)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation is the same between the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state. there is In the embodiment, the same length of specific variation is likely to be selected for the special 1 variation display of losing in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state. Special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and loss feature in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 variation display It is easy to select a specific variation of the same length as one variation display. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 are the same. A particular variation in length is likely to be chosen.

By doing so, even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in both the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Players can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 1-3)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation is different between the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state. In the embodiment, an effect with a longer specific variation is more likely to be selected for the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state. From the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the special feature of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 variation display In the case of 1-variation display, it is easier to select an effect with a longer specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. Productions with long specific fluctuations are more likely to be selected.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 1-4)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation is different between the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state. In the embodiment, an effect with a longer specific variation is more likely to be selected for the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. From the special 2 fluctuation display of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the special of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. In the case of 1-variation display, it is easier to select an effect with a longer specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. Productions with long specific fluctuations are more likely to be selected.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 2-1)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the special 1 variable display of losing in the normal game state is executed is the first rate (aa1). The rate at which the special 1 variation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first ratio and the second ratio have different execution ratios (aa1≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state is easier to execute the variation effect with the specific variation than the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state (aa1<aa5). . This is because the number of losses in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of holds is the same as the special 1 variation display is higher than the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state when the number of holds is 1 (2 to 3). In the special 1 variation display, it is easier to execute a variation effect with a specific variation. In addition, when the number of reservations is 4, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the normal game state is more specific fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state when the number of reservations is 4. It is easy to execute a certain variable performance.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the second advantageous game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 2-2)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa3). The rate at which the special 1 variation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The execution ratios of the first ratio and the second ratio are the same (aa3=aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state have the same rate of execution of the variation performance with the specific variation (aa3 =aa5). This is the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. The percentage of execution of the variation effect with the specific variation is the same as the special 1 variation display of the loss. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 are specified. The rate at which the variable performance with variation is executed is the same.

By doing so, even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in both the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Players can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 2-3)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa4). The rate at which the special 1 variation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first ratio and the second ratio have different execution ratios (aa4≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state is easier to execute the variation effect with the specific variation than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state (aa4 < aa5). This is more of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display than the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3). In the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss, it is easier to execute the fluctuation effect with the specific fluctuation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. Variation production with specific variation is easier to execute.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 2-4)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa6). The rate at which the special 1 variation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first ratio and the second ratio have different execution ratios (aa6≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state is easier to execute the variation performance with the specific variation than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state (aa6 < aa5). This is more of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display than the special 2 fluctuation display of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3). In the special 1 variation display of the loss, it is easier to execute the variation effect with the specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. Variation production with specific variation is easier to execute.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 3-1)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can perform a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but the specific variation in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state can be restricted. Specific variation is limited in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous game state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 variation display. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of losing. In addition, when the reserved number is 4, it is possible to limit the specific variation in the special 1 loss display in the normal game state, but when the reserved number is 4, the special 1 loss in the second advantageous game state. A specific variation can be executed in the variation display.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the second advantageous game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 3-2)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can perform a specific variation in both the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. is. When the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), a specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state, and the second when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 variation display. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of losing in an advantageous game state. In addition, a specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, and a special characteristic of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. A specific variation can be executed in one variation display.

By doing so, even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in both the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Players can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 3-3)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state Specific variations can be limited. A second advantageous game when the specific variation is restricted in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3) and the number of reservations is the same as the number of special 1 fluctuation display. A specific change can be executed in the special 1 change display of the lost state. In addition, it is possible to limit the specific variation in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, but the number of losses in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 Specific variation can be executed in special 1 variation display.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 3-4)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state Specific variations can be limited. The second advantageous game when the specific variation is restricted in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3) and the number of reservations is the same as the number of special 1 fluctuation display. A specific change can be executed in the special 1 change display of the lost state. In addition, it is possible to limit the specific variation in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, but the number of losses in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4 Specific variation can be executed in special 1 variation display.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 2 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects that expect a big win, and the plurality of types of advance notice effects are executed singly or in combination. Such advance notice effects include images (characters, effects, backgrounds, etc.) on the image display device 70 and effects executed in the display (referred to as first display effects when particularly distinguished). A background change effect such as changing the background to the background for SP or SPSP, a character notice effect in which characters such as "Chance has arrived?" It is possible to execute a mode entry effect or the like for suggesting or notifying a change from one mode to another mode, either singly or in combination. The advance notice effects include effects executed by display on display means other than the image display device (referred to as a second display effect when distinguished). , the light guide plate forewarning effect executed by the display by the light guide plate, etc. can be executed singly or in combination. As the advance notice effect, it is possible to execute an action effect executed by the action of a movable accessory that performs a predetermined action, such as a movable member. As the notice effect, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that is executed by vibrating the operation button 17 or the like. As the announcement effect, a sound announcement effect using sound output from the speaker 9 can be executed. As a notice effect, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect that is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting device provided on a game board, a game frame, a movable member, an operation button, an accessory such as a winning opening, or an operation handle. .

The advance notice effects may be of the same type, or may be further subdivided according to the degree of reliability. For example, if it is a hold change effect, the color of the hold icon is set so that the reliability increases in the order of "blue" < "red" < "rainbow", or if it is a motion effect, a weak action with a small action < For example, it may be set so that the degree of reliability increases in the order of strong operation with large operation. Note that the degree of reliability may be changed by combining a plurality of types of advance notice effects.

(Comparison of game state effects 4-1)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is a big hit in the variation display in which the background change effect is executed, rather than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. is easily established (bb1<bb5). In particular, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state is more likely to achieve a big win in the variable display in which the background change effect other than the normal (for example, for SP) is executed than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state. ing. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the background change effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. It is easy to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The background change effect may be more difficult to execute in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state than in the normal game state. In this way, although the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the background change effect is likely to be lost even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. Although it is difficult to win, it becomes easier to win big when the background change effect is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 4-2)
As shown in FIG. 366, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. A big win is likely to occur (bb3=bb5). In particular, between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of winning big in the variation display in which the background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed are the same. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to win big, and in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the background change When the production is executed, it is easy to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the background change effect may be set to be the same between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, the background change effect is difficult to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous game state, but the big win is likely to occur when the background change effect is executed, and the background change is easy in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. Although the performance is difficult to execute, the big win is likely to occur when the background change performance is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 4-3)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more variable display in which the background change effect is executed than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. , the jackpot is likely to be established (bb4<bb5). In particular, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is more successful than the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state in the variation display in which the background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. It's getting easier. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the background change effect is executed in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state, the background change effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. It is easier to hit the jackpot when it is done. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The background change effect may be more difficult to execute in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state, but the background change effect is likely to be lost even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is easy to be executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. is difficult to execute, but when the background change effect is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

The rate at which the background change effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the background change effect in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous game state, even if the background change effect is executed, it is easy to lose, In the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the background change performance is the same as in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state, but when the background change performance is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

(Comparison of game state effects 4-4)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more variable display in which the background change effect is executed than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. , the jackpot is likely to be established (bb6<bb5). In particular, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is more successful than the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous game state in the variation display in which the background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. It's getting easier. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the background change effect is executed in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous game state, the background change effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. If you do, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The background change effect may be more difficult to execute in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous game state, the background change effect is likely to be lost even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 change display of the second advantageous game state. is difficult to execute, but when the background change effect is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

The rate at which the background change effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the background change effect in the special 2 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 1 change display of the second advantageous game state, even if the background change effect is executed, it is easy to lose, In the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the background change performance is the same as in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state, but when the background change performance is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

It may be relatively difficult to execute a highly reliable advance notice effect in the normal game state, and it is relatively easy to lose even if a highly reliable advance notice effect is executed. In the first advantageous game state and/or the second advantageous game state, it is relatively easy to execute a highly reliable advance notice effect, and when the highly reliable advance notice effect is executed, it is relatively easy to win a big win.

(Comparison of game state effects 5-1)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special notice effect in the notice effect is executed more in the special notice effect in the second advantageous game state than in the special notice effect in the normal game state. A big hit is likely to be established in the variable display (cc1<cc5). Here, the specific notice effect includes, for example, a text notice effect, an effect notice effect, a 3D filter notice effect, a light guide plate notice effect, a mode entry effect, a notice effect by a movable member (operation and light emission by a movable member, etc.), and a sound notice. Effect, vibration forewarning effect of the operation button 17, and the like can be mentioned. For example, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state is more likely to establish a big win in the variable display in which the character advance notice effect is executed than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the specific advance notice performance is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, and the specific advance notice performance is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state. It is easy to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the specific advance notice performance may be made more difficult in the special notice effect in the second advantageous game state than in the special game state in the normal game state. In this way, although the specific advance notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the specific advance notice effect is likely to be lost even if the specific advance notice effect is executed, and the specific advance notice effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. Although it is difficult to win, it becomes easier to win big when the specific advance notice effect is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 5-2)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the variation display in which the specific advance notice effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state A big win is likely to occur (cc3=cc5). For example, in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the big hits in the variable display in which the character advance notice effect is executed is the same. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special notice effect is executed in the special notice effect in the first advantageous gaming state, the special notice is likely to occur in the special notice effect in the second advantageous gaming state. When the production is executed, it is easy to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the specific advance notice effect may be set to be the same between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, it is difficult to execute the specific advance notice effect in the special 1 fluctuation display in the first advantageous game state, but when the specific advance notice effect is executed, it is easy to win big, and in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state, the specific advance notice is obtained. Although the performance is difficult to execute, the big win is likely to occur when the specific advance notice performance is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 5-3)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the variation display in which the specific advance notice effect is executed is higher in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the 2nd variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. , the jackpot is likely to be established (bb4<bb5). For example, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to establish a big win in the variable display in which the character announcement effect is executed than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the special notice performance is executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. If you do, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the specific advance notice performance may be made more difficult in the special notice performance in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special notice 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the specific advance notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous game state, the specific advance notice effect is likely to be lost even if the specific advance notice effect is executed, and the specific advance notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. is difficult to execute, but when the specific advance notice effect is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

The rate at which the specific advance notice effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the specific advance notice effect in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state is the same as that in the special notice effect 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state, even if the specific advance notice effect is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution ratio of the specific advance notice performance in the special notice performance in the second advantageous game state is the same as the special notice performance in the special notice performance in the first advantageous game state, the big win is likely to occur when the special notice performance is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 5-4)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special notice effect is executed in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state rather than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. , the jackpot is likely to be established (bb6<bb5). For example, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to establish a big win in the variable display in which the character announcement effect is executed than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the special notice performance is executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. It is easier to hit the jackpot when it is done. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the specific advance notice performance may be made more difficult in the special notice performance in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special notice 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the specific advance notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state, the specific advance notice performance is likely to be lost even if the specific advance notice performance is executed, and in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state. is difficult to execute, but when the specific advance notice effect is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

The ratio of execution of the specific advance notice effect may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the specific notice effect in the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special notice effect 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state, even if the specific notice effect is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution ratio of the specific advance notice performance in the special notice performance in the second advantageous game state is the same as the special notice performance in the special notice performance in the first advantageous game state, the big win is likely to occur when the special notice performance is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 6-1)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to be displayed by the display means (image display device) than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. 70, including display means such as a sub-liquid crystal and a light guide plate). Here, examples of display device forewarning effects include background change effects, character forewarning effects, effect foreshadowing effects, 3D filter foreshadowing effects, light guide plate forecast effects, mode entry effects, and the like. Among the advance notice effects other than the notice effect of the display means, the notice effects are executed in places other than the display means, such as the notice effect by the movable member (movement by the movable member, light emission, etc.), the sound notice effect, and the vibration notice of the operation button 17. performances, etc. For example, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is more likely to establish a big win in the variation display in which the background change notice effect is executed than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the display means advance notice effect is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the display means advance notice effect is executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. It is easier to hit the jackpot when it is done. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the advance notice effect by the display means may be made more difficult in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state than in the normal game state. In this way, although the display means advance notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the display means notice effect is likely to be lost even if the display means notice effect is executed, and the display means notice effect is easily executed in the special 1 change display in the second advantageous game state. Although the effect is difficult to execute, the big win is likely to occur when the display means advance notice effect is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 6-2)
As shown in FIG. 368, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, and a variable display in which a display means advance notice effect is executed. , the jackpot is likely to be established (dd3=dd5). For example, between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of winning big in the variation display in which the background change effect is executed is the same. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the display means advance notice effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to win a big win, and in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. When the means foretelling effect is executed, it is easy to win a big hit. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the display means advance notice effect may be set to be the same between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, it is difficult to execute the advance notice effect of the display means in the special 1 fluctuation display of the first advantageous game state, but it is easy to win big when the advance notice effect of the display means is executed, and in the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state. Although the display means advance notice performance is difficult to execute, when the display means advance notice effect is executed, the big win is likely to occur.

(Comparison of game state effects 6-3)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more variable than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. In the display, a big win is likely to occur (dd4<dd5). For example, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to establish a big win in the variation display in which the background change effect is executed than the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the display means advance notice effect is executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the display means notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state. is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the display means advance notice effect may be made more difficult in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the display means advance notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the display means is likely to lose even if the display means notice performance is executed, and is displayed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although the means advance notice effect is difficult to execute, the big win is likely to occur when the display means advance notice effect is executed.

The rate at which the display means advance notice effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, in the special 2 fluctuation display of the first advantageous game state, although the execution ratio of the display means advance notice performance is the same as that of the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state, even if the display means advance notice performance is executed, it is lost. Although the execution ratio of the display means advance notice effect in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 2 change display in the first advantageous game state, it becomes easy to win big when the display means notice effect is executed. .

(Comparison of game state effects 6-4)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more variable than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In the display, a big win is likely to occur (dd6<dd5). For example, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to establish a big win in the variation display in which the background change effect is executed than the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the display means advance notice effect is executed in the special 2 fluctuation display of the second advantageous gaming state, the display means notice effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state. is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the display means advance notice effect may be made more difficult in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the display means advance notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the display means is likely to lose even if the display means notice performance is executed, and is displayed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although the means advance notice effect is difficult to execute, the big win is likely to occur when the display means advance notice effect is executed.

The rate at which the display means advance notice effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, in the special 2 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state, the execution ratio of the display means advance notice performance is the same as that of the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state, but even if the display means advance notice performance is executed, it is lost. Although the execution ratio of the display means advance notice effect in the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 2 change display in the first advantageous game state, it becomes easy to win big when the display means notice effect is executed. .

(Comparison of game state effects 7-1)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is more effective than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. A movable accessory announcement effect that can be executed by the operation button 17 (not limited to the operation of the movable members 73 and 74 and the operation button 17, but may include light emission of the movable members 73 and 74 and the operation button) is executed. A big win is likely to be established in the variable display (ee1<ee5). Here, the notice effects other than the movable character notice effects include, for example, a background change effect, a text notice effect, an effect notice effect, a 3D filter notice effect, a light guide plate notice effect, a mode entry effect, a sound notice effect, and an operation button 17. Vibration notice production etc. For example, the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state is more likely to establish a big win in the variation display in which the movable accessory announcement effect is executed by the movable member 73 than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. . Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the movable role announcement effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, it is easy to lose, and in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state, the movable role announcement effect is likely to be lost. is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the movable accessory advance notice performance may be more difficult in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state than in the normal game state. In this way, although the movable role announcement performance is likely to be executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, it is easy to lose even if the movable role announcement performance is executed, and it is possible to move in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state. Although it is difficult to execute the character object foretelling effect, it becomes easy to win big when the movable character object foretelling effect is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 7-2)
As shown in FIG. 369, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, and a variation in which the movable accessory announcement effect is executed. In the display, a big win is likely to occur (ee3=ee5). For example, between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of winning big in the variation display in which the movable accessory announcement effect by the movable member 73 is executed is the same. be. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the movable role announcement effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to win big, and in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state When the movable accessory announcement performance is executed, it is easy to win a big hit. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution ratio of the movable accessory announcement effect may be set to be the same between the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, it is difficult to execute the movable role announcement performance in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous game state, but when the movable role announcement performance is executed, it is easy to win big, and the special 1 variation of the second advantageous game state is performed. Although it is difficult to execute the movable role announcement performance in the display, it is easy to win big when the movable role announcement performance is executed.

(Comparison of game state effects 7-3)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the movable accessory forewarning effect is executed more in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. A big win is likely to occur in the variable display (ee4<ee5). For example, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state makes it easier for a big win to be established in the variable display in which the movable accessory announcement effect is executed by the movable member 73 than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. ing. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the movable accessory announcement effect is executed in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the movable accessory is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. When the advance notice effect is executed, it is easy to win a big hit. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the movable accessory advance notice performance may be more difficult in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the movable role announcement performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous game state, the movable role announcement performance is likely to be lost even if the movable role announcement performance is executed, and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous game state. Although it is difficult to execute the movable role announcement performance in , it becomes easy to win big when the movable role announcement performance is executed.

The rate at which the movable accessory announcement effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the movable role announcement effect in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous game state, the movable role announcement effect is not executed. Also, it is easy to lose, and although the execution ratio of the movable role announcement effect in the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 2 fluctuation display of the first advantageous game state, when the movable role announcement effect is executed It becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of game state effects 7-4)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the movable accessory forewarning effect is executed more in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. A big win is likely to occur in the variable display (dd6<dd5). For example, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state makes it easier for a big win to be established in the variable display in which the movable role announcement effect by the movable member 73 is executed, than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. ing. Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the movable accessory announcement effect is executed in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the movable accessory is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. When the advance notice effect is executed, it is easy to win a big hit. By doing so, the merit of each game state can be enjoyed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The execution of the movable accessory advance notice performance may be more difficult in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the movable role announcement performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous game state, even if the movable role announcement performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous game state is easily performed. Although it is difficult to execute the movable role announcement performance in , it becomes easy to win big when the movable role announcement performance is executed.

The rate at which the movable accessory announcement effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the movable role announcement effect in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous game state, the movable role announcement effect is not executed. Also, it is easy to lose, and although the execution ratio of the movable role announcement effect in the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous game state is the same as that of the special 2 fluctuation display of the first advantageous game state, when the movable role announcement effect is executed It becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Example 3 of production)
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification performances (for example, advance notice, prefetching, etc.) that expect a big win, and the plurality of types of notification performances are executed singly or in combination. The notification effect is executed at a first notification executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started) and at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when the game ball enters the winning hole). There is a second notification. As an example of such a notification effect, a pending change effect in which the state of the pending icon or the effect accompanying the pending icon changes, an effect change effect in which the effect such as an effect acting on the display of the effect pattern 70a changes, and a winning It is possible to execute a combination of mouth lighting effect and the like.

For example, when the execution timing of the first notification is the start of the variable display, if the pending memory is "0", the fluctuation starts at the same time as the winning, and the second notification is executed at the winning timing of the winning opening. As a result, it may be executed at the same (simultaneous) timing. At this time, when the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if there is a pending memory, the timings of the second notification and the first notification that are executed at the winning timing to the winning opening are different. The timings of the first notification and the second notification may overlap or may not overlap. Further, the first and second notifications may have the same trigger and different timings, or the first and second notifications may have the same trigger but different timings.

For example, as the first notification, the notification effect has a first mode, a second mode different from the first mode, and a third mode different from the second mode, and from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode It is possible to execute changing effects that change. In the first aspect of the first notification, for example, the hold icon, the icon, the hold, the winning entrance lamp, etc. blink alone or in plurality, or the color changes to blue, etc. Change to be different from the normal mode do. In the second aspect of the first notification, for example, the suspension icon, the icon, the suspension, the winning entrance lamp, etc. alone or in multiple colors, such as changing from the normal color or the blue color of the second aspect to red, rainbow color, etc. It changes differently from the normal mode and the first mode. In the third mode of the first notification, changes differ from the first mode and the second mode, for example, the pending icon or the corresponding icon is hidden, or the winning entrance lamp is turned off. Also, the third form is the basic (initial) form of the icon, and the character, color, etc. may be changed from the third form of the basic form to the first form or the second form. It should be noted that the pending icon or the non-display of the icon in the third aspect can be executed regardless of the presence of pending storage.

As for the notification effect, as the second notification, a notice other than the first notification, for example, the above-described notice effect can be executed. Note that the notification effect is not limited to the example described above, and may be the effect exemplified as the advance notice effect or other modes.

(Comparison of game state effects 8-1)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff11). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the ratio of the first notification in the notification effect to be executed in the first mode is the second ratio (ff51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (ff11<ff51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff13). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (ff53), and the fourth rate is greater than the third rate. is set (ff13<ff53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 8-2)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff31). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second rate (ff51), and the first rate and the second rate are the same. is set (ff31=ff51).

By doing so, even when hitting left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player does not notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff33). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (ff53), and the third rate and the fourth rate are the same rate. (ff33=ff53).

By doing so, even when hitting left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player does not notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 8-3)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff41). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the ratio of the first notification in the notification effect to be executed in the first mode is the second ratio (ff51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (ff41<ff51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff43). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (ff53), and the fourth rate is greater than the third rate. is set (ff43<ff53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 8-4)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff61). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second rate (ff51), and the second rate is smaller than the first rate. is set (ff61<ff51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff63). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (ff53), and the fourth rate is greater than the third rate. is set (ff63<ff53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 4 of production)
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification performances (for example, advance notice, prefetching, etc.) that expect a big win, and the plurality of types of notification performances are executed singly or in combination. The notification effect is executed at a first notification executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started) and at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when the game ball enters the winning hole). There is a second notification. As an example of such a notification effect, a pending change effect in which the state of the pending icon or the effect accompanying the pending icon changes, an effect change effect in which the effect such as an effect acting on the display of the effect pattern 70a changes, and a winning It is possible to execute a combination of mouth lighting effect and the like.

For example, when the execution timing of the first notification is the start of the variable display, if the pending memory is "0", the fluctuation starts at the same time as the winning, and the second notification is executed at the winning timing of the winning opening. As a result, it may be executed at the same (simultaneous) timing. At this time, when the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if there is a pending memory, the timings of the second notification and the first notification that are executed at the winning timing to the winning opening are different. The timings of the first notification and the second notification may overlap or may not overlap. Further, the first and second notifications may have the same trigger and different timings, or the first and second notifications may have the same trigger but different timings.

For example, the notification effect has a first mode, a second mode different from the first mode, and a third mode different from the second mode as the second notification, and from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode It is possible to execute changing effects that change. In the first aspect of the second notification, for example, the hold icon, the icon, the hold, the winning entrance lamp, etc. blink alone or in plurality, or the color changes to blue, etc. Change to be different from the normal mode do. In the second aspect of the second notification, for example, the suspension icon, the icon, the suspension, the winning entrance lamp, etc., alone or in multiple colors, such as changing from the normal color or blue of the second aspect to red, rainbow color, etc. It changes differently from the normal mode and the first mode. In the third mode of the second notification, for example, the pending icon or the corresponding icon is hidden, or the winning entrance lamp is extinguished. Also, the third form is the basic (initial) form of the icon, and the character, color, etc. may be changed from the third form of the basic form to the first form or the second form. It should be noted that the pending icon or the non-display of the icon in the third aspect can be executed regardless of the presence of pending storage.

As for the notification effect, as the first notification, an advance notice other than the second notification, for example, the above-described advance notice effect can be executed. Note that the notification effect is not limited to the example described above, and may be the effect exemplified as the advance notice effect or other modes.

(Comparison of game state effects 9-1)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg11). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode at the second percentage (gg51), and the second percentage is smaller than the first percentage. is set (gg11<gg51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg13). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect to be executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is higher than the third ratio. is set (gg13<gg53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 9-2)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg31). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode at the second rate (gg51), which is the same rate as the first rate and the second rate is set (gg31=gg51).

By doing so, even when hitting left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player does not notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg33). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (gg53), and the third rate and the fourth rate are the same rate. (gg33=gg53).

By doing so, even when hitting left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player does not notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 9-3)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg41). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode at the second percentage (gg51), and the second percentage is smaller than the first percentage. is set (gg41<gg51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg43). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect to be executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is higher than the third ratio. is set (gg43<gg53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 9-4)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 2 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg61). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode at the second rate (gg51), and the second rate is smaller than the first rate. is set (gg61<gg51).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg63). In the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous game state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect to be executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is higher than the third ratio. is set (gg63<gg53).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when hitting left in the second advantageous game state. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 5 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects that expect a big win, and are executed singly or in combination from among the plurality of types of notification effects. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has setting means that allows the player to change the settings by operating the cross button or the like. The game machine 1 of the embodiment can be set by the setting means, for example, normal which is preset as an initial setting, customization which arbitrarily changes the setting for the player, arbitrary mode selection from among a plurality of types of modes, presence/absence of 3D display, and so on. It is possible to change various settings such as adjusting the display such as.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), when the setting means is set to the first setting, it is possible to execute a specific effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects at a normal execution ratio. Such specific effects include, for example, a pending change effect, a character effect change effect such as a zebra pattern attached to a character or a figure, a light guide plate notice, a 3D display, etc., which are executed by the change processing of the setting means. It is a production that is affected by the ratio. For example, when the first setting is normal by the setting means, the effect such as 3D display is executed at a normal rate. When the player performs predetermined change processing by the setting means, the specific performance can be executed at a specific ratio different from the normal ratio. For example, when a specific ratio is reached, the execution ratio of the pending change effect becomes less than the normal ratio, the execution ratio of the character effect change effect becomes higher than the normal ratio, or the execution ratio of the light guide plate notice effect becomes higher than the normal ratio. The ratio is different from the normal ratio, such as the number of 3D display execution ratios is increased, or the ratio of execution of 3D display is lower than the normal ratio.

(Comparison of game state effects 10-1)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set in the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the normal game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the normal ratio. That is, when the first setting is set, the specific effect is executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the normal ratio. 3rd special ratio. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal ratio as set in the first setting, but the third special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the first setting remains as the third special ratio. Incidentally, when the third special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 10-2)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set in the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is changed to the normal ratio. It becomes the first special rate which is a different rate from . That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal ratio as set in the first setting, but the first special ratio is executed in Further, in a state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set in the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is a third special which is a ratio different from the normal ratio. percentage. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal ratio as set in the first setting, but the third special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the first special ratio or the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the first setting remains the first special ratio or the third special ratio. Incidentally, when the first special rate is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the third special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous game state. In this case, in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state are executed. When, it becomes possible to limit the execution of a specific effect.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 10-3)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set in the setting means, the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the normal ratio. Become. That is, when the first setting is set, the specific effect is executed at a normal rate as set in the first setting in the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the normal ratio. 3rd special ratio. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal ratio as set in the first setting, but the third special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the first setting remains as the third special ratio. Incidentally, when the third special rate is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 10-4)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state (first setting) where the normal ratio is set in the setting means, the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the normal ratio. Become. That is, when the first setting is set, the specific effect is executed at a normal rate as set in the first setting in the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in the state (first setting) in which the normal ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the normal ratio. 3rd special ratio. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal ratio as set in the first setting, but the third special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the first setting remains as the third special ratio. Incidentally, when the third special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 11-1)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state (second setting) in which a specific ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the normal game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the specific ratio. That is, when the first setting is set, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the normal game state, the specific effect is executed at a specific ratio as set in the first setting. On the other hand, in a state (second setting) in which the specific ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the specific ratio. 4th special ratio. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific ratio as set in the first setting, but the fourth special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fourth special ratio remains the second setting. Incidentally, when the fourth special rate is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 11-2)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state (second setting) in which a specific ratio is set in the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is changed to a specific ratio. It becomes the second special rate which is a different rate from . That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific ratio as set in the first setting, but the second special ratio is executed in In addition, in a state (second setting) in which a specific ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is a fourth special which is a ratio different from the specific ratio. percentage. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific ratio as set in the second setting, but the fourth special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the second special ratio or the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the second setting remains the second special ratio or the fourth special ratio. Incidentally, when the second special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the fourth special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous game state. In this case, in a state (second setting) set to a specific ratio by the setting means, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state are executed. When, it becomes possible to limit the execution of a specific effect.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 11-3)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state (second setting) in which a specific ratio is set in the setting means, the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the specific ratio. Become. In other words, when the second setting is set, the specific performance is executed at a specific ratio as set in the second setting in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in a state (second setting) in which a specific ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the specific ratio. 4th special ratio. That is, when set to the second setting, in the special 1 variation display of the losing in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific ratio as set in the second setting, but the fourth special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the fourth special ratio remains the second setting. Incidentally, when the fourth special rate is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 11-4)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state (second setting) in which the setting means is set to a specific ratio, the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the specific ratio. Become. In other words, when the second setting is set, the specific performance is executed at a specific ratio as set in the second setting in the special 2 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in a state (second setting) in which the specific ratio is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is a ratio different from the specific ratio. 4th special ratio. That is, when the second setting is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific ratio as set in the second setting, but the fourth special ratio is executed in Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the third special ratio remains the second setting. Incidentally, when the fourth special rate is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 6 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects that expect a big win, and are executed singly or in combination from among the plurality of types of notification effects. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has setting means that allows the player to change the settings by operating the cross button or the like. The game machine 1 of the embodiment can be set by the setting means, for example, normal which is preset as an initial setting, customization which arbitrarily changes the setting for the player, arbitrary mode selection from among a plurality of types of modes, presence/absence of 3D display, and so on. It is possible to change various settings such as adjusting the display such as.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), when the game is in the first mode (for example, normal) by mode selection by the setting means, it is possible to execute a specific effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects at a first ratio. Such specific effects include, for example, a pending change effect, a character effect change effect such as a zebra pattern attached to a character or a figure, a light guide plate notice, a 3D display, etc., which are executed by the change processing of the setting means. It is a production that is affected by the ratio. For example, when the first mode is set to normal by the setting means, effects such as 3D display are executed at the first rate. When the player performs predetermined change processing by the setting means, the specific effect can be executed in a second mode different from the first mode. For example, in the second mode, the execution ratio of the pending change effect becomes smaller than the first ratio, the execution ratio of the character action change effect becomes larger than the first ratio, or the execution ratio of the light guide plate notice effect becomes the first ratio. The second ratio is different from the first ratio, such as being more than 1 ratio or the execution ratio of 3D display being less than the first ratio.

(Comparison of game state effects 12-1)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the normal game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the fifth ratio which is a ratio different from the first ratio. and That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but the fifth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the first rate to the fifth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the fifth rate remains in the first mode. In addition, when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 12-2)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is at a rate different from the first rate. is the third ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but the third performed in proportion. Further, in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the fifth ratio different from the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but the fifth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the first rate to the third rate or the fifth rate, the mode setting of the setting means is not switched, and the first mode remains the third rate or the fifth rate. Incidentally, when the third ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, when the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state are executed, the specific effect execution can be restricted.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 12-3)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode in the special second variable display of the loss in the first advantageous game state. On the other hand, in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the fifth ratio which is a ratio different from the first ratio. becomes. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but the fifth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the first rate to the fifth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the fifth rate remains in the first mode. In addition, when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 12-4)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode in the special 2 variable display of the loss in the second advantageous game state. On the other hand, in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the fifth ratio which is a ratio different from the first ratio. becomes. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the fifth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the first rate to the fifth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the fifth rate remains in the first mode. In addition, when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 13-1)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), when the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the normal game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth ratio which is a ratio different from the second ratio. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the second rate to the sixth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the sixth rate remains in the second mode. In addition, when the sixth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 13-2)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is at a rate different from the second rate. is the fourth ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but the fourth performed in proportion. Further, when the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the sixth ratio which is different from the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the second rate to the fourth rate or the sixth rate, the mode setting of the setting means is not switched, and the second mode remains at the fourth rate or the sixth rate. Incidentally, when the fourth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. When the sixth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, when the second mode is set by the setting means and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous game state and the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state are executed, the specific effect execution can be restricted.

By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 13-3)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the first advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode in the special second variable display of the loss in the first advantageous game state. On the other hand, in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth ratio which is a ratio different from the second ratio. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the second rate to the sixth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the sixth rate remains in the second mode. In addition, when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of game state effects 13-4)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 2 fluctuation display of losing in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, the specific effect is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode in the special 2 variation display of the losing in the second advantageous game state. On the other hand, in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth ratio which is a ratio different from the second ratio. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth performed in proportion. Here, by switching from the second rate to the sixth rate, the setting of the setting means is not switched, and the sixth rate remains in the second mode. In addition, when the sixth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the second advantageous game state. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display can be set as follows, for example. In the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the length of the specific variation is the loss variation with the number of retained memories of 1 (2, 3) and the variation with the number of retained memories of 4. They can be the same. Also, in the first advantageous game state, even if the variation time changes at the predetermined variation number from the start of the first advantageous game state (for example, a variation pattern that makes the average variation time longer is likely to be selected), the second advantageous game In the state, it is possible to prevent the variable time from switching at the specified variable number of times from the start of the second advantageous gaming state. The variation time of the variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the variation time of the variation display in the second advantageous gaming state may be different. For example, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state executed after the RAM is cleared may be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state. The fluctuation time may be different or the same between the first rotation and the final fluctuation in the first advantageous game state.

Regarding the ratios such as the execution ratio described above, the lower ratio in the comparison may be zero.

The configuration such as the effect of the first advantageous game state may be applied to the second advantageous game state, and the configuration such as the effect of the second advantageous game state may be applied to the first advantageous game state.

The embodiments of the present disclosure should be considered illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (First advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours), and can be controlled from the first period of the second game state (for example, the first half of the first advantageous game state) to the first period in the second game state is a different second period (for example, the latter half of the first advantageous gaming state), at a predetermined timing during the variable display (at the start of the variable display, at the stop of the variable display, etc.) It is characterized by the fact that it is easy to execute an action effect, a non-deathblow effect, etc.).

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours), the first period of the second game state (for example, the first half of the first advantageous game state), and the first period of the second game state is a different second period (for example, the second half of the first advantageous gaming state), and a predetermined effect (for example, pattern enlargement effect, It is characterized by the fact that the number of types of role item operation effects, non-deathblow effects, etc.) is different.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a reduction in working hours), and in the second gaming state (first advantageous gaming state), from the variation display before the specific variation number of times reaching the predetermined variation number, a predetermined effect It is characterized by being able to limit the execution of (for example, look-ahead effect, etc.).

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving), and in the first game state, it is possible to limit the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a look-ahead effect, etc.) from the variable display before the specified variable number of times before the predetermined condition is reached. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving), and the number of types of selectable modes is larger when the second game state is started than when the third game state is started. do.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving) and can be controlled, and in the first game state (normal game state), a display means ( image display device 70), and when the calculated effect is not displayed on the display means, when the number of fluctuations until the start of the third game state reaches a predetermined number, the calculated effect is different from the calculated effect. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify that the third game state is about to start by a predetermined notification (change in color or size of image, appearance of character, etc.).

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (First advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second Advantageous game state, b time saving), and when the variable display of the final round under the predetermined condition is stopped, it is possible to switch from the first game state to the third game state, and the final It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific notification (chance entry image, etc.) indicating that the game state has shifted to the third game state when the next variable display of the round is started.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (First advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second Advantageous game state, b time saving), and when the variable display of the final round under the predetermined condition is stopped, it is possible to switch from the first game state to the third game state, and the final It is characterized in that it is possible to execute right-handed display when the variable display of times stops.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a reduction in working hours), and when the variable display is performed in the first gaming state, the variable performance of the performance symbols among the symbols is the first variation mode (number + characters, etc.), and when performing the variable display in the second game state, the variable effect of the effect symbols can be executed in the second variable mode (number-based display mode, etc.). Yes, and a specific state (during result display) in which the variable display based on the reserved memory is executed after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times in the second game state and after the predetermined number of times has been reached. In the case of , it is characterized in that it is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol in a third variation mode (for example, a display mode of small symbols) that is not executed in the first variation mode and the second variation mode.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (First advantageous game state, a time saving), and can be controlled, and when performing a variable display with the first symbol (production symbol 70a) and the second symbol (special symbol TZ) in the first game state, the above It is possible to execute a first effect (reach inflaming in the normal game state) that agitates the possibility that the first symbol or the second symbol will become a reach, and in the second game state, the first symbol (effect symbol 70a) and the second symbol When performing a variable display with 2 symbols (special symbol TZ), it is possible to execute a second effect (reach boost in the first advantageous game state) that agitates the possibility that the first symbol or the second symbol will become a reach. Yes, after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times in the second game state, and after the predetermined number of times has been reached, the variable display based on the reserved memory is executed in a specific state (such as when a result is displayed) ), a third effect (such as direct hit) different from the first effect and the second effect can be executed without executing the first effect and the second effect.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a short time) and, if it is in a specific state (at the time of result display) after the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the second game state, the pending memory is When there is a first display (first result background) or a second display (second result background) on the display means, only the first display can be executed when there is no pending memory. It is characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, the right to execute the first effect (for example, NEXT or timer) or the second effect (for example, operation button) can be acquired. It is possible to execute a possible obtainable effect, it is possible to execute an digest effect capable of extinguishing the right to execute the first effect or the second effect acquired in the obtainable effect, and it is possible to execute the second effect. The variable display that consumes the right of the first production is more specific than the variable display that consumes the right to perform a specific production (for example, a pending change) in the digestion production that consumes the right acquired in the acquisition production. It is characterized by being easy.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, it is possible to acquire the right to execute the first effect (for example, NEXT or timer) or the second effect (operation button). acquisition effect can be executed, and a consumption effect can be executed that can consume the right to execute the first effect or the second effect acquired in the acquisition effect, and in the consumption effect, the second effect A specific effect (for example, a change on hold, etc.) can be executed even if any right of the first effect or the second effect is extinguished, and the specific effect is executed by extinguishing the right to execute the first effect in the extinguished effect. and in the case of executing the specific effect by extinguishing the right to execute the second effect in the digesting effect, after acquiring the right to be executed in the acquired effect, in the digesting effect It is characterized in that the time until the specific performance is executed is different.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and a change suggesting effect suggesting the possibility of executing a change effect (for example, a hold change) can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, and the change The effect is characterized in that it can be executed at a predetermined timing after the change suggesting effect is executed a plurality of times.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbol having the first numerical information (for example, 7) is more likely to become a ready-to-win than the first effect. The second effect that encourages the possibility that the pattern having numerical information (eg, 2) will become a ready-to-win game is characterized in that a specific stimulating effect (eg, shake vision) is more likely to be executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and by stopping and displaying the predetermined display, the variable performance of the performance symbols among the symbols can be started a plurality of times in one time of the variable display. An executable pseudo-fluctuation effect can be executed, and the pseudo-fluctuation effect can be a fanning effect in which the stop display (NEXT pattern) of the predetermined display is successful and the stop display is unsuccessful. Yes, in one time of the variable display, the second stirring effect executed after the first stirring effect is successful is more likely than the first stirring effect in the pseudo-variation effect. It is characterized by a high success rate.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a predetermined effect ( For example, a battle effect, etc.) can be executed, and in the predetermined effect, when a predetermined condition (advantage/disadvantage) is satisfied, a specific effect (such as a joint battle ) is easy to execute.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving), and in the variable display in which the notification image (chance rush image) for notifying the transition to the third game state is displayed, the first right hitting notification and the second right hitting notification is executable.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving), and the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition can be displayed by the number of pending icons on the display means (image display device 70) When the second starting condition is satisfied in the third game state, the holding icon is displayed, and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the third game state, the holding icon is not displayed. do.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the winning opening), and when the variable display of the symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. A first game state (normal game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed and disadvantageous to the player (normal game state), and a second game state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous game state, a reduction in working hours) and a third game state (second advantageous game state, b time saving), and a specific right hitting notification in the third game state is started at the first stage (normal game state stage), and the second stage (second advantageous game state stage) can be terminated.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and the notice effect is executed in the first game state with a variable display based on the first start condition. Although it is possible, the execution can be restricted by the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected in the entire period of one variation display is provided. It is possible to perform a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performances while executing the basic performance not including the It is characterized in that the length of the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation is different between the fluctuation display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, the player is expected to perform a basic performance of symbol display and background display, and the execution of the special game. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and the notice effect is executed in the first game state with a variable display based on the first start condition. Although it is possible, the execution can be restricted by the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected in the entire period of one variation display is provided. In addition to executing the basic effect that does not include, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the specific change is performed by the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the first game state. A rate at which the variation is executed is a first rate, a rate at which the specific variation is performed in the change display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a second rate, and It is characterized in that the first percentage and the second percentage are different.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. It is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to players, and based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the first winning hole or the second winning hole) can store a plurality of pending memories, and when a predetermined condition (loss variation) in which the special game is not executed in the first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player is established, the player is displayed a predetermined number of times in the variation display. A second game state (second advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the game can be executed. For example, winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) can be executed, and the notice effect can be executed by a variable display based on the first start condition in the first game state. In a second game state, execution can be restricted by the variable display based on the first starting condition, and the variable display can be executed in the same variable time regardless of whether the reserved memory is at a minimum or at a maximum; During the entire period of the variable display, it is possible to execute the basic effect that does not include the effect that expects the execution of the special game, and it is possible to execute a specific change that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. In the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, the specific variation can be executed, but in the variation display based on the first start condition in the first game state, the specific It is characterized by being able to limit the execution of variations.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect. 2 productions (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry production, movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and fluctuation based on the first start condition in the first game state The variation display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variation display in which the first effect is executed than the display.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific change that limits execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (for example, a background change for SP) and the first effect. It has a different second effect (for example, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the second game state in the first game state It is easier for the special game to be executed from the variable display in which the second effect is executed in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state than in the variable display based on the starting condition of 1. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the notice effect is a first effect (for example, Background change for SP, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.) and the second production (movable character notice, sound notice) that is different from the first production , operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first game state. The special game is easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific change that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, Light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and movable effect means (movable member 73, operation button 17), second effect different from the first effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration, etc.) advance notice, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. It is characterized in that the special game is easily executed from the variable display in which the performance is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (change at the start of fluctuation, at the time of holding movement) change, etc.) and a second notification (change when winning) that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning). change at the start, character effect change, etc.), a second mode different from the first mode (for example, different color), and a third mode different from the second mode (light off, non-display, basic form display, etc.), , and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode, and in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first game state is a first ratio, and in the second game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the first ratio is higher than the It is characterized in that the second percentage is smaller.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. It is possible to execute a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the start of fluctuation, change during pending movement, etc.) and a second notification (change at winning) that can execute a look-ahead effect at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning). , 1st mode (winning entrance lamp, hold or flashing of the icon), 2nd mode different from the 1st mode (color change etc.), 3rd mode different from the 2nd mode (light off, non-display, basic mode display, etc.), and the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first game state is the first ratio, In the second game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. .

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D) and a second rate different from the first rate ( setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small pending change, large zebra pattern, large light guide plate notice, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the first ratio In this state, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the first gaming state with the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition is the first ratio, and the setting means sets the first ratio. In the state set to 1 ratio, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state with the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D) and a second rate different from the first rate ( setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small pending change, large zebra pattern, large advance notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the second ratio is set by the setting means In this state, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the first gaming state with the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition is the second ratio, and the setting means sets the second ratio. In the state where the ratio is set to 2, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second gaming state with the variable display of the failure based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the second ratio. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) execution ratio is changed to a first mode and a second mode (holding There is a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small change, large zebra pattern, large notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the first mode is set by the setting means. In the state where the game is played, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the first game state is set to the first ratio, and the setting means selects the first mode. In the set state, setting the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state in the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) execution ratio is changed to a first mode and a second mode (holding There is a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small change, large zebra pattern, large notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the second mode is set by the setting means. In the state where the game is played, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the first game state is set to the first ratio, and the second mode is set by the setting means. In the set state, setting the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state in the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. The advance notice effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition, but in the second game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition. can be limited, and the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the execution of the special game is executed in the entire period of one time of the variable display, and the specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance. can be executed, and the specific variation is a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state and a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state is the same in length of fluctuation time.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. The advance notice effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition, but in the second game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition. can be limited, and the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the execution of the special game is executed in the entire period of one time of the variable display, and the specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance. can be executed, the ratio of executing the specific fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a first ratio, and the first ratio in the third gaming state is a second percentage, and the first percentage and the second percentage are the same.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. It is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to players, and based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the first winning hole or the second winning hole) can store a plurality of pending memories, and when a predetermined condition (loss variation) in which the special game is not executed in the first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player is established, the player is displayed a predetermined number of times in the variation display. a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game, and the variable display. In the above, it is possible to execute a basic effect of displaying a pattern and a background display, and a plurality of types of notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game, and the notice The effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first start condition, but can be limited in execution by a variable display based on the first start condition in the second game state, The variable display can be executed in the same variable time regardless of whether the reserved memory is at a minimum or at a maximum, and the entire period of one variable display does not include an effect that expects execution of the special game. A basic effect can be executed, and a specific change that limits execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be executed, and a change display based on the first start condition in the second game state and the third game The variation display based on the first starting condition in the state is characterized in that execution of the specific variation can be restricted.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect includes a first effect (background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third game state are The special game is executed at the same rate from the variable display in which the first effect is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. It is possible, and the notice effect includes a first effect (for example, background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect (for example, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect , movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first start condition in the second game state and the first start condition in the third game state. In the variable display based on the second effect, the rate of execution of the special game from the variable display in which the second effect is executed is the same.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect is a first effect (for example, SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.) that can be executed by the display means (image display device 70). ), and a second effect (movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.) different in the effect mode to be executed from the first effect, and the first start condition in the second game state and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third game state, the rate of execution of the special game from the variable display in which the first effect is executed is the same. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect includes the first effect (SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and movable effect means (movable member 73, operation button 17), has a second effect different from the first effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration notice, etc.), and is based on the first start condition in the second game state. The variable display and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third game state are characterized in that a ratio of the special game being executed from the variable display in which the second effect is executed is the same. and

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. , and a first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (change at the start of fluctuation, change during hold movement, etc.), and a second notification that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, at the time of winning) (change at the time of winning) and can be executed, and the first notification includes a first mode (change at the start of fluctuation, change in character effect, etc.) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, color difference, etc.), and a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode. executable, in the third game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first start condition is a first ratio, and in the second game state, the first start condition is a second ratio, and the first ratio and the second ratio are the same.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. , and the first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of holding movement, etc.) that can execute the look-ahead effect at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation), and at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, at the time of winning). A second notification that can be executed (change at the time of winning) can be executed, and the second notification is a first mode (winning entrance lamp, hold or blinking of the icon, etc.), and the first mode A second mode (color change, etc.) different from the second mode, and a third mode (lights off, non-display, basic form display, etc.) different from the second mode can execute a change effect, and in the third game state, the An execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is the first ratio, and execution in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The ratio is a second ratio, and the first ratio and the second ratio are the same.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio different from the first ratio (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more advance notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state in which the first ratio is set by the setting means, fluctuation of loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state It is characterized in that execution of the specific effect can be restricted by display and variable display of failure based on the first start condition in the third game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio different from the first ratio (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more advance notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state in which the second ratio is set by the setting means, variation in loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state; It is characterized in that execution of the specific effect can be restricted by display and variable display of failure based on the first start condition in the third game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting means that can set the first mode and the second mode (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (Normal, Customization, Mode Selection, 3D Selection, etc.), and in a state in which the first mode is set by the setting means, a variable display of failure based on the first starting condition in the second game state. Execution of the specific effect can be limited by the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition in the third game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting means that can set the first mode and the second mode (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (Normal, Customization, Mode Selection, 3D Selection, etc.), and in a state in which the second mode is set by the setting means, a variable display of failure based on the first starting condition in the second game state. Execution of the specific effect can be limited by the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition in the third game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. The advance notice effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition, but in the second game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition. can be limited, and the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the execution of the special game is executed in the entire period of one time of the variable display, and the specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance. can be executed, and the specific variation is a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state and a variation display of a loss based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state are characterized by different lengths of fluctuation time.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. The advance notice effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition, but in the second game state by a variable display based on the first starting condition. can be limited, and the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the execution of the special game is executed in the entire period of one time of the variable display, and the specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance. can be executed, and the rate at which the specific variation is executed in the variation display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a first rate, and the second in the third gaming state is a second percentage, and the first percentage and the second percentage are different.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. It is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to players, and based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the first winning hole or the second winning hole) can store a plurality of pending memories, and when a predetermined condition (loss variation) in which the special game is not executed in the first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player is established, the player is displayed a predetermined number of times in the variation display. a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game, and the variable display. In the above, it is possible to execute a basic effect of displaying a pattern and a background display, and a plurality of types of notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game, and the notice The effect can be executed in the first game state by a variable display based on the first start condition, but can be limited in execution by a variable display based on the first start condition in the second game state, The variable display can be executed in the same variable time regardless of whether the reserved memory is at a minimum or at a maximum, and the entire period of one variable display does not include an effect that expects execution of the special game. A basic effect can be executed, and a specific change that limits execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be executed, and in the change display based on the first start condition in the second game state, the specific change can be executed, but in the variation display based on the second starting condition in the third game state, execution of the specific variation can be restricted.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect includes a first effect (background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable character notice, sound advance notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the third game state. The special game is easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. It is possible, and the notice effect includes a first effect (for example, background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect (for example, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect , movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the change display based on the second start condition in the third game state corresponds to the first start condition in the second game state. It is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variable display in which the second effect is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect is a first effect (for example, SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.) that can be executed by the display means (image display device 70). ), and a second effect (movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.) different in the effect mode to be executed from the first effect, and the second start condition in the third game state The variation display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variation display in which the first effect is performed than the variation display based on the .

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. In the variable display, a basic effect of symbol display and background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning entrance lamp lighting, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) that expect the execution of the special game are executed. It is possible, and during the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic performance that does not include the performance that expects the performance of the special game is executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performance is executed. The notice effect includes the first effect (SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and movable effect means (movable member 73, operation button 17), has a second effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration notice, etc.) different from the first effect, and is based on the second start condition in the third game state. The variation display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variation display in which the second effect is executed than the variation display.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. , and a first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (change at the start of fluctuation, change during hold movement, etc.), and a second notification that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, at the time of winning) (change at the time of winning) and can be executed, and the first notification includes a first mode (change at the start of fluctuation, change in character effect, etc.) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, color difference, etc.), and a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode. executable, in the third game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variation display based on the second start condition is a first ratio, and in the second game state, the first start condition is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. , and the first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of holding movement, etc.) that can execute the look-ahead effect at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation), and at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, at the time of winning). A second notification that can be executed (change at the time of winning) can be executed, and the second notification is a first mode (winning entrance lamp, hold or blinking of the icon, etc.), and the first mode A second mode (color change, etc.) different from the second mode, and a third mode (lights off, non-display, basic form display, etc.) different from the second mode can execute a change effect, and in the third game state, the A ratio of execution in the first mode in the variable display based on the second start condition is a first ratio, and execution in the first mode in the variable display based on the first start condition in the second gaming state. The ratio is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio different from the first ratio (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more advance notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state in which the first ratio is set by the setting means, the loss based on the second starting condition in the third game state; The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display is the first ratio, and in a state where the first ratio is set by the setting means, the first starting condition is met in the second game state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of failure based on is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio different from the first ratio (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more advance notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state in which the second ratio is set by the setting means, a loss based on the second starting condition in the third game state; The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display is the second ratio, and in the state where the second ratio is set by the setting means, the first starting condition is met in the second game state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of failure based on is set to a predetermined ratio different from the second ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting means that can set the first mode and the second mode (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in the state where the first mode is set by the setting means, variation of loss based on the second start condition in the third game state The execution ratio of the specific effect executed by display is assumed to be the first ratio, and in the state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a third game state (first advantageous game state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game can be executed. The execution ratio of a specific effect (suspension change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among a plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) A setting means that can set the first mode and the second mode (less change in hold, more zebra pattern, more notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.) different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, variation of loss based on the second starting condition in the third game state The execution ratio of the specific effect executed by display is assumed to be a first ratio, and in the state where the second mode is set by the setting means, a loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display of is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and the notice effect is executed in the first game state with a variable display based on the first start condition. Although it is possible, the execution can be restricted by the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected in the entire period of one variation display is provided. It is possible to perform a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice performances while executing the basic performance not including the above, and to perform a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state; The length of the fluctuation time of the specific fluctuation is different between the fluctuation display of the loss based on the second starting condition in the second game state.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and the notice effect is executed in the first game state with a variable display based on the first start condition. Although it is possible, the execution can be restricted by the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected in the entire period of one variation display is provided. In addition to executing the basic effect that does not include, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the specific change is performed by the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second game state. A rate at which the variation is executed is a first rate, a rate at which the specific variation is performed in the change display of the failure based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is a second rate, and It is characterized in that the first percentage and the second percentage are different.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. It is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to players, and based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (winning of the game ball to the first winning hole or the second winning hole) can store a plurality of pending memories, and when a predetermined condition (loss variation) in which the special game is not executed in the first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player is established, the player is displayed a predetermined number of times in the variation display. A second game state (second advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the game can be executed. For example, winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.) can be executed, and the notice effect can be executed by a variable display based on the first start condition in the first game state. In a second game state, execution can be restricted by the variable display based on the first starting condition, and the variable display can be executed in the same variable time regardless of whether the reserved memory is at a minimum or at a maximum; During the entire period of the variable display, it is possible to execute the basic effect that does not include the effect that expects the execution of the special game, and it is possible to execute a specific change that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. In the variation display based on the first start condition in the second game state, the specific variation can be executed, but in the variation display based on the second start condition in the second game state, the specific It is characterized by being able to limit the execution of variations.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (background change for SP) and a second effect different from the first effect. 2 productions (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry production, movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and fluctuation based on the second start condition in the second game state The variation display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variation display in which the first effect is executed than the display.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific change that limits execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (for example, a background change for SP) and the first effect. It has a different second effect (for example, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable character notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the second game state in the second game state The special game is more likely to be executed from the variable display in which the second effect is executed in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state than in the variable display based on the starting condition of 2. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the notice effect is a first effect (for example, Background change for SP, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.) and the second production (movable character notice, sound notice) that is different from the first production , operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second game state. The special game is easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, a basic performance of symbol display and background display and execution of the special game are anticipated. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (e.g. winning entrance lamp light emission, pending change, effect, simulation, etc.), and does not include effects that expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one time of the variable display. Along with executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific change that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects, and the advance notice effects include a first effect (SP background change, character notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, Light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and movable effect means (movable member 73, operation button 17), second effect different from the first effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration, etc.) advance notice, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second game state. It is characterized in that the special game is easily executed from the variable display in which the performance is executed.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (change at the start of fluctuation, at the time of holding movement) change, etc.) and a second notification (change when winning) that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning). change at the start, character effect change, etc.), a second mode different from the first mode (for example, different color), and a third mode different from the second mode (light off, non-display, basic form display, etc.), , and it is possible to execute a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode, and in the first mode in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second game state is a first ratio, and in the second game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the first ratio is higher than the It is characterized in that the second percentage is smaller.

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. It is possible to execute a second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player in the variable display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the start of fluctuation, change during pending movement, etc.) and a second notification (change at winning) that can execute a look-ahead effect at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning). , 1st mode (winning entrance lamp, hold or flashing of the icon), 2nd mode different from the 1st mode (color change etc.), 3rd mode different from the 2nd mode (light off, non-display, basic mode display, etc.), and the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the second start condition in the second game state is the first ratio, In the second game state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. .

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D) and a second rate different from the first rate ( setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small pending change, large zebra pattern, large light guide plate notice, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the first ratio In this state, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second gaming state with the variable display of failure based on the second starting condition is the first ratio, and the setting means sets the first ratio. In the state set to 1 ratio, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state with the variable display of the loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) is changed by a predetermined change process (player's selection, etc.) to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D) and a second rate different from the first rate ( setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small pending change, large zebra pattern, large advance notice of the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the second ratio is set by the setting means in the second gaming state, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state with the variable display of the failure based on the second starting condition is the second ratio, and the setting means sets the second ratio. In the state where the ratio is set to 2, the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second gaming state with the variable display of the failure based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the second ratio. characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) execution ratio is changed to a first mode and a second mode (holding There is a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small change, large zebra pattern, large notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the first mode is set by the setting means. in the second game state, the execution ratio of the specific effect to be executed in the second game state with the variable display of the loss based on the second start condition is set to the first ratio, and the setting means selects the first mode. In the set state, setting the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state in the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Characterized by

■ The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs a variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition (the winning of the game ball into the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and the game is played. A special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be executed, and when a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) is established in which the special game is not executed in a first game state (normal game state) disadvantageous to the player, a predetermined number of times. A second game state (second advantageous game state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific effect (hold change, zebra pattern, Light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) execution ratio is changed to a first mode and a second mode (holding There is a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to (small change, large zebra pattern, large notice on the light guide plate, no 3D, etc.), and the second mode is set by the setting means. in the second game state, the execution ratio of the specific effect to be executed in the variable display of the loss based on the second starting condition in the second game state is set to the first ratio, and the second mode is set by the setting means. In the set state, setting the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the second game state in the variable display of failure based on the first starting condition to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Characterized by

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present invention and do not limit the present invention. This invention may be modified and modified without departing from its spirit and scope of the claims, and this invention includes equivalents thereof.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1,100 Game machine 5 Game board 44 Normal figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize winning port 70 First image display device 70a Production pattern 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110m Main control unit 120 Payout control board 130, 320 Effect control board 130a Sub CPU
130m Production control unit 131 Main display device 136 Production operation stick 331 Audio output device

Claims (1)

Symbols are variably displayed based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition, and a special game advantageous to the player can be executed,
When a predetermined condition is established in which the special game is not executed in the first game state disadvantageous to the player, a second game state advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display a predetermined number of times,
In the variable display, it is possible to execute a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background display, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects that expect the execution of the special game,
In the entire period of one time of the variable display, the basic effect that does not include the effect that expects the execution of the special game is executed, and a specific change that limits the execution of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be executed,
The advance notice effect has a first effect that can be executed by the display means and a second effect that is executed in a manner different from the first effect,
The variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is more sensitive to the variable display in which the first effect is executed than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the special game is easily executed.

Images